Home

NCDware Reference Manual

1. Compose Back Line Setup Break Esc Space Feed F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 16 15 98 31 39 47 55 63 71 79 10 1 2 80 ME S E E EE ASE E EE E ol te Il eX 14 1 2 230 3 3s 4 37 5 46 6 54 7 61 8 62 9 7 Ooo 78 85 10 Tab Q IW E R T Y U l O P Return 13 21 29 36 45 44 53 60 67 68 z E s vs Ctrl Lock A S D F G H J K L 17 20 28 27 35 43 52 51 59 66 75 5 7z6 82 83 90 Shift gt Z X Cc V B N M lt gt Shift 18 lt 9 26 34 33 42 50 49 ss 2 65 74 89 Compose Character 41 Help F17 F18 F19 F20 128 129 130 131 we oe PFI re PF3 PF4 E aia 08 118 95 87 103 100 Select Prev Next 7 8 9 Screen Scree 108 117 125 132 il 109 4 5 J 107 124 99 lias Se gt 97 96 106 121 Figure 17 3 VT220 Compatible Keyboard Legends and Keycodes 17 22 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Compose Break Esc Back Line Setup Space Feed F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 16 15 98 31
2. Table Entries Possible Values Result protocol default tftp tftp TFTP is used for accessing files through this access point nfs NFS UDP is used for accessing files through this mount point nfs tcp NFS TCP is used for accessing files through this mount point ncdnet NCDnet is used for accessing files through this mount point server mount point default nil pathname Pathname for this file service access point on the file server host file name type default unknown This field is not used unknown This value works for TFTP or DAP if the protocol field unix The file server uses UNIX style filenames is nfs or nfs tcp vms The file server uses VMS style filenames retransmission timeout default 3 integer The amount of time in seconds between successive transmissions of a file service request This is only used with file service protocols running over connectionless transports for example NFS or TFTP Range 0 4294967295 transaction timeout default 30 integer The amount of time in seconds to attempt a file service request before a failure situation is declared Range 0 4294967295 Configuring Network Services 5 17 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Table 5 19 file service table Parameter Continued Table Entries Possible Values Result read size default 8192 integer The amount of data in bytes requested in a single read request fro
3. Telnet Port Number Ports and DECnet object for config telnet port connections to the terminal s F TCP Port Number Configuration daemon config tcp port NCDnet Object Name config ncdnet object name Default File Configuration file that defines the config default file initial terminal configuration Auto Save NVRAM Changes to parameters that are config auto save nvram saved in NVRAM are automatically saved Using Configuration Menus 9 19 Using Change Setup Parameters Configuration Fields Description Corresponding Parameter Auto Save File Auto Save File Name Changes to the configuration are automatically saved to a file the file to which the changes are saved and the extent of the information saved config auto save file config auto save file name Auto Saved Info config auto saved info User Preferences Daemon Service section Telnet Port Number Ports and DECnet object for config pref telnet port connections to the terminal s f TCP Port Number Preferences daemon config pref tcp port NCDnet Object Name config pref ncdnet object name Diagnostics Parameters The parameters in the Diagnostics hide box affect the logging of diagnostic messages and the actions of the Diagnostic daemon Diagnostics Field Add Timestamps Description Adds timestamps to the diagnostic log Corresponding Parameter diag add timestamps Timesta
4. Setting the Subnet Mask in NVRAM Use the ip subnet mask parameter to set the subnet mask explicitly Setup gt Change Setup Parameters IP Subnet Mask This parameter takes effect immediately and is saved in NVRAM 3 14 Booting Address Discovery Communicating with Multi Homed Hosts Note You can also set the subnet mask in the Boot Monitor Setup menus Table 3 4 ip subnet mask Parameter Possible Values Result default OxFFFFFFO0 255 255 255 0 hexadecimal constant or decimal IP address The network subnet mask Communicating with Multi Homed Hosts If the terminal communicates with hosts that have more than one Ethernet interface on the same subnet place all of the host addresses or hostnames in the ip equivalent addresses table Each row in the table lists the network addresses or hostnames of the interfaces on a given host This parameter is not saved in NVRAM Rows in the ip equivalent addresses table consist of the addresses or hostnames for all the interfaces on a given host For example on a network with two multi homed hosts ip equivalent addresses eaglel eagle2 eagle3 peregrinel peregrine2 Using a Reverse Name Request The unit query for name at boot parameter controls whether at boot time the terminal sends a reverse name request to the name servers to discover the terminal s hostname Using a reverse name request is useful in situations in
5. keyboards Table 12 18 N 97 N Kana Keypad Escape Sequences Application Mode Reset Application Mode Set Sey 8 bit 7 bit 8 bit 7 bit 0 0 0 SS3 p EscO p 1 1 1 SS3 q EscOq 2 2 2 SS3 r EscOr 3 3 3 SS3 s Esc O s 4 4 4 SS3 t EscOt 5 5 5 SS3 u EscO u 6 6 6 SS3 v Esc O v 7 7 7 SS3 w Esc O w 8 8 8 SS3 x Esc O x 9 9 9 SS3 y Esc O y 4 P SS3 Esc O 1 e E SS3 m Esc O m SS3 n EscOn Enter Return Return SS3 M Esc O M PF1 SS3 P Esc OP SS3 P Esc O P PF2 SS3 Q EscOQ SS3 Q EscOQ PF3 SS3 R Esc OR SS3 R EscOR PF4 S83 5 Esc OS S83 S EscO S 12 42 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Table 12 19 N 97 N Kana Function Key Escape Sequences Escape Sequence Key 8 bit 7 bit F1 CSI11 Esc 11 F2 CSI12 Esc 12 F3 CSI13 Esc 13 F4 CSI 14 Esc 14 F5 CSI 15 Esc 15 F6 CSI17 Esc 17 F7 CSI 18 Esc 18 F8 CSI 19 Esc 19 F9 CSI 20 Esc 20 F10 CSI 21 Esc 21 F11 CSI 23 Esc 23 F12 CSI 2 4 Esc 24 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 43 Using Compose Key Sequences Using Compose Key Sequences Compose sequences available on all keyboards allow you to type more characters than appear on the keyboard by using a sequence of keystrokes to compose a single special character You can use compose sequences in the NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm or ncdrunterm Support for Dead Keys
6. Character Name Keystrokes t plus or minus sign superscript 2 an i superscript 3 3 u micro sign U 1 paragraph sign P middle dot i superscript one T o masculine ordinal o closed angle brackets 1 4 fraction one quarter 14 1 2 fraction one half Le inverted 2 A A grave A A acute A A A circumflex A A A tilde A A A umlaut A a A ring A AE diphthong AE C cedilla C E grave E Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 47 Using Compose Key Sequences Table 12 20 Compose Sequences Continued Character Name Keystrokes E E umlaut E I grave I I acute I i I circumflex T I umlaut i N N tilde N O grave O O acute O O circumflex O O O tilde O O umlaut o OE diphthong T OE O slash O U grave U U acute U U U circumflex Us U U umlaut U x Y umlaut t y B German small sharp s ss a grave a a acute a a circumflex a a tilde a 12 48 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Compose Key Sequences Table 12 20 Compose Sequences Continued Character Name Keystrokes a a umlaut a a a ring a ae diphthong ae c cedilla c e grave e e acute e e circumflex e e umlaut e i i grave i i i acute i i circumflex i 1
7. Severity Error Explanation The terminal did not obtain a license for featureA User Action Make sure that you are licensed for featureA NONCDNET NCDnet being DISABLED not licensed Severity Error Explanation The terminal does not have a license for NCDnet also called DECnet User Action Make sure that you have a valid NCDnet license Enter the valid license string into the terminal s NVRAM or a remote configuration file NORESPONSE no response from license host host_IP Severity Error Explanation ncdlicense at the address host_IP did not respond to the terminal s license request User Action Make sure that ncdlicense and Imgrd are both running on the host host_IP X Server Messages 18 73 LOADB Messages SELECTERR select failed message Severity Error Explanation The selecterr system call failed on the terminal Message is the UNIX error description User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support LOADB Messages BROWSER usi ENVNOT Cann GOODURL The LOADB messages pertain to loading of the NCD Mosaic Browser If you are looking for messages that refer to the LOADB module but do not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ng browser string Severity Information Explanation Tells which browser module is being loaded User Action None ot resolve
8. bin sh NC DNAME ae Je B Sample Xsession File for OpenWindows For OpenWindows you can change the default Xsession file so the environment is OpenWindows or you can install user specific xsession files to establish the OpenWindows environment If you set up an Xsession file tailored for OpenWindows only users who are not using OpenWindows should have xsession files in their home directories As an alternative you can leave the default Xsession file unchanged and set up xsession files for users who run OpenWindows For information about xsession files see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems The following Xsession file is designed for use with the OpenWindows environment The script starts a command tool and the olwm window manager echo SDISPLAY awk FS print 1 Set up variables for running OpenWindows OP export OW SOP export LD_ LIB ENWINHO OP OW MANPAT PATH SOW bin SOW bin xview SOW demo usr local bin usr local bin X11 u sr bin E usr openwin ENWINHOME ENWINHOME RARY_PATH SOW 1lib usr lib H SOW man usr man export NCDNAME LD_LIBRARY_PATH MANPATH PATH DE fi el fi f SHOME xsession then if else se x SHOME xsession then exec SHOME xsession exec bin sh HOME xsession 8 10 Login and X Session Management Configuring XDM Hosts Start
9. FONT Messages BADFONTDATA bad data in font font Severity Error Explanation The X server attempted to read another vendor s SNF font file and was unsuccessful User Action If your site uses another vendor s SNF fonts convert them to NCD s SNF font format before using them The NCD font server can provide the necessary conversion BADFONTFILE cannot recognize data in font file file Severity Error Explanation The X server does not understand the information contained in the specified font file This message occurs only when reading font files from the local file system User Action Make sure the specified font file contains the correct font information If the X server still cannot read the font file create a fonts dir file to identify the fonts residing in the local file system BADTYPE unrecognized font type in file file Severity Error Explanation This message occurs when either of the following is true 1 The specified font file contains an incorrect font name L The X server is running low on memory User Action Verify that the font name in the specified font file is correct Verify that the X server has enough memory to access the font If memory is running low close any unused local clients to free local memory X Server Messages 18 49 FONT Messages FONTEMPTYDIR no fonts found in directory directory Severity Information Explanation The X server cannot find any fonts in th
10. ethernet address The Ethernet address the host supplies in response to the ARP request from the terminal ip address default 0 0 0 0 IP address The IP address broadcast by the terminal type default incomplete incomplete The IP address could not be resolved to an Ethernet address dynamic This completed entry is subject to automatic deletion after the timeout elapses static This entry is not subject to automatic deletion time since last use default 0 integer The amount of time in minutes since this entry was used by the terminal Range 0 255 Configuring Network Services 5 5 Configuring the ARP Cache Resolved Addresses The lifetimes of the dynamic and incomplete entries in the tcpip arp cache table are governed by the following parameters The tcpip arp complete entry timeout parameter specifies how long a dynamic ARP table entry should be allowed to exist without being used before it is automatically deleted Setup Change Setup Parameters ARP gt Complete Entry Timeout Table 5 3 tcpip arp complete entry timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 20 integer How long to wait in minutes before deleting an unused complete entry Range 1 255 The tcpip arp incomplete entry timeout parameter specifies how long an incomplete ARP table entry should be allowed to exist before it is automatically deleted Setup Change Setup Param
11. lt 13 21 29 36 45 44 53 67 68 zil si s g9 Caps Lock A S D F G H J L Enter 20 28 27 35 43 52 51 59 75 5 76 82 lt 90 C v B IIN M lt gt Shift 33 42 50 49 ssil gt esl 731 za f 89 Alt Com Alt 25 64 41 72 Pose Graph sg Figure 17 6 N 123 Default Keyboard Legends and Keycodes Print Screen Scroll Pause Setup Sys Rq Lock Break 87 95 98 80 81 83 93 Insert Home Page Num F U Lock p 103 110 111 118 119 126 132 Del End Page 7 8 9 Down Home T Pg Up 100 101 109 108 11 125 z 4 5 6 eS gt 128 129 130 107 115 116 124 1 2 3 f End Pg Dn Enter 127 99 131 105 1 122 N ie og 97 96 106 112 113 121 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 45 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 8 Escape 9 Help 107 F11 F11 Cancel 111 F12 F12 Redo 12 F13 F13 SunProps 13 Tab 14 grave asciitilde 15 F2 16 F14 F14 Undo 17 Control_L 18 Shift_L 19 F15 F15 SunFront 20 Caps_Lock 21 Q 22 1 exclam 23 F3 24 F16 F16 SunCopy 25 Alt_L 26 Z 27 S 28 A 29 W 17 46 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 123 Sun
12. 5 28 Configuring Network Services Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks Table 5 28 ip routing table Parameter Continued Table Entry route mask Possible Values Result Field Type hexadecimal A hexadecimal value indicating the bits in the read only number destination address used to determine the route The mask is logically AND ed with the destination address before being compared to the value in the gateway field This field is used by SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol An example routing table follows ip routing table 0 0 0 0 gatewayl ncd com 1 dynamic local 42 1 network 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 0 static local 582 1 host 0 0 0 0 eagle ncd com 1 dynamic local 42 1 network 192 40 157 0 ncdull ncd com 0 static local 39 1 network Finding Routes to Hosts through Proxy ARP Proxy ARP resolves routes to hosts for which there are no routes in the IP routing table It redirects the terminal s request to communicate with a host on another network to the gateway that provides the route to the host Routes discovered through proxy ARP are automatically placed into the routing table and identified as dynamic routes The terminal uses hosts specified in the default gateway parameters before resorting to proxy ARP To configure the terminal to use proxy ARP set the ip use proxy arp parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters IP Use Proxy
13. Getting Font Information Viewing the Font Path xset The xset command displays the font path and other current server settings xset q Font Path built ins usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf dwil00dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf dw75dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 75dpi Listing the Available Fonts xlsfonts The xIsfonts 1 command lists the fonts currently available to the X server It has many options for narrowing the search but its basic form lists the names of all fonts known to the X server xlsfonts When run with the argument fn pattern xlsfonts lists only fonts that match pattern The pattern may include the wildcard characters matches any sequence of characters and matches any single character Quote these characters to prevent the shell from expanding them For example the following command lists all fonts with names that include the word helvetica xlsfonts fn helvetica Displaying the Characters in a Font xfd The xfd 1 command displays all the characters in a font its basic syntax is xfd fn font_name For example the following command displays all the characters in the 6x13 font xfd fn 6x13 The font specification can include wildcard characters as shown in the example above for xlsfonts 7 18 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Server Issues Displaying Samples of a Font and XLFD Names
14. TERM Messages STATUSLN Can t create the interface status line STOPLOG SUBFONT TEL8ACT TEL8REQ Severity Error Explanation The TERM module cannot create the VT320 terminal emulator status line This usually occurs if the terminal is running low on memory User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the action Close any unused local clients to free local memory Stop logging to file Severity Information Explanation The TERM module has stopped logging information to the specified file User Action None Specified substitute font not found Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot locate the desired substitute font User Action Make sure that the desired font resides in one of the directories included in the terminal s current font path and that the file service table contains an entry for the font directory Eight bit telnet mode is status Severity Information Explanation The TERM module has detected that eight bit TELNET mode is either enabled or not available as specified by the status User Action None Requesting eight bit telnet connection operating_system Severity Information Explanation The TERM module is requesting an eight bit TELNET connection as requested User Action None 18 120 X Server Messages TERM Messages TELNTBIN Set Telnet connection to binary mode Severity Information
15. exec bin sh HOME xsession fi 8 8 Login and X Session Management Configuring XDM Hosts else twm amp exec xterm fn 10x20 geometry 80x24 20 20 ls fi bin sh at fi else NCDNAME Example Xsession File for the Local NCD Window Manager The Xsession file shown in this section is designed for using the default local NCD Window Manager ncdwm 1 Note the following m m m The variable NCDNAME the terminal s hostname is extracted from the DISPLAY variable and is used later in the file in a remote shell command By exporting NCDNAME you can use it in other commands for example in the window manager s menu configuration file The PATH variable must be correct for applications that users need to run echo SDISPLAY awk FS print 1 PATH usr local bin usr local bin X11 usr bin X11 PATH export NCDNAME PATH f SHOME xsession then if x S HOME xsession then exec SHOME xsession else exec bin sh SHOME xsession Start the ncdwm local window manager ncdrunwm d SNCDNAME amp Start an xterm xterm fi sb geometry 80x24 5 150 fn 9xl5bold amp To start the local Motif Window Manager instead of the NCD Window Manager use the mwm option to ncdrunwm for example Start the mwm local window manager ncdrunwm d SNCDNAME mwm amp Login and X Session Management 8 9 Configuring XDM Hosts
16. prompt The terminal displays a dialog box when the xdm control program exits The user can display the current X connections continue with the session or log out logout The session ends without displaying a dialog box ignore The terminal does not log the user out and does not display a dialog box Clients may continue to run unless they were started by XDM Configuring XDM Keepalives Keepalives are messages that NCD terminals send to verify that the host providing the XDM session to the terminal is still functioning If the host is unavailable a dialog box is displayed If the terminal has received no client input for a configurable amount of time the terminal sends an XDMCP keepalive If the host fails to respond the terminal takes the specified action Complete these steps to configure terminal keepalives 1 The login xdm keepalives begin time parameter specifies the amount of time after which the terminal verifies that the login host is still running Setup Change Setup Parameters Login XDM section gt Begin Sending Keepalives after Table 8 5 login xdm keepalives begin time Parameter Possible Values Result default 3 integer The amount of time in minutes the terminal waits before sending an XDMCP keepalive Range 0 4294967295 8 18 Login and X Session Management Using XDM X11R3 Version The login xdm keepalives wait time parameter controls the am
17. Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor gateway IP Is the IP address of the gateway subnet_mask Is the subnet mask specified in decimal dot format or as a hexadecimal number Booting xX Server Loading 4 19 Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor 4 20 Booting X Server Loading 5 Configuring Network Services This chapter describes the required and optional network services used by NCD terminals The contents of this chapter are Which Network Services Are Used by NCD Terminals on page 5 1 Summary of Network Service Defaults and Alternatives on page 5 3 Configuring the ARP Cache Resolved Addresses on page 5 5 Using a Name Service on page 5 7 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files on page 5 13 Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks on page 5 25 Setting TCP Performance Parameters on page 5 31 C C O The following network services are discussed in other chapters because they are used only when booting address discovery and subnet mask discovery Chapter 3 Booting Address Discovery and X server download service Chapter 4 Booting X Server Loading Which Network Services Are Used by NCD Terminals NCD terminals require that host computers residing on the network provide the following services Some of the following are optional or depend on the network configuration 0 Address discovery service provides terminals with their network addresses and
18. Note If any of the trap monitor hosts are also manager or monitor hosts use the community names already specified for those hosts For information about manager and monitor hosts see Configuring Read Write Access on page 16 4 and Configuring Read Only Access on page 16 5 Using SNMP to Read and Write Variables You can read and write SNMP variables using the SNMP utilities provided with your SNMP host software In addition you can read a few variables using the ncdquery 1 utility provided on the NCDware distribution Reading a Terminal s SNMP Variables The following sections describe how to use SNMP management software or the ncdquery utility to read a terminal s SNMP variables Using SNMP Management Software A host s SNMP management software usually includes a get command that allows you to read a terminal s SNMP variables Reading variables requires read only or read write access to the terminal which is allowed by default Using the ncdquery Utility The ncdquery utility allows you to display the contents of a few MIB variables for a specified terminal An ncdquery command must be executed from a host designated as an SNMP manager or monitor 1 When executing the command from a manager host you must supply the read write community string d When executing the command from a monitor host you must supply the read only community name For more information about community names see Configuring Read
19. User Action None XSESSSTART protocol session started on host host Severity Information Explanation The specified host has established an X session with the X server using the specified protocol either XDMCP or DECwindows User Action None MIRRORD Messages MIRRORD messages pertain to the MIRROR daemon and loopback testing of connections on a DECnet network If you are looking for a message that refers to the MIRRORD module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 MSGSRCVD received n messages Severity Information Explanation The MIRROR daemon has received the specified number n of messages User Action None X Server Messages 18 81 MPEGPLAY Messages MPEGPLAY Messages MPEGPLAY messages pertain to video software support If you are looking for a message that refers to the MPEGPLAY module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADENDCODE Improper or missing sequence end code Severity Fatal Explanation The decoder could not find the MPEG I end code User Action Make sure that the file is terminated properly with the MPEG I end code BADFLAG Un recognized flag flag Severity Fatal Explanation The user included an incorrect command line option User Action Review the usage and syntax instructions in the command s man page for the correct options and usage NODISPLA
20. Using Change Setup Parameters Connect to New Unit Presents a popup box requesting a terminal name and the config read only password or config read write password required for configuration data access Displays the remote terminal s Change Setup Parameters window Close Closes the Change Setup Parameters client m The Sections menu contains a listing of the Change Setup Parameters hide boxes allowing you an alternative way to select one to open You can also select to open or hide all hide boxes _1 The Messages area below the hide boxes displays Configuration daemon messages 1 The Auto Save File toggle below the Messages area enables or disables the Auto Save feature described in the System Administrator s Guide and in Chapter 6 Terminal Configuration Methods d The four buttons along the bottom of the window allow you to commit changes to the current X session to NVRAM or to the configuration database Apply Applies current changes to the current X session Applies changes to NVRAM and to configuration files according to specifications set for the Auto Save feature Parameters may take effect immediately after you click on App1y at boot time at session startup or when a client is initialized When you click on Apply a message in the Messages area indicates when the change takes effect Restart Removes changes that have not been applied Defaults Loads parameter settings from the
21. A simple assignment consists of an optional set command a parameter name followed by an equals sign and a single value For example boot tcpip desired server 192 43 153 16 set boot tcpip desired server 192 43 153 16 The end of a simple assignment statement is indicated by a newline or carriage return Tables and Rows Parameters that can take more than one value or require a series of related values are stored in tables composed of rows For example each row in the exec startup commands table consists of a single local client name or a local client name followed by arguments exec startup commands wm term login eagle When resetting values in a row resetting an entire row or adding and deleting rows you can use the row number as an index into the table This is useful mainly in configuring a terminal through a TELNET connection For example to add a fourth row to the exec startup commands table exec startup commands 4 lat To add a row to the end of a table use the index number 1 For example exec startup commands 1 lat If you represent the parameters in a row as simple assignment statements enclosed in parentheses their order in the row does not matter Using assignment statements in a row is especially useful if you are not defining all the parameters in the row The following example shows how to reset only the Terminal Configuration Methods 6 11 The Config
22. Function up file NCD_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask Uploads an X server image to a host on a TCP IP network using TFTP You can specify the X server image file file the IP address of the terminal NCD_IP and the IP address of the host host_IP If you are specifying either the host or IP address you must specify both and specify the filename If you are uploading through a gateway supply the address of the gateway gateway_IP and if you are using one the subnet mask subnet_mask Display or change the wireless domain Display or change the roaming configuration of a wireless terminal ws Change or reset the security ID for a wireless terminal zk Clear keyboard statistics zs Clear all statistics gathered during the execution of bn bt bd pi up and ud Repeats the last command Lists all Boot Monitor commands 1 These commands are available only if the Boot Monitor supports wireless 11 10 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Updating the Boot Monitor on Explora Terminals Updating the Boot Monitor on Explora Terminals On Explora 400 450 and 700 series terminals you can download an updated Boot Monitor from the remote configuration file To download a new Boot Monitor version set the boot prom update file parameter to the absolute pathname of a file that contains a new Boot Monitor image Such files are available from NCD whenever the Boot M
23. LED1 Net on all HMX series X1 on all Explora series LED2 Caps Lock LED3 x3 To access the Boot Monitor from an N 97 keyboard when the X server is running use the Left Alt Caps Lock Setup key combination 17 4 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 97 Keyboard Details Esc Back 2 4 30 5 38 37 i 46 6 54 61 8 62 70 oll 78 85 Spac Tab Q WwW E R T Y U l O P ele 68 sa 97 ne 92 Ctrl Return Line Feed 87 Shift Palle Peal faa wa al ee ae i KA iga 18 a KA Ka ee ae i fae KA iga Caps Fl pa PF2 118 119 126 124 7 8 9 108 117 125 132 4 5 lie 107 115 116 109 1 2 3 Enter 105 114 122 0 112 113 121 Figure 17 1 N 97 Keyboard Legends and Keycodes Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 5 N 97 Keyboard Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 8 Escape 9 10 11 12 13 Tab 14 quoteleft asciitilde 15 F2 16 F1 17 Control_L 18 Shift_L 19 20 Caps_Lock 21 q Q 22 l exclam 23 F3 24 25 Alt L Meta_L 26 Z Z 27 S S 28 a A 29 w W 17 6 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definition
24. Possible Values Result host default empty list host Host permitted to access the terminal s serial ports specified by hostname IP address or DECnet address DECnet host names must have appended to them family default tcpip tcpip The host can connect to the serial ports via TCP IP ncdnet The host can connect to the serial ports via DECnet lat The host can connect to the serial ports via LAT For example serial access control list eagle tcpip eagle lat nedu23 tcpip In the following example only local access to the terminal is allowed serial access control list 127 0 0 1 tcpip To prevent access from all hosts leave the serial access control list table empty serial access control list Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 15 11 Controlling Access to Serial and Parallel Ports 15 12 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 16 Using SNMP for Terminal Management This chapter describes using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol to manage NCD terminals over the network The following topics are covered in this chapter SNMP Overview on page 16 1 SNMP Host Requirements on page 16 3 Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP on page 16 3 Using SNMP to Read and Write Variables on page 16 7 Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot on page 16 10 Ooo ou SNMP Overview SNMP is an industry sta
25. When using interactive configuration via TELNET you must enter an apply command to save parameters in NVRAM The config auto save nvram parameter determines whether parameters are saved automatically to NVRAM Change Setup Parameters Configuration Configuration Daemon section Auto Save NVRAM For more information about auto save see Configuring the Apply Command on page 6 34 Terminal Configuration Methods 6 15 Creating Remote Configuration Files Creating Remote Configuration Files Remote configuration files allow you to configure all terminals easily from a host computer Remote configuration files are ASCII files that reside on the boot host or other hosts designated as initial file servers The default file server is the boot host For information about designating other file servers see Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services Remote configuration files are downloaded using TFTP or NFS after the terminal has loaded an X server NCD terminals are configured by default to 1 Download a configuration file from the boot host the host from which the X server is downloaded Note If the terminal is booting from a PCMCIA card and its NVRAM is set to default values it automatically loads a configuration file from the local source If a configuration file is not found on the PCMCIA card the terminal tries to download a file from a network host d Search for two default configuration filenames in the default
26. file initial protocol 1 File Server Address Address of the primary initial file server file initial server 1 Using Configuration Menus 9 3 Using Change Quick Setup Files Field Description Corresponding Parameter Backup File Service Protocol Protocol for file exchange with the secondary initial file server file initial protocol 2 Backup File Server Address of the secondary initial file initial server 2 Address file server Config File Configuration file downloaded by config default file the terminal UNIX Config Directory Directory containing the config unix directory configuration file downloaded by the terminal VMS Config Directory Directory containing the config vms directory configuration file downloaded by the terminal from a VMS host Loadable Modules Directory that contains the modules directory Directory loadable X server modules Name Type for Initial Type of filenames UNIX or VMS file name type for initial tftp TFTP servers sent via TFTP from the initial file servers servers Extended File Generates more detailed file extended diagnostics Diagnostics diagnostic messages about file services Fonts Parameters The Fonts hide box defines the default font path a ee Default Font Path at Reset Default directories that the terminal searches for fonts Corresponding Parameter xserver default font path 9 4 Using Confi
27. timeout waiting for interrupt Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal timed out waiting for an interrupt User Action Try the following remedies in the order given 1 Make sure the LAN adapter card is fully inserted in the slot and the antenna is properly connected 2 Make sure the terminal is properly configured for wireless use 3 Make sure the Access Point is properly configured 4 Test the wireless system to make sure the terminal is within the range of an Access Point If you cannot find the source of the problem please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support transmit error Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal detected a transmit error to the Access Point User Action Try the following remedies in the order given 1 Make sure the LAN adapter card is fully inserted in the slot and the antenna is properly connected 2 Make sure the terminal is properly configured for wireless use 3 Make sure the Access Point is properly configured Test the wireless system to make sure the terminal is within the range of an Access Point If you cannot find the source of the problem please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support transmit timeout error reason_code Severity Error Explanation The software timed out on transmit of a packet Usually the LAN adapter is restarted in an attempt to recover from this error This problem may be caused by intermittent communication betwee
28. 1 The protocol that connects the manager with agents The NCDware distribution also includes two utilities ncdreset 1 for remotely resetting terminals and ncdquery 1 for displaying the values of certain NCD specific variables How SNMP Works NCD terminals respond to queries from hosts running SNMP management software Manager hosts have read write access monitor hosts have read only access and trap monitors receive information about significant events The SNMP manager initiates information gathering by sending a request for information to the SNMP agent in the terminal When the request is received the agent collects data as specified in the MIB and sends it to the manager Using SNMP utilities the system administrator can read or write variables NCDware provides an access control mechanism that you can use to prevent read write or read only access to the SNMP agent from outside the terminal or restrict access to a specified list of hosts Both levels of access are further controlled by passwords called community names MIB Contents All of the mandatory variables are included in NCD s SNMP agent except for the ifAdminStatus variable Read only access is provided for this variable but write access can cause security problems and is not necessary on NCD terminals which have only one network interface The NCDware MIB file contains SNMP variables for all NCD configuration parameters Each configuration parameter has a unique
29. 25 Alt_L Meta_L 26 Z 27 S 28 A 29 W 17 24 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 4 VT220 Compatible N 108 Default Keysyms for ULTRIX Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 30 2 at 31 F4 32 33 34 36 37 dollar C X 35 D E 4 3 38 numbersign 39 F5 40 41 space 42 43 45 V F 44 T R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 49 50 51 QOJ a SIZ 32 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 25 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 4 VT220 Compatible N 108 Default Keysyms for ULTRIX Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 53 Y 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 57 Alt_R 12 Meta_R 12 58 M 59 J 60 U 61 7 ampersand 62 8 asterisk 63 F8 64 65 comma less 66 K 67 I 68 O 69 0 parenright 70 9 parenleft 71 F9 72 73 period greater 74 slash question 75 L 17 26 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 4 VT220 Compatible N 108 Default Keysyms for ULTRIX Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 76 semicolon colon 77 P 78 minus un
30. Change Setup Parameters 9 11 SNMP Read Write Alternative Community Change Setup Parameters 9 11 SNMP Read Write Community Change Setup Parameters 9 11 SNMP Trap Monitors Change Setup Parameters 9 11 snmp allow reset 9 11 16 11 16 12 snmp bad variable name error responses received 10 19 snmp bad variable name error responses transmitted 10 20 snmp bad variable values error responses received 10 19 Index 26 snmp bad variable values error responses transmitted 10 20 SNMPD messages 18 108 snmp general error responses received 10 19 snmp general error responses transmitted 10 20 snmp get next requests received 10 20 snmp get next requests transmitted 10 20 snmp get requests received 10 19 snmp get requests transmitted 10 20 snmp get responses received 10 20 snmp get responses transmitted 10 20 snmp packets received 10 18 snmp packets received with asn1 errors 10 19 snmp packets received with bad community names 10 18 snmp packets received with bad community uses 10 18 snmp packets received with bad variable types 10 19 snmp packets received with bad versions 10 18 snmp packets transmitted 10 18 snmp read only access control enabled 9 11 16 5 snmp read only access control list 9 11 16 5 snmp read only community 9 10 snmp read only community alt 9 10 snmp read only variable error responses received 10 19 snmp read only variable error responses transmitted 10 20 snmp read write access control
31. Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 57 VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 23 ISO Latin 1 Supplemental Character Set C1 and GR Codes Continued Column b8 BITS b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 217 143 8F APC C1 CODES GR CODES ISO LATIN 1 SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS This character is illustrated in Table 12 20 12 58 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 24 National Replacement Character Sets Character Set 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 sns 60 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 tr eth United Hee poe ee ah r Portuguese N Spanish Cs Swedish Swiss Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 59 VT320 Character Coding Conventions 12 60 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 13 Configuring Display PostScript This chapter describes the DPS Display PostScript X server module The following topics are covered in this chapter UW DPS Overview on page 13 1 DPS Requirements on page 13 2 Using DPS Support Files on page 13 3 Adobe Fonts for DPS on page 13 8 Configuring the DPS Resource Path on page 13 10 Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients on page 13 11 Freeing the DPS Cache on page 13 12 Troubleshooting DPS on page 13 12 COCO C O DPS is available on HMX and Explora 700
32. Disabling Change Setup Parameters and Change Quick Setup prevents interactive access to the terminal s Configuration and User Preferences daemons through the Console Disabling Change User Preferences prevents all interactive access to the terminal s Preferences daemon Disabling the Console prevents access to all clients through the Console To disable the Setup local clients list them in the exec disabled commands table using their command names The following example disables Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup and Change User Preferences exec disabled commands setup pref quicksetup In the Console menus the names of disabled clients are dithered displayed in a shaded font To disable the Console include it in the exec disabled command table exec disabled commands console When disabled the Console does not appear after booting or upon pressing the Setup key or key combination Configuring the Apply Command The configuration language apply command Applies changes to the terminal s current configuration LI Writes changes to NVRAM for parameters that are retained in NVRAM I Writes changes to a file The default filename is the name of the initial configuration file loaded by the terminal plus the filename extension stp for example C02B9A41 stp By default the file is located in the usr lib X11 ncd configs directory The apply command can be used in interactive configurat
33. Index font server continued defined 7 19 to 7 20 diagnostic messages explanations of 18 48 displaying fonts 7 27 error logging 7 23 font formats 7 20 to 7 21 host load configuring 7 22 IBM Type 1 Adobe outline fonts 7 21 installation 7 22 listing fonts 7 27 ncdfsinfo 1 7 26 ncdfslsfonts 7 27 outline fonts 7 20 7 21 point size default 7 23 resolution default 7 23 SNF fonts 7 21 timeouts configuring 7 25 to 7 26 font cache hits 10 3 font cache size 10 3 font cache used 10 3 font extended diagnostics 18 6 font number of fonts in cache 10 3 font object count 10 3 font objects currently in use 10 3 fonts access sequence 7 2 available fonts listing 7 18 BDF format converting to PCF 7 10 defined 7 7 built in 7 11 cache 7 14 characters in a font displaying 7 18 client font requests 7 4 7 6 configuration parameters for 9 4 9 23 9 47 default font 7 13 diagnostic messages displaying 7 17 explanations of 18 48 logging 7 17 Index 10 fonts continued directories for 7 8 downloading protocols for 7 6 DPS fonts 13 8 13 11 DWF format 7 7 files 7 8 to 7 10 font information displaying 7 17 to 7 19 font names 7 2 to 7 5 font path aliases for creating 7 16 current 7 11 to 7 13 defined 7 6 displaying 7 18 xset 1 setting current font path 7 13 fonts alias file defined 7 9 name changing 7 15 fonts dir file creating 7 10 defined 7 9 name changing 7 15 formats 7 7 initial file server hosts 5 13 NCD
34. NCDware Reference Manual Part Number 9300584 Rev A October 1997 Network Computing Devices Inc 350 North Bernardo Avenue Mountain View California 94043 Telephone 650 694 0650 FAX 650 961 7711 Copyright Copyright 1997 by Network Computing Devices Inc The information contained in this docu ment is subject to change without notice Network Computing Devices Inc shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnish ing performance or use of this material This document contains information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Network Computing Devices Inc Trademarks Explora Explora Pro ECX HMX HMXpro HMXpro24 WinCenter WinCenter Pro WinCenter Connect NCDnet and NCDware are trademarks of Network Computing Devices Inc XRemote is a registered trademark of Network Computing Devices Inc All trademarks and service marks are the trademarks and service marks of their respective companies All terms mentioned in this book that are known to be trademarks or service marks have been appropriately capitalized NCD cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark Revisions Revision history
35. Number of ICMP Timestamp request messages sent icmp timestamp requests transmitted Timestamp Replies Number of Timestamp Reply icmp timestamp replies Transmitted messages sent transmitted Address Mask Number of Address Mask Request icmp address mask requests Requests Transmitted messages sent transmitted Address Mask Replies Number of Address Mask Reply icmp address mask replies Transmitted messages sent transmitted Statistics Menus 10 5 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes IP Statistics The parameters in the IP hide box report statistics on terminal communications using IP IP Field Description Corresponding Parameter IP Forwarding Type Whether the terminal is acting as an IP gateway when forwarding datagrams that were not addressed to the terminal ip forwarding type Packets Received Total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including datagrams received in error ip packets received Packets Received with Errors in IP Header Number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers including bad checksums mismatched version numbers incorrect format exceeded time to live and errors discovered in processing their IP options ip packets received with errors in ip header Packets Received with Incorrect Address Number of input datagrams discarded because of an invalid address for t
36. The default sequence for finding an X server and loading it into RAM allows the terminal to load an X server the first time it is powered on The Boot Monitor first attempts to download an X server from the following sources TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol MOP Maintenance Operations Protocol NFS Network File Service local PCMCIA card If a PCMCIA card is installed in the terminal NVRAM is still set to factory defaults and the terminal has never booted from the network the default order is local TFTP MOP NES If all attempts to load an X server fail the Boot Monitor displays its prompt gt you can enter a manual boot command The default X server loading sequence listed in Table 4 1 automatically loads the first X server found in the default TFTP directory usually tftpboot The default directory is defined by your implementation of TFTP After the request for an X server is answered by a host and is downloaded no further requests are made You can disable any of the requests Booting xX Server Loading 4 1 Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Although the sequence uses predefined pathnames you can use it to boot an X server located in another directory by linking one of the default pathnames to the X server s true location For information about linking see Linking X Server Files on page 4 14 Table 4 1 Default Server Loading Sequence 1 TFTP Requests The Boot Mo
37. non volatile RAM including Boot Monitor commands and the contents of NVRAM The following topics are covered in this chapter Boot Monitor Versions on page 11 1 Boot Monitor Functions on page 11 2 Using Boot Monitor Commands on page 11 6 Updating the Boot Monitor on Explora Terminals on page 11 11 Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals on page 11 12 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals on page 11 20 DGO DO O O Boot Monitor Versions The Boot Monitor version is displayed while the terminal boots After the terminal boots you can find the version in the Console s Statistics Show Version window The Boot Monitor version required for a terminal depends on the terminal model and the interface boards installed in some terminal models At the time of this manual s publication Boot Monitor 2 8 3 is installed in all new HMX terminals and Boot Monitor 2 8 2 is installed in new Explora and Explora Pro terminals Boot Monitor 2 9 0 is installed in Explora 400 450 and Explora 700 terminals Older HMX terminals may have PROMs from version 2 7 1 or later and older Explora terminals may have PROMs from version 2 7 6 or later Terminals with older versions of the Boot Monitor can run the most recent version of NCDware however you will not have access to features that require the newer Boot Monitor See the NCDware Release Notes descriptions of new features and for informa
38. on page 9 34 This hide box appears on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only PEX Preferences Field Description Corresponding Parameter Nominal Line Width Sets the standard width of lines pref pex nominal line width pixels and curves Nominal Edge Width Sets the standard width of edges pref pex nominal edge width pixels of surface primitives when displayed Nominal Marker Size pixels Sets the standard size of marker primitives pref pex nominal marker size Dither Flat Shaded Enables dithering of flat shaded pref pex dither flat shaded Surface surfaces surface Dither Interpolated Enables dithering of Gouraud pref pex dither interpolated Surface shaded surfaces surface Surface Interior Style Specifies the rendering style of surface interiors pref pex surface interior style Surface Interpolation Method Specifies shading method for surface interiors pref pex surface interp method Surface Reflection Model Specifies how to apply lighting effects to all surfaces pref pex surface reflect model Color Clipping Method Specifies the method for correcting colors with RGB components outside the acceptable ranges pref pex color clipping method 9 50 Using Configuration Menus Using Change User Preferences Pointing Devices Preferences The parameters in the Pointing Devices hide box affect the mouse and other pointing devices Pointing Devi
39. r lucidasans 18 b amp h lucida dium r normal sans 25 180 100 100 142 is08859 1 lucidasans 24 b amp h lucida dium r normal sans 34 240 100 100 191 iso08859 1 fixed misc fixed medium r semicondensed 13 120 100 100 c 60 iso08859 1 variabl helvetica bold r normal 120 5x8 misc fixed medium r normal 8 80 100 100 50 is08859 1 6x9 misc fixed medium r normal 9 90 100 100 c 50 1is08859 1 6x10 misc fixed medium r normal 10 100 100 100 c 50 is08859 1 6x1l3bold misc fixed bold r semicondensed 13 120 100 100 c 50 is08859 1 The first font specification on a line is the unavailable font and the second is the substitute font When both font names are too long for one line the line automatically wraps to the next line As illustrated in the example file you can specify a variety of font names including names that were used with Releases 1 and 2 of the X11 server the last six entries NCD Font Management Utilities The following font utilities are installed by ncdinstall in usr bin X11 I ncdbdftopcf Converts fonts from BDF to PCF For syntax and usage see the ncdbdftopcf 1 man page D ncdmkfontdir Creates a fonts dir file from a directory of font files For syntax and usage see the ncdmkfontdir 1 man page 7 10 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Alternative Methods of Changing the Current Font Path Built In Fonts
40. 99 42 Booting xX Server Loading 4 15 Specifying Boot Hosts Specifying Boot Hosts Instead of loading an X server from the first host to respond to the terminal s request or specifying the boot server using BOOTP DHCP you can specify the names of the boot hosts Specifying the Initial Boot Host To make sure that the terminal tries to boot first from a specific host you can set the primary boot host s IP address using the boot tcpip desired server parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section TCP IP Desired Server Save the new value in NVRAM This parameter is used for both TFTP and NFS booting Table 4 13 boot tcpip desired server Parameter Possible Values Default default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 There is no designated boot host The terminal uses information from the bootptab file or broadcasts requests for a server to the network IP address The IP address of the desired boot host Specifying Backup Boot Hosts You can specify more than one boot host to use in case the initial boot server is unavailable There are three methods 0 Using the p and 1 bootpd options to specify when a secondary host should respond to the terminal s BOOTP requests See the bootpd 8 man page for more information D Setting Second Boot Host IP Address and Third Boot Host IP Address in the Network window of the Boot Monitor Setup menus See Chapter 11 Boot Moni
41. Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes TCP IP Name Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Memory Allocation Number of times the name resolver tcpip name memory allocation Failures was unable to allocate required failures memory TFTP Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on file access using TFTP TFTP Field Description Corresponding Parameter File Read Requests Number of read requests made by tftp file read requests Transmitted the TFTP client transmitted File Write Requests Number of file write requests made tftp file write requests Transmitted by the TFTP client transmitted Data Packets Number of data packets received tftp data packets received Received by the TFTP client Ack Packets Received Number of TFTP ACK packets tftp ack packets received received by the TFTP client No File Error Number of times a TFTP client tftp no file error responses Responses Received received an error packet with error code File not found received Bad Access Error Responses Received Number of times the TFTP client received an error packet with error code Access violation tftp bad access error responses received Disk Full Error Responses Received Number of times a TFTP client received an error packet with error code Disk full tftp disk full error responses received No Available Buffer Number of
42. Each value can range from 0 0 to 1 0 Configuring PEX 14 5 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Table 14 4 pex monitor reference blue u Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 1756 floating point number The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the blue color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Table 14 5 pex monitor reference blue v Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 1785 floating point number The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the blue color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Table 14 6 pex monitor reference blue y Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 0 floating point number The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the blue color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Green Color Component The following parameters specify the three values that make up the green color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Each value can range from 0 0 to 1 0 Table 14 7 pex monitor reference green u Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 1169 floating point number The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the green color component of the properly adjusted display monitor 14 6 Configuring PEX Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Table 14 8 pex monitor reference green v Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 559 floating point nu
43. Error Explanation The file does not exist or the file service table is not configured to ensure access to it User Action Make sure that the file exists and the file service table is configured for access to it Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service gt File Service Table NOFILEINC Line n cannot open file file Severity Error Explanation The include file referred to in line n does not exist or the file service table is not configured to ensure access to it User Action Make sure that the file exists and the file service table is configured for access to it Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service gt File Service Table NOKEYSYM Line n keysym not found in keycode table name Severity Error Explanation At line n the keysym located in a command was not defined in the keycode portion of the file User Action Define the keysym in a higher location in the file than its first use X Server Messages 18 63 KBM Messages NOKESYMINTABLE Line n found no occurrence of keysym in table keysym Severity Error Explanation At line n the keysym was not found in the keycode table User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n NOMEMORY No memory for temporary keyboard table NOMODIFI Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal ran out of memory for internal tables User Action Check the amount of available memory If possible clos
44. Ethernet Change Setup Parameters 9 32 Use WinCenter Colors Change Setup Parameters 9 40 User Account Name Change Setup Parameters 9 31 User Preferences daemon configuration parameters for 9 20 defined 6 2 ports for accessing 6 29 starting from Terminal Emulator 12 2 User Preferences Read Only Password Change Setup Parameters 9 10 User Preferences Read Write Password Change Setup Parameters 9 10 usr lib X11 ncd configs directory 6 26 usr lib X11 ncd dps DPS directory 13 10 usr lib X11 ncd fs font server directory 7 23 usr lib x11 ncd snmp SNMP directory 16 2 Index 32 V video configuration parameters for 9 39 diagnostic messages 18 82 VIDEO messages 18 82 VIDEODECODER messages 18 82 VIDEOPLAYER messages 18 82 visual default 9 41 VMS Config Directory Change Quick Setup 9 4 VMS Directory Change Setup Parameters 9 18 VT220 compatible keyboards Boot Monitor accessing from 17 21 keycodes 17 22 keymap 17 24 to 17 35 LEDs 17 21 legends 17 22 Setup key combination 17 21 VT320 terminal emulation see Terminal Emulator W Wait for Broadcasts for Change Setup Parameters 9 30 Wait for Keepalive Responses for Change Setup Parameters 9 30 wd command Boot Monitor 11 10 What to do when XDM disconnects Change Setup Parameters 9 30 What to do with XDMCP Broadcasts Change Setup Parameters 9 30 What to do with XDMCP Indirects Change Setup Parameters 9 30 White Pixel Change Setup Para
45. Locate the duplicate request for starting the local Motif Window Manager and remove it ERROR message Severity Error Explanation The X server may not have been able to save all arguments necessary for a proper restart of the local Motif Window Manager User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the desired action X Server Messages 18 83 NCD Mosaic Browser Messages RESTART restarting Severity Information Explanation The local Motif Window Manager is restarting as requested User Action None WARNING message Severity Warning Explanation The MWM module has encountered some difficulty as described in the message User Action Use the information contained in the message to resolve the problem Verify L The terminal is not running low on memory The X server can locate open and read files as requested m 4 The mwm resource file is free of errors I The configuration file is free of errors NCD Mosaic Browser Messages Browser messages pertain to the NCD Mosaic Browser These messages are not formatted in the same way as other messages Messages are not preceded by a module name they appear in the Console as shown in this section Modifying application octet stream is not allowed Explanation The user attempted to change the helper application for application octet stream Unable to save file Disk may be full Explanation An attempt to create a file has fi
46. Routing Table Change Setup Parameters 9 26 rs command Boot Monitor 11 9 RTLD messages 18 103 S Save Screen After Change User Preferences 9 53 Screen Background Type Change User Preferences 9 52 screen background configuration parameters for 9 52 screen resolution displaying 9 54 setting 11 13 Screen Resolution Change User Preferences 9 54 Index 24 Screen Saver Bitmap File Change User Preferences 9 53 Screen Saver Style Change User Preferences 9 53 screen saver configuration parameters for 9 53 se command Boot Monitor 11 9 11 12 Secondary Boot Source Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Secondary TCP IP Server Change Setup Parameters 9 14 security see assess control passwords Send Broadcast ICMP for Subnet Mask Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Send Buffer Size Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Serial and Parallel Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 13 Serial Daemon LAT Service Passwords Change Setup Parameters 9 12 Serial Daemons Table Change Setup Parameters 9 35 Serial Interfaces Table Change Setup Parameters 9 35 serial port access control 15 10 configuration parameters for 9 35 configuring serial daemons table 15 6 to 15 8 serial interfaces table 15 2 to 15 6 diagnostic messages 18 106 numbering 1 through 3 15 2 serial sessions automatic display in Terminal Host Chooser 12 3 serial terminal emulation configuring 12 3 statistics 10 17 to 10 18 system console configuring termin
47. Table 6 11 config pref telnet port Parameter Possible Values Result default 5997 port number Access to the terminal s user preferences data is through the TELNET port specified Range 1024 through 65535 To change the TCP port for the Preferences daemon use config pref tcp port Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration User Preferences daemon section TCP Port Number Table 6 12 config pref tcp port Parameter Possible Values default Result 5977 port number Access to the terminal s user preferences data is through the TCP port specified Range 1024 through 65535 Terminal Configuration Methods 6 29 Setting Up Host Based Access Control for Configuration Data Setting Up Host Based Access Control for Configuration Data This section describes how to control which hosts have remote interactive access to a terminal s Configuration and Preferences daemons Excluding a host from this form of access does not mean that the host cannot download remote configuration files to the terminal it only prevents remote access through a TELNET connection or Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup and Change User Preferences Host access control is turned off by default allowing access to configuration data from any host prevent all access You can allow access from a list of specified hosts or Allowing Access from Specified Hosts To establis
48. The number of roaming alarm packets received which indicates that the signal strength is weak In Syncs The number of times the terminal synchronized to a Master station Out Syncs The number of the times the terminal lost contact with the Master station Statistics Menus 10 29 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes XRemote Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on XRemote Except for Packet Round Trip Time these statistics are reported when XRemote is being used in non TCP mode XRemote Field Description Corresponding Parameter XRemote version The version of XRemote protocol in use xremote xremote version State State of the XRemote connection xremote state Packets Transmitted Number of XRemote packets transmitted including packets retransmitted xremote packets transmitted Packet Transmission Errors Number of errors encountered while trying to transmit packets xremote packet transmission errors Packets Retransmitted Number of Xremote packets retransmitted xremote packets retransmitted Packets Received Number of XRemote packets received xremote packets received Packets with Errors Received Number of XRemote packets received in error xremote packets with errors received Packets Received Out of Sequence Number of XRemote packets received with an incorrect sequence number xremote
49. The parameters you set when configuring the terminal are read write parameters Read only parameters report various types of statistical information Parameters containing passwords and encryption keys are write only When displayed through a TELNET connection write only parameter values are shown as follows LJ If not set values are shown as nil L1 Ifset values are shown as lt GET PROTECTED gt When displayed through Change Setup Parameters write only parameter values are shown as follows LJ If not set fields are blank m If set fields contain a series of asterisks Terminal Configuration Methods 6 5 Parameter Types and Groups Parameter Groups The parameter groups are listed in Table 6 1 The name of each parameter within a group begins with the group name Groups correspond for the most part to the hide boxes displayed in Change Setup Parameters when invoked from the Console except for the pref group which appears only in Change User Preferences Table 6 1 Parameter Groups Group Name Description boot Terminal booting browser The NCD Mosaic Browser config Terminal configuration including access control diag Diagnostics logging including access control for the Diagnostics daemon dps DPS Display PostScript resource file enet Read only Ethernet statistics exec Execution of and access control for local clients file File servic
50. Total number of ICMP messages that the terminal attempted to send including messages counted by icmp packets unable to be transmitted icmp packets transmitted Packets Unable to be Transmitted Number of ICMP messages that the terminal did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer icmp packets unable to be transmitted 10 4 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes ICMP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Destination Unreachables Transmitted Number of Destination Unreachable messages sent icmp destination unreachables transmitted Time Exceededs Transmitted Number of Time Exceeded messages sent icmp time exceededs transmitted Parameter Problems Transmitted Number of Parameter Problem messages sent icmp parameter problems transmitted Source Quenches Transmitted Number of Source Quench messages sent icmp source quenches transmitted Redirects Transmitted Number of Redirect messages sent always zero because non routers do not send redirect messages icmp redirects transmitted Echo Requests Number of Echo request messages icmp echo requests Transmitted sent transmitted Echo Replies Number of Echo Reply messages sent icmp echo replies transmitted Transmitted Timestamp Requests Transmitted
51. User Action None NOMULTICAST unable to set protocol multicast address message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set the multicast address for the specified protocol as requested User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support NONCDNETHOSTNAME unable to find host name for NCDnet address aa nnnn Severity Warning Explanation The Configuration daemon cannot find the network name of the node specified by the DECnet address User Action Verify that d The DECnet address is correct 1 The terminal s configuration database identifies the system that is to provide name service for the terminal 1 The name server is running and is accessible via the network 18 24 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages NONET no network interfaces have been enabled NOPASSWDS Severity Warning Explanation The X server expects to communicate via a network or over a serial line but the terminal is not configured for communications via a network or for communications over a serial line User Action Configure the terminal for network or serial communications If you require assistance please contact NCD Technical Support no passwords configured denying access Severity Warning Explanation The terminal does not have read write or read only passwords specified for access to the terminal s Configuration daemon and therefore is denying access to the conf
52. User Action None RPCERROR NFS RPC Error message Severity Error Explanation The X server has encountered a lower level NFS networking failure Message defines the error more more completely and suggests a course of action User Action Use the information contained in the message to determine the action to take STATATTEMPT attempting stat for file Severity Information Explanation The X server is attempting to read the file s attributes User Action None 18 92 X Server Messages NETSRV Messages STATSUCCESS stat succeeded for file Severity Information Explanation The X server successfully read the file s attributes User Action None NETSRV Messages NETSRV messages pertain to the library shared by NCDware daemons If you are looking for a message that refers to the NETSRV module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ACCEPT accepting module connection from host Severity Information Explanation The NETSRV module has accepted the specified connection from the specified terminal User Action None REFUSE refusing module connection from host Severity Warning Explanation The NETSRV module has refused the specified connection from the specified terminal This situation usually occurs when access control is enabled but the specified host is not in the list of hosts granted access privileges User Action If the s
53. boots after the X server is executed These messages show how the terminal reads its configuration file keymap file color definition file and fonts Other messages in the Console reflect ongoing operations such as starting clients and loading fonts as clients request them Messages are listed by module and alphabetically within each module section The text of each message is followed by a table listing the severity the explanation and the recommended user action if any The first section of messages describes those that are common to many modules followed by a separate section for each module that issues its own unique messages The Format of Messages X server messages follow the format MODULE L ABBREV full message text where MODULE Is the NCDware module issuing the message such as CONFIGD or FILED L Is the message s level of severity I An informational message The activity was successful W A warning message The activity may not have have been successful You should verify the results 18 2 X Server Messages The Format of Messages E An error The module did not complete the activity but is attempting to continue F A fatal error The module did not complete the activity and cannot continue ABBREV Is the abbreviated message for example READ for an operation that involved reading a file Some example messages of different levels of severity are shown in the following list they were all iss
54. clients If you are using the NCD Display Manager user variables obtained from XDM such as HOME and USER appear in this field ae a vanables Description Corresponding Parameter Environment Variables Current environment variables for pref environment use by local clients Font Preferences The parameters in the Font hide box affect font diagnostic messages and the directories in which the terminal searches for fonts Font Field Description Corresponding Parameter Show Extended Font All font actions that require file pref font extended Diagnostics system or network access are diagnostics reported Current Font Path Current font search path pref font path Keyboard Preferences The parameters in the Keyboard hide box affect keyboard attributes ioe ai prolerences Description Corresponding Parameter Function Key Style How the X server interprets pref keyboard function key function keys style Enable Keyboard Keys repeat automatically when pref keyboard auto repeat Autorepeat held down Autorepeat Begin After How long a key must be held pref keyboard auto repeat milliseconds down before it starts repeating start Using Configuration Menus 9 47 Using Change User Preferences Keyboard Preferences Field Description Corresponding Parameter Autorepeat Rate keys per second How many times per second keys repeat when held down pref keyboard auto repeat
55. font and the font format Font files supplied by NCD are compressed using 12 bit compression If you add compressed font files you must use 12 bit compression 7 8 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Use Overview 200 courBoO0os courBOl10 courBOl12 courBOl14 courBOl18 courBO24 Font Management Files Font management files enable the X server to locate font files The fonts dir File Each font directory contains a font directory management file called fonts dir which contains an entry for each font file in the directory A fonts dir file is required in every font directory for the X server to access any fonts in the directory When searching for a font the X server reads the fonts dir files in the directories in the terminal s font path to find out where fonts are located An example fonts dir file follows snf adobe courier bold o normal 11 80 100 100 m 60 is08859 1 snf adobe courier bold o normal 14 100 100 100 m 90 is08859 1 snf adobe courier bold o normal 17 120 100 100 m 100 iso08859 1 snf adobe courier bold o normal 20 140 100 100 m 110 is08859 1 snf adobe courier bold o normal 25 180 100 100 m 150 is08859 1 snf adobe courier bold o normal 34 240 100 100 m 200 is08859 1 The first line in the file lists how many bitmap fonts or outline fonts are described by the file The rest of the file lists the filenames and XLFD names for all the files in the directory The snf filename exten
56. ncdnet name server hits Name Cache Overflows Number of times a valid entry in the local name cache was deleted to make room for a new entry ncdnet name cache overflows Errors section No Such Name Errors Number of times the DECnet name servers returned No Such Name error messages in response to name request ncdnet name no such name errors Bad Name Errors Number of Bad Name errors returned by the name servers indicates a badly formed name ncdnet name bad name errors Name Server Response Errors Number of badly formed responses returned by the name servers ncdnet name servet response errors No Server Responses Number of times the name servers did not respond to name requests ncdnet name no server responses System Errors Number of times the name resolver encountered a general system error ncdnet name system errors 10 10 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes NCDnet Name Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Memory Allocation Failures Number of times the name resolver could not allocate required memory ncdnet name memory allocation failures Network Buffers Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on network buffers Network Buffers Field Description Corresponding Parameter Total Buffers Total number of network buffers net total buffers Available Bu
57. s Ethernet address Setup Change Setup Parameters gt For example 0000a70040ac Configuration Initial Configuration File section Try Unit Ethernet Address as Filename Terminal Configuration Methods 6 23 Using Optional Names for Configuration Files Table 6 5 Configuration Filenames and Download Sequence Continued Download a neag rder File Description Parameter Name by Default 4 File named using the config unit ip address file Yes terminal s IP address either Setup Change Setup Parameters gt in hexadecimal notation or Configuration Initial Configuration File in decimal dot notation section gt Try Unit IP Address as For example C02B994F or Filename 192 40 150 4 config use decimal ip address notation No as filename 3 Setup gt Change Setup Parameters gt Configuration Initial Configuration File section Use Decimal IP Address as Filename 5 File named using the config unit ncdnet address file Yes terminal s DECnet address Setup Change Setup Parameters gt For example 01_0079 dat Configuration Initial Configuration File for the DECnet area number section gt Try Unit NCDnet Address as and node 1 79 4 Filename 6 The generic filename config generic file Yes ncd_std Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Configuration Initial Configuration File section Try Generic Filename should keep the filename as short as possible See
58. statistics 10 3 to 10 5 subnet mask discovery 3 14 icmp address mask replies received 10 4 icmp address mask replies transmitted 10 5 icmp address mask requests received 10 4 icmp address mask requests transmitted 10 5 icmp destination unreachables received 10 3 icmp destination unreachables transmitted 10 5 icmp echo replies received 10 4 icmp echo replies transmitted 10 5 icmp echo requests received 10 4 icmp echo requests transmitted 10 5 icmp packets received 10 3 icmp packets received with errors 10 3 icmp packets transmitted 10 4 icmp packets unable to be transmitted 10 4 icmp parameter problems received 10 4 icmp parameter problems transmitted 10 5 icmp redirects received 10 4 icmp redirects transmitted 10 5 icmp source quenches received 10 4 icmp source quenches transmitted 10 5 icmp time exceededs received 10 4 icmp time exceededs transmitted 10 5 icmp timestamp replies received 10 4 icmp timestamp replies transmitted 10 5 icmp timestamp requests transmitted 10 5 icmp timestamps requests received 10 4 IEN 116 name service configuration parameters for 9 37 enabling 5 7 name server hosts specifying 5 8 selecting 5 8 Index 11 Index Ignore Case on TCP IP Name Cache Lookups Change Setup Parameters 9 37 Incomplete Entry Timeout minutes Change Setup Parameters 9 13 Initial Default Gateway 1 Change Setup Parameters 9 25 Initial Default Gateway 2 Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Initial File Server 1
59. string string Environment variable string not found Severity Warning Explanation An environment variable was specified in pref environment with no value User Action Make sure that all environment variables specified in the pref environment parameter have values browser is currently loading the URL will result in a new after the browser loads browser pan Severity Information Explanation You tried to open two different URL pages on the browser while it is still loading User Action None 18 74 X Server Messages LOADB Messages IGNURL The browser is currently loading and the requested URL is already being processed This URL request will be ignored Severity Information Explanation The browser was started again with the same URL that is being loaded before the first URL could be loaded It is assumed that only one of the windows is desired User Action If you want multiple copies of the same URL wait until the first is loaded before loading the others NOLOAD loadb called with nothing to load NOM Severity Error Explanation loadb requires a local client command name if called directly User Action Specify the local client to load EM Not enough memory for URL string This URL request will be ignored Severity Error Explanation In the process of trying to send a URL string to the running browser loadb could not allocate enough memory User Action Start closing local cli
60. tftp Use the TFTP protocol for file access nfs Use NFS for file access using the UDP protocol nfs tcp Use NFS for file access using the TCP protocol ncdnet Use DAP for file access Table 5 17 file initial protocol 2 Parameter Possible Values Result default tftp tftp Use the TFTP protocol for file access nfs Use NFS for file access using the UDP protocol nfs tcp Use NFS for file access using the TCP protocol ncdnet Use DAP for file access 5 14 Configuring Network Services Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Configuring the File Service Table After loading an X server the terminal uses its file service table defined in the file service table parameter for all file access Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service File Service Table This table maps the default file locations known to the X server to the actual locations of files on file server hosts The entries in each row of the file service table are described in Table 5 19 By default the terminal uses the boot host as the initial file server on which it searches for files such as configuration files during the booting process After booting the terminal also uses the boot host by default for all ongoing file requests If you have defined initial file servers as explained in Configuring the Initial File Servers on page 5 13 the initial file servers are automatically placed in the file
61. xfontsel The xfontsel 1 client displays the fonts known to the X server allows you to examine samples of a font and shows the XLFD name for a font The command s basic syntax is xfontsel pattern font_specification The font specification may include wildcard characters For example the following command displays a window in which you can select samples of various bold fonts xfontsel pattern bold Font Server Issues This section describes font server usage J Font server overview 1 Font server configuration issues Terminal configuration parameters for font server use I Utilities for displaying information about the font server and outline fonts The NCD font server is host based software that provides fonts to X servers The font server provides access to more fonts than the X server and decreases the time it takes the X server to display fonts The font server was designed at NCD for the X Consortium to simplify font management and to support use of scalable outline fonts The NCD font server adds functionality to the X Consortium s Sample Implementation and includes enhancements for X11R6 How the Font Server Accesses Fonts When an application requests a font the X server examines its font path to determine where it should look for the font When the font server is included in the X server s font path the X server sends the request to the font server If the font needs scaling the font server
62. 10 3 IP Statistics 10 6 Loadable Modules Statistics 10 8 NCDnet Statistics 10 9 NCDnet Name Service Statistics 10 10 Network Buffers Statistics 10 11 Network Interfaces Statistics 10 13 NFS Statistics 10 13 Parallel Daemon Statistics 10 16 Serial Statistics 10 17 Serial Daemons Statistics 10 17 SNMP Statistics 10 18 TCP Statistics 10 21 TCP IP Name Service Statistics 10 24 TFTP Statistics 10 25 Token Ring Statistics 10 26 UDP Statistics 10 26 Unit Statistics 10 27 Wireless LAN Statistics 10 28 Contents XRemote Statistics 10 30 Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Boot Monitor Versions 11 1 Boot Monitor Functions 11 2 Automatic Boot Monitor Functions 11 2 Self Tests and Commands for Testing 11 2 Keyboard Controller and Supported Keyboards 11 3 Address Discovery 11 3 X Server Downloading 11 4 Display Blanking 11 5 Interactive Boot Monitor Functions 11 5 Using Boot Monitor Commands 11 6 Starting the Boot Monitor Utility 11 6 Issuing Commands to the Boot Monitor 11 7 Updating the Boot Monitor on Explora Terminals 11 11 Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals 11 12 Starting Boot Monitor Setup 11 12 Navigating in Boot Monitor Setup 11 13 Setting the Keyboard Type 11 13 Setting Monitor Resolution and Dots Per Inch 11 13 The Monitor Resolution Window 11 14 The Dots Per Inch Window 11 14 Setting Network Parameters 11 14 Setting Booting Parameters 11 16 Finishing the Boot Monitor Setup Session 11 17 Pro
63. 101 Keyboard Details Esc Fi F2 F3 F4 F5 F7 39 6 8 16 15 23 31 47 55 8 94 7 A amp s ii Back Space 1 1 2 2 30 3 38 4 37 5 4 6 54 7 61 8 amp 2 19 0 ol l 78 8s P 102 Tab Q WwW E R T Y l O P 13 21 29 36 45 44 53 67 68 IIL s s 9 Ctrl A S D F G H J L Return 20 28 27 35 43 52 51 59 75 3 76 lt 82 90 Shift Z X C V B N M lt gt 18 26 34 33 42 50 49 ss gt s 73 74 Caps Alt Alt Option Lock 17 25 41 57 88 F6 F8 F9 71 F10 79 F11 F12 63 70 Line Break Setup Num 7 Feed Lock 87 95 98 118 119 126 132 7 8 9 Insert Home Page Up 108 117 125 103 110 iil P Delete End Page 4 5 6 Down 100 101 109 107 115 116 124 1 2 3 Enter i 105 114 12 2 99 U gt 97 96 106 112 113 121 Figure 17 2 N 101 Default Keyboard Legends and Keycodes 17 14 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 101 Keyboard Details Table 17 3 N 101US and N 101PS Default Keymapping Keycode Value Keysyms Shifted Keysyms 8 Escape 9 10 11 12 13 Tab 14 quoteleft asciitilde 15 F2 16 F1 17 Caps_Lock Control_L on the N 101PS and Windows 95 compatible 18 Shift_L 19 20 Control_L Caps_Lock
64. 11 5 NVRAM utility commands 11 20 sample sessions 11 21 starting 11 20 Setup Boot window 11 16 exiting 11 17 keyboard type setting 11 13 keymapper for 11 18 monitor dpi and resolution 11 13 navigating in 11 13 Network window 11 14 to 11 16 rebooting from 11 17 saving changes 11 17 starting 11 12 submenus 11 12 updating Explora 400 450 and 700 11 11 version displaying 16 8 versions 11 1 Boot Monitor Inverse Video Change Setup Parameters 9 14 boot automatically 9 13 11 7 boot custom file 9 14 boot default server when prom booting 9 14 boot desired source 4 8 9 3 9 14 booting absolute pathname requests 4 2 4 6 automatic boot disabling 4 4 boot hosts 4 16 booting sequence default 2 1 4 8 BOOTP DHCP 3 3 to 3 10 broadcast requests disabling 4 4 color database file loading 2 5 configuration files loading 6 21 to 6 27 configuration parameters for 9 3 9 13 to 9 15 configuring in Boot Monitor Setup 11 16 default actions 2 1 to 2 5 from PCMCIA manual boot 4 18 order of 4 8 manual from PCMCIA 4 18 overview 4 17 using MOP 11 7 using NFS 4 18 11 7 using TFTP 4 18 11 8 modules load policy 4 10 MOP requests default 4 3 disabling 4 5 manual boot 11 7 order of 4 8 NFS requests default 4 3 disabling 4 5 location of X servers 4 13 manual boot 4 18 order of 4 8 persistent enabling 4 7 Index 3 Index booting continued protocols backup choices 4 9 first choice 4 9 order of 4 2 4 8 to 4 10
65. 12 31 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Note also that the combination of black text on a white background is always reserved for the first color cell hence there are really only seven combinations of these colors that you can select If you attempt to use more than seven combinations at one time the resulting text is displayed using color cell zero black on white Hewlett Packard Color Pair Usage The eight available color cells can be assigned to any combination of foreground and background colors using NCDware specific functionality This functionality builds on the SGR method of text specification with the addition of the range of new selections listed in Table 12 8 Table 12 8 New Color Pair Selection Color Pair Selector Color Pair 90 color pair0 91 color pair1 92 color pair2 93 color pair3 94 color pair4 95 color pair5 96 color pair6 97 color pair7 For example CSI 91 m or ESC 91 m uses color pair1 for rendering text Specify the colors associated with the selections by using an extension of the OSC functions in the following format osc ps ND string NP 12 32 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences where ps ranges from 90 to 97 for the color pair selection ND is any non alphanumeric character and is discarded string is in the format foreground background NP is any non printing characte
66. 16 and in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems 1 Interactive configuration through TELNET After the server is running you can a use a TELNET connection via the NCD Terminal Emulator or the TELNET utility on a host computer to the Configuration daemon or the User Preferences daemon to read or change a terminal s current configuration parameters You can write parameters set through a TELNET connection to configuration files and to NVRAM Access to configuration data through a TELNET connection is controlled through passwords and host access control This method of configuring a terminal is described in the System Administrator s Guide I Interactive configuration through Change Setup Parameters and Change Quick Setup You can use these local clients accessible through the Console for configuring the terminal locally while the X server is running You can use also use these clients as the primary configuration tool and save settings to a configuration file and to NVRAM You can allow users to write their own settings to files and control which parameters if any they can set Also you can completely disable the clients or restrict access to them by enforcing passwords locally Terminal Configuration Methods 6 3 Configuration Methods Overview From one terminal s configuration client you can access another terminal s configuration data remotely Such access is controlled through passwords an
67. 18 Terminal Configuration Methods Creating Remote Configuration Files The file is saved into the default configuration file directory unless you specify a complete pathname The normal default directory is ust lib X11 ncd configs To change the default directory see Specifying a Different Configuration File Directory on page 6 26 Complete the following steps to create a file from Change Setup Parameters or Change Quick Setup 1 Invoke the local client and set parameters as needed 2 From the File menu select Save to File 3 In the dialog box displayed enter the filename For automatic downloading when the terminal is rebooted use the generic filename ncd_std or the hexadecimal equivalent of the terminal s IP address For information about converting the IP address see Using the Sample Configuration File on page 6 17 Click on ox in the dialog box to save the parameters to the specified file 5 Click on Cancel at the bottom of the Setup Parameters window to exit from the client 6 The configuration file is saved in the default configuration file directory usr lib X11 ncd configs 7 Check the file to make sure all parameter settings are complete and in the correct order Nesting Configuration Files Using the configuration language read command you can include files containing configuration parameters within another configuration file The included files may have any name you wish and you can r
68. 38 downloadable keyboard description files 18 58 DTR 18 40 EXECD 18 40 file service 18 87 FILED 18 44 floppy disk drive 18 38 FONT 18 48 font server 18 48 IPROUTE 18 55 JAVA 18 57 KBM 18 58 Keymap Editor 18 67 KEYMAPPER 18 67 launcher 18 133 LICENSE 18 67 LOADB 18 74 local client execution 18 40 Local File Manager 18 44 local file system 18 44 18 77 LOCALDEV 18 77 LOGIN 18 78 MIRRORD 18 81 module loader 18 103 Motif Window Manager 18 83 MPEGPLAY 18 82 MWM 18 83 NCD Display Manager 18 86 NCD Mosaic Browser 18 74 18 84 18 99 NCD Window Manager 18 133 NCDDM 18 86 nedwm 18 133 NETD 18 87 ETFILE 18 87 ETSRV 18 93 OPENGL 18 94 PCMCIA card 18 77 ZZ Z Index 15 Index messages continued explanations of continued PPP 18 96 PRINTAPIS 18 99 routing 18 55 RTLD 18 103 SERIALD 18 106 SIE 18 108 SLIP 18 96 SNMPD 18 108 TERM 18 109 Terminal Emulator 18 109 TOKENRING 18 122 touch screen 18 16 UI 18 125 VIDEO 18 82 VIDEODECODER 18 82 VIDEOPLAYER 18 82 WINCEN 18 127 WIRELESS 18 128 WM 18 133 XPRINTD 18 138 XREMOTE 18 136 XSERVER 18 139 XT 18 141 extended 18 6 format 18 2 to 18 3 logging 18 5 overview 18 1 to 18 2 time stamps 18 5 MIRRORD messages 18 81 modules X server see X server modules directory 9 4 9 29 modules loaded 10 8 modules load policy 9 29 monitor dots per inch setting 11 13 power management configuration parameters for 9 52 resolution setting 11 13 Index 16 MOP M
69. 39 47 55 63 71 79 10 ul R 80 y A amp Z x 14 1 gt 22 230 3 38 4 37 5 46 6 54 7 67 8 62 9 70 O 69 78 35 102 Tab Q W E R T Y l O P Return 13 21 29 36 45 44 53 67 68 HL sal s A lis ip F lla H IJ lk lL II a 17 20 28 27 35 43 52 51 59 66 75 76 82 83 90 v B IIN M lt gt Shift gt Z X C Shift 18 lt 9 26 34 33 42 50 49 58 s 65 73 74 89 Compose Alt Alt eaea aracter Character H ae a id Help Do F17 F18 F19 F20 81 127 128 129 130 131 Find Insert Re PF1 PF2 PF3 PF4 Here move 110 103 100 8 118 95 87 Select Prev Next 7 8 9 i 101 ul 109 108 117 125 132 4 5 6 I 107 115 116 124 qt 1 2 3 Enter 99 105 114 122 4 y gt 0 i 97 96 106 112 113 121 Figure 17 4 N 108 Keyboard Legends and Keycodes Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 23 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 4 VT220 Compatible N 108 Default Keysyms for ULTRIX Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 8 KP_PF1 9 less greater 10 Escape 11 Backspace 12 Linefeed 13 Tab 14 quoteleft asciitilde 15 F2 16 F1 17 Control_L 18 Shift_L 19 20 Caps_Lock 21 Q 22 1 exclam 23 24
70. 48 auto save configuring 6 34 to 6 37 disabling 6 35 extent of data saved 6 37 protocols for 6 35 saving parameters to a file 6 35 to 6 36 saving parameters to NVRAM 6 35 backing store configuring 9 54 Backup File Server Address Change Quick Setup 9 4 Backup File Service Protocol Change Quick Setup 9 4 backward compatibility parameters for 9 45 bd command Boot Monitor 11 7 Be Compatible With Old DECwindows Images Change User Preferences 9 45 Be Compatible With Old DECwindows Keyboards Change User Preferences 9 45 Be Compatible With Old DECwindows Vendor String Change User Preferences 9 45 Begin Sending Keepalives after Change Setup Parameters 9 30 Bell Base Volume Change User Preferences 9 45 Bell Duration Change User Preferences 9 45 Bell Pitch Change User Preferences 9 45 bell configuration parameters for 9 45 Bitmap Background Color Change User Preferences 9 53 Bitmap File Change User Preferences 9 52 Index Bitmap Foreground Color Change User Preferences 9 53 bl command Boot Monitor 11 7 Black Pixel Change Setup Parameters 9 41 bn command Boot Monitor 11 7 Boot automatically at power up Change Setup Parameters 9 13 Boot From Change Quick Setup 9 3 boot host backup hosts 4 16 first host to try 4 16 Boot Host IP Address Change Quick Setup 9 3 Boot Monitor accessing 4 18 11 6 booting from 4 17 commands 11 7 to 11 10 displaying 11 2 functions of 11 2 to
71. 5 33 tcp established connections 10 22 tcp failed connect attempts 10 22 tcpip arp cache 5 5 9 13 tcpip arp complete entry timeout 5 6 9 13 tcpip arp incomplete entry timeout 5 6 9 13 tcpip dns default domain 5 9 9 37 tcpip dns domain search 9 37 tcpip name bad name errors 10 24 tcpip name cache hits 10 24 tcpip name cache max lifetime 5 10 9 37 tcpip name cache max size 5 11 9 37 tcpip name cache overflows 10 24 tcpip name local cache 9 37 tcpip name memory allocation failures 10 25 Index 28 tcpip name no server responses 10 24 tcpip name numerical addresses 10 24 tcpip name requests 10 24 tcpip name server hits 10 24 tcpip name server protocol 5 8 9 5 9 37 tcpip name server response errors 10 24 tcpip name server retransmission timeout 5 11 9 37 tcpip name servers 5 8 9 5 9 37 tcpip name server transaction timeout 5 12 9 37 tcpip name system errors 10 24 tcpip no such name errors 10 24 tcp keepalive idle time 9 36 tcp keepalive interval 9 36 tcp keepalive packets transmitted 10 23 tcp maximum number of connections 10 21 tcp maximum retransmission time 10 21 tcp max keepalive idle time 9 36 tcp max retransmissions 5 33 9 36 tcp minimum retransmission time 10 21 tcp packets received 10 22 tcp packets retransmitted 10 23 tcp packets transmitted 10 22 tcp packets with errors received 10 23 tcp passive connects attempts 10 21 tcp receive buffer size 5 31 9 36 tcp reset packets transmitted 10 23 tcp retransmission
72. 68 udp Remove any comment symbols at the beginning of these entries 1 If you make any changes in the etc inetd conf or etc services file restart the inetd daemon To restart the daemon find the inetd process ID and send a hangup signal as shown in the following example This causes the daemon to read the configuration file and use the new information For example ps axc grep inetd 17601 I 0 12 inetd kill HUP 17601 3 4 Booting Address Discovery Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery On some systems the command for finding the process ID is ps ef grep inetd Adding Options for NCD Terminals to the bootptab File If you do not use ncdinstall to add terminals to the network you must add BOOTP options for each terminal to the etc bootptab database file on the boot host bootptab Format and Options For BOOTP configuration on your boot host see your vendor documentation The normal rules for etc bootptab file entries are C1 A colon indicates the end of a field and a backslash indicates that the entry is continued on the next line 1 Spaces are not permitted between the characters on a line 1 Fields consist of a tag followed by an equals sign and a value Each tag identifies a unique parameter L The Ethernet address has no internal punctuation such as periods or dashes The typical file structure is one or more template entries containing information common to all terminals or
73. Aliases 7 16 Displaying and Logging Font Diagnostic Messages 7 17 Contents Getting Font Information 7 17 Viewing the Font Path xset 7 18 Listing the Available Fonts xlsfonts 7 18 Displaying the Characters in a Font xfd 7 18 Displaying Samples of a Font and XLFD Names xfontsel 7 19 Font Server Issues 7 19 How the Font Server Accesses Fonts 7 19 Usable Font Formats with a Font Server 7 20 Font Server Configuration Issues 7 21 Network Considerations 7 21 Host Considerations 7 21 Default Font Specifications 7 23 Error Logging 7 23 Example NCD Font Server Configuration File 7 23 Configuring Font Server Timeouts 7 25 Getting Information about the Font Server 7 26 Getting Information about Fonts from the Font Server 7 27 Displaying Font Server Fonts 7 27 XDM Default Actions 8 2 XDM Overview 8 3 Components of XDM 8 4 XDMCP Queries and Host Responses 8 4 XDM and the DISPLAY Variable 8 5 The NCD Login Chooser 8 5 The NCD Display Manager 8 5 Contents Configuring XDM Hosts 8 5 Installing the XDM Binary File 8 6 Installing XDM Configuration Files 8 6 Configuring the System Wide XDM Session Management File 8 7 The Default Xsession File 8 8 Example Xsession File for the Local NCD Window Manager 8 9 Sample Xsession File for OpenWindows 8 10 Individual XDM Session Management Files 8 11 Configuring the XDM Xaccess File 8 11 Contents of an Xaccess File Entry 8 11 Types of Xaccess File Entries 8 12 Dire
74. Alternatives Default Booting Action If the Boot Monitor does not find an X server it displays its prompt and waits for the user to type a manual boot command Alternate Action s Set the Boot Monitor to continue attempting to download an X server until the booting process is manually interrupted When the booting process is interrupted the terminal displays the Boot Monitor prompt References Chapter 4 Booting X Server Loading continues to boot without one The Boot Monitor executes None None the X server and the X server takes control of the terminal displaying the name of the X server file and the IP address and hostname of the terminal The X server loads a Set the X server to download the Chapter 5 Configuring configuration file from the configuration file from a host other Network Services boot host s default than the boot host by specifying an configuration directory initial file server host and a usr lib X11 ned configs secondary file server host The X server searches for Specifying an initial file server host two default configuration also allows terminals booted from a filenames a terminal local PCMCIA card to download specific file named with the configuration files from a host hexadecimal equivalent of 7 F 3 f the terminal s IP address Use a configuration file with a non Chapter 6 Terminal and a generic file named standard or custom filename Co
75. Change User Preferences 9 50 dm command Boot Monitor 11 8 DNS Domain Name System configuration parameters for 9 37 domain suffix default 5 9 enabling 5 7 name server hosts specifying 5 8 name space widening searches of 9 37 reverse name request 3 15 5 12 selecting 5 8 DNS Default Domain Change Setup Parameters 9 37 DNS Domain Search Change Setup Parameters 9 37 documentation conventions 1 5 how to comment on 1 6 intended audience 1 1 license server 1 4 NCDware manuals 1 4 WinCenter 1 5 Domain Channel Change Setup Parameters 9 33 DOS messages 18 38 DPS Display PostScript cache freeing 13 12 CIE dict19c dat file 13 7 configuration parameter for 9 21 file access protocols 13 3 fonts adding 13 11 client access configuring 13 11 directories 13 9 included in NCDware distribution 13 8 InitProc dat file 13 7 licensing 13 2 PSres upr file 13 3 to 13 6 resource path 13 10 Solaris systems running applications on 13 13 support files 13 3 to 13 7 13 10 terminals supported 13 1 troubleshooting 13 12 VM_3_2 SNF file 13 7 dps resource path 9 21 13 10 dr command Boot Monitor 11 8 ds command Boot Monitor 11 8 DTR messages 18 40 Index 7 Index E EHLLAPIA Default tcp Port Change Setup Parameters 9 42 Enable 24 bit RGBA Change User Preferences 9 49 Enable 3270 Terminal Emulation Change Setup Parameters 9 42 Enable 8 bit Color Index Change User Preferences 9 49 Enable 8 bit RGBA Chan
76. Chapter 11 for more information information on DNS see Chapter 5 This filename consumes space in the optional string area of NVRAM As this space is limited you Using these filenames requires reverse name service which is available only if you are using DNS For This parameter modifies the filename To use the domain name set both this parameter and config unit name file to true To use the decimal dot address set both this parameter and config unit ip address file to true 4 To use this filename the terminal must be configured with an NCDnet DECnet address If this file name is enabled the terminal tries this name before trying the terminal IP address filename 6 24 Terminal Configuration Methods Disabling Specific Configuration File Download Attempts To use optional configuration filenames 1 To create the file use the methods described in Using the Sample Config uration File on page 6 17 or Creating a File from the Setup Clients on page 6 18 Make sure the file has the correct name as listed in Table 6 5 Set the relevant parameter to true so the file will be downloaded the next time the terminal boots Suggested Uses for Configuration Filenames Following are some suggested uses for the default and optional filenames m m Use a custom filename if the other choices are not appropriate in your environment Use a file named for the IP address if you do not swap t
77. Control for Terminal Configuration Data 6 5 Parameter Types and Groups 6 5 Read write Read only and Write only Parameters 6 5 Parameter Groups 6 6 The Configuration Language 6 8 Configuration Language Summary 6 8 Assigning Values to Configuration Parameters 6 11 Simple Assignment Statements 6 11 Tables and Rows 6 11 Types of Values 6 12 Syntax Rules 6 13 Comments 6 14 Assigning Parameters More than Once 6 14 Listing Commands in Order 6 14 Saving Parameters in NVRAM 6 15 Creating Remote Configuration Files 6 16 Using the Sample Configuration File 6 17 Configuration File Size 6 18 Creating a File from the Setup Clients 6 18 Nesting Configuration Files 6 19 Including the User s Settings in Remote Configuration Files 6 20 Specifying Hosts for Loading Configuration Files 6 21 Enabling Persistent Loading of the Configuration File 6 22 Using Optional Names for Configuration Files 6 23 Suggested Uses for Configuration Filenames 6 25 Disabling Specific Configuration File Download Attempts 6 25 Specifying a Different Configuration File Directory 6 26 vii Contents viii Disabling All Remote Configuration File Downloads 6 27 Specifying the File for Loading Configuration Defaults 6 27 Changing the Ports for Accessing Configuration Daemons 6 28 Changing Ports for Access to All Configuration Data 6 28 Changing Ports for Access to User Preferences Data Only 6 29 Setting Up Host Based Access Control for Configuration
78. Digital Equipment Corp SNF SCO SNF Santa Cruz Operation SNF Sun SNF not OpenWindows FB fonts Bitstream Speedo outline and IBM Type 1 Adobe outline formats describe fonts as mathematical algorithms rather than as individual pixels Consequently they can be resized by applying the same algorithm on a different scale The resulting font display is smooth regardless of point size or resolution Outline fonts are in the usr lib X11 ncd fonts Speedo and usr lib X11 ncd fonts Typel directories Although the ability to use various SNF formats is part of the NCD font server using SNF font formats from HP IBM SCO and DEC is not part of the X Consortium s Sample Implementation The font server can read either compressed or uncompressed font files Font Server Configuration Issues The basic procedures for configuring and starting the font server are described in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide This section provides more information about some of the font server configuration parameters and includes a sample font server configuration file Network Considerations By distributing NCD font servers on different hosts on the network system administrators can ensure reliable access to fonts and decrease dependence on any single host In the font server configuration file the alternate servers parameter specifies alternate font servers to be tried if the connection to the current font server is lost Host Conside
79. Equivalent IP Addresses Change Setup Parameters 9 26 etc bootptab file 3 5 to 3 10 etc bootptab cfg file 3 3 etc ethers file 3 11 etc services file 3 4 Ethernet address displaying 3 11 on terminal base 3 11 restoring 11 21 to 11 22 interfaces configuration parameters for 9 32 statistics 10 13 ex command Boot Monitor 11 8 exec access control enabled 9 12 exec access control list 9 12 exec command menu 9 18 EXECD messages 18 40 exec disabled commands 6 34 9 18 exec startup commands 9 6 9 18 exec user access control 9 12 Execution Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 12 Index Export Directory List Change Setup Parameters 9 23 Extended Diagnostics Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Extended File Diagnostics Change Quick Setup 9 4 Extended Routing Diagnostics Change Setup Parameters 9 26 F Failed Server Ignore Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Fast MPEG decoder Change Setup Parameters 9 39 Fast Perspective Rendering Change User Preferences 9 49 File Manager Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 12 File Server Address Change Quick Setup 9 3 file service configuration parameters for 9 3 9 22 diagnostic messages 18 87 diagnostic messages extended 5 24 file server hosts 5 13 to 5 20 boot host 5 13 in file service table 5 15 initial file servers 5 13 file service table 5 15 to 5 20 locations of files default 5 15 matching filenames to file service table entries 5 18 t
80. Error Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support adapter initialization failed message Severity Fatal Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support adapter open interface active Severity Information Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board is working successfully User Action None X Server Messages 18 123 TOKENRING Messages OPENFAIL adapter open failed messagel message2 PCMCIAFAIL Severity Fatal Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has encountered an error while attempting to connect to the Token Ring network This error is described in message If the error is irrecoverable additional information is provided in message2 This message may appear if the Token Ring controller detects a cable fault or if the terminal is attempting to connect at the wrong ring speed User Action Verify that the terminal is securely attached to the Token Ring network and that the terminal is set to the correct speed for communications across a Token Ring physical network PCMCIA initialization failed Severity Fatal Explanation The PCMCIA card interface failed The X server has detected an internal error User Act
81. Explanation The TERM module s current connection is in binary mode User Action None UNKWNFONT Unknown font font UNRECESC Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module does not recognize the specified font User Action Make sure the font is entered correctly and that it is recognized by the X server Escape sequence unrecognized escape_sequence Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module has received the specified unknown escape sequence from an application User Action Verify that the application issues only recognized escape sequences WINDOW Can t create the interface window XLAT ESTR Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has insufficient memory to perform the desired action User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory Close any unused local clients to free local memory Error with Translation Management Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has encountered an error in an X resource translation string User Action Make sure that the terminal s TERM X resource translations use the correct names format and syntax X Server Messages 18 121 TOKENRING Messages XLATETAB Terminal lookup table corrupt internal error Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support TOKENRING Messages TO
82. F17 129 F18 130 F19 131 F20 132 KP_Subtract 1 If the pref compatibility decwindows keyboard parameter is set to true this right modifier is translated to a left modifier 2 This keysym exists only for the N 108 keyboard Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 35 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Figure 17 5 illustrates the N 107 keyboard legends and keycodes Table 17 6 lists the N 107 keysyms when the default mapping is in use An N 107 keyboard has four LEDs built into keycaps Their default values are LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 Net on HMx series X1 on all Explora series Num Lock Caps Lock x4 To access the Boot Monitor from the N 107 keyboard after booting use the Stop A L1 A key combination The Setup key combination for the N 107 keyboard is Alt Graph Help Setup 17 36 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 Delete 135 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 71 79 86 oa 81 92 Esc A amp Back Space __ 14 1 22
83. IP Address Change Quick Setup 9 5 Browser Module Change Setup Parameters 9 16 Browser Printer Table Change Setup Parameters 9 17 bt command Boot Monitor 11 8 Buffer Size Change Setup Parameters 9 20 Button Arrangement Change User Preferences 9 51 Button Press Threshold Change User Preferences 9 51 Button Release Threshold Change User Preferences 9 51 C Cache Class File Change Setup Parameters 9 27 Cache Size Limit Change Setup Parameters 9 16 CALIBLIGHTPEN messages 18 15 Index Calibrate Light Pen Change Setup Parameters 9 25 Calibrate Touch Screen Change Setup Parameters 9 25 CALIBTOUCH messages 18 16 Change Quick Setup see Setup menus Console Change Screen Saver After Change User Preferences 9 53 Change Setup Parameters see Setup menus Console Change User Preferences see Setup menus Console Circuit Flush Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 27 Clear Messages command Console 18 4 clients font requests 7 4 7 6 old X clients error checks 9 45 X resources loading 8 7 see also local clients color color text in Terminal Emulator 12 30 colormap default 9 41 database file for 2 5 5 15 9 40 screen background 9 52 9 53 with WinCenter 9 40 Color Clipping Method Change User Preferences 9 50 Command Menu Change Setup Parameters 9 18 Complete Entry Timeout minutes Change Setup Parameters 9 13 Config Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 10 Config Fil
84. IP Name Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Name Cache Max Size Maximum number of entries in the tcpip name cache max size name cache Name Cache Max How long a name service entry is tcpip name cache max Lifetime seconds used before it is automatically deleted lifetime Ignore Case on TCP IP Name Cache Lookups Specifies that case is ignored when searching for a name in the local name cache tcpip name cache Local Name Cache The terminal s name service cache tcpip name local cache Name Server Protocol Name server protocol used when contacting name servers tcpip name server protocol Name Server Retransmission Timeout seconds How long a name service retransmission is attempted before a failure is declared tcpip name server retransmission timeout Name Server Transaction Timeout seconds How long a name service request is attempted before a failure is declared tcpip name server transaction timeout Name Servers List of name servers tcpip name servers DNS Default Domain Default domain for DNS name tcpip dns default domain service requests DNS Domain Search Successively wider searches of the tcpip dns domain search name space are made when attempting to resolve a name with DNS Using Configuration Menus 9 37 Using Change Setup Parameters Time Parameters The Time hide box contains parameters that aff
85. Loading configuration files Obtaining fonts O C O O Displaying a login prompt For each default action the alternatives if any are listed followed by references that provide information about customizing each action Summary of Booting Alternatives Table 2 1 lists the default booting actions of an NCD terminal and the alternatives to each action When you add a terminal to the network using ncdinstall the defaults are in effect Do not change the booting and network configuration of your terminal unless you understand the characteristics you are altering Incorrect settings may make it impossible for your terminal to boot and may also impair network activity Booting Defaults 2 1 Summary of Booting Alternatives Table 2 1 Chronological Summary of Default Booting Actions and Alternatives Default Booting Action A user powers on the terminal or reboots it and booting actions begin automatically Alternate Action s You can configure the terminal to display a Boot Monitor prompt instead of booting automatically when powered on References Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading The Boot Monitor performs You can disable some of the self Chapter 11 Boot Monitor physical Ethernet address using alternating DHCP BOOTP and RARP requests for its IP address If you use ncdinstall to add terminals it configures the BOOTP DCHP database on the boot host to include additional network info
86. MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 does not use encryption and can be used with X11R4 X11R5 or X11R6 XDM Both authorization methods are enabled automatically The XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 method requires additional configuration steps you put an encryption key for each terminal in a special file xdm keys and enter the same key on the terminal If a key is present in the file and entered on the terminal and you are using X11R5 or X11R6 XDM XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 is used as the authorization method Otherwise MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 is used For XDM access control to be effective you must make sure that X server access control is in effect and the list of hosts having access to the X server is empty X server access control is described in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems If XDM Cannot Write to a User s Home Directory If XDM is not permitted to write to the user s home directory on your network you must specify a different directory for storing the Xauthority file To do this set the userAuthDir resource in the xdm config file to specify the alternate directory For example DisplayManager ncdu85_O userAuthDir ul xdm dir This results in creation of an Xauthority file in the alternate directory with the environment variable XAUTHORITY pointing to the alternate directory 8 16 Login and X Session Management Configuring Terminals for XDM Configuring Terminals for XDM This section describes remote configuration pa
87. N 107 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 30 2 at 31 F4 32 Multi_key 33 C 34 X 35 D 36 E 37 4 dollar 38 3 numbersign 39 F5 40 F14 F14 Undo 41 Space 42 V 43 F 44 T 45 R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 Mode_switch 49 N 50 B 51 H 52 G Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 39 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 6 N 107 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 53 Y 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 57 Meta_R 58 M 59 J 60 U 61 7 ampersand 62 8 asterisk 63 F8 64 65 comma less 66 K 67 I 68 O 69 0 parenright 70 9 parenleft 71 F9 72 F16 F16 SunCopy 73 period greater 74 slash question 75 L 17 40 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 6 N 107 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 76 semicolon colon 77 P 78 minus underscore 79 F10 80 81 backslash bar 82 quoteleft quotedbl 83 84 bracketleft braceleft 85 equal plus 86 1 SunF36 87
88. Parameter Default Font Path Default directories in which the xserver default font path terminal looks for fonts Default Font The X server s default font xserver default font Font Cache Maximum Size bytes Amount of memory used for font caching xserver font cache max size Retain Font Path Across Sessions The X server retains the font path after the last client disconnects xserver retain font path Font Directory File Alternative filename for the xserver font directory file Name fonts dir file name Font Alias File Name Alternative filename for the xserver font alias file name fonts aliases file Using Configuration Menus 9 23 Using Change Setup Parameters Fonts Field Description Corresponding Parameter Font Name Table Symbolic mappings between user specified names and font path names xserver font path alias table Font Server section Reconnect attempts before failure Number of times to retry a font server request before declaring an error xserver fontserver retry attempts Read Timeout seconds How long to try reading information from a font server before declaring an error xserver fontserver read timeout Open Timeout seconds How long to try connecting to a font server before declaring an error xserver fontserver open timeout Reopen Timeout seconds Timeout before failing to reopen the font serve
89. Parameter Name config console display password Description Password for displaying the Console config custom file Custom configuration filename config pref read only password Password for read only access to user preference information config pref read write password Password for read write access to user preference information config read only password Password for read only access to all configuration data config read write password Password for read write access to all configuration data config unix directory Custom configuration file directory for UNIX config vms directory Custom configuration file directory for VMS file manager password Password for access to the Local File Manager login xdm authentication key Key for authenticating clients trying to connect to the terminal snmp read only community snmp read only community alt Community names for read only access to configuration data through SNMP snmp read write community snmp read write community alt Community names for read write access to configuration data through SNMP unit global password Global password for read write access to configuration data and the Local File Manager Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 37 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Remote Configuration Parameters Saved in NVRAM Table 11 10 is an alphabetical listing all of the remote configurati
90. Parameters on page 9 7 OM Using Change User Preferences on page 9 43 Using Change Quick Setup Change Quick Setup allows you to change the parameters that affect basic terminal operations a subset of the parameters in Change Setup Parameters and Change User Preferences By default you access Change Quick Setup through the Console after the NCD terminal has been booted Setup Change Quick Setup For other ways to display and start local clients and information about disabling local clients see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Components of the Change Quick Setup Window Change Quick Setup contains a series of hide boxes providing access to fields that correspond to remote configuration parameters Change Quick Setup has a menu bar with a File menu and a Sections menu a messages area and several buttons 1 The File menu provides commands for writing values to and reading values from files and NVRAM Save to File Specifies the name of a file to which all current param eter settings should be written A popup dialog box presents the default filename or the last filename entered during this session Save to NVRAM Saves settings to NVRAM as appropriate Using Configuration Menus 9 1 Using Change Quick Setup Read from File Specifies a file from which parameter settings can be loaded into Change Quick Setup A popup dialog box presents the default filename or the last fi
91. Preferences daemon through a TELNET connection 2 The protect commands are irreversible You can remove protection only by rebooting the terminal Table 6 3 Configuration Commands for Interactive Use Only Command and Description get parameter get all groupname changes group read write read only Displays parameters and their current values get parameter displays the specified parameter s get all groupname changes group read write read only J all displays all the parameters M groupname displays all the parameters in the specified group d changes displays only the current changes Ll group displays all of the remote configuration group names L read write displays only the read write parameters J read only displays only the read only parameters The show command is equivalent to get pending Displays all changes that have not been applied cancel Cancels all pending changes help Displays a quick summary of the configuration language quit Disconnects from the Configuration or User Preferences daemon 6 10 Terminal Configuration Methods The Configuration Language Assigning Values to Configuration Parameters Values can be set through simple assignment statements or in tables Parameter names permitted values and table entry names for all read write parameters are given in the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference Simple Assignment Statements
92. Prints selected text in the display window Send Break Sends a break character Exit Exits from the session This item can be disabled using the disableExits resource For more information see the ncdterm 1 man page Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 7 Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus The Options Menu The Options menu offers a variety of terminal mode settings The selections are all toggles Options that are set are indicated by filled in toggle buttons The initial states of the Options menu selections are controlled by resources Table 12 3 summarizes the Options menu modes and names the associated resources Table 12 3 Options Menu and Associated Resources Menu Item Resource Name Action Menu Bar menuBar Enables the menu bar Jump Scroll jumpScroll Enables the terminal emulator to add lines to the screen quickly Reverse Video reverse Video Reverses the foreground and background For example if your terminal is displaying dark characters on a light background reverse video displays light characters on a dark background Visual Bell visualBell Specifies flashing instead of an audible bell Auto Wraparound autoWrap Specifies that the character typed after the cursor reaches the right border of the page automatically appears on the next line By default autowrap is enabled If autowrap is turned off a character typed aft
93. SNMP variable name 16 2 Using SNMP for Terminal Management SNMP Host Requirements and path for example the SNMP variable name and path for the boot desired source parameter are ncdBootDesiredSource and ncdBoot 5 The SNMP variable name and path for each parameter are listed in the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference SNMP Host Requirements Hosts that access the terminal s SNMP information or need to access the terminal for reset purposes must have both SNMP management software and the NCD MIB installed The MIB is installed during the NCDware installation process If you are not using the default MIB file etc mib txt you should set the MIBFILE environment variable to the pathname of the MIB file or specify the pathname of the MIB in the command line for SNMP utilities Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP By default any host on the network can read and write an NCD terminal s SNMP variables You can restrict this access using the procedures in this section This section also provides a procedure for configuring terminals to send notification of traps to specified hosts Traps are responses to significant events and are generated by the terminal SNMP passwords community names are saved into a limited area in the terminal s NVRAM To save space you can define a global password that provides read write access to SNMP variables as well as access to other terminal functions Setup Change Se
94. Specifying Surface Interior Style Shading and Lighting 14 11 Specifying the Color Clipping Method 14 12 Specifying the Input Device for PEX 14 13 Contents Troubleshooting PEX 14 14 If the PEX Client Does Not Run 14 14 If the PEX Client Looks Different 14 14 Ports Overview 15 1 Serial Ports 15 1 Parallel Port 15 2 Configuring Port Operating Characteristics 15 2 Identifying Serial Port Numbers 15 2 Specifying Physical Serial Port Attributes 15 2 Specifying Serial Port Software Characteristics 15 6 Configuring the Parallel Port 15 8 Configuring a Terminal for Use as a System Console 15 9 Controlling Access to Serial and Parallel Ports 15 10 hapter 16 Using SNMP for Terminal Management SNMP Overview 16 1 SNMP Components 16 1 How SNMP Works 16 2 MIB Contents 16 2 SNMP Host Requirements 16 3 Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP 16 3 Configuring Read Write Access 16 4 Configuring Read Only Access 16 5 Configuring Terminals to Allow Trap Monitoring 16 6 xix Contents XX Using SNMP to Read and Write Variables 16 7 Reading a Terminal s SNMP Variables 16 7 Using SNMP Management Software 16 7 Using the ncdquery Utility 16 7 Writing SNMP Variables Configuring Terminals 16 9 Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot 16 10 Configuring a Host for SNMP Remote Reset 16 10 Configuring a Terminal for SNMP Remote Reset 16 11 Resetting Session and Rebooting Terminals 16 11 Using the ncdreset Utility for Remote Reset
95. Specifying a Non Standard X Server Filename 4 7 Specifying a Non Standard X Server Directory 4 7 Keeping the Terminal from Entering the Boot Monitor at Boot Time 4 7 Configuring the Sequence of X Server Loading Methods 4 8 Configuring X Server Module Loading 4 10 Changing X Server Module Load Policy 4 10 Changing the X Server Module Location 4 11 Using TFTP for X Server Downloading 4 12 Making Sure TFTP is Enabled 4 12 Specifying a Custom X Server Directory 4 12 Using NFS for X Server Downloading 4 13 Making Sure NFS is Available 4 13 Specifying the Directory to Search for an X Server 4 13 Linking X Server Files 4 14 Contents Specifying Boot Hosts 4 16 Specifying the Initial Boot Host 4 16 Specifying Backup Boot Hosts 4 16 Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor 4 17 Manual Boot from a PCMCIA Card 4 18 Manual Boot Using TFTP or NFS 4 18 hapter 5 Configuring Network Service Which Network Services Are Used by NCD Terminals 5 1 Summary of Network Service Defaults and Alternatives 5 3 Configuring the ARP Cache Resolved Addresses 5 5 Using a Name Service 5 7 Making Sure a Name Service is Running on the Local Network 5 7 Making Sure the Terminal Uses the Name Service 5 7 Selecting the Name Service Protocol 5 8 Specifying Name Server Hosts 5 8 Specifying the Default Domain Suffix for DNS 5 9 Configuring the Name Translation Table Local Name Cache 5 10 Setting the Name Cache Entry Lifetime 5 10 Setting the Na
96. Summary HMx series and Explora series terminals have the following built in fonts 10x20 snf 6x10 snf 6x13 snf 8x13 snf 9x15 snf cursor snf helvB10 snf helvB12 snf term14 snf If the terminal is licensed for PEX the roman phont and roman_m phont built in fonts are also available Alternative Methods of Changing the Current Font Path The NCDware System Administrator s Guide for Unix Systems describes using the pref font path parameter in a remote configuration file or the Console Setup Change User Preferences Fonts Current Font Path to set the current font path This section describes two additional methods Changing the Current Font Path Using TELNET You can modify the current font path through TELNET terminal emulation or using TELNET from a host You can modify the font path of the terminal you are using or a remote terminal This method requires the User Preferences daemon read write password or the Configuration daemon read write password Complete the following steps to modify the current font path using TELNET 1 Start a TELNET session using one of the following methods Start the NCD Terminal Emulator Terminals New Telnet In the Host field of the Terminal Emulator window type the name or IP address of the terminal to be configured and the port 5997 is the User Preferences daemon port number and 5999 is the Configuration daemon port number ncdu10 5997 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7
97. Table 11 4 Boot Monitor Setup Boot Window Window Item Purpose and How to Set Value Directory 1 Boot Filet Backspace through the existing value then type the name of the X server file for example Xncdhmx Limited to 64 characters TFTP Boot Backspace through the existing value then type the name of the X server directory for TFTP booting for example t tpboot Limited to 64 characters NFS Boot Directory 1 Backspace through the existing value then type the name of the X server directory for NFS booting for example tftpboot or usr tftpboot Limited to 64 characters Config File 12 Backspace through the existing value then type the name of the remote configuration file for example ned_std The length is limited to 64 characters UNIX Config Directory Backspace through the existing value then type the name of the directory containing the configuration file for use with UNIX hosts for example usr 1ib X11 nced configs The length is limited to 64 characters 11 16 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals Table 11 4 Boot Monitor Setup Boot Window Continued Window Item NCDnet Config Directory Purpose and How to Set Value Backspace through the existing value then type the name of the directory containing the configuration file for use with VMS hosts on DECnet for example NCD_ROOT CONFIGS The length is limi
98. The X server is checking permissions for the file User Action Information PERMCHKSUCCESS permission check succeeded for file Severity Information Explanation The X server successfully checked permissions on the file User Action Information READSYMLINK read symbolic link link new path is path Severity Information Explanation The X server has identified the symbolic link and is using the newly specified path This message occurs only when using NFS file servers User Action None REMOVEATTEMPT attempting remove for file Severity Information Explanation The X server is attempting to remove a file User Action Information RMDIRSUCCESS remove succeeded for file Severity Information Explanation The X server removed a file User Action Information RENAMEATTEMPT attempting rename for file to file Severity Information Explanation The X server is attempting to rename a file User Action Information X Server Messages 18 91 NETFILE Messages RENAMESUCCESS rename succeeded for file to file Severity Information Explanation The X server renamed a file User Action None RMDIRATTEMPT attempting rmdir for file Severity Information Explanation The X server is attempting to remove a directory User Action None RMDIRSUCCESS rmdir succeeded for file Severity Information Explanation The X server removed a directory
99. These parameters are not saved in NVRAM To restrict access to a terminal s serial ports or prevent all access from outside the terminal complete the following steps 1 To establish access control for a terminal s ports set the serial access control enabled parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Serial and Parallel Daemon section gt Enable Serial and Parallel Access Control Table 15 4 serial access control enabled Parameter Possible Values Result default false false New requests for connection to the terminal s ports are not checked against the list of hosts defined in the serial access control list parameter true Requests to access the terminal s ports are honored only from hosts listed in the serial access control list parameter 15 10 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports Controlling Access to Serial and Parallel Ports 2 In the serial access control list parameter specify the hosts permitted to access the terminal s ports You must list all hosts that have access including other terminals A separate entry is required for each protocol family TCP IP DECnet and LAT For example a host that has both TCP IP and DECnet access must have two entries Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control Serial and Parallel Daemon section gt Serial and Parallel Access Control List Table 15 5 serial access control list Parameter Table Entries
100. Timeouts The tcpip name server retransmission timeout parameter determines how long the terminal waits before sending a retransmission if the name server does not respond Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service gt Name Server Retransmission Timeout Table 5 11 tcpip name server retransmission timeout Possible Values Result default 2 integer How long to wait in seconds before retransmitting a name service request Range 1 4294967295 Configuring Network Services 5 11 Using a Name Service The tcpip name server transaction timeout parameter determines how long the terminal waits for a response from the name server before failure is declared Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service gt Name Server Transaction Timeout The value of this parameter should be larger than the retransmission timeout Table 5 12 tcpip name server transaction timeout Possible Values Result default 10 integer How long in seconds to attempt a name service request before declaring a failure condition Range 1 4294967295 Discovering the Terminal s Hostname when Booting Reverse Name Request The unit query for name at boot parameter controls whether at boot time the terminal sends a reverse name request to the DNS name servers to find the terminal s host name Setup Change Setup Parameters Unit gt Query for Unit Name at Boot Table 5 13 unit query
101. Tool Bar Enables display of the tool bar browser show tool bar Default home page Home page loaded when the browser home page browser starts Network Proxy Settings section HTTP Proxy Host Host that runs an HTTP proxy browser http proxy host server HTTP Proxy Host Port TCP IP port on which the HTTP browser http proxy host port proxy server listens for connections 9 16 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Browser Fields Description Corresponding Parameter HTTP Proxy Overrides HTTP proxy domains that override browser http proxy overrides or avoid the proxy host FTP Proxy Host Host that runs an FTP proxy server browser ftp proxy host FTP Proxy Host Port TCP IP port on which the FTP browser ftp proxy host port proxy server listens for connections FTP Proxy Overrides FTP proxy domains that avoid or browser ftp proxy overrides override the proxy host Gopher Proxy Host Host that runs a gopher proxy browser gopher proxy host server Gopher Proxy Host Port TCP IP port on which the gopher browser gopher proxy host proxy server listens for connections port Gopher Proxy Gopher proxy domains that avoid browser gopher proxy Overrides or override the gopher proxy server overrides SOCKS Host Host that runs the SOCKS daemon browser socks host SOCKS Port TCP IP port on which the SOCKS browser socks port daemon listens for connections SMTP Email Server SMTP el
102. Turn on margin bell 45 Reverse wraparound mode 46 Start logging 47 Use alternate screen buffer CSI psi Digital private print control mode Permissible Esc psi values for ps are Print line with cursor Exit autoprint mode Enter autoprint mode Print main display Print main display Pre ORR e O Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 15 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued Esc psn i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI ps ps 1 Reset Digital private mode Esc ps ps 1 Permissible values for ps include 1 Cursor keys mode normal cursor keys DECCKM 3 Column mode 80 columns DECCOLM 4 Scrolling mode jump fast scroll DECSCLM 5 Screen mode normal video DECSCNM 6 Origin mode normal cursor DECOM 7 Autowrap mode wraparound DECAWM 8 Auto repeat mode disabled DECARM 9 Do not send MIT mouse row column on button press 10 Text cursor enable mode cursor invisible DECTCEM 40 Donot allow 80 to 132 mode 41 No curses 1 fix 42 National replacement character set mode DECNRCM disabled 44 Turn off margin bell 45 No reverse wraparound mode 46 Stop logging 47 Use normal screen buffer CSI ps n See CSI psn 12 16 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Functio
103. VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details The VT220 compatible keyboard and N 108 keyboard are Digital style keyboards that may be used with either VMS or ULTRIX keymaps The default keymap differs depending on whether the server host is running the VMS or ULTRIX operating system See Table 17 4 and Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible Keyboard Figure 17 3 illustrates the legends and keycodes on the US type of the VT220 compatible keyboard The VT220 compatible keyboard has four LEDs Their default values are LED1 Net on all HMX series X1 on all Explora series LED2 Caps LED3 x2 LED4 x4 The Setup key combination for the VT220 compatible keyboard is Compose F3 To access the Boot Monitor from a VT220 compatible keyboard after booting use the Ctrl Compose F3 key combination N 108 Keyboard Figure 17 4 illustrates the legends and keycodes of the N 108 keyboard The 108 key keyboards have four LEDs Their default values are LED1 Net on all HMX series X1 on all Explora series LED2 x2 LED3 Caps Lock LED4 x4 The Setup key combination for an N 108 keyboard is Alt F3 To access the Boot Monitor from an N 108 keyboard after booting use the Ctrl Left Alt F3 key combination Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 21 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details
104. Verify that the correct display name is specified DSTRCORR Object input buffer corrupted internal error EIGNORE Severity Error Explanation Internal TERM memory is corrupted User Action Start the NCD Terminal Emulator a second time If the situation persists please contact NCD Technical Support End of DCS ignore download mode Severity Error Explanation When the TERM module received a request for downloaded character sets it entered the DCS ignore download mode This message signifies the end of that mode User Action If possible use an alternate application that does not require downloaded character sets FONTFAML Font family is invalid internal error Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 111 TERM Messages FONTINFO Cannot find the information for font Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot find the desired or default font User Action Verify that the desired font is in the user s font path and that it is located in the correct directory has read access and is available via the network If the terminal is configured to obtain fonts from a font server verify that the font server is running and is accessible via the network INETCONN Can t initialize network connection INTFACE LIN Severity Error
105. Write Access on page 16 4 and Configuring Read Only Access on page 16 5 Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 7 Using SNMP to Read and Write Variables The command syntax is ncedquery V where V V c community d variable_options hostname v c community d variable_options hostname Displays version information for ncdquery Displays the hostname Is the community name If the community name is not one of the defaults manager for manager hosts and public for monitor hosts you must supply the community name Displays debugging information Specifies the variable s to display The default is to display the X server version The options and variables displayed by each are s X server version b Boot Monitor version k Keyboard controller version i Amount of memory installed h Memory fragments f Amount of free memory a All of the above Is the hostname of the terminal For example the following command displays the X server and Boot Monitor versions assuming the default community name and MIB file o nedquery s b ncdu60 server version NCD19c server 3 1 0 03 12 91 downloaded boot monitor version Boot PROM V2 2 4 16 8 Using SNMP for Terminal Management Using SNMP to Read and Write Variables For more information about the ncdquery command and its options see the man page Writing SNMP Variables Configuring Terminals You can modify an NCD
106. X server does not recognize the specified filename as being either a VMS or UNIX filename User Action Verify that all references to the specified file in configuration files are correct that is confirm that the filename is either a valid UNIX filename or a valid VMS filename wherever it appears in a terminal s configuration database BADSERVERTYPE protocol file server aa nnnn disagrees with configured file system type Severity Error Explanation The X server has been configured to expect one file system type such as a VMS file system or a UNIX file system when communicating with the specified file server but upon connection discovers that the other file system type is in use User Action Let the X server determine the correct file system type dynamically DAPERROR NCDnet DAP error octal octal octal Severity Error Explanation The X server has encountered an error identified by the specified octal values when attempting to communicate using the DAP protocol User Action Refer to the DAP specification for information on the specified error and suggestions for resolution DAPNOTENABLED unable to perform DAP operation NCDnet not enabled Severity Error Explanation The terminal was unable to perform a DAP operation because an NCDnet license has not been entered into the license key parameter User Action Enter a license key into the license key parameter 18 88 X Server Messa
107. a group of terminals followed by individual entries each containing information about a specific terminal Template entry template name tag value tag value Entry for an NCD terminal hostname tc template name tag value tag value Booting Address Discovery 3 5 Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery The tags recognized by NCD terminals and supported by the version of bootpd provided in the NCDware distribution are listed in Table 3 1 The table lists the normal two letter tag name or a tag number and a description of the information provided by the tag Although some versions of bootpd may provide additional information only information listed in the table is used by NCD terminals Table 3 1 BOOTP DHCP Tags Used by NCD Terminals Tag Name Information Returned by BOOTP or DHCP ip Terminal IP address ha Terminal Ethernet address hd X server directory bf X server filename sm Subnet mask gw Gateway address es ns IEN 116 name server host address es ds Domain name server host address es cs Vendor magic cookie selector hn Terminal host name you do not need to supply a value for this field it is taken automatically from the first field up to the first colon ts Names of hosts supplying the current time on UDP port 37 T15 Domain name suffix T144 Configuration file name to Time offset from Coordinated Universal Time t
108. addresses in NVRAM The next time the terminal boots the Boot Monitor uses the addresses stored in NVRAM For more information about saving configuration settings set through the Setup menus or remote configuration files to NVRAM see the System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Setting the Broadcast Address Whenever the terminal broadcasts to the network for example when discovering its IP address or broadcasting for an X server it uses its broadcast address The default broadcast address is 255 255 255 255 If this address is not the correct address for your network and the terminal broadcasts for the X server the server download succeeds but a warning message is displayed To prevent the warning message display the broadcast address must be set to reflect the subnet mask if any and the host portion of the address If subnetting is used on your network set the ip broadcast address parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters IP Broadcast Address It should have all 1s in the host field The parameter is saved in NVRAM 3 12 Booting Address Discovery Configuring Subnet Mask Discovery Table 3 2 ip broadcast address Parameter Possible Values Result default 255 255 255 255 or OxFFFFFFFF IP address The address used by the terminal when broadcasting to the network For example in a class B network with the network address 191 40 0 0 and a subnet mask of 0xFFFF0000 255 255 000 0
109. and processed snmp set requests received Get Responses Received Total number of Get Responses PDUs accepted and processed snmp get responses received Traps Received Total number of Trap PDUs accepted and processed snmp traps received Too Big Error Responses Transmitted Total number of PDUs generated with tooBig in the error status field snmp too big error responses transmitted Bad Variable Name Total number of PDUs generated snmp bad variable name error Error Responses with error status of responses transmitted Transmitted noSuchName Bad Variable Values Total number of PDUs generated snmp bad variable values error Error Responses with error status of badValue responses transmitted Transmitted Read Only Variable Error Responses Transmitted Total number of valid PDUs generated with error status of readonly snmp read only variable error responses transmitted General Error Responses Transmitted Total number of PDUs generated with error status of genErr snmp general error responses transmitted Get Requests Transmitted Total number of Get Request PDUs generated snmp get requests transmitted Get Next Requests Total number of Get Next snmp get next requests Transmitted PDUs generated transmitted Set Requests Total number of Set Requests snmp set requests transmitte
110. available for this line but different character modes such as blinking or bold are not supported To enter characters into the status line the programmer switches from the main display to the status line display then uses normal cursor control and text to add characters By default the status line is not visible on the screen To use the status line enable or disable it with the following sequence CSI ps where ps indicates which status line to use or none 0 No status line available 1 Indicator status line no op 2 Host writable status line Hence the value 2 makes the status line appear and 0 makes it disappear Note that content is not retained when the status line is hidden the line is emptied To select the status line use the following sequence CSI ps where ps represents the display area to which the terminal sends data 0 Send characters to the main display 1 Send characters to the status line Once the status line is selected all character input is directed there until the main display is selected Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 27 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Programming Function Keys on N 108LK Keyboards Fifteen of the twenty function keys on the N 108LK keyboards can be redefined by the user The definable function keys are L F6 through F14 LY Do and Help I F17 through F20 When redefined the shifted state of these keys takes on the defined va
111. client application is looking for the specified extension the extension is not provided by the current X server User Action Determine if another X server image available for the terminal will provide the desired extension 18 140 X Server Messages XT Messages NOWARNING unable to find warning box window Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot display the low on memory warning window User Action Reboot the terminal If the situation persists please contact NCD Technical Support resetting X server to defaults for new session Severity Information Explanation The X server is resetting its configuration information to its default values as requested User Action None XT Messages XT messages pertain to the X Toolkit libraries If you are looking for a message that refers to the XT module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ERROR message Severity Error Explanation The X Toolkit library has reported an error as described in the message User Action Refer to X Toolkit documentation for more information about the specified error If you require more assistance please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 141 XT Messages WARNING message Severity Warning Explanation The X Toolkit library has generated a warning as specified in the message User Action Refer to X Toolkit documentation for more
112. connect to a font server for 30 seconds before failing integer How long in seconds that the terminal tries to connect to a font server before failing Range 0 100 Table 7 13 xserver fontserver reopen timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 10 10 After a font server fails the terminal tries for 10 seconds to reopen it before timing out integer How long seconds the terminal attempts to reopen a font server after a failure before timing out Range 0 100 The xserver fontserver read timeout and xserver fontserver retry attempts parameters control how long the font server tries to obtain fonts Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Fonts Font Server section gt Read Timeout Reconnect attempts before failure Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 25 Font Server Issues Table 7 14 xserver fontserver read timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 20 20 The terminal waits 20 seconds to obtain a font from a font server before failing integer How long in seconds the terminal waits to obtain a font from a font server before failing Range 0 100 Table 7 15 xserver fontserver retry attempts Parameter Possible Values Result default 5 5 The terminal makes five attempts to obtain a font from a font server before giving up integer How many attempts the terminal makes to obtain a font from a font server before
113. connection 1 In the Console select Terminals New Terminal 2 To view current messages for the local terminal click on the line beginning with Diag in the Default Hosts window 3 To view current messages for a remote terminal enter its hostname or IP address and the number of the diagnostics port in the Service field The default port number is 5998 For example ncdul0 5998 4 Click on ox The current messages appear in a Terminal Emulator window To view more messages use the window scroll bar While you are connected to a remote terminal you can ask the user to perform the action causing the problem You can read the messages as they are issued 5 When you are finished close the TELNET connection and the Terminal Emulator window by selecting Exit from the File menu 18 4 X Server Messages Logging Messages to a File Logging Messages to a File You can log messages to a file using the NFS protocol 1 Specify the filename in the diag log file parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Diagnostics Log File There is no default filename or directory so you must specify the complete pathname 2 The log file must be accessible through the file access table described in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems and Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services Configuring Message Logging You can configure 1 Time stamps attached to the messages 1 Size of the buffer used for saving messages i
114. control structures net connection control structure buffers Connection Name Buffers Number of network buffers allocated for storing connection names net connection name buffers Connection Option Buffers Number of network buffers allocated for storing connection options net connection option buffers Protocol Control Structure Buffers Number of network buffers allocated for storing protocol control structures net protocol control structure buffers Interface Address Buffers Number of buffers allocated for storing network interface address information net interface address buffers ARP Table Entry Buffers Number of network buffers allocated for storing ARP table entries net arp table entry buffers 10 12 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Network Interfaces Statistics The parameters in this hide box report on network interface statistics Network Interfaces Field Description Corresponding Parameter Number of Interfaces Number of network interfaces net number of interfaces Interfaces Table Table of network interface characteristics net interfaces table NFS Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on file access using NFS NFS Field Description Client NFS section Corresponding Parameter Null Requests Number of NFS null operations requested by the NFS Cl
115. data structures Message includes additional information such as invalid structure User Action Reformat or replace the floppy disk 18 38 X Server Messages DOS Messages FATERR Unable to write FAT probable data loss Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot update the primary copy of the file allocation table FAT The floppy disk may be corrupted User Action Reformat or replace the floppy disk FATWARN Warning unable to write backup FAT FORMAT Severity Warning Explanation The floppy file system keeps two copies of the file allocation table FAT The X server is unable to update the second copy User Action The potentially bad floppy may need to be replaced Format failed var Severity Error Explanation The floppy disk cannot be reformatted because it is corrupted User Action Replace the floppy disk NOPARENT unable to find parent directory of dir_name Severity Error Explanation The file system state is inconsistent User Action Reformat or replace the floppy disk WRITEFAIL Disk write failed n sectors bad at sector_n Severity Error Explanation The X server failed to write data to disk and files may be corrupted User Action The floppy disk may be bad and need to be reformatted or replaced X Server Messages 18 39 DTR Messages DTR Messages DTR module messages pertain to the DTR network test utility If you are looking for a messag
116. directory usr lib X11 ncd configs First the X server searches for a terminal specific file The name of the file is the hexadecimal equivalent of the terminal s IP address For example the server running on a terminal with IP address 192 40 150 4 searches for a configuration file named C02B994F If the server does not find a terminal specific file it searches for a generic file named ncd_std The generic file can be downloaded by all terminals in the network m Continue to boot if a configuration file cannot be downloaded To create and install remote configuration files using the default behavior of the terminal see the rest of this section 6 16 Terminal Configuration Methods Creating Remote Configuration Files Using the Sample Configuration File ncdinstall normally creates the following standard configuration files when you add a terminal to the network M1 A terminal specific file named for the terminal s IP address converted to hexadecimal format For example a terminal with IP address 192 40 150 4 has a configuration file named C02B994F 1 A terminal specific file for the user s configuration data This file has the same name as the IP address file plus the suffix stp 1 The generic file ncd_std If this file already exists ncdinstall does not attempt to create a new one If you need to create files manually this section explains how to create files with the standard filenames and install fil
117. end of the connection Configuring Network Services 5 31 Setting TCP Performance Parameters Table 5 32 tcp receive buffer size Parameter Possible Values Result default 4096 integer Size of the receive buffer in bytes Range 1024 65535 The tep send buffer size parameter specifies the maximum amount of data awaiting transmission that a TCP connection buffers in the terminal Setup gt Change Setup Parameters TCP Send Buffer Size This corresponds to the maximum amount of the peer s TCP send window that is used by the terminal Table 5 33 tcp send buffer size Parameter Possible Values Result default 2048 integer Size of the send buffer in bytes Range 1024 65535 Specifying the TCP Timeout The tcp connect timeout parameter specifies the amount of time that must elapse between a TCP connection attempt and a lack of response before failure is declared Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP Connect Timeout Table 5 34 tcp connect timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 75 integer Elapsed time in seconds between TCP connection attempts before failure is declared Range 1 4294967295 5 32 Configuring Network Services Setting TCP Performance Parameters Specifying TCP Maximum Retransmissions The tcp max retransmissions parameter specifies the number of retransmissions on a TCP connection before failure
118. file defined in the config default file parameter By default the value in this parameter is the initial configuration file loaded at boot time Cancel Removes changes that have not been applied and quits Change Setup Parameters closes the window Contents of the Change Setup Parameters Hide Boxes The following sections describe the contents of the Change Setup Parameters hide boxes The tables describing the hide box contents include a description of each field and the name of the corresponding remote configuration parameter For the following information about parameters see the alphabetical configuration parameter descriptions in the Remote Configuration Quick Reference 9 8 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Permitted values SNMP variable names and paths When the parameter takes effect Whether the parameter is saved in NVRAM O O O O Access Control Parameters The parameters in the Access Control hide box control access to the terminal configuration database and other terminal functions Access Control Field Description Corresponding Parameter Unit Password section Unit Global Password Password for read write access to unit global password the Configuration Preferences SNMP and File Manager daemons X Server section XDM Authentication Key used for authorized client login xdm authentication key Key connection requests write only Default for Enabl
119. font requests The X server locates fonts by searching the directories in its font path or handing off requests to font servers in its font path The default font path directs the terminal to search the font directories supplied with the NCDware distribution After locating the requested font the X server displays the requested characters in client windows Terminals also have built in fonts to use with initial installation or to use with clients in case downloaded fonts are not available and terminals have a default font for clients that do not request fonts Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 1 Font Use Overview Font Access Sequence An NCD terminal accesses fonts in the following order 1 When the terminal is reset it loads the built in fonts and uses them for initial displays 2 When a client requests a font the X server checks terminal memory to see if the font is already in use by another client If the font is in use the X server uses the font in memory for the new font request If the font is not in use the X server checks its font cache to see if the font was in use and was closed A font is placed in the font cache after it is closed by the last client using it If the font is in the cache the X server retrieves it to satisfy the new font request If the font is not in use and not in the cache the X server checks each element font directory or font server in its font path 3 If the requested font is bei
120. font server font_server Severity Information Explanation The original font server connection has failed The X server is trying to connect to the alternate font server User Action Check to see why the original font server is no longer functioning IPROUTE Messages IPROUTE messages appear only if extended IP routing diagnostics are enabled by setting the ip extended routing diagnostics parameter to true If you are looking for a message that refers to the IPROUTE module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ADDING adding route to nnn nnn nnn nnn thru gateway nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The X server is adding the specified route to its IP routing table as requested User Action None X Server Messages 18 55 IPROUTE Messages HOLDDOWN no response from nnn nnn nnn nnn temporarily disabling default route thru gateway nnn nnn nnn nnn NORESPONS Severity Information Explanation The X server is no longer trying to route packets to the specified default gateway This may be because of network problems or because of problems on the gateway The X server uses the second default gateway defined by ip initial default gateway 2 when the initial default gateway ip initial default gateway 1 fails When the X server verifies via ping that the gateway machine nnn nnn nnn nnn is operating it again routes packets there User Acti
121. for accessing the Boot Monitor and key combinations for accessing the Console from keyboards lacking a Setup key The following topics are described in this chapter Specifying the Keyboard Type on page 17 2 N 97 Keyboard Details on page 17 4 N 101 Keyboard Details on page 17 13 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details on page 17 21 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details on page 17 36 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details on page 17 44 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files on page 17 54 DCCC C O O This chapter does not describe keysyms for the foreign language versions of NCD keyboards To see a keymap of a foreign language keyboard use the X Window System utility xmodmap 1 The NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems and the NCDware User s Guide describe concepts needed for understanding keyboard usage and keyboard attachment and configuration The System Administrator s Guide also shows how to use the X utilities such as xmodmap and xev for keyboard configuration Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 1 Specifying the Keyboard Type Specifying the Keyboard Type The Boot Monitor senses the general type group of the keyboard attached to the terminal It is only necessary to explicitly set the keyboard type if you are using a keyboard that is not the US version or the IBM PS 2 version for the N 101 group If the terminal
122. for name at boot Parameter Possible Values Result default none none The terminal does not attempt a reverse name query at boot tcpip The terminal tries a reverse query to the TCP IP name servers If no name servers are defined the terminal tries the TCP IP boot server if the boot server is defined The name service protocol must be DNS ncdnet The terminal tries a reverse query to the MOP boot server if the boot server is defined 5 12 Configuring Network Services Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files This section describes accessing files other than the X server file that are located on a network host For information on local file service accessing files on a PCMCIA card or local diskette see the System Administrator s Guide Configuring the Initial File Servers The initial file servers are used for loading configuration files fonts and the rgb txt file when the terminal boots and for accessing files while the terminal is running The initial file servers are automatically entered into the file service table described in Configuring the File Service Table on page 5 15 The file initial server 1 and file initial server 2 remote configuration parameters permit you to define the primary and secondary initial file servers Setup gt Change Setup Parameters File Service gt Initial File Server 1 Initial File Server 2 The file
123. for the character sets included in NCD Terminal Emulator The following conventions are used in the code tables 1 Columns and rows are numbered in the top row and right most or left most columns The character codes are sometimes referred to by columnnumber rownumber For example in the Digital Multinational Character set Table 12 21 the character 1 0 is the control character DLE d The binary representation of a character is obtained by finding the character code in the table then looking at the binary representations next to the character s column and row numbers 1 The octal decimal and hexadecimal representations of each character are listed to its right the octal representation is the top number decimal representation is the middle number and the hexadecimal representation is the bottom number For example IESC 107 71 45 12 52 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Octal Decimal Hexadecimal VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 21 Digital Multinational Character Set CO and GL Codes Column b8 BITS b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 0 STX 0 0 1 1 ETX fica 1 ooo J E mi J O wWwlNnNNnN JeRre w o o o o o o o Y O T 1 ENQ 0 ACK 4 4 ma 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 7 N C S B 0 0 1 HT N 0 LF VT 0 O FF CR pa an FEE EE CEERI CO
124. for the sophisticated input devices required by some PEX clients In NCDware Summagraphics compatible digitizing tablets and the Logitech 3D mouse are supported The PEX module provides both terminal configuration parameters and user preference parameters for PEX Setting PEX Configuration Parameters on page 14 3 describes the parameters in detail PEX Fonts The PEX module uses stroke fonts which are scalable fonts defined as coordinates of line segments The fonts required by PEX are built into the X server so no additional font paths or font definitions are required The PEX fonts available in NCDware are roman a proportionally spaced font and roman_m a monospaced font The same two fonts are supplied on NCDware distribution media as downloadable font files All fonts in the NCD PEX font format have filenames with the phont suffix The two font files available in NCDware are named Roman phont and Roman_M phont These fonts are normally installed in the usr lib X11 ncd fonts PEX directory during software installation 14 2 Configuring PEX PEX Requirements PEX Requirements Using PEX requires a valid license To add a PEX node license use the unit license key parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Licenses gt License Key If the terminal has more than one node license include one instance of this parameter for each license key The parameter is saved in NVRAM After adding the PEX license reboot
125. has detected a configuration error on the specified port as described in the message User Action Refer to the message for guidance in resolving the problem If you need additional assistance please contact NCD Technical Support Port n IPCP config failure message Severity Error Explanation The X server has encountered difficulties during communications negotiations due to either host or terminal IPCP Internet Protocol Control Protocol configuration errors User Action Verify that both the host and terminal are configured correctly for IPCP communications If you need additional assistance refer to your PPP product documentation or contact NCD Technical Support Port n LCP config failure message Severity Error Explanation The X server has encountered difficulties during communications negotiations due to either host or terminal LCP configuration errors User Action Verify that both the host and terminal are configured correctly for LCP Link Control Protocol communications If you need additional assistance refer to your PPP product documentation or contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 97 PPPD Messages LOOPBACK Port n the line appears to be looped back Severity Warning Explanation The specified port is configured incorrectly for negotiations between the host system and the terminal User Action Verify that both the host and terminal are configured correctly for PPP communi
126. has received a termination message from the remote host User Action None local nan nnn nnn nnn remote nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The X server has established communications on the specified port using the specified IP addresses for the terminal and the remote host User Action None PRINTAPIS Messages The PRINTAPIS library gives local clients such as the browser the ability to print via the parallel port or to a remote host running LPD If you are looking for a message that refers to the PRINTAPIS library but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 CFILECMDFAIL failed to init transfer of control file to remote queue Severity Fatal Explanation The LPD on the remote print server did not accept the Receive Control File command User Action Make sure that the network and the remote print server are operational If so try the print job again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support X Server Messages 18 99 PRINTAPIS Messages CFILEXFERFAIL failed to complete transfer of control file to remote queu CONNBLOCKED Severity Fatal Explanation The end of control information was not acknowledged User Action Make sure that the network and the remote print server are operational If so try the print job again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support connection is blocked Severi
127. height line DECSWL Esc 6 Double width single height line DECDWL Esc 8 Screen alignment pattern DECALN 12 24 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function Designate character sets SCS Esc ps Select character set GO Esc ps Select character set G1 Esc ps Select character set G2 Esc ps Select character set G3 Permitted values for ps ps Character set B ASCII 5 Digital supplementary lt Digital user supplementary 0 Digital graphics A United Kingdom 4 Dutch C FINNISH 5 FINNISH 2 R French Q French Canadian 9 French Canadian 2 K German Y Italian E Norwegian 6 Norwegian 2 Norwegian 3 6 Portuguese Z Spanish H Swedish 7 Swedish 2 Swiss Esc Select locking shift of G3 character set right LS3R Esc Select locking shift of G1 character set right LS1R Esc 7 Save cursor DECSC Esc 8 Restore cursor DECRC Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 25 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued Escape Sequence Action alae Esc D Index IND Esc E New line NEL Esc H Horizontal tab set HTS Esc M Reverse index RI Esc N Select single shift of G2 character set 52 Esc O Select single shift of G3 character set SS3 Esc Z Send device attributes termin
128. ignore case set the tcpip name cache ignore case parameter to true Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service gt Ignore Case on Name Cache Lookups To customize the local name cache you can change the following parameters however the defaults work well for most sites Setting the Name Cache Entry Lifetime The tcpip name cache max lifetime parameter controls the maximum amount of time that an entry in the cache is used before it is deleted automatically Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service gt Name Cache Max Lifetime 5 10 Configuring Network Services Using a Name Service Table 5 9 tcpip name cache max lifetime Parameter Possible Values Result default 1800 integer The maximum lifetime in seconds of the name cache Range 0 4294967295 Setting the Name Cache Size The tcpip name cache max size parameter sets the maximum number of entries allowed in the name cache Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service Name Cache Max Size When the maximum size is reached the oldest entry is discarded when a new entry is added You may want to restrict the size of the cache to save memory for other uses Table 5 10 tcpip name cache max size Parameter Possible Values Result default 32 integer The maximum number of entries in the name cache Range 0 4294967295 or until all free memory is consumed Setting Name Service
129. invoked by XDM or a remote shell command with no overriding arguments Wincenter Field Description Corresponding Parameters Use WinCenter Colors Action taken to control colormap flash when using WinCenter and NCDware wincenter colors Window Size Size of the WinCenter window Number of colors Number of WinCenter colors or TrueColor Audio Enabled Enables audio wincenter resources Wincenter resources of the RESOURCE_MANAGER root window property X and Graphics Parameters The parameters in the X and Graphics hide box affect X attributes X and Graphics Field Disabled X Extensions Description X extensions that should be made unavailable Corresponding Parameter xserver disabled extensions Retain X Settings Across Sessions The X server retains the settings of the resource database keyboard mouse and screen saver when the last client disconnects xserver retain x settings Arc Cache Maximum Amount of memory used for arc xserver arc cache max size used by local clients Size caching RGB File Filename of the color database xserver reb file Keysym File Filename of the keysym database xserver keysym file 9 40 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters X and Graphics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Default Visual The terminal s default visual If Wincenter Use WinCenter
130. is declared Setup gt Change Setup Parameters TCP Maximum Retransmissions Table 5 35 tcp max retransmissions Parameter Possible Values Result default 12 integer Retransmissions on a TCP connection before failure is declared Range 1 4294967295 Specifying the TCP Linger Time The tcp default linger time parameter specifies the default time interval during which TCP attempts reliable transmission of outstanding data on the connection s transmit queue after local software closes a connection Setup gt Change Setup Parameters TCP Default Linger Time This timer is optional and higher level software can configure it for each connection Table 5 36 tcp default linger time Parameter Possible Values Result default 120 integer Time in seconds that TCP continues to attempt transmission after the local software closes the connection Range 1 4294967295 Allowing Larger Segment Sizes When set to false the tcp default mss for non local parameter allows segment sizes larger than the default to be used when communicating with non local hosts that is hosts on the other side of a gateway The default segment size is 536 bytes Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP Use default maximum segment size for non local hosts Configuring Network Services 5 33 Setting TCP Performance Parameters Table 5 37 tcp default mss for non local Parameter Possib
131. m m Establishes a default X session for all users who log into the host where the file is installed Checks for xsession files in user home directories in case the user prefers an individual X session If xsession files are present the Xsession file executes them If xsession files are not present the Xsession file defines the user s session For information about xsession files see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Invokes xrdb 1 to load client resources into the X server where they are available for all clients If you do not use xrdb to load resources and you have not cross mounted user home directories then users must have separate resource files such as Xdefaults in their home directory on each host You must use xrdb to load resources for NCD local clients into the X server local clients do not read resource files Starts the initial clients including a window manager If you want to edit the default Xsession file J 2 Make sure the file permissions are correct The Xsession file must be world executable Edit the file if necessary following these general rules for Xsession files Clients that must take effect before starting subsequent clients are executed in the foreground For example clients such as xrdb xset and Login and X Session Management 8 7 Configuring XDM Hosts xmodmap run in the foreground because subsequent clients may need th
132. map the navigation keys 1 Enter the Boot Monitor and type the following command gt km The current keymap is displayed Current keymap Key Current Customized left default no right default no up default no down default no setup default no 11 18 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals escape default no backspace default no Change any items y n To start changing the keymap type y and follow the directions displayed Change any items y n y Press one of the following keys lt key gt Key to use for this item must not be A Z Return Do not change this item d Restore default for this item q Quit without any changes When you press a key its code appears in the New column In this example the user has remapped all items but one Key Current New Customized left default 0x6B yes right default 0x74 yes up default 0x75 yes down default no setup default 0x76 yes escape default 0x77 yes backspace default Ox7E yes Save new keymap in nvram y n To save the new keymap type y Save new keymap in nvram y n y gt Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 19 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals The NVRAM utility provides another method of configuring a subset of terminal parameters and provides access to some parameters that are not available through other
133. memory it will start reclaiming memory from the cache To change the size of the font cache specify the size in bytes in the xserver font cache max size parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Fonts gt Font Cache Maximum Size The new font cache size takes effect immediately after an apply command is entered Table 7 7 xserver font cache max size Parameter Possible Values Result default 100000 integer Up to the specified number of bytes are used for caching fonts Range 0 4294967295 7 14 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Renaming the Font Management Files Renaming the Font Management Files To change the name of the fonts dir file use the xserver font directory file name parameter to specify the new filename then rename or copy the fonts dir file to the desired name Setup Change Setup Parameters Fonts gt Font Directory File Name Table 7 8 xserver font directory file name Parameter Possible Values Result default fonts dir filename The X server uses the specified filename when attempting to locate the font directory management file To change the name of the fonts alias file use the xserver font alias file name parameter to specify the new filename then rename or copy the fonts alias file to the desired name Setup Change Setup Parameters Fonts gt Font Alias File Name Table 7 9 xserver font alias file name Parameter Possible
134. monitor Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 13 Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals When you select the Monitor menu item the two Monitor windows described below appear Use the right and left arrow keys to move from one window to the other The Monitor Resolution Window Selecting an unsupported screen refresh rate or resolution can damage the monitor Always refer to your monitor installation booklet and test to be sure the refresh rate or resolution selection is supported by the monitor Note that the test grid may appear even though a monitor is not rated to operate at the frequency selected The Monitor Resolution window lists the monitor resolutions in pixels of height and width and refresh rates in hertz that are supported by the video cable attached to your monitor To make sure that the resolution or refresh rate you select is supported on the terminal press Shift T If the resolution or refresh rate that you selected is supported a grid test pattern appears labelled with the selected resolution or refresh rate If the value is not supported the test grid might not appear The Dots Per Inch Window To change dpi backspace over the current setting and type the desired dpi Setting Network Parameters Use the Network window to set the basic networking parameters Table 11 3 lists the fields and how to change them 11 14 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminal
135. no assigned keysyms 128 no assigned keysyms 129 no assigned keysyms 130 no assigned keysyms 131 no assigned keysyms 132 F24 F24 KP_Subtract 133 134 135 F1 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 51 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym Keycodes 218 through 248 are used only for compose sequences that create European characters not available on North American keyboards 218 agrave Agrave 219 egrave Egrave 220 igrave Igrave 221 ograve Ograve 222 ugrave Ugrave 223 grave 224 acircumflex Acircumflex 225 ecircumflex Ecircumflex 226 icircumflex Icircumflex 227 ocircumflex Ocircumflex 228 ucircumflex Ucircumflex 229 asciicircum 230 adiaeresis Adiaeresis 231 ediaeresis Ediaeresis 232 idiaeresis Idiaeresis 233 odiaeresis Odiaeresis 234 udiaeresis Udiaeresis 235 ydiaeresis 236 diaeresis diaeresis 237 atilde Atilde 238 ntilde ntilde 17 52 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 239 otilde Otilde
136. of NFS get file system root nfs received get root requests operations received by the terminal Path Lookup Requests Number of NFS filename nfs received path lookup component lookup operations requests received by the terminal Read Symlink Requests Number of NFS read link nfs received read symlink operations received by the terminal requests Read Data Requests Number of NFS read operations nfs received read data received by the terminal requests Write Data Cache Number of NFS write data cache nfs received write data cache Requests operations received by the terminal requests Write Data Requests Number of NFS write data nfs received write data operations received by the terminal requests File Create Requests Number of NFS create file nfs received file create operations received by the terminal requests File Remove Requests Number of NFS remove file operations received by the terminal nfs received file remove requests File Rename Requests Number of file rename operations received by the terminal nfs received file rename requests Statistics Menus 10 15 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes NFS Field Description Corresponding Parameter Link Create Requests Number of NFS create link nfs received link create operations received by the terminal requests Symlink Create Number of NFS create symbolic nfs received symlink create Requests link operati
137. on the N 101PS and Windows 95 compatible 21 Q 22 1 exclam 23 F3 24 25 Alt_L Meta_L 26 Z Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 15 N 101 Keyboard Details Table 17 3 N 101US and N 101PS Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysyms Shifted Keysyms 27 S 28 A 29 W 30 2 at 31 F4 32 33 C 34 X 35 D 36 E 37 4 dollar 38 3 numbersign 39 F5 40 41 space 42 V 43 F 44 T 45 R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 49 N 17 16 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 101 Keyboard Details Table 17 3 N 101US and N 101PS Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysyms Shifted Keysyms 50 B 51 H 52 G 53 Y 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 57 Alt R1 Meta_R 1 58 M 59 J 60 U 61 7 ampersand 62 8 asterisk 63 F8 64 65 comma less 66 K 67 I 68 O 69 0 parenright 70 9 parenleft 71 F9 72 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 17 N 101 Keyboard Details Table 17 3 N 101US and N 101PS Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysyms Shifted Keysyms 73 period greater 74 slash question 75 L 76 semicolon colon 77 P 78 minus underscore 79 F10 80 81 82 quoteright quotedb
138. on using BOOTP refer to the following sources For Information About Refer to NCD s BOOTP The bootpd man page in the NCDware implementation distribution The native BOOTP already Your host s documentation installed on your host Booting Address Discovery 3 3 Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery BOOTP DHCP options Table 3 1 page 3 6 recognized by NCD terminals Dynamic IP address The bootpd 8 and bootptab cfg 5 man pages in allocation using BOOTP the NCDware distribution and the System Administrator s Guide For instructions on using DHCP refer to your host system s documentation Making Sure that BOOTP Is Enabled To verify that BOOTP is enabled on your boot host check the following I To find out if bootpd is running enter a ps 1 command For example ps axc grep bootp On some systems the command is ps ef grep bootp 1 Host operating systems based on the 4 3 BSD UNIX operating system such as SunOS require an entry in the etc inetd conf file for BOOTP Often these entries exist but are rendered ineffective by a comment symbol at the beginning of the entry If this is the case remove the For example for SunOS bootps dgram udp wait root usr etc bootpd bootpd 1 Make sure that TCP IP ports are reserved for the bootpd server and client processes in the etc services file The usual entries in etc services are bootps 67 udp bootpe
139. other information at boot time You can use BOOTP DHCP or RARP for address discovery or you can store addresses in NVRAM For information on address discovery services and storing information in NVRAM see Chapter 3 Booting Address Discovery 1 Subnet mask discovery service provides the terminal with the subnet mask if your network uses subnetting when it boots Most versions of BOOTP DHCP allow you to enter the subnet mask in the database file The alternatives to BOOTP DHCP are ICMP Internet Control Message Configuring Network Services 5 1 Which Network Services Are Used by NCD Terminals Protocol which is included in the TCP IP protocol family or storing the subnet mask in NVRAM For information on the subnet mask see Chapter 3 Booting Address Discovery _ X server download service NCD terminals use TFTP or NFS for downloading an X server file For information about downloading X servers from the network see Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading For basic information on starting and configuring TFTP and NFS see Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files on page 5 13 For information on loading an X server locally from a PCMCIA card see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems 1 File service NCD terminals use TFTP or NFS for accessing files on network hosts during normal operation and at boot time For information on configuring the file service see Configuring How a
140. packets received out of sequence Packet Round Trip Time Current approximation of the time in milliseconds elapsed from sending a packet until acknowledgment is received xremote packet round trip time Time out Length Current timeout period in milliseconds Packets not acknowledged in the timeout period are retransmitted xremote time out length Transmit Window Size Number of packets that may be transmitted before acknowledgment by the remote host is required xremote transmit window size 10 30 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes XRemote Field Description Corresponding Parameter Next Transmit Sequence Number The sequence number of the next packet to be transmitted xremote next transmit sequence number Oldest Unacknowledged Packet The sequence number of the oldest unacknowledged transmitted packet xremote oldest unacknowledged packet Receive Window Size Number of packets that may be received from the remote host without acknowledgment xremote receive window size Next Receive Sequence Number The expected sequence number of the next packet to be received xremote next receive sequence number Statistics Menus 10 31 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes 10 32 Statistics Menus 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM This chapter describes features of the terminal s Boot Monitor and NVRAM
141. parameter specifies the location of the DPS resource files Setup Change Setup Parameters Display PostScript DPS X Resource Path By default the files reside in usr lib X11 ncd dps Because the dps resource path parameter recognizes colons as significant characters adhere to the following conventions when assigning values to this parameter m Use one colon to separate directory specifications in which DPS resource files reside For example the assignment dps resource path usr coe ps usr lib X11 ncd dps indicates that the DPS module should look first in usr coe ps for a DPS resource file and then in usr lib X11 ncd dps 11 Use two colons to indicate that the DPS extension should look at the system default location for the DPS resource file For example the default entry dps resource path usr lib X11 ncd dps indicates that the DPS module should look first in usr lib X11 ncd dps for a DPS resource file and then in the system default location If you modify this parameter 1 Make sure the file service table equates the directories specified with this parameter with the mount points on the host system L Reboot the terminal so the new values can take effect The dps resource path parameter is not saved in NVRAM 13 10 Configuring Display PostScript Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients Table 13 4 dps resource path Parameter Possible Values Results default usr lib
142. pfa AvantGarde Demi fonts AGD pfa AvantGarde DemiOblique fonts AGDO pfa 0 FontPrebuilt This section identifies the locations of the available hand tuned bitmap fonts It lists each font name and the font location For example 13 4 Configuring Display PostScript Using DPS Support Files FontPrebuilt Courier BoldOblique prebuilts COBO bepf Courier Bold prebuilts COB bepf Courier prebuilts COM bepf Courier Oblique prebuilts Coo bepf Creating or Updating the PostScript Resource File The makepsres utility allows you to make a new PostScript resource file or update an existing file The following example shows how to use this utility to update the PSres upr file so that DPS servers can access more fonts 1 Change to the directory to which you will be adding fonts Note NCD recommends that you use a directory under usr lib X11 ncd Otherwise the DPS module may not be able to locate the PostScript resource file If you must place the fonts in another location make sure that each terminal can access the new fonts through its file service table Add the desired fonts to the directory While in the directory invoke makepsres gt usr lib X11 makepsres In response makepsres creates a new PostScript resource file in the current directory If the current directory contains an existing PostScript resource file makepsres merges the contents of the existing file with the information from the new fonts and
143. prevent interpretation of the newline This is not necessary for tables in which curly braces function as delimiters White space White space the separator between grammatical elements may be spaces tabs newline characters or carriage returns White space is not required before or after the equals sign in an assignment statement For example the following three assignments are functionally identical Terminal Configuration Methods 6 13 The Configuration Language boot automatically true boot automatically boot automatically true true As the last example shows an assignment statement may span several lines m Special characters You can use the C language convention of a backslash for escaping special characters Comments You can include a comment in a remote configuration file by typing a pound sign at the beginning of each line of comments For example to explain why a parameter was set to a specific value you might type Set to local to ensure that terminal boots from PCMCIA card instead of network host boot desired source local Comments can also be appended to a line For example boot desired source local Boot from PCMCIA Note Do not append comments to a line in statements that extend for more than one line Assigning Parameters More than Once A parameter can be assigned any number of times Each assignment is processed as it is read overri
144. produces a new PSres upr file Add the DPSVM section to the resulting PSres upr file if that section does not already exist If you invoke makepsres in a directory that does not contain an existing PSres upr file you must include information identifying the location of the VM file To do this add DPSVM to the beginning of the PSres upr file where it lists all sections of the file For example PS Resources 1 0 DPSVM FontAFM FontFamily FontOutline Configuring Display PostScript 13 5 Using DPS Support Files Add the DPSVM section to the file for example DPSVM local VM_3_2 beta2 snf master VM_3_2 beta2 snf When you finish modifying this file it should resemble the following example PS Resources 1 0DPSVM ColorRendering ContextInit FontAFM FontFamily FontOutline FontPrebuilt DPSVM local VM_3_2 beta2 snf master VM_3_2 beta2 snf ColorRendering SDefaultCIE CIE dict19c ColorCIE CIE dict19c dat If necessary modify the dps resource path parameter on all terminals using DPS so the DPS module can locate the resource files For information on setting this parameter see Configuring the DPS Resource Path on page 13 10 5 Reboot the affected terminals so they can read the new PSres upr file 13 6 Configuring Display PostScript Using DPS Support Files The Virtual Memory File The virtual memory file VM_3_2 SNF provides information about the VM Virtual Memory spac
145. properly adjusted display monitor Each value can range from 0 0 to 1 0 Table 14 13 pex monitor reference white u Parameter Possible Values default Result 0 1884 floating point number The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the reference white value of the properly adjusted display monitor Table 14 14 pex monitor reference white v Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 4463 floating point number The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the reference white value of the properly adjusted display monitor Table 14 15 pex monitor reference white y Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 0 floating point number The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the reference white value of the properly adjusted display monitor 14 8 Configuring PEX Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Setting the Parameters Listed in Change User Preferences PEX user preference parameters allow users to manipulate PEX rendering by setting attributes such as shading dithering and light sources When set through Change User Preferences Setup Change User Preferences these parameters offer dynamic control over the client All of the PEX preference parameters take effect immediately after they are applied Specifying the Nominal Line Width The pref pex nominal line width parameter controls the nominal width in pixels of lines and curves The nominal line width is a d
146. protocol software for running PEX applications is required on the terminal and on the host computer where the application is running The PEX acronym stands for PHIGS Extension to X PHIGS was the original API application programming interface for PEX Since the origin of PEX other APIs have been implemented and PEX is no longer based solely on PHIGS Configuring PEX 14 1 PEX Overview The PEX X Server Module The PEX X server module allows you to display PEX images along with standard X images on your NCD terminal The PEX module supports PEX protocol versions 5 0 and 5 1 The PEX module supports all of the subsets of PEX immediate mode the Renderer Subset structure mode the Structure Subset and workstation mode the PHIGS Workstation Subset These subsets provide a variety of 3D and 2D graphics capabilities Data can be rendered immediately as it is transmitted to the terminal immediate mode rendering or it can be stored as data in the terminal structure mode where it can be quickly updated and re rendered Workstation mode is similar to structure mode and provides additional control of scene updating The PEX module includes two other X extensions LY MBX the MultiBuffer Extension to X Provides an invisible drawing buffer for rendering one scene while another scene is displayed This enables clients to provide smooth animation with little effort LY XInput the Input Extension to X Provides support
147. read only password file file extended diagnostics file initial server 2 file initial protocol 1 file manager password file initial protocol 2 file name type for initial tftp servers file initial server 1 11 38 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 10 Remote Configuration Parameters Saved in NVRAM Continued Group Parameter Name ip ip address at next boot ip use address discovery ip broadcast address ip use proxy arp ip initial default gateway 1 ip use router discovery ip initial default gateway 2 ip use router solicit ip subnet mask login login xdm authentication key ncdnet ncdnet address at next boot ncdnet default router net net ethernet snap encapsulation net token ring speed serial serial interfaces table snmp snmp read only community snmp read only community alt snmp read write community snmp read write community alt tcpip tcpip name server protocol tcpip name servers unit unit global password unit license key unit query for name at boot xserver xserver keyboard type xserver touchscreen calibration limits Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 39 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals 11 40 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator This chapter describes the local NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm and ncdrunterm which provides VT320 terminal emulation The following topics are co
148. received directory create requests 10 16 nfs received directory remove requests 10 16 nfs received file create requests 10 15 nfs received file remove requests 10 15 nfs received file rename requests 10 15 nfs received get attributes requests 10 15 nfs received get file system stats requests 10 16 nfs received get root requests 10 15 nfs received link create requests 10 16 nfs received null requests 10 15 nfs received path lookup requests 10 15 nfs received read data requests 10 15 nfs received read symlink requests 10 15 nfs received set attributes requests 10 15 nfs received symlink create requests 10 16 nfs received write data cache requests 10 15 Index 19 Index nfs received write data requests 10 15 nfs set attributes requests 10 13 nfs symlink create requests 10 14 nfs write data cache requests 10 14 nfs write data requests 10 14 Nominal Edge Width Change User Preferences 9 50 Nominal Line Width Change User Preferences 9 50 Nominal Marker Size Change User Preferences 9 50 Number of colors Change Setup Parameters 9 40 v command Boot Monitor 11 8 11 20 NVRAM addresses storing in 3 11 11 14 configuration parameters saved in 11 38 contents of 11 24 to 11 39 optional string space 11 37 reading values from 9 7 saving data to 6 35 11 12 NVRAM utility commands 11 20 to 11 21 sample sessions 11 21 starting 11 20 O Offset from Greenwich Mean Time Change Setup Parameters 9 38 Open Timeout C
149. statistics on serial port software functions This hide box contains the Serial Daemons Statistics table which corresponds to the serial daemons statistics table parameter Table Entries Description Port Number The identifying number of the serial port Connections Accepted The number of connections to the Serial daemon Statistics Menus 10 17 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Table Entries Description Connections with Access Control Errors The number of connections closed by the Serial daemon because the remote address was not in the Serial daemon s access control list Connections with I O Errors The number of connections closed by the Serial daemon because of a local I O error including the user aborting the connection through a local mechanism Connections with Normal Completion The number of connections closed by the remote host which is the normal mode of ending a Serial daemon connection SNMP Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on SNMP For statistics that refer to the PDU Protocol Data Unit error status field see SNMP specifications for the relevant error code SNMP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Packets Received Total number of messages delivered to SNMP from the transport service snmp packets received Packets Transmitted Total number of messages passed from SNMP t
150. table with entries in the format name policy where name is the name of the module as listed in the modsmodel doc file policy is the load policy on demand at boot or disable For example the following table sets the local Motif Window Manager module to load at boot and disables the Change Setup Parameters menu touch screen module and PEX module modules load policy mwm at boot touchscreen disable PEX disable setup disable Setup Change Setup Parameters Loadable Modules Load Policy Changing the X Server Module Location If you install NCDware using ncdinstall X server modules are placed in the tftpboot ncd release modsmodel directory where release is the release version number such as Xncd 5 0 xxx model is the terminal model such as modshmx for modules for the HMX series of terminals On systems running secure TFTP ncdinstall places the server modules in the secure dir tftpboot ncd release modsmodel directory Booting xX Server Loading 4 11 Using TFTP for X Server Downloading When the terminal boots it looks first for server modules in the directory specified in the modules directory parameter not saved in NVRAM The X server sets the value of modules directory based on the location of the X server boot image If the modules are not there the terminal looks in tftpboot ncd release modsmodel If a terminal cannot find X server modules error messa
151. terminal s SNMP variables using your host SNMP management software Host SNMP software usually includes a set command for modifying variables Modifying variables requires read write access to the terminal which is allowed by default Consult your SNMP management documentation for information about commands to use for modifying SNMP variables Each remote configuration parameter has a variable name and path assigned to it You can obtain SNMP variable names and paths for the read write parameters from the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference Depending on the SNMP management software at your site you may need to assign numerical values to parameters that accept choices or Boolean values To assign numerical values to a parameter complete the following steps 1 Identify the values available for the desired parameter 2 If required by your SNMP management software assign numerical values to the available choices WM For Boolean values use 1 for false yes and on no and off Use 2 for true For choice values assign 1 to the first choice 2 to the second choice and so on unless otherwise specified Use the order of choices listed in the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference For example the following numerical values correspond to the choices for boot desired source 1 tcpip 2 tftp 3 nfs 4 ncdnet 5 local 6 prom For more information about as
152. the boot host This method is less flexible than discovering addresses from the network because if you move the terminal to another network you must reconfigure the addresses You can place other information in NVRAM such as the name of an X server to download To configure a terminal to obtain addresses from NVRAM set the following in Setup Change Setup Parameters Note You can also set addresses in the Boot Monitor Setup menus 1 In the IP hide box a Turn off the Use Address Discovery toggle so the terminal does not attempt to discover addresses from the network b Enter the addresses you need You must enter at least the IP address of the terminal in IP Address at Next Boot Booting Address Discovery 3 11 Setting the Broadcast Address If the terminal is booting through a gateway set the Subnet Mask Initial Default Gateway 1 and Initial Gateway 2 if you have more than one gateway The terminal uses the boot host as a gateway if these fields are left at 0 0 0 0 the default If desired set the Broadcast Address The default address of 255 255 255 255 works although the Boot Monitor displays error messages as the terminal boots 2 In the Booting hide box a Make sure Primary Boot Source is set to TFTP or NFS b Set TCP IP Desired Server to the network address of the boot host Set the Secondary and Tertiary Server fields if desired to designate backup boot servers 3 Click on Apply to save
153. the number of seconds to wait before removing a window after disconnecting from the host The default value is one second This resource is useful because you can set the disconnect delay to permit viewing of error messages displayed when the terminal emulator fails to connect to a host For example if a user attempts to connect to the Configuration daemon without a password the window can be set to remain on the terminal long enough for the user to read the message that says a password is required Configuring the Answer Back Message The terminal emulator includes the control character ENQ which decodes to 5 When the terminal emulator receives this code from the host it sends back the string in the answerbackString resource Typing Ctrl E causes the terminal to send its answer back message 12 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences An escape sequences is a series of non printing characters beginning with an Escape character that sends commands to devices Escape sequences are used for printing communications and display management The command in an escape sequence results in specified actions by devices Escape sequences are also called control codes or control sequences Escape sequences are most often used in scripts as in the following examples cursoroff echo ESC 25lcursor is off cursoron echo ESC 25hcur
154. the serial port This mode choice is for the use of NCD Technical Support input device Configures the port for one of the input devices selected in the xserver input extension device parameter xremote Configures the port for XRemote ppp Configures the port for PPP baud rate default 9600 baud rate The baud rates for Serial Port 1 are 50 75 110 134 5 150 200 300 600 1050 1200 1800 2000 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 19200 38400 57600 Optional serial ports 2 and 3 can operate at the following additional baud rates 76800 and 115200 data bits default 8 8 The serial port transmits characters with eight data bits 7 The serial port transmits characters with seven data bits 15 4 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports Configuring Port Operating Characteristics Table 15 1 serial interfaces table Parameter Continued Table Entries Possible Values Results stop bits default 1 1 The serial port uses one stop bit per character 2 The serial port uses two stop bits per character parity default none none No parity is generated odd The serial port requires an odd number of 1s ones for each byte even The serial port requires an even number of 1s ones for each byte space The serial port uses a 0 zero for each parity bit mark The serial port uses a 1 one for each parity bit handshake default none none Flow control is disabled xo
155. the terminal so that the X server can read the PostScript resource file If you are using site licensing or floating licenses see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems for instructions Additional terminal memory may be required For information on the amount of terminal memory required to use PEX see the Release Notes Setting PEX Configuration Parameters This section describes the PEX remote configuration parameters In the Setup menus some PEX parameters are in Change Setup Parameters in the PEX and PEX Colors hide boxes and some are in Change User Preferences in the PEX hide box PEX parameters are not saved in NVRAM Setting the Parameters Listed in Change Setup Parameters The PEX parameters in Change Setup Parameters take effect after rebooting so they must be set in a remote configuration file The parameters described in this section control the maximum number of half spaces for model clipping the maximum number of name set identifiers and the maximum number of non ambient light sources The default values of these parameters are the defaults specified by the PHIGS standard and should work for most applications The recommended terminal memory listed in the Release Notes is based on the default values of these parameters Increasing the values of these parameters places increased demands on terminal memory Configuring PEX 14 3 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Specifying the Numb
156. this font server reaches its client limit start up a new one clone self on The default point size to be used when a font name does not specify point size The unit of measurement is decipoints default point siz 120 The default resolutions to be used when a font name does not specify resolution The resolutions specified are 100 x 100 and 75 x 75 default resolutions 100 100 75 75 The file to be used for logging errors when file is specified error file var log fs The method of error logging to be used Possible values are none file syslog opcom and off rror method fil The port number on which the font server listens for connections port 7001 The font server should not scale bitmaps scaled bitmaps false The SNF format is read as NCD SNF msb msb 4 4 snf format msb msb 4 4 The clients from which the font server accepts connections trusted clients green expo lcs mit edu focusl6 7 24 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Server Issues Configuring Font Server Timeouts The parameters xserver fontserver open timeout and xserver fontserver reopen timeout control how long the terminal tries to contact a font server Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Fonts Font Server section gt Open Timeout Reopen Timeout Table 7 12 xserver fontserver open timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 30 30 The terminal tries to
157. to false Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Configuration Configuration Daemon section Auto Save NVRAM Table 6 15 config auto save nvram Parameter Possible Values Results default true true Changes made to parameters that are saved in NVRAM are written to NVRAM after an apply command false Changes made to parameters that are saved in NVRAM are not written to NVRAM after an apply command Terminal Configuration Methods 6 35 Configuring the Apply Command The Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference shows which parameters can be saved to NVRAM Configuring Auto Save to a File The following subsections explain how to disable auto save to a file change the name of the auto save file and change the extent of the data saved to the file Disabling Auto Save By default changes are written to the stp file or another specified file after an apply command To prevent changes from being written to a file when you use the apply command set the config auto save file parameter to false Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Configuration Configuration Daemon Section Auto Save File Table 6 16 config auto save file Parameter Possible Values Result default true true Any changes made to the terminal s configuration are saved automatically to a file after an apply command false No changes made to the terminal s configuration are saved automatically t
158. to the state that causes that LED to light The format of a keyboard definition file is similar to an xmodmap file LI Each line consists of a keyword and values LY Blank lines are ignored Use an exclamation point anywhere on a line to cause the remainder of the line to be ignored LI Use a backslash at the end of the line to continue a statement past the end of a line The backslash following carriage return newline and any leading white space are replaced with a single space Table 17 8 summarizes the statements permitted in a keyboard definition file A statement consists of one or more keywords and values The values permitted in the statements are defined in Table 17 9 Table 17 8 Keyboard Description File Statements Statement Keyword Value Description name QUOTEDSTRING Specifies the name of the keyboard typically the first line in the file include QUOTEDSTRING Reads in other files needed to assemble a keyboard description from other files such as deadkeys kbd ora personal keyboard file such as my kbd initialize Sets keyboard state tables to known values LI All keys repeat and click I No keys lock or latch Ll Dead key setup debug keysym and modifier tables are cleared L The scancodes map one to one with keycodes 17 56 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Table 17 8 Keyboard Description File Statements Cont
159. two characters so 4 is written as 04 3 Make any necessary changes to configuration parameter values You can use any text editor such as vi to edit the file Check the file permissions The file must be world readable 5 Boot the terminal The configuration file is downloaded and the parameter settings in the file take effect Configuration File Size The size of configuration files is limited only by the amount of available terminal memory Creating a File from the Setup Clients You can create a configuration file by invoking Change Setup Parameters or Change Quick Setup setting parameters and saving the parameters to a file All parameters are saved to the file in alphabetical order by group that is parameters in the boot group are listed first and parameters in the xserver group are listed last Therefore you may need to rearrange some lines for example to put the name server parameters ahead of parameters that use hostnames The file must be saved on the boot host another specified host or one of the initial file server hosts On TCP IP networks you can use TFTP or NFS to write the file depending upon how the initial file servers are set up I If you are using TFTP to write the file the file must exist before it can be written to and must be world readable and world writable I If you are using NFS to write the file you must have read write permission in the directory where you are saving the file 6
160. use them A utility for converting BDF to PCF is included in the NCDware distribution For information about conversion from BDF format see NCD Font Management Utilities on page 7 10 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 7 Font Use Overview Font Directories and Files Fonts are organized into font directories Font directories contain font files and font management files Font management files are used to locate font files Font Directories Table 7 3 lists the bitmap font directories on the NCDware distribution and describes the fonts in each directory When using TFTP to access fonts font directories must be world executable When using NFS permissions may differ For more information about using TFTP and NFS see Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services Table 7 3 Bitmap Font Directories Font Directory Contents pcf 100dpi Fonts for 100 dpi terminals pef 75dpi Fonts for 85 dpi and 75 dpi terminals pcf Xol Fonts from AT amp T for OPEN LOOK clients pef dw100dpi Fonts for DECwindows applications on 100 dpi terminals pcf dw75dpi Fonts for DECwindows applications on 85 dpi and 75 dpi terminals pcf misc Miscellaneous fonts pcf Java Fonts for Java PEX Fonts for PEX 1 1 PEX fonts are in a special PEX format Font Files Font files are compiled in a specific format and must be world readable The name of a font file usually indicates the font family weight and size of the
161. via the network and has the appropriate permissions Can t allocate memory for needed structure Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module does not have sufficient memory to perform the desired action User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory Close any unused local clients to free local memory OBJCORR Object data has been corrupted internal error Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 115 TERM Messages OPCODERR Opcode lookup out of rang internal error Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support OPTABERR Opcode table out of sequenc internal error Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support OPTERR Can t combine telnet port and display option Severity Fatal Explanation The command that has been entered specifies a TELNET port and uses the display command line option This is an invalid command User Action Re enter the command making sure that it specifies either a TELNET port or the display command line option Do not use both PARSEFONT Couldn t parse font font PROC
162. volume of audio pref audio maximum gain clients 9 44 Using Configuration Menus Using Change User Preferences Bell Preferences The parameters in the Bell hide box affect the terminal bell Bell Field Description Corresponding Parameter Enable Bell Turns bell on pref bell enable Bell Base Volume percent Bell s base volume as a percentage of the maximum volume pref bell volume Bell Pitch Hz Bell pitch pref bell pitch Bell Duration Bell duration pref bell duration milliseconds Ring Bell Rings the bell none Compatibility Preferences The parameters in the Compatibility hide box ensure compatibility with older equipment or software Compatibility Field Description Corresponding Parameter Permit Old X Bugs Bypasses error checks on pref compatibility permit old requests that old X clients arenot x bugs expected to fail Be Compatible With Old Prefixes the display vendor pref compatibility DECwindows Vendor string with DECwindows for decwindows vendor string String older DECwindows applications Be Compatible With Old Right modifiers mimic left pref compatibility DECwindows Keyboards modifiers as with old DEC decwindows keyboards keyboards Be Compatible With Old Incoming X images are byte pref compatibility DECwindows Images swapped not done by some old DECwindows applications decwindows images Using Co
163. with How the terminal responds to XDM login xdm broadcasts XDMCP Broadcasts broadcasts What to do with How the terminal responds to XDM login xdm indirects XDMCP Indirects indirect queries What to do when XDM Action taken when the host XDM login xdm action on disconnects program disconnects from the disconnect terminal DWLOGIN section Login Name Login account name for invoking the VMS DECwindows login banner login dwlogin name Login Password Login account password for invoking the VMS DECwindows login banner login dwlogin password NCDDM section NCD Display Manager NCD Display Manager is queried login ncddm enabled Enabled for user specific information NCD Display Manager TCP port on which the NCD login ncddm tcp port TCP Port Number Display Manager listens for requests 9 30 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters NCDnet Parameters The parameters in the NCDnet hide box affect terminals in a DECnet network NCDnet Field Description Corresponding Parameter NCDnet Address The terminal s current DECnet ncdnet address address NCDnet Address At The DECnet address the next time ncdnet address at next boot Next Boot the terminal boots Default Router Address or symbolic name of the ncdnet default router default router Connect Timeout seconds Length of time that must elapse between a connection attempt and a lack of respo
164. your service personnel or NCD Technical Support internal stack error reason_code Severity Warning Explanation The software detected an internal stack error Usually the adapter is restarted in an attempt to overcome this error User Action If the problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support unexpected interrupt Severity Warning Explanation The terminal received an unexpected interrupt from the LAN adapter card User Action None the terminal software ignores this command If the message persists please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support invalid command command_ID Severity Warning Explanation The terminal received an invalid command from the LAN adapter card User Action None the terminal software ignores this command If the message persists please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support internal status error reason_code Severity Warning Explanation The software detected an internal stack error Usually the adapter is restarted in an attempt to overcome this error User Action If the problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support 18 130 X Server Messages WIRELESS Messages RECEIVE ESTART ESFAIL receive error reason_code Severity Error Explanation The software detected a receive status error Usually the LAN adapter is restarted in an attempt to recover from this error This problem m
165. 00 the broadcast address setting is ip broadcast address 191 40 255 255 Configuring Subnet Mask Discovery Subnets are used to extend the network portion of IP addresses This allows you to divide a physical network into separate subnets The subnet mask distinguishes the subnet from the rest of the address If subnetting is used on the local network the terminal must be able to discover the subnet mask If a bit is on in the subnet mask the equivalent bit in the IP address is interpreted as a network bit If a bit is off in the mask the equivalent bit in the IP address is interpreted as part of the host address Therefore the subnet mask has 1s in the network and subnet portions of the address and Os in the host portion Subnet masks can be written as hexadecimal numbers or as decimal IP addresses For example if the network portion of a class B address is extended by one byte the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 The first two bytes of the address define the class B network address the third byte defines the subnet portion and the fourth byte defines the host address There are three methods for making sure the terminal can discover the subnet mask d Set the subnet mask in the bootptab file for information about using BOOTP to set the subnet mask see Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery on page 3 3 Booting Address Discovery 3 13 Configuring Subnet Mask Discovery I Use ICMP to obtain the subnet mas
166. 08 German 73 Nokia 108 Netherlands 74 Nokia 108 Italian 75 Nokia 108 Norwegian 76 Nokia 108 Portuguese 77 Nokia 108 Spanish 78 Nokia 108 Swedish 79 Nokia 108 Swiss French 80 Nokia 108 Swiss German 81 unused 82 91 IBM 3270 US 92 N 123 NA US 93 N 123 UNIX 94 N 123 UK 95 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 35 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 8 Keyboard Type Settings in NVRAM Continued Keyboard a N 123 German 96 N 123 French 97 N 123 Spanish 98 N 123 Swiss German 99 N 123 Swiss French 100 N 123 Swedish 101 N 123 Danish 102 N 123 Italian 103 N 123 Dutch 104 N 123 Norwegian 105 N 123 Portuguese 106 reserved 107 N 102 Siemens German 108 N 102 Spanish Latin American 109 N 102 Dutch 110 N 102 Icelandic 111 11 36 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Parameters Saved in the Tagged Strings Area Table 11 9 lists all of the strings saved in the tagged string area of NVRAM Terminals in the HMX and Explora series have 166 bytes available for storing these strings If you are storing many of these strings in NVRAM you should keep them short to avoid running out of space Strings stored in the tagged string space use one byte per character plus two bytes of overhead for each string For example a 10 character password uses 12 bytes Table 11 9 Parameters in NVRAM Optional String Space
167. 1 Configuring XDM Hosts and the question mark to match any single character For example ncd matches all terminals whose names begin with ncd m A macro definition consists of a macro name followed by a list of hostnames The macro expands to these hostnames when you use it in another entry Macro names begin with a percent sign For example SHOSTS atlantic oceans com pacific oceans com antarctic oceans com Types of Xaccess File Entries Xaccess files have two types of entries I Entries that control XDM s response to direct and broadcast queries LY Entries that control XDM s response to indirect queries In all cases XDM uses the first entry that matches the terminal name If the terminal sends an indirect query only indirect entries in the file can match If the terminal sends a direct or broadcast query only direct and broadcast entries can match Direct and Broadcast Entries in the Xaccess File In a direct query the terminal sends a request directly to a host In a broadcast query the terminal sends a request to all hosts on the network Direct and broadcast entries consist of a terminal hostname or a pattern representing one or more terminals Example Entries The following entry permits direct and broadcast connections to this host from all terminals on the network This entry allows direct or broadcast access to this host from the terminal nedu10 ncdul0 oceans com This entry allo
168. 108 Belgian N 108 Norwegian N 108 Canadian English N 108 Portuguese N 108 Canadian French N 108 Spanish N 108 Danish N 108 Swedish N 108 Finnish N 108 Swiss French N 108 French N 108 Swiss German N 108 German N 108 UK Nokia 108 108 US 108 Italian 108 Belgian 108 Norwegian 108 Canadian English 108 Portuguese 108 Canadian French 108 Spanish 108 Danish 108 Swedish 108 Finnish 108 Swiss French 108 French 108 Swiss German 108 German 108 UK Sun Type 4 N 107 US Sun Type 5 N 123 North American N 123 Norwegian N 123 Unix N 123 Portuguese N 123 Danish N 123 Spanish N 123 Dutch N 123 Swedish N 123 French N 123 Swiss French N 123 German N 123 Swiss German N 123 Italian N 123 UK Kana Kana Nokia 122 US 122 Hitachi Kana H 123 3270 Lexmark 3270 US 1 Use IBM PS 2 for the Windows 95 compatible keyboard Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 3 N 97 Keyboard Details N 97 Keyboard Details The legends and keycodes for the US type 97 key keyboard are illustrated in Figure 17 1 Table 17 2 lists the N 97 keysyms when the default mapping for the US type is in use The 97 key keyboards have three LEDs Their default values are
169. 11 Alternative Methods of Changing the Current Font Path ncdu10 5999 Click on OK Ona host computer type a TELNET command similar to the following 5997 is the User Preferences daemon port number and 5999 is the Configuration daemon port number telnet ncdul0 5997 telnet ncdul0 5999 2 After the Password prompt enter the read write password for the relevant daemon 3 After the TELNET prompt gt enter the command to modify the pref font path parameter not saved in NVRAM For example gt pref font path built ins tcep mohawk 7000 Table 7 4 pref font path Parameter Table Entry Possible Values Results font path entry default The same as the font path defined in the xserver default font path table font path A specified font path that may include font servers as well as font directories and built in fonts 4 Enter the apply command to put the new current font path into effect gt apply 5 Enter a quit command to exit from the Terminal Emulator or the TELNET application gt quit 7 12 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Setting the Default Font Changing the Current Font Path Using the xset Client To modify the current font path using the xset client enter one of the following commands Table 7 5 Setting the Current Font Path xset Commands Command Result xset fp directory Prefixes directory to the font path xset f
170. 11 to 8 13 XAUTHORITY environment variable 8 16 XDM Authentication Key Change Setup Parameters 9 9 XDM X Display Manager access control 8 15 to 8 16 components of 8 4 configuration files 8 6 to 8 14 configuration parameters for 9 6 9 29 defaults 8 2 defined 8 3 diagnostic messages 18 78 disconnecting terminal actions 8 17 DISPLAY variable automatically set 8 5 error message log 8 14 hosts configuring 8 5 to 8 15 controlling access to 8 11 to 8 13 keepalives 8 18 to 8 19 login banner configuring 8 14 delay before displaying 8 17 Login Chooser redisplay of 8 17 MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 8 16 OpenWindows environment 8 14 8 15 Index 33 Index XDM X Display Manager continued polling interval configuring 8 14 queries types of 8 4 resources loading from session management files 8 7 login box 8 14 xdm program 8 13 userAuthDir resource 8 16 X session ending 8 17 session management files system wide 8 7 to 8 11 X11R3 version 8 19 Xaceess file 8 11 to 8 13 Xauthority file 8 16 XAUTHORITY environment variable 8 16 xdm daemon configuring 8 13 to 8 14 starting 8 15 XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 8 16 xdm config file 8 13 to 8 14 8 16 XDMCP defined 8 4 xdm errors file 8 14 xrdb 1 8 14 Xreset file 8 7 Xresources file 8 14 Xservers file 8 19 xsession file 8 7 Xsession file configuring 8 7 to 8 11 for NCD local window manager 8 9 for OpenWindows 8 10 Xstartup file 8 7 xdm XDM daemon 8 6 8 13 to 8 14 XDM Display
171. 16 11 Using unit administrative status for SNMP Remote Reset 16 12 Chapter 17 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions Specifying the Keyboard Type 17 2 N 97 Keyboard Details 17 4 N 101 Keyboard Details 17 13 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details 17 21 VT220 Compatible Keyboard 17 21 N 108 Keyboard 17 21 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details 17 36 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details 17 44 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files 17 54 Creating a Keyboard Definition File 17 54 Specifying Dead Key Processing 17 60 Contents hapter 18 X Server Message Messages and Modules Overview 18 1 The Format of Messages 18 2 Displaying Messages 18 4 Viewing Messages in the Console Window 18 4 Viewing Messages through TELNET 18 4 Logging Messages toa File 18 5 Configuring Message Logging 18 5 Configuring Message Time Stamps 18 5 Changing the Message Buffer Size 18 6 Enabling Extended Diagnostics 18 6 Messages Common to All Modules 18 7 CALIBLIGHTPEN Messages 18 15 CALIBTOUCH Messages 18 16 CONFIGD Messages 18 17 CONFUI Messages 18 30 CONSOLE Messages 18 33 DESKTOP Messages 18 36 DHCP Messages 18 37 DIAGD Messages 18 38 DOS Messages 18 38 DTR Messages 18 40 EXECD Messages 18 40 FILED Messages 18 44 FONT Messages 18 48 IPROUTE Messages 18 55 JAVA Messages 18 57 xxi Contents xxii KBM Messages 18 58 KEYMAPPER Messages 18 67 LICENSE Messages 18 67 LOADB Mess
172. 17 5 keymap 17 6 to 17 12 LEDs 17 4 legends 17 5 name cache 5 10 to 5 11 Name Cache Max Lifetime Change Setup Parameters 9 32 9 37 Name Cache Max Size Change Setup Parameters 9 32 9 37 Name Server Protocol Change Setup Parameters 9 37 Name Server Retransmission Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 37 Name Server Transaction Timeout Change Setup Parameters for DECnet name service 9 32 for TCP IP name service 9 37 Name Servers Change Setup Parameters for DECnet name service 9 32 for TCP IP name service 9 37 name service configuration parameters for 9 37 enabling 5 7 name cache local 5 10 to 5 12 name server hosts specifying 5 8 protocol selecting 5 8 remote configuration file entries for 5 7 reverse name request 5 12 statistics 10 24 to 10 25 Name Type for Initial TFTP servers Change Quick Setup 9 4 Name Type for Initial TFTP Servers Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Narrow Keysym Tables Change Setup Parameters 9 24 NCD Display Manager configuration parameters for 9 30 defined 8 5 diagnostic messages 18 86 NCD Display Manager Enabled Change Setup Parameters 9 30 NCD Display Manager TCP Port Number 9 30 NCD Mosaic Browser configuration parameters for 9 16 to 9 17 diagnostic messages 18 74 18 84 18 99 NCD Terminal Emulator see Terminal Emulator NCD Window Manager diagnostic messages 18 133 ncd_std remote configuration file 6 24 NCD3270 Default Model Change Setup Parameters 9 42 NCD32
173. 2 30 3383 14 37 15 4 6 sa 7 67 8 62 9 70 O ool 7s 85 123 Tab e IQ W E R T Y U l O P Return a 21 29 36 45 44 53 60 67 68 IL sal s 1 Control A S D F G H J K L 20 28 27 35 43 52 51 59 66 75 5 76 82 102 90 Shift Z X Cc v B N M lt gt Shift aka ee 18 26 34 33 42 50 49 s8 gt 65 731 74 89 Alt lt Com Jalt pose 88 25 41 57 32 Graph LED 1 LED 2 y 3 LED 4 Stop Again Pause PrSc 130 8 T Ri RZ ii i i 131 40 103 119 126 132 URI Uas Re Front Copy 7 8 9 129 72 Home A Pg U m u7 I R7 RS RO Open Paste i i 133 104 lt 107 us gt 116 124 Rio Ri Hip Find Cut j 1 d 2 2 Dn Enter 134 n Lio 105 W 4 2 R13 R14 R15 Hel p 0 Del 16 Setup Ins 112 i13 121 Figure 17 5 N 107 Default Keyboard Legends and Keycodes Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 37 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 6 N 107 Default Keymapping Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 81 F12 F12 Redo 9 F20 F20 SunCut 10 11 12 13 Tab 14 Escape 15 F2 16 Help 17 Caps_Lock 18 Shift_L 19 Shift_R 20 Control_L 21 Q 22 1 exclam 23 F3 24 25 Meta_L 26 Z 27 X 28 A 29 W 17 38 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 6
174. 240 asciitilde 241 aacute Aacute 242 eacute Eacute 243 iacute Iacute 244 oacute Oacute 245 uacute Uacute 246 acute 247 ccedilla Ccedilla 248 cedilla OpenWindows compatibility necessitates that these keycodes do not match the key legends Stop for keycode 10 Again for keycode 11 SunF36 for keycode 86 and SunF37 for keycode 94 Keycode 120 is available only on European language keyboards WYSetup is an NCD specific keysym mapped to the NCD Setup keysym Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 53 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files NCDware provides a mechanism for experienced system administrators to configure terminals to work with keyboards that are not explicitly supported in the NCD X server such as some international keyboards This appendix describes how to use a keyboard description file downloaded from the host during terminal booting to support such keyboard usage Keyboard description files may be available from the NCD FTP site or from other vendors To use an unsupported keyboard you need to 1 Find or prepare a keyboard description file describing the behavior of the keyboard See the content and format descriptions later in this appendix Make sure that the file is world readable 2 Make sure that the directory containing the keyboard description file is accessible through the file service table parameter Setup
175. 3 file permissions 6 18 file size not restricted 6 18 filenames custom 6 23 hexadecimal converting to 6 17 optional 6 23 standard 6 16 6 23 to 6 25 hexadecimal converting IP address to 6 17 nced_std generic file 6 24 nesting files 6 19 NVRAM saving data to 6 15 Restore Defaults file for 6 27 sample file 6 17 stp file 6 36 user s file including 6 20 see also remote configuration Setup menus Console remote reset using SNMP 16 10 to 16 12 Reopen Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 24 Rescan Messages command Console 18 4 reset remote 16 10 to 16 12 Respond to Broadcast ICMP Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Restore Defaults Setup menus 6 27 Restrict Host Choices Change Setup Parameters for login through the Terminal Emulator 9 39 for login through XDM 9 29 Retain X Settings Across Sessions Change Setup Parameters 9 40 Index 23 Index Retransmission Limit Change Setup Parameters 9 28 9 31 Retransmission Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 28 reverse name request 3 15 RGB File Change Setup Parameters 9 40 rgb txt file default location 5 15 initial file server hosts 5 13 renaming 9 40 Ring Bell Change User Preferences 9 45 Roaming Condition Change Setup Parameters 9 32 Router Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 31 routing configuration parameters for 9 25 gateways default 5 25 boot host used as gateway 5 25 messages 18 55 proxy ARP 5 29 router discovery 5 30 routing table 5 26 to 5 29
176. 3 pref screensaver enable 9 53 pref screensaver exposures 9 53 pref screensaver interval 9 53 pref screensaver style 9 53 pref screensaver time 9 53 pref sie contrast threshold 9 54 pref sie sampling method 9 54 pref xserver backing store 9 54 pref xserver benchmark optimizations 9 54 pref xserver current pointing device 9 51 pref xserver graphics optimizations 9 54 pref xserver screen resolution 9 54 pref xserver touchscreen button press threshold 9 51 pref xserver touchscreen button release threshold 9 51 Previous Server Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Previous Source Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Primary Boot Source Change Setup Parameters 9 14 PRINTAPIS messages 18 99 Index 22 protect command Configuration language 6 32 PU2 1 Default Host Change Setup Parameters 9 42 PU2 1 Default tcp Port Change Setup Parameters 9 42 pwireless interface table 10 28 pwireless statistics table 10 28 Q Query for Unit Name at Boot Change Setup Parameters 9 38 R RARP Address Resolution Protocol 3 10 rarpd 8 3 10 read command Configuration language 6 19 to 6 20 Read Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 24 Receive Buffer Size Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Reconnect attempts before failure Change Setup Parameters 9 24 Reference Blue Chromaticity Change Setup Parameters 9 34 Reference Blue Luminance Change Setup Parameters 9 34 Reference Green Chromaticity Change Setup Parameters 9 34 Reference G
177. 31 DEC auxiliary boot protocol 1 bit 0 TFTP 1 MOP Monitor power management override 1 bit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Extra messages from booting 1 bit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Use DDC data 1 bit Hardware dependent Absolute Ethernet address booting 1 bit 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Relative Ethernet address booting 1 bit 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Reserved 2 bits 0x32 TFTP boot priority upper 1 Try TFTP first 4 bits 2 Try TFTP second 3 Try TFTP third 4 Try TFTP last 15 Disable TFTP booting NFS boot priority lower 1 Try NFS first 4 bits 2 Try NFS second 3 Try NFS third 4 Try NFS last 15 Disable NFS booting Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 27 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Continued Location Description Size Values Default in Bold 0x33 MOP boot priority upper 1 Try MOP first 4 bits 2 Try MOP second 3 Try MOP third 4 Try MOP last 15 Disable MOP booting Local boot priority lower 1 Try local first If a PCMCIA card is installed NVRAM 4 bits 2 Try local second has default values and the terminal has 3 Try local third not booted from the network the terminal 4 Try local last first tries to boot from the PCMCIA card 15 Disable local booting 0x34 Reserved 8 bits Boot Monitor Configuration 0x35 NCD logo enable 1 bit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Use standard NCD path for X server files 1 bit 0 NCD path and directories or a special OEM path 1
178. 5 15 9 40 foreign language keyboards 17 1 LEDs configuring 9 48 N 101 details 17 13 to 17 20 N 107 details 17 36 to 17 43 N 108 details 17 21 to 17 35 keyboards continued N 108LK function keys programming 12 28 to 12 30 N 123 details 17 44 to 17 53 N 97 details 17 4 to 17 12 type setting in Boot Monitor Setup 11 13 xserver keyboard type parameter 17 2 VT220 compatible details 17 21 to 17 35 Windows 95 compatible 17 13 Keyclick Volume Change User Preferences 9 48 Keymap Editor messages 18 67 KEYMAPPER messages 18 67 keymapper Boot Monitor 11 18 Keysym File Change Setup Parameters 9 40 keysyms file 2 5 5 15 foreign language keyboards 17 1 keysyms file 9 40 km command Boot Monitor 11 8 11 18 ks command Boot Monitor 11 8 L LAT configuration parameters for 9 27 passwords 9 12 services in Terminal Host Chooser 12 3 lat circuit flush timeout 9 27 lat connect timeout 9 27 lat keepalive timeout 9 27 lat retransmission limit 9 28 lat retransmission timeout 9 28 lat service directory max size 9 27 lat service groups 9 27 launcher diagnostic messages 18 133 Index 13 Index Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Change User Preferences 9 48 License Agent Port Number Change Setup Parameters 9 28 License Agents Change Setup Parameters 9 28 License Key Change Quick Setup 9 5 License Key Change Setup Parameters 9 28 LICENSE messages 18 67 Licensed Features Change Quick Setup 9 5 Licensed Fe
179. 70 Default Protocol Change Setup Parameters 9 42 NCDDM messages 18 86 Index 17 Index ncddm 1 configuration parameters for 9 30 defined 8 5 diagnostic messages 18 86 ncdloadprefs 1 6 21 ncdmkfdir 1 13 11 NCDnet Address Change Quick Setup 9 5 NCDnet Address Change Setup Parameters 9 31 NCDnet Address at Next Boot Change Quick Setup 9 5 NCDnet Address At Next Boot Change Setup Parameters 9 31 NCDnet Name Servers Change Quick Setup 9 6 NCDnet Object Name Change Setup Parameters for Configuration daemon 9 19 for Diagnostic daemon 9 21 for Local File Manager 9 21 for Preferences daemon 9 20 NCDnet Router Address Change Quick Setup 9 6 NCDnet see DECnet ncdnet address 9 5 9 31 ncdnet address at next boot 9 5 9 31 ncdnet bytes received 10 9 ncdnet bytes sent 10 9 ncdnet connect timeout 9 31 ncdnet count circuit down 10 9 ncdnet data blocks received 10 9 ncdnet data blocks sent 10 9 ncdnet default router 9 6 9 31 ncdnet hello packets received 10 9 ncdnet hello packets sent 10 9 ncdnet hello timeout 9 31 ncdnet inbound errors 10 9 ncdnet keepalive timeout 9 31 ncdnet mop allow reset 9 31 ncdnet mop identify timeout 9 31 ncdnet mop reset password 9 11 Index 18 ncdnet name bad name errors 10 10 ncdnet name cache hits 10 10 ncdnet name cache max lifetime 9 32 ncdnet name cache max size 9 32 ncdnet name cache overflows 10 10 ncdnet name local cache 9 32 ncdnet name memory all
180. AT Parameters 9 27 Licenses Parameters 9 28 Loadable Modules Parameters 9 29 xii Contents Login Parameters 9 29 NCDnet Parameters 9 31 NCDnet Name Service Parameters 9 32 Network Interfaces Parameters 9 32 Parallel Parameters 9 33 PEX Parameters 9 33 PEX Color Parameters 9 34 PPP and SLIP Parameters 9 35 Serial Parameters 9 35 TCP Parameters 9 36 TCP IP Name Service Parameters 9 37 Time Parameters 9 38 Unit Parameters 9 38 Video Parameters 9 39 VT320 Terminal Emulation Parameters 9 39 WinCenter Parameters 9 40 X and Graphics Parameters 9 40 XRemote Parameters 9 41 3270 Terminal Emulation Parameters 9 42 Using Change User Preferences 9 43 Components of the Change User Preferences Window 9 43 Components of the Change User Preferences Hide Boxes 9 44 Audio Preferences 9 44 Bell Preferences 9 45 Compatibility Preferences 9 45 Console and Utilities Preferences 9 46 Environment Variables Preferences 9 47 Font Preferences 9 47 Keyboard Preferences 9 47 OpenGL Preferences 9 48 PEX Preferences 9 50 xiii Contents xiv Pointing Devices Preferences 9 51 Power Management Preferences 9 52 Screen Background Preferences 9 52 Screen Saver Preferences 9 53 X SIE and Graphics Preferences 9 54 Chapter 10 Statistics Menu Accessing Statistical Parameters 10 1 Components of the Show Statistics Window 10 1 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes 10 2 Ethernet Statistics 10 2 Font Usage Statistics 10 3 ICMP Statistics
181. Action If possible use an alternate application that does not require ReGIS graphics SCRLBAR Can t create the interface scrollbar Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot create the scroll bar This situation usually indicates that the terminal is running low on memory User Action Verify the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the action Close any unused local clients to free local memory X Server Messages 18 117 TERM Messages SELECTER Selection buffer overrun internal error SERIALERR SERIALINF Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support Internal error message Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support Switching to mode mode Severity Information Explanation The serial interface is communicating via XRemote or PPP as requested User Action None SESSION Can t initialize the session Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot create an NCD Terminal Emulator session This occurs if the terminal is low on memory or if a network problem exists User Action Verify there is sufficient memory for the terminal emulator If memory is low close any unused clients to free local memory If there is suff
182. Application Mode Set 8 bit 7 bit Table 12 10 N 101 N 102 Function Key Escape Sequences Escape Sequence Key 8 bit 7 bit F1 CSI11 Esc 117 F2 CSI12 Esc 12 F3 CSI13 Esc 13 F4 CSI14 Esc 14 F5 CSI15 Esc 15 F6 CSI17 Esc 17 F7 CSI18 Esc 18 F8 CSI19 Esc 19 F9 CSI 20 Esc 20 F10 CSI 21 Esc 21 F11 CSI 2 3 Esc 23 F12 CSI 2 4 Esc 24 12 36 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Table 12 11 N 101 N 102 Editing Keypad Escape Sequences Escape Sequence Key 8 bit 7 bit Insert CSI 2 Esc 2 Home CSIA A Esc A Page Up CSI5 Esc 5 Delete CSI Esc End CSI B Esc B Page Down CSI 6 Esc 6 Table 12 12 N 101 N 102 Cursor Keypad Sequences Escape Sequence Arrow Key 8 bit 7 bit Up CSI A Esc A Down CSIB Esc B Right CSI C Esc C Left CSI D Esc D Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 37 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences N 108LK VT220 Style Keyboard Escape Sequences The tables in this section list escape sequences for N 108LK and VT220 keyboards Table 12 13 N 108LK Keypad Escape Sequences Application Mode Reset Application Mode Set Sey 8 bit 7 bit 8 bit 7 bit 0 0 0 SS3 p Esc
183. Arp This parameter is saved in NVRAM Configuring Network Services 5 29 Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks Table 5 29 ip use proxy arp Parameter Possible Values Result default false false The terminal does not use proxy ARP to locate gateways true The terminal uses proxy ARP to locate gateways Discovering Neighboring Gateways through Router Discovery Router discovery is an extension to ICMP that enables hosts attached to multicast or broadcast networks to discover the IP addresses of neighboring routers gateways If the router discovery daemon is running on your network you can use this method of discovering routes The terminal automatically places the routes discovered in the routing table as dynamic routes To configure a terminal to use router discovery make sure the ip use router discovery parameter is set to true the default Setup Change Setup Parameters IP Use Router Discovery This parameter can be saved in NVRAM Table 5 30 ip use router discovery Parameter Possible Values Result default true true The terminal modifies its IP routing table with information received from router discovery messages false The terminal does not modify its routing table with information received from router discovery messages If the terminal should use router discovery to solicit for routing information at boot time make sure ip use router solic
184. C O O Address Discovery By default the Boot Monitor seeks the terminal s IP address by broadcasting alternating DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol and RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol requests These requests contain the terminal s Ethernet or Token Ring address which is set in NVRAM at the factory A host running BOOTP DHCP and configured with information about the terminal may respond with the terminal s IP address Depending on the Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 3 Boot Monitor Functions protocol implementation and the information in the host s database DHCP BOOTP can return other information as well For a complete list of supported DHCP BOOTP options see Chapter 3 Booting Address Discovery Alternatively a host running RARP and configured with information about the terminal may respond with the terminal s IP address RARP responses contain only the address of the terminal and the address of the host that responded to the request If the subnet mask is not supplied in a BOOTP DHCP response or if BOOTP DHCP is not used for address determination you can use ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol to determine the subnet mask Instead of using network protocols you can set network addresses in the terminal s NVRAM Addresses can be saved in NVRAM by using remote configuration files terminal configuration menus TELNET the Boot Monitor Setup menus or the NVRAM ut
185. CD terminal to a host system you can use the terminal as the system console Complete the following steps to configure an NCD terminal to operate as the system console 1 Connect the terminal to the host using a null modem cable 2 Make sure the X server boots from a PCMCIA card With a local server the terminal can reboot even if the host system is down Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 15 9 Controlling Access to Serial and Parallel Ports 3 Make sure the config auto save nvram parameter is set to true so the serial interfaces table is written to NVRAM 4 Set the mode parameter in the serial interfaces table to terminal for the port that you wish to use Table 15 1 on page 15 3 lists the values for serial port attributes in the serial interfaces table When an NCD terminal is used as the system console you should make sure security is enforced Without security a user on another terminal connected to the host could execute the NCD Terminal Emulator on the console and display its output on the user s own terminal To prevent a user from invoking the term ctype command on a terminal being used as a system console use exec access control disabled and exec access control list as described in the System Administrator s Guide Controlling Access to Serial and Parallel Ports This section describes the parameters that control access to a terminal s serial and parallel ports from other network hosts
186. CODES GL CODES ASCII GRAPHIC Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 53 VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 21 Digital Multinational Character Set CO and GL Codes Continued Column b8 BITS b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 CO CODES GL CODES ASCII GRAPHIC 12 54 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 22 Digital Multinational Character Set C1 and GR Codes b8 BITS b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 NNN Qo w PRR Aaa DAN C1 CODES GR CODES Digital SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 55 VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 22 Digital Multinational Character Set C1 and GR Codes Continued 356 376 238 254 EE FE C1 CODES GR CODES Digital SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS 12 56 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator VT320 Character Coding Conventions Table 12 23 ISO Latin 1 Supplemental Character Set C1 and GR Codes b8 BITS b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 capital Iceld eth C1 CODES GR CODES ISO LATIN 1 SUPPLEMENTAL GRAPHICS This character is illustrated in Table 12 20
187. CSI pn xX Erase pn characters ECH Esc pnX CSI pr pet Horizontal and vertical position HVP Esc pr pct Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 19 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued 4 Replace mode 20 No line feed no new line i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI psg Tab clear Permissible values for ps TBC Esc ps g 0 Clear current tab stop default 2 Clear all tab stops 3 Clear all tab stops CSI ps ps ps Set Mode Permissible values for ps IRM Esc ps ps ps LNM 4 Insert mode 20 Line feed new line CSI psi Print control mode Permissible values for ps Esc psi 0 Print page that has cursor 4 Exit printer controller mode 5 Enter printer controller mode CSI ps ps ps Reset Mode Permissible values for ps IRM Esc ps ps ps LNM 12 20 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI ps ps ps m Select graphic rendition visual attributes SGR Esc ps ps ps m Permissible values for ps For more information see Configuring Color Text on page 12 30 Normal clear all attributes Bold Underscore Blink Reverse video 2 Normal intensity not bold 24 Not underlined 25 Not blinking 27 Normal video NN OB RF Fore
188. Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt File Service Table For information about this parameter see Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services 3 Configure the terminal to read the keyboard description file during booting In a remote configuration file set the xserver keyboard description file parameter to the name of the keyboard definition file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Input Devices Keyboard Description File Plug in the keyboard 5 Reboot the terminal The first time you boot the terminal after using a new keyboard description file check the Messages hide box in the Console to make sure that the file was read without error Creating a Keyboard Definition File This section describes how to manually create or edit a keyboard description file Note You can also create a keyboard description file for the keyboard attached to the terminal from Change Setup Parameters In the Input hide box click on Write Keyboard Description File In the dialog box that appears type the pathname of the file and click on OK 17 54 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files A keyboard description file is an ASCII file containing statements defining keyboard behavior The statements describe the following keyboard characteristics Scancode table Keycode table Dead key sequences Modifiers table Clicking list Locking list Used by the keyboard driver
189. Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Initial File Server 2 Change Setup Parameters 9 22 initial file servers see file service Initial Protocol 1 Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Initial Protocol 2 Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Input Extension Device Change Setup Parameters 9 25 IP Internet Protocol addresses configuration parameters for 9 25 hexadecimal converting to 4 15 multi homed hosts 3 15 see also address discovery routing table 5 26 to 5 29 statistics 10 6 to 10 8 IP Address Change Setup Parameters 9 25 IP Address At Next Boot Change Setup Parameters 9 25 ip address 9 25 ip address at next boot 9 5 9 25 ip broadcast address 3 12 3 13 9 5 9 25 ip default packet time to live 9 26 ip equivalent address 3 15 ip equivalent addresses 9 26 ip extended routing diagnostics 9 26 18 6 18 55 ip forwarding type 10 6 ip initial default gateway 1 5 25 9 5 9 25 Index 12 ip initial default gateway 2 5 25 9 26 ip packet fragmentations completed 10 8 ip packet fragmentations not completed 10 8 ip packet fragments created 10 8 ip packet reassemblies completed 10 8 ip packet reassemblies not completed 10 8 ip packet reassemblies required 10 8 ip packet reassembly timeout 10 7 ip packets forwarded 10 6 ip packets received 10 6 ip packets received and delivered 10 7 ip packets received and discarded 10 7 ip packets received with errors in ip header 10 6 ip packets received with incorrect address 10 6 i
190. Class Change Setup Parameters 9 29 XDM Manufacturer Display ID Change Setup Parameters 9 29 xdm config file 8 13 to 8 14 8 16 Index 34 xdm errors file 8 14 xfd 1 7 18 xfontsel 1 7 19 XKeysymDB file 5 15 XLFD X Logical Font Description 7 2 7 19 xlsfonts 1 7 18 xrdb 1 OpenWindows version 8 14 X resources loading 8 7 XRemote configuration parameters for 9 6 9 41 diagnostic messages 18 136 18 138 statistics 10 30 to 10 31 XREMOTE messages 18 136 XRemote Session Change Quick Setup 9 6 xremote additional escape chars 9 41 xremote authorize xremote clients 9 41 xremote data compression mode 9 41 xremote next receive sequence number 10 31 xremote next transmit sequence number 10 31 xremote oldest unacknowledged packet 10 31 xremote packet round trip time 10 30 xremote packets received 10 30 xremote packets received out of sequence 10 30 xremote packets retransmitted 10 30 xremote packets transmitted 10 30 xremote packets with errors received 10 30 xremote packet transmission errors 10 30 xremote receive window size 10 31 xremote state 10 30 xremote tcp port 9 41 xremote time out length 10 30 xremote transmit window size 10 30 xremote xremotetcp connections 9 41 xremote xremote version 10 30 Xreset file 8 7 Index Xresources file 8 14 XRPRINTD messages 18 138 XSERVER messages 18 139 xserver access control enabled 9 9 xserver access control enabled default 9 9 xserver access control list 9 9 xserve
191. Colors is enabled it allocates the entries in this table xserver default visual Default Colormap Initial contents of the default color map If Wincenter Use WinCenter Colors is enabled it allocates the entries in this table xserver default colormap Black Pixel Value reported as BlackPixel on grayscale and color monitors xserver black pixel White Pixel Value reported as WhitePixel on grayscale and color monitors xserver white pixel XRemote Parameters The parameters in the XRemote hide box affect the use of XRemote XRemote Field Description Corresponding Parameters Data Compression Mode Compression method for XRemote data packets xremote data compression mode Authorize XRemote Clients XRemote clients are authenticated xremote authorize xremote clients Additional Escape Additional escape characters xremote additional escape chars Chars besides those in the pre defined list are defined Allow XRemote TCP XRemote TCP connections are xremote allow xremotetcp Connection allowed connection TCP Port Number TCP port on which the terminal xremote tcp port listens for XRemote connections Using Configuration Menus 9 41 Using Change Setup Parameters 3270 Terminal Emulation Parameters The parameters in the 3270 Terminal Emulation hide box affect the use of the 3270 terminal emulator 3270 Terminal Emulation Field D
192. D Terminal Emulator See Chapter 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Attach a printer See the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Use the terminal as a console for controlling a host system See Configuring a Terminal for Use as a System Console on page 15 9 Use XRemote NCD s optional software for running both X clients and non X applications See the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Use an alternative input device For information about the input devices you can attach to a serial port see the NCDware User s Guide For input device configuration parameters see the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference and Chapter 9 Using Configuration Menus Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 15 1 Configuring Port Operating Characteristics Parallel Port Parallel ports are Centronics compatible You can configure the parallel port for printing or for a floppy drive Configuring the Parallel Port on page 15 8 explains how to configure general parallel port attributes For information about configuring the parallel port for a floppy drive or printer see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Configuring Port Operating Characteristics This section describes how to identify terminal ports and the parameters used for configuring them Identifying Serial Port Numbers The Auxiliary Serial Port on all terminals is serial port 1 For terminals with m
193. Danish 21 VT220 Norwegian 22 VT220 German 23 VT220 Swedish 24 VT220 Spanish 25 VT220 Flemish 26 VT220 Portuguese 27 VT220 French 28 VT220 Swiss German 29 VT220 Swiss French 30 VT220 Italian 31 VT220 Dutch 32 VT220 Finnish 33 VT220 Canadian 34 VT220 Hebrew 35 reserved 36 39 VT220 UK 40 reserved 41 N 122 Nokia 42 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 33 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 8 Keyboard Type Settings in NVRAM Continued Keyboard ae N 102 French Canadian 43 N 102 Belgian French 44 N 102 French Canadian CSA 1992 45 N 102 Swiss French 46 N 102 OADG Kana 47 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible 48 Hitachi Kana 49 N 108 UK 50 N 108 Flemish 51 N 108 Canadian English 52 N 108 Canadian French 53 N 108 Danish 54 N 108 Finnish 55 N 108 French 56 N 108 German 57 N 108 Netherlands 58 N 108 Italian 59 N 108 Norwegian 60 N 108 Portuguese 61 N 108 Spanish 62 N 108 Swedish 63 N 108 Swiss French 64 11 34 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 8 Keyboard Type Settings in NVRAM Continued Keyboard ae N 108 Swiss German 65 Nokia 108 UK 66 Nokia 108 Flemish 67 Nokia 108 Canadian English 68 Nokia 108 Canadian French 69 Nokia 108 Danish 70 Nokia 108 Finnish 71 Nokia 108 French 72 Nokia 1
194. Data 6 30 Allowing Access from Specified Hosts 6 30 Preventing All Remote Access to the Terminal s Configuration Data 6 31 Protecting Configuration Parameters 6 32 Using the protect Command 6 32 Using the get protect Command 6 33 Using the set protect Command 6 33 Removing Parameter Protection 6 33 Disabling the Configuration Utilities or the Console 6 34 Configuring the Apply Command 6 34 Protocols for Auto Save 6 35 Configuring Auto Save to NVRAM 6 35 Configuring Auto Save to a File 6 36 Disabling Auto Save 6 36 Changing the Name of the Auto Save File 6 36 Specifying the Data to Save 6 37 Contents hapter 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Use Overview 7 1 Font Access Sequence 7 2 Font Names 7 2 Wildcards in Font Names 7 4 Bitmap and Outline Font Naming 7 4 Specifying Fonts for Clients 7 4 Obtaining Fonts 7 5 Font Download Methods 7 6 Considerations in Using Downloaded Fonts 7 6 Problems with Client Font Requests 7 6 The Font Path 7 6 Font Formats 7 7 Font Directories and Files 7 8 Font Directories 7 8 Font Files 7 8 Font Management Files 7 9 NCD Font Management Utilities 7 10 Built In Fonts Summary 7 11 Alternative Methods of Changing the Current Font Path 7 11 Changing the Current Font Path Using TELNET 7 11 Changing the Current Font Path Using the xset Client 7 13 Setting the Default Font 7 13 Changing the Size of the Font Cache 7 14 Renaming the Font Management Files 7 15 Specifying Font Path
195. Description Corresponding Parameter Default Hosts Hosts listed in the Login Chooser login default hosts Restrict Host Choices User is restricted to selecting a login host from those listed in the Login Chooser login restrict host choices Disabled Networks Limits network connections for login disabled networks terminals on both TCP IP and DECnet networks Window Delay Time How long the terminal waits before login window delay time seconds displaying the login window when starting the login client from a command line XDM section XDM Manufacturer The XDM manufacturer display ID none Display ID read only XDM Display Class The XDMCP display class login xdm display class Using Configuration Menus 9 29 Using Change Setup Parameters Login Field Description Corresponding Parameter Begin Sending Length of time between keepalives login xdm keepalives begin Keepalives after sent to verify that the XDM session time minutes host is still running Wait for Keepalive Elapsed time from the start of XDM login xdm keepalives wait Responses for seconds dead session testing with no response from the login host before a failure is declared time Wait for Broadcasts for seconds How long the terminal waits for responses to the XDM broadcast query before displaying the results to the user in the Login Chooser login xdm broadcast wait time What to do
196. Disabling the Configuration Utilities or the Console on page 6 34 Configuring the Apply Command on page 6 34 Terminal Configuration Methods 6 1 Configuration Methods Overview Configuration Methods Overview All terminal configuration methods operate on the same database of terminal configuration information Daemons running in the terminal manage the terminal s configuration database This section briefly describes configuration system components Configuration Daemons The Configuration daemon loads the initial configuration from NVRAM when the terminal boots and reads the initial configuration file The daemon also provides both network and local access to all of the terminal s configuration data The User Preferences daemon provides network and local access to user preferences data only Configuration Parameters The two basic types of parameters are read write and read only Some parameters take single values others take several and others are organized into tables of values The parameters essential for terminal booting are saved in the terminal s NVRAM others must be loaded from remote configuration files when a terminal boots Parameters are grouped and named according to their functions for example the names of parameters in the boot group all start with boot For details about the different types of parameters and about parameter groupings see Parameter Types and Groups on page 6 5 Config
197. ESS Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module cannot interpret or identify the specified font User Action Make sure the font specified is entered correctly and that it is known to the X server Can t initialize the process Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module does not have sufficient memory to perform the desired action User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory Close any local clients that are not being used to free local memory 18 116 X Server Messages TERM Messages PROCTABERR Process table corrupted internal error PRTINUSE 7 PRTOFFLN REGIS Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support The printer is in use Severity Information Explanation The specified printer is currently in use User Action None Printer offline or not responding message Severity Warning Explanation The specified printer is offline or otherwise not responding to the print request as specified in the message User Action Verify that the correct port is specified for the printer and that printer resources are assigned correctly For a printer attached to a serial port verify that the user has selected the correct print option Regis graphics is not supported Severity Error Explanation The X server does not support ReGIS graphics User
198. Escape Sequences 12 38 N 97 N Kana Keyboard Escape Sequences 12 42 Using Compose Key Sequences 12 44 Support for Dead Keys 12 44 Typing Compose Sequences 12 44 Compose Sequence Table 12 45 VT320 Character Coding Conventions 12 51 Character Sets 12 51 Character Code Tables 12 52 hapter 13 Configuring Display PostScript DPS Overview 13 1 DPS Requirements 13 2 Using DPS Support Files 13 3 The PostScript Resource File 13 3 Sections in the PostScript Resource File 13 3 Creating or Updating the PostScript Resource File 13 5 The Virtual Memory File 13 7 The Color Rendering File 13 7 The Context Initialization File 13 7 Adobe Fonts for DPS 13 8 xvii Contents xviii Configuring the DPS Resource Path 13 10 Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients 13 11 Freeing the DPS Cache 13 12 Troubleshooting DPS 13 12 If the DPS Extension Fails to Start 13 12 File Service Problems 13 12 DPS Applications on Solaris Systems 13 13 Running AnswerBook 13 13 Running ImageTool 13 14 Running PageView 13 15 PEX Overview 14 1 The PEX X Server Module 14 2 PEX Fonts 14 2 PEX Requirements 14 3 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters 14 3 Setting the Parameters Listed in Change Setup Parameters 14 3 PEX Color Parameters 14 5 S the Parameters Listed in Change User Preferences 4 9 Specifying the Nominal Line Width 14 9 Specifying the Nominal Edge Width 14 9 Specifying the Nominal Marker Size 14 10 Specifying Surface Dithering 14 10
199. Explanation The TERM module has detected a problem with the network User Action Verify that the network is running and that the terminal is securely attached to the network Can t create an interface button Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot create the desired interface feature specifically one or more of the interface buttons This situation usually occurs when the terminal is running low on memory User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the desired action Close any unused local clients to free local memory ECORR Object line buffers corrupted internal error Severity Error Explanation Internal TERM memory is corrupted User Action Start the NCD Terminal Emulator a second time If the situation persists please contact NCD Technical Support 18 112 X Server Messages TERM Messages LINERR Lines are out of order internal error Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support LOGDIR Logfile directory is directory LOGFILE Severity Information Explanation The TERM module is using the specified directory for its logfile User Action None Can t open logfile for session Severity Error Explanation The TERM module cannot open a file for logging information about the current NCD Terminal Emulator session User Action Veri
200. Explanation The sendto system call failed on the terminal Message is the UNIX error description User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support ERRSHORTPKT recvfrom received short packet Severity Error Explanation The terminal received a truncated license packet User Action Try again If the problem occurs again restart ncdlicense on the license host ERRSOCKET socket failed message Severity Error Explanation The socket system call failed on the terminal Message is the UNIX error description User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support FAILCHECKOUT license checkout failed received NACK Severity Error Explanation ncdlicense refused to license the requested feature User Action Make sure that you have a license for the feature FLEXMSG FLEX1m message Severity Information Explanation The X server is reporting the most recent FLEXlm error message including the error numbers FLEXIm errors are described in the FLEXIm End 18 70 X Server Messages LICENSE Messages INVLICENSE User Manual If a UNIX operating system error is also involved the X server message also includes the UNIX error message and number User Action Check the FLEXIm End User Manual for a description of the problem n invalid license string license_string LICBADCHAR LICRI EMO
201. F21 F21 Pause 88 Alt_L 89 Line Feed 90 Return 91 bracketright braceright 92 Delete 93 F23 F23 Scroll_Lock Break 941 SunF37 95 F22 F22 Print 96 97 98 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 41 N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 6 N 107 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 99 100 101 102 quoteright asciitilde 103 F24 F24 KP_Equal 104 F18 F18 SunPaste 105 F33 F33 KP_1 End 106 107 Left F30 KP_4 108 F27 F27 KP_7 Home 109 110 111 112 Insert Insert KP_0 113 Delete Delete KP_Decimal 114 Down F34 KP_2 115 F31 F31 KP_5 116 Right F32 KP_6 117 Up F28 KP_8 118 Num_Lock 119 F25 F25 KP_Divide 120 121 KP_Enter 17 42 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 107 Sun Type 4 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 6 N 107 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 122 F35 F35 KP_3 Next 123 Back Space 124 KP_Add 125 F29 F29 KP_9 Prior 126 F26 F26 KP_Multiply 127 128 129 F15 F15 SunFront 130 1 F11 F11 Cancel 131 F13 F13 SunProp 132 KP_Subtract 133 F17 F17 SunOpen 134 F19 F19 Find 135 Help 1 OpenWindows compatibility necessitates that these keycodes do not match t
202. KENRING messages pertain to Token Ring communications If you are looking for a message that refers to the TOKENRING module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ACCESS adapter access violation Severity Error Explanation The X server attempted to access Token Ring reserved read only memory User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support ADAPTERFAIL PCMCIA adapter initialization failed Severity Fatal Explanation The Token Ring adapter failed or the X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support ADDRESS address for this unit 00 00 E5 nn nn nn Severity Information Explanation The terminal is using the specified Token Ring address User Action None 18 122 X Server Messages TOKENRING Messages CHECK CLOSED ERROR INITFAIL OPEN adapter CHECK error hex_values Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal adapter error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support adapter closed interface inactive Severity Error Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has detected a cable fault and has shut itself down User Action Verify that the cable is intact and securely fastened to the terminal internal adapter error Severity
203. LOADFAIL Severity Information Explanation The module is being unloaded from memory User Action None unable to unload module module Severity Error Explanation The module could not be unloaded User Action None X Server Messages 18 105 SERIALD Messages SERIALD Messages SERIALD messages pertain to the terminal s serial port s and the Serial daemon If you are looking for a message that refers to the SERIALD module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADCMD port bad cmd hex_value Severity Error Explanation The Serial or Parallel daemon has received an invalid serial or parallel protocol command User Action Make sure that your host side print program is properly configured to use the serial parallel protocol BADCONFIG port not enabled for printing Severity Error Explanation The specified port on the terminal is not configured for printing User Action Configure the terminal for printing to the specified port Make sure any host side requirements are in place DNETCLOSE port closed session from aa nnnn Severity Information Explanation The Serial daemon has closed the serial session with the specified DECnet host on the specified serial port User Action None DNETOPEN port opened session from aa nnnn Severity Information Explanation The Serial daemon has opened a serial session with the specified DEC
204. M module has discovered an irrecoverable error in the specified launcher configuration file User Action Verify that all entries in the launcher configuration file are correct and complete ECTION launcher connection message Severity Error Explanation The application launcher cannot connect to the local NCD Window Manager due to a catastrophic problem with the socket either the socket cannot be created or the socket has disappeared User Action Refer to the message to determine the best course of action EOMETRY Geometry for tool is out of range Severity Warning Explanation The values for the size of the specified tool are not valid This message usually occurs when the specified size of an icon box exceeds 2048x2048 User Action Correct the values specifying the size of the icon box The size of the icon box is measured in number of icons not pixels BADGRAB bad grab count n on grab server Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 134 X Server Messages WM Messages BADUNGRAB bad grab count m on ungrab server NOMENU RESTART SOCK ET Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support no such menu menu Severity Error Explanation The
205. MS BADPORT Severity Error Explanation The X server was unable to load modules from the configured directory User Action Make sure that the modules are in the correct location and accessible invalid parameters given for client Severity Error Explanation The specified local client does not recognize the command line options it received through the EXEC daemon User Action Verify that the command line options are correct for the specified client refused request from nnn nnan nnn nnn on bad port n Severity Error Explanation The EXEC daemon has received a request for connection from the specified host The EXEC daemon is refusing the request because the request did not originate from a privileged TCP port on the host Specifically the requesting TCP port number is equal to or greater than 1024 User Action Verify the host system is using the correct TCP port X Server Messages 18 41 EXECD Messages DISABLEDCMD command has been disabled command Severity Error Explanation Command cannot be executed because it has been configured as disabled User Action Remove command from the exec disabled commands remote configuration parameter LOADCMD error loading command command Severity Error Explanation The X server is unable to load a module needed to run the command User Action Make sure that the modules are present and in the correct location LOADDISABLED loading of modul
206. Matches on The terminal tries all file service file try all matches on open Open table entries that match when trying to access a file Failed Server Ignore How long a file server that has file failed server ignore timeout NFS Unmount Timeout seconds How long after the last reference to an NFS file service entry that the terminal notifies the server that access is no longer required file nfs unmount timeout 9 22 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters File Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Default VMS File Name Extension Default file extension appended to a filename when accessing a file on a file server that uses VMS style names file default vms file name extension Enable Floppy Filesystem Makes the local diskette drive accessible through the Local File Manager or from another host via NFS file enable floppy filesystem Enable NFS Server Starts the NFS Server daemon at boot time to permit NFS access to the local file system from remote hosts file enable nfs server Export Directory List Export file server mount points for NFS mounts of the local file system diskette or PCMCIA card file export directory list Fonts Parameters The parameters in the Fonts hide box affect how the terminal accesses fonts both bitmap fonts and fonts supplied by the font server Fonts Field Description Corresponding
207. NKHOST unknown host hostname Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal could not resolve the hostname of the remote print server User Action Examine the browser printer table entry and make sure that the hostname of the remote print server is correct RTLD Messages BADEXPMOD RTLD messages pertain to the dynamic loader which is responsible for loading X server modules If you are looking for a message that refers to the RTLD module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 incorrect exports module loaded Severity Error Explanation The export module that was found is incorrect for the current X server User Action Make sure that the X server is loading modules from the correct directory X Server Messages 18 103 RTLD Messages DISABLED loading for module has been disabled Severity Warning Explanation Module cannot be loaded because it has been disabled User Action Make sure that the desired module load policy has been configured through the modules load policy remote configuration parameter ERRLOAD error loading module Severity Error Explanation An error occurred while loading the module User Action Make sure that the host file system is accessible to the terminal Also make sure that you are using the correct server module versions ERROPEN error opening module file for module Severity Error Explanation The X serve
208. O p 1 1 1 SS3 q EscOq 2 2 2 SS3 r EscOr 3 3 3 SS3 s Esc Os 4 4 4 S53 t EscOt 5 5 5 SS3 u EscO u 6 6 6 SS3 v Esc O v 7 7 7 SS3 w Esc O w 8 8 8 SS3 x Esc O x 9 9 9 SS3 y Esc Oy r SS3 Esc Ol _ SS3 m EscOm SS3 n Esc On Enter Return Return SS3 M Esc O M PF1 SS3 P Esc O P 5S3 P Esc O P PF2 SS3 Q Esc OQ SS3 Q Esc OQ PF3 SS3 R Esc OR SS3 R Esc OR PF4 SS3 S EscOS SS3 S EscOS 12 38 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Table 12 14 N 108LK Function Key Escape Sequences VMS ULTRIX Key 8 bit 7 bit 8 bit 7 bit F1 hold screen hold screen hold screen hold screen F2 print screen print screen printscreen print screen F3 F4 F5 Break Break Break Break F6 CSI17 Esc 17 CSI17 Esc 17 F7 CSI 18 Esc 18 CSI18 Esc 18 F8 CSI19 Esc 19 CSI19 Esc 19 F9 CSI2 0 Esc 20 CSI2 0 Esc 2 0 F10 CSI2 1 Esc 2 1 CSI2 1 Esc 21 F11 CSI23 Esc 23 Esc _ Esc F12 CSI 2 4 Esc 24 Backspace Backspace F13 CSI25 Esc 25 Newline Newline F14 CSI 26 Esc 2 6 CSI2 6 Esc 2 6 Help CSI2 8 Esc 2 8 CSI2 8 Esc 2 8 Do CSI29 Esc 29 CSI29 Esc 29 F17 CSI3 1 Esc 31 CSI3 1 Esc 31 F18 CSI3 2 Esc 32 CSI3 2 Esc 32 F19 CSI3 3 Esc 33 CSI3 3 Esc 33 F20 CSI3 4 Esc 3 4 CSI3 4 Esc 3 4 P5 is the break key in a s
209. OEM path Test RAM at boot 1 bit 0 Enabled boot test ram 1 Disabled Boot source 1 1 bit 0 Network 1 Local file system Screen saver 1 bit 0 Off 1 On Background 1 bit 0 Black 1 White Auto boot after reset or display Boot 1 bit 0 Boot Monitor Monitor prompt 1 Auto boot boot automatically MOP boot 1 bit 0 Enabled boot mop 1 Disabled 11 28 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Continued Location Description Size Values Default in Bold 0x36 Discover IP address from the network or 2 bits 0 NVRAM from NVRAM 1 DHCP BOOTP ip use address discovery RARP Default settings 1 bit set by the Boot Monitor Use ICMP to determine subnet mask 1 bit 0 Enabled boot send broadcast icmp for subnet 1 Disabled mask Boot via MOP with filename 1 bit 0 Disabled boot mop with file name 1 Enabled Reserved 3 bits 0x37 Reserved 1 byte Device Configuration 0x38 Type of keyboard attached to the terminal lbyte See Table 11 8 xserver keyboard type 0x39 IBM PS2 or Windows 95 compatible 1 bit 0 Other keyboard keyboard this is the default keyboard and 1 IBM keyboard the default for the N 101 N 102 keyboard group Token Ring speed valid 1 bit set by the Boot Monitor Token Ring speed 1 1 bit 0 4Mbitring 1 16 Mbit ring Synchronize monitor on green HMX and 1 bit Hardware dependent older terminals only Use monitor timing 1 bit Hardwar
210. RAM To disable a request set its parameter to false For example boot tcpip unit address with path fil fals Note There are no configuration parameters for the X server file named using the terminal s Ethernet address These attempts can only be disabled by using the NVRAM utility For more information see Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Booting xX Server Loading 4 5 Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Table 4 5 Download Sequence Parameters boot tcpip unit address file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section gt Try TCP IP Unit Address File Relative Pathname Requests The file named using the hexadecimal representation of the terminal s IP address boot tcpip product name and memory size file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section gt Try TCP IP Product Name and Memory Size File The file named using the product name with the memory size as a suffix boot tcpip product name file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section Try TCP IP Product Name File Absolute Pathname The file named using the product name alone Requests boot tcpip unit address with path file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section gt Try TCP IP Unit Address with Path File The file named using the hexadecimal representation of the te
211. RARP 3 10 relative pathname requests 4 2 4 6 remote reset 16 10 to 16 13 using ncdreset 16 11 to 16 12 using unit administrative status 16 12 reverse name request 3 15 5 12 TFTP requests default 4 2 disabling 4 5 location of X servers 4 12 manual boot 4 18 order of 4 8 through a gateway 3 8 to 3 10 11 7 11 8 X server loading 4 1 to 4 15 see also address discovery X server boot monitor inverse video 9 14 boot mop 4 5 9 15 boot mop with file name 9 15 boot nfs directory 9 15 BOOTP DHCP etc bootptab file 3 5 to 3 10 diagnostic messages 18 37 enabling 3 4 entry example 3 7 3 9 option tags supported 3 6 bootpd 8 backup boot host specifying 4 16 enabling 3 4 boot persistent loading 9 14 boot previous server 9 14 boot previous source 9 14 boot second source 9 14 boot send broadcast icmp for subnet mask 3 14 9 15 boot tcpip broadcast boot request 4 4 9 15 Index 4 boot tcpip desired server 9 3 9 14 boot tcpip product name and memoty size file 4 6 9 15 boot tcpip product name and memoty size with path file 4 6 9 15 boot tcpip product name file 4 6 9 15 boot tcpip product name with path file 4 6 9 15 boot tcpip second server 9 14 boot tcpip third server 9 14 boot tcpip unit address file 4 6 9 15 boot tcpip unit address with path file 4 6 9 15 boot test ram 9 13 boot tftp directory 9 15 boot third source 9 14 broadcast address 3 12 Broadcast Address Change Setup Parameters 9 25 Broadcast
212. Setup key modifiers Displays the NCDware Console To disable this command do not define a Setup key and modifiers setup debug Debug key modifiers Aborts the X server placing the terminal in the control of the Boot Monitor To disable this command do not define a debug key and modifiers debug Table 17 9 Permitted Values in Keyboard Description Files Value Syntax QUOTEDSTRING An ASCII string of characters within quotes NUMBER A positive integer SCANCODE NUMBER KEYCODE NUMBER KEYSYM A string representing an X keysym name Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 59 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Table 17 9 Permitted Values in Keyboard Description Files Continued Value Syntax LISTofKEYSYM Any of the following KEYSYM KEYSYM LISTofKEYSYM KEYSYM LISTofKEYSYM LISTofKEYSYM can also be an empty list MODIFIER Any of the following shift mod2 control mod3 lock mod4 mod1 mod5 Specifying Dead Key Processing The following keyboard description file statement specifies a sequence of keys to press to generate another key when local dead key processing is enabled deadkey KEYSYM LISTofKEYSYM KEYSYM The range of LISTofKEYSYM is 1 2 The resulting keysym must have been defined before this command so that the resulting table can be correctly populated In
213. Special characters called dead keys create automatic compose sequences When a dead key is pressed the next key you press determines the composed character The N 102 French and Swiss keyboards provide dead key support for the following accent marks LI On the French keyboard the dieresis and circumflex LI On the Swiss keyboard the acute accent grave accent circumflex tilde and dieresis When using these keyboards you must first set the keyboard type to French or Swiss by using the Boot Monitor keyboard menu before booting For information about the Boot Monitor keyboard menu see Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Typing Compose Sequences To quickly test compose sequences display the Terminal Host Chooser Console Terminals New Terminal Type the compose sequences in the Service window To type compose sequences in an NCD Terminal Emulator window ncdterm or ncdrunterm 1 Make sure the eightBitInput resource is set to true For example NCDrunterm eightBitInput true 2 Start the NCD Terminal Emulator and type o stty istrip cs8 3 Ifyou are using the vi text editor to enter the compose sequences set the environment variable LC_CTYPE to iso_8859_1 12 44 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Compose Key Sequences 4 Find the character you want in the Character column in Table 12 20 On the N 108LK keyboard press the Compose Cha
214. System distribution plus several outline fonts If you installed fonts when you ran ncdinstall you should have some or all of the following fonts installed 1 Fonts rendered for both 75 and 100 dpi dots per inch monitors d Miscellaneous fonts C1 DECwindows fonts 1 Java and NCD Mosaic Browser fonts You can obtain X fonts from vendors of the X Window System from font vendors and from the public domain In addition your host computers may already have fonts installed on them Fonts must be in a format that the terminal can use See Font Formats on page 7 7 The NCDware distribution also includes outline or scalable fonts For information about outline fonts see Usable Font Formats with a Font Server on page 7 20 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 5 Font Use Overview Font Download Methods Fonts can be accessed from the network by using the file service and network protocols or by using one more font servers If you are accessing fonts through the file service you can use the following network protocols 1 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol the default method LY NFS Network File Service usually faster than TFTP LI DAP Data Access Protocol used in DECnet networks only By default an NCD terminal searches for fonts on the boot host the host from which the X server is downloaded If you have set up initial file server hosts the terminal also searches for fonts on the initial file servers Cons
215. TFTP should be placed in this directory Configuring File Access through NFS The terminal can use NFS for accessing all files and for downloading an X server When accessing files through NFS the X server temporarily mounts the file system onto its internal path Configuring the Host for NFS File Access For files to be available through NFS the host directories must be exported This ensures that NFS clients such as NCD terminals can access the directories For example on SunOs 1 To export the default directory for X server files add a line describing the directory in the etc exports file For example tftpboot or usr tftpboot Files can be exported to specific terminals exported to everyone or exported to unknown the default name for an NCD terminal 2 On the host where the directory resides enter the following command exportfs a Setting User and Group IDs for NFS File Access If the host exporting the file systems restricts mount requests to certain user or group IDs set the file nfs uid and file nfs gid parameters to the relevant user ID UID and group ID GID These parameters are not available in the Setup menus 5 22 Configuring Network Services Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files The default value for both parameters is 2 which corresponds to nobody NFS handles requests that do not have a valid UID and GID by mapping them to the anonymous user By default the anonymous user
216. TSYSSTATUS host nan nnn nnn nnn set system status to status na Severity Information Explanation Reports the SNMP reset status of the terminal See the ncdreset man page for more information User Action None X Server Messages 18 27 CONFIGD Messages SYNTAX line n syntax error at string Severity Error Explanation The specified line contains an error beginning with the specified string User Action Make sure that the parameter its value s and the commands are correct TIMEZONEFAIL unable to set time zone to timezone file TOOMANYRI lt Severity Error Explanation The terminal was unable to load the timezone file specified by the time zone configuration parameter User Action Check to make sure that the timezone files were installed correctly and are accessible through the terminal s file service table EADS nested file reads exceeded limit of n ignoring file file Severity Error Explanation The Configuration daemon accepts nested files up to ten levels and does not read included files that exceed this limit User Action Do not nest files to more than ten levels ERIFYFAILED failed to verify filesystem_name filesystem Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot verify the structure of the specified file system as requested User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support ERIFYING verifying filesystem_nam
217. Terminal Accesses Files on page 5 13 For information on accessing local files on a PCMCIA card or diskette see the System Administrator s Guide Li Address resolution service The Address Resolution Protocol ARP translates between hardware addresses and IP addresses Translations can also be configured manually For information on address resolution see Configuring the ARP Cache Resolved Addresses on page 5 5 1 Name service By using a name service you can specify hostnames instead of network addresses in terminal configuration parameters or in commands that require a network address NCD terminals can use either the IEN 116 Internet Engineering Notes name service or the Domain Name System DNS You can also store translations in a terminal s local name cache For information on name service see Using a Name Service on page 5 7 5 2 Configuring Network Services Summary of Network Service Defaults and Alternatives Summary of Network Service Defaults and Alternatives Table 5 1 lists the default network services setup of an NCD terminal the alternatives and where to get more information When you add a terminal to the network using ncdinstall the defaults are in effect Table 5 1 Default Network Services and Alternatives terminal s ARP cache as addresses are resolved ARP table entries last for 20 minutes Change the timeouts for complete and incomplete entries Defaul
218. Terminal Emulator 12 1 Configuring Local Services in the Terminal Host Chooser LI Options and resources The ncdterm 1 man page provides details on command line options and resources 4 Configuring printing from the Terminal Emulator Items in the NCD Terminal Emulator s File menu allow the user to send the current screen or the current session log to a printer attached to the X terminal s serial or parallel port For successful printing you must configure the port and the NCD Terminal Emulator See the System Administrator s Guide for configuration instructions 0 Downloadable character sets The NCD Terminal Emulator supports the use of downloadable character sets DRCS See Chapter 17 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions for more information m Technical details For more detailed technical information about VT320 terminal emulation see Digital Equipment Corporation publications Configuring Local Services in the Terminal Host Chooser The Terminal Host Chooser provides easy access to the Local File Manager daemon filed Diagnostic daemon diagd and Configuration daemon configd The showLocal resource must be set to true the default for these services to be listed automatically in the Terminal Host Chooser The user can select Show Local from the Chooser s View menu to control the display locally To access the Local File Manager and Configuration daemon through the Terminal Host Choo
219. Terminal loads a configuration file with a non standard name config custom file 9 18 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Configuration Fields Description Corresponding Parameter Try Unit Name as Filename Add Domain to Unit Name as Filename The terminal s hostname is used as the filename for the initial configuration file with or without the domain name as a suffix config unit name file config add domain to unit name as filename Try Unit Ethernet Address as Filename The terminal s Ethernet address is used as the filename for the initial configuration file config unit ethernet address file Try Unit IP Address as The terminal s IP address in config unit ip address file Filename hexadecimal format is used as the filename for the initial configuration file Use Decimal IP Address The terminal s IP address in config use decimal ip Notation as Filename decimal format is used as the filename for the initial configuration file address notation as filename Try Unit NCDnet Address as Filename The terminal s DECnet address is used as the filename for the initial configuration file config unit ncdnet address file Try Generic Filename The standard configuration filename ncd_std is used as the filename for the initial configuration file config generic file Configuration Daemon Service section
220. The parameters in the LAT hide box affect terminal communications using the LAT Local Area Transport protocol LAT Field Description Corresponding Parameter Service Groups list LAT service advertisements that are added to the LAT service directory lat service groups Service Directory Max Size Maximum number of entries in the LAT service directory can only be increased from Change Setup Parameters lat service directory max size Connect Timeout seconds Elapsed time between a connection attempt and a lack of response before failure is declared lat connect timeout Circuit Flush Timeout milliseconds Length of time input characters are queued before the terminal flushes data by sending a packet to the host lat circuit flush timeout Keepalive Timeout seconds Length of time an established connection is inactive before a keepalive packet is sent lat keepalive timeout Using Configuration Menus 9 27 Using Change Setup Parameters LAT Field Description Corresponding Parameter Retransmission Timeout milliseconds Elapsed time between retransmissions of LAT data packets on an established connection lat retransmission timeout Retransmission Limit Number of times a LAT packet is retransmitted before the connection is considered a failure lat retransmission limit Licenses Parameters The parameters in the Licenses hide box
221. Try to reduce the length of the path to the Java modules NOMEM could not allocate buffer for command string Severity Error Explanation The desktop launcher was not able to allocate space for the command buffer to be sent to the JVM User Action Close local clients or remote clients to free memory NOURL no URL specified Severity Error Explanation No URL that contains an applet was sent to the desktop code User Action Specify an URL when calling the desktop code 18 36 X Server Messages DHCP Messages DHCP Messages INFLEASE DHCP module messages pertain to the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol support If you are looking for a message that refers to the DHCP module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 Infinite IP address lease acquired NEWLEASE Severity Information Explanation The terminal has acquired an IP address that it does not need to renew User Action None New IP address lease acquired expires in m seconds Severity Information Explanation The terminal has acquired an IP address that it is permitted to use for n seconds before it must renew the lease User Action None NOLEASE Unable to renew IP address lease TCP IP network being halted NORESPONSE seconds u Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal was unable to renew its lease so it must disable its TCP IP pro
222. Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 30 2 at 31 F4 32 F17 F17 SunOpen 33 C 34 X 35 D 36 E 37 4 dollar 38 3 numbersign 39 F5 40 F18 F18 SunPaste 41 space 42 V 43 F 44 T 45 R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 F19 F19 Find 49 N 50 B 51 H 52 G Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 47 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 53 Y 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 F20 F20 SunCut 57 Multi_key 58 M 59 J 60 U 61 7 ampersand 62 8 asterisk 63 F8 64 Meta_L 65 comma less 66 K 67 I 68 O 69 0 parenright 70 9 parenleft 71 F9 72 Meta_R 73 period greater 74 slash question 75 L 17 48 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 76 semicolon colon 77 P 78 minus undersco
223. Unknown Port Total number of received UDP datagrams for which there were no applications at the destination port udp packets received with unknown port Packets Transmitted Total number of UDP datagrams sent from the terminal udp packets transmitted 10 26 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes UDP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Listener Table Table of IP addresses and ports for the UDP listener udp listener table Unit Statistics The statistics in this hide box report on miscellaneous terminal attributes Unit Field Description Corresponding Parameter Version Complete specification of the NCDware software version unit version Terminal Model Current terminal model unit terminal model Boot Monitor Version Boot PROM version number unit boot monitor version Keyboard Controller Description of the keyboard unit keyboard controller Version controller version SNMP System Object Authoritative identification of the unit snmp system object id Id SNMP network management subsystem in the terminal Time Since Boot seconds How long since the terminal last booted unit time since boot Idle Time seconds Estimated time since booting during which the X server was not performing any useful tasks unit idle time TCP IP Service Level A value that indi
224. VE Severity Error Explanation n is an error value The license string license_string is invalid User Action Correct the license string in the remote configuration file NVRAM or the license dat file For floating and site licenses you must use the Imreread utility to instruct Imgrd to reread the license dat file and you must restart ncdlicense bad character char in license string Severity Error Explanation The license string contained an invalid character Valid characters for 16 character license strings are abcdefABCDEF0123456789 Valid characters for 12 character license strings are abcdefghijklm ABCDEFGHIJKLM User Action Correct the license string in the remote configuration file or the license dat file For floating and site licenses you must use the Imreread utility to instruct the Imgrd to reread the license dat file and you must restart ncdlicense could not validate license disabling features Severity Error Explanation The terminal tried to return a license but the FLEXlm license manager did not accept it User Action None X Server Messages 18 71 LICENSE Messages LICWRONGL ENGTH license string is not n characters Severity Error Explanation The license string contained in the remote configuration file or the license dat file has the wrong number n of characters User Action Correct the license string in the remote configuration file or the license dat file For flo
225. VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible N 108 Keysyms for VMS Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 8 KP_PF1 9 less greater 10 F11 11 F12 12 F13 13 Tab 14 quoteleft asciitilde 15 F2 16 F1 17 Control_L 18 Shift_L 19 20 Caps_Lock 21 Q 22 1 exclam 23 24 25 Alt_L Meta_L 26 Z 27 S 28 A 29 W 30 2 at 17 30 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible N 108 Keysyms for VMS Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 31 F4 32 33 34 36 37 dollar C X 35 D E 4 3 38 numbersign 39 F5 40 41 space 42 43 45 V F 44 T R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 49 50 51 52 K QO Z ae Zz 53 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 31 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible N 108 Keysyms for VMS Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 57 Alt_R 12 Meta_R 12 58 M 59 J 60 U 61 7 ampersand 62 8 asterisk 63 F8 64 65 comma less 66 K 67 I 68 O 69 0 parenright 70 9 parenleft 71 F9 72 73 period greater 74 slash
226. Values Result default fonts alias filename The X server uses the specified filename when attempting to locate the font alias management file Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 15 Specifying Font Path Aliases Specifying Font Path Aliases You can use font path aliases to create simple names for complex font directory names or font server specifications You can use such names for example in the configuration parameters used to set the font path To create font aliases enter the aliases and font directory names or font server specifications into the xserver font path alias table Setup Change Setup Parameters Fonts gt Font Name Table If you use font path aliases in a remote configuration file define the aliases and include an apply command before defining the font path Table 7 10 xserver font path alias table Parameter Table Entry Possible Values Result font path alias alias The alias to be mapped to a font directory or a font server specification font path value directory or Font directory name or font server specification font server The following is an example font alias table xserver font path alias table misc usr lib X11 fonts misc xview usr lib X11 fonts xview 75dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts 75dpi 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi falcon fonts tcp falcon 7000 RRR NR 7 16 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Displa
227. X Session Management 8 3 XDM Overview For hosts or networks on which XDM is not available users can log in through the NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm Using the NCD Terminal Emulator to log in is described in the NCDware User s Guide and managing the terminal emulator is described in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Advanced configuration and management of the NCD Terminal Emulator are described in this manual in Chapter 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Components of XDM XDM consists of both host and terminal software LY Hosts called managers that run the xdm daemon and offer login services LY NCD terminals that run XDMCP X Display Management Control Protocol Terminals send XDMCP queries requesting display management and hosts respond to terminal queries On XDM manager hosts configuration files control how XDM works The X11R5 and X11R6 versions of XDM provide the chooser program which can be configured to display a choice of login hosts on the terminal XDMCP Queries and Host Responses An NCD terminal can send three different types of queries Depending upon the type of query and the host and terminal configuration either a login banner or a Login Chooser appears on the terminal The three types of terminal queries are Broadcast query the terminal sends a general query to the network for any host running XDM to answer D Direct query the terminal requests c
228. X11 ncd dps usr lib X11 ncd dps When attempting to locate DPS resource files the X server looks first in usr lib X11 ncd dps and then in the default system location path path path The X server looks in the specified directory or directories when loading DPS resource files Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients To configure your environment so that X clients can access DPS outline fonts complete the following steps Note If you add new outline fonts you must complete all of the following steps If you use only the outline fonts included with the NCDware distribution you need only perform Step 5 Set your current working directory to the directory in which the DPS outline fonts reside by default usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Make sure that each outline font file has a pfa PostScript Font ASCII extension Use the ncdmkfdir 1 utility to add an entry to the fonts scale file for each link or file created in the previous step nedmkfdir currentworkingdir The fonts scale file which resides in the font directory has an entry for each font file that pairs the file with its XLFD name such as Symbol pfa adobe Symbol Medium r normal 0 0 0 0 P 0 adobe fontspecific ncdmkfdir works well with Adobe outline fonts If you use it on fonts from other sources in which the key values may be inaccurate the resulting fonts scale file may need to be corrected by hand While still in the font directory
229. Y Could not open display Severity Fatal Explanation The application could not open the display User Action Make sure that the correct display is set by checking the DISPLAY environment variable NOFILE Could not open file file Severity Fatal Explanation The X server failed to open the file specified User Action Make sure that L1 The file exists LI The file service table is configured for access to the file Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service File Service Table I The file is terminated properly with the MPEG I end code 18 82 X Server Messages MWM Messages NOTMPEG This is not an MPEG stream Severity Fatal Explanation The decoder could not find the MPEG I start code User Action Make sure that the file is either an MPEG I video stream or an MPEG 1 interleaved audio and video stream PRIVCM Using private colormap Severity Information Explanation The decoder installed a private colormap User Action None MWM Messages MWM messages pertain to the local Motif Window Manager mwm If you are looking for a message that refers to the MWM module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ALREADY window manager is already running Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has received a request to start the local Motif Window Manager when it is already running The duplicate request has failed User Action
230. a cmdtool session SOW bin cmdtool amp Start OpenLook Window Manager exec olwm Individual XDM Session Management Files For information on creating xsession files see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide Configuring the XDM Xaccess File The Xaccess file is used only by the X11R5 and X11R6 versions of XDM and is required on all hosts running X11R5 or X11R6 XDM Its function is to control access to the host If you are using the Login Chooser you do not need to configure this file unless the terminal is sending an indirect query and you want to configure the host s response The default file provided on the NCDware distribution is shown here This file allows all terminals to connect to the host XDMCP access file allow everybody If you edit the Xaccess file while XDM is running XDM automatically re reads the file and uses the new information the next time a terminal connects to the host Contents of an Xaccess File Entry File entries consist of hostnames patterns and macros 1 Hostnames are simple names or complete domain names To omit a terminal from the list of those allowed to connect to the host put an exclamation point in front of its name 1 A pattern includes one or more wildcard characters which are compared with the hostname of the terminal sending the query The wildcard characters allowed are the asterisk to match any number of characters Login and X Session Management 8 1
231. ackets indicate command options and bold italic text indicates a variable Table 6 2 Configuration Commands for Files and Interactive Use Command and Description set parameter value Sets the value of the specified parameter If you are modifying parameters interactively you must use the apply command to put them into effect The word set is optional apply Applies pending commands to the current configuration In a configuration file this command is usually optional end of file implies the apply command lock tand unlock 1 lock prevents other clients of the Configuration daemon from issuing commands unlock allows other clients of the Configuration daemon to issue commands 6 8 Terminal Configuration Methods The Configuration Language Table 6 2 Configuration Commands for Files and Interactive Use Continued Command and Description read nvram read filename Reads configuration information from a file or from NVRAM read nvram reads all of the configuration information stored in NVRAM read filename reads the configuration information stored in the specified file The include command is equivalent to read write nvram write filename parameter write filename all group changes read write read only Writes current configuration information to NVRAM or to the specified filename write nvram writes parameters saved in NVRAM from the cur
232. address When configuring BOOTP use the current address Both addresses are printed on the sticker on the terminal base and on the packing box The built in address always begins with 00 00 a7 for example 00 00 a7 11 2a 4b The current address is a bit reversed version of the built in address for example 00 00 e5 88 54 d2 Booting Address Discovery 3 7 Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery The current address is displayed by the Boot Monitor during booting Both the current address and the built in address are displayed in Statistics Show Version The current address is also displayed in Statistics gt Show Statistics Network Inter faces Interfaces Table and in Statistics Show Statistics gt Token Ring Interface Table 1 If you use BOOTP DHCP to specify the X server to be downloaded by the terminal add the X server filename and the X server directory name if not specified in the global or template entry If you do not specify the X server in the etc bootptab file the Boot Monitor uses the default X server download sequence For information about this sequence see Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading If you specify an X server file in etc bootptab and bootpd cannot locate the file the terminal cannot download an X server In that situation the Boot Monitor displays its prompt and waits for a manual boot command Syntax errors in the file may also prevent the terminal from booting 0 If the term
233. affect the allocation of licenses Licenses Fields License Key Description License key for licensed software features Corresponding Parameter unit license key License Agents IP addresses of the hosts on which license server agents are running unit license agents License Agent Port Number UDP port on which the license server listens unit license agent port Transaction Timeout seconds How long the terminal waits for a reply from the license agent unit license agent timeout Maximum Retries Maximum number of times the terminal tries to get a license from the proxy license server unit license agent retries Licensed Features Features currently licensed on the terminal read only unit licensed features Optional Features Optional software enabled for the terminal unit optional features 9 28 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Loadable Modules Parameters The parameters in the Loadable Modules hide box affect the loading of X server modules Loadable Modules Fields Description Corresponding Parameter Loadable Modules Directory containing the loadable modules directory Directory modules Load Policy When modules are loaded or if a modules load policy module is disabled Login Parameters The parameters in the Login hide box affect login through XDM and DECwindows Login Field
234. ages 18 74 LOCALDEV Messages 18 77 LOGIN Messages 18 78 MIRRORD Messages 18 81 MPEGPLAY Messages 18 82 MWM Messages 18 83 NCD Mosaic Browser Messages 18 84 NCDDM Messages 18 86 NETD Messages 18 87 NETFILE Messages 18 87 NETSRV Messages 18 93 OPENGL Messages 18 94 PPPD Messages 18 96 PRINTAPIS Messages 18 99 RTLD Messages 18 103 SERIALD Messages 18 106 SIE Messages 18 108 SNMPD Messages 18 108 TERM Messages 18 109 TOKENRING Messages 18 122 UI Messages 18 125 VIDEO VIDEODECODER and VIDEOPLAYER Messages 18 127 WINCEN Messages 18 127 WIRELESS Messages 18 128 Contents WM Messages 18 133 XREMOTE Messages 18 136 XRPRINTD Messages 18 138 XSERVER Messages 18 139 XT Messages 18 141 Index xxiii Contents XXIV 1 About this Manual This chapter provides information about this manual and other NCD publications Intended Audience Purpose This manual is intended for system administrators and network administrators who are responsible for 1 Setting up NCD network computers also called NCD terminals in this manual for networked use 1 Setting up the user s work environment The manual assumes familiarity with the UNIX operating system the X Window System X TCP IP and local area networks Ethernet or Token Ring If you are not familiar with X NCD recommends the series of books published by O Reilly amp Associates Inc The series includes books for users and for system administ
235. ain suffix is the same as the domain name obtained from the Internet authority For example the parameter setting specifying NCD s default domain suffix is tcpip dns default domain ncd com Table 5 7 tcpip dns default domain Parameter Possible Values Result default nil nil No suffix is applied to hostnames in name service searches domain suffix The suffix applied to hostnames in name service searches Configuring Network Services 5 9 Using a Name Service Configuring the Name Translation Table Local Name Cache Translations are automatically placed in the local name cache If your site does not run a name service you can place translations into the table manually The terminal maintains the local name cache in the tcpip name local cache parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt TCP IP Name Service gt Local Name Cache Table 5 8 lists the entries in each row of the table Table 5 8 tcpip name local cache Table Entries Table Entry Possible Values Result name default nil hostname Hostname discovered through the name service or added manually address default 0 0 0 0 IP address IP address corresponding to the hostname lifetime default 0 integer The time in seconds relative to the time the terminal was booted at which the entry becomes invalid By default case is considered when the terminal searches for a name in the local name cache To
236. aintenance Operations Protocol boot requests disabling 4 5 order of use in booting 4 8 server download sequence 4 1 4 3 MOP Identify Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 31 MOP Reset Password Change Setup Parameters 9 11 Motif Window Manager diagnostic messages 18 83 Mouse Buttons Change Setup Parameters 9 25 mouse configuration parameters for 9 25 1 MPEGPLAY messages 18 82 multi homed hosts 3 15 MWM messages 18 83 N N 101 keyboards Boot Monitor accessing from 17 13 escape sequences in Terminal Emulator 12 35 to 12 37 keycodes 17 14 keymap 17 15 to 17 20 LEDs 17 13 legends 17 14 Setup key combination 17 13 Windows 95 compatible version 17 13 N 102 keyboards dead keys in Terminal Emulator 12 44 escape sequences in Terminal Emulator 12 35 to 12 37 N 107 keyboards Boot Monitor accessing from 17 36 keycodes 17 37 keymap 17 38 to 17 43 LEDs 17 36 legends 17 37 Setup key combination 17 36 Index N 108 keyboards Boot Monitor accessing from 17 21 keycodes 17 23 keymap 17 24 to 17 35 LEDs 17 21 legends 17 23 N 108LK escape sequences in Terminal Emulator 12 38 to 12 41 N 108LK function keys in Terminal Emulator 12 28 Setup key combination 17 21 N 123 keyboards Boot Monitor accessing from 17 44 keycodes 17 45 keymap with OpenWindows 17 46 to 17 53 LEDs 17 44 legends 17 45 N 97 keyboards Boot Monitor accessing from 17 4 escape sequences in Terminal Emulator 12 42 to 12 43 keycodes
237. al You can specify a customized set of local clients that appear at startup System Administrator s Guide You can configure a customized Login Chooser or specify that only a login banner appears Chapter 8 Login and X Session Management System Administrator s Guide You can configure the terminal to display a Terminal Host Chooser for the user to log in through the NCD Terminal Emulator Chapter 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator System Administrator s Guide Booting Defaults 2 5 Summary of Booting Alternatives 2 6 Booting Defaults 3 Booting Address Discovery This chapter describes alternative methods of obtaining the network information necessary for the terminal to boot and to participate on the network The following topics are covered in this chapter COOUCCHCOC Summary of Address Discovery Protocols on page 3 1 Changing the Order of Network Information Requests on page 3 2 Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery on page 3 3 Using RARP for Address Discovery on page 3 10 Storing Addresses in NVRAM on page 3 11 Setting the Broadcast Address on page 3 12 Configuring Subnet Mask Discovery on page 3 13 Communicating with Multi Homed Hosts on page 3 15 Using a Reverse Name Request on page 3 15 Summary of Address Discovery Protocols When an NCD terminal powers up it knows only its Ethernet or Token Ring addr
238. al Explanation The print job is first gathered into a buffer then sent to the remote print server In this case not enough memory could be allocated for the print gather buffer User Action Free terminal memory by closing unused local or remote clients adjusted gather buffer size to gb_size new print buffer size Severity Information Explanation The request for more memory for the print gather buffer was successful User Action None lost connection Severity Warning Explanation The connection to the LPD on the remote print server was lost User Action None sending to print server print queue Severity Information Explanation A connection to the remote print server was established and the job will be spooled to the identified queue User Action None X Server Messages 18 101 PRINTAPIS Messages MEMCPFAIL memcopy of printer data failed Severity Error Explanation The printer data could not be placed in the print gather buffer User Action Try the print job again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support MOREMEM realloc ing for more print buffer space total_bytes bytes placed in print buffer length amount of additional data to be placed in print buffer gob_size current print buffer size MOREMEMFAIL Severity Information Explanation The print job exceeded the initial print gather buffer allocation so more memory is being obtained fo
239. al as 15 9 uses for 15 1 serial access control enabled 9 13 15 10 serial access control list 9 13 Index SERIALD messages 18 106 serial daemons lat service passwords 9 12 serial daemons table 9 35 serial interfaces table 9 35 12 4 15 2 15 10 Service Directory Max Size Change Setup Parameters 9 27 Service Groups Change Setup Parameters 9 27 set protect command Configuration language 6 32 6 33 Setup Boot Monitor keymapper for 11 18 navigating in 11 13 setting parameters 11 13 to 11 17 starting 11 12 Setup menus Console auto save 6 34 to 6 37 Change Quick Setup commands and buttons 9 1 to 9 2 fields corresponding parameters 9 3 to 9 6 fields described 9 3 to 9 6 remote terminal configuring 9 2 Change Setup Parameters commands and buttons 9 7 to 9 8 fields corresponding parameters 9 8 to 9 42 fields described 9 8 to 9 42 remote terminal configuring 9 8 Change User Preferences commands and buttons 9 43 to 9 44 fields corresponding parameters 9 44 to 9 54 fields described 9 44 to 9 54 remote terminal configuring 9 43 connecting to remote terminal through 9 2 disabling 6 34 Restore Defaults 6 27 see also terminal configuration remote configuration Show Console Message Timestamps Change User Preferences 9 46 Show Extended Font Diagnostics Change User Preferences 9 47 Show Low Memory Warning Box at Change Setup Parameters 9 39 Show Statistics Console commands and buttons 10 1 to 10 2 fi
240. al DECID Esc c identification Response CSI 62 1 2 6 8c Esc c Hard reset RIS Esc n Select locking shift of G2 character set LS2 Esc o Select locking shift of G3 character set LS3 OSC ps string NP Esc ps string NP For more information see Configuring Window and Icon Titles on page 12 30 OSC Mode Set icon and window titles Parameter variables are NP Any non printing character discarded string ASCII printable string maximum 511 characters ps 0 Usestring as new icon name and title 1 Use string as new icon name only 2 Use string as new title only OSC ps ND string NP Esc ps ND string NP For more information see Configuring Color Text on page 12 30 Color pair specification NCD specific Parameter variables are defined as follows ps 90 to 97 ND Any non digit character string foreground background NP Any non printing character 12 26 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Configuring the Status Line The status line is referred to in Digital documents as the 25th line of the display Because NCD Terminal Emulator windows may have more than 24 lines the status line must be treated as the hardware status line instead of line 25 The NCD implementation of the status line allows the programmer to create a new line that appears at the bottom of the window Normal programmatic editing operations are
241. al clients extensions libraries and protocols included in NCDware exist as X server modules All modules are listed in the online file modsmodel doc model is the model on which the modules run such as modshmx doc for the HMX family of terminals This file is installed in the modules directory which is described in Changing the X Server Module Location on page 4 11 The modules are also listed in the Release Notes The Change Quick Setup Console Lock Screen and Logout local clients are not loadable modules They are always available unless disabled Changing X Server Module Load Policy By default the terminal loads X server modules when a user or client needs them and unloads them when the user logs out or when the server needs memory This load method is called on demand 4 10 Booting X Server Loading Configuring X Server Module Loading X server modules can also be loaded at boot time At boot loading is useful for clients that take a long time to load such as the local Motif Window Manager The LAT server module must be loaded at boot to be available for use You can also disable server modules so that they cannot be loaded Disabled local clients appear in a dithered grayed out font in the Console menus To change X server module load policy list the modules you want to change and the desired load policies in the modules load policy remote configuration parameter not saved in NVRAM The parameter is a
242. al port a Summagraphics compatible digitizing tablet or a Logitech 3D mouse If you are using one of these input devices 1 Make sure the input device is specified in the xserver input extension device parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters Input Devices gt Input Extension Device This parameter is not saved in NVRAM Table 14 25 xserver input extension device Parameter Possible Values Results default tablet tablet Specifies a Summagraphics compatible digitizing tablet 3d mouse Specifies a Logitech 3D mouse Configuring PEX 14 13 Troubleshooting PEX D Set the mode of the serial port to input device in the serial interfaces table parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Serial Serial Interfaces Table This parameter is saved in NVRAM For example serial interfaces table 1 input device input device 9600 8 1 none none none Troubleshooting PEX The most common problems experienced in running PEX clients are clients that do not run and clients that run but look different on an NCD terminal If the PEX Client Does Not Run If you have trouble running a PEX client and cannot figure out why check the client documentation Common conditions that prevent clients from running are LI Some clients require that a variable be set in the user s environment LI Some clients require a pre existing error output file I Occasionally a client written for a 24 bit di
243. al strength of the last packet received The Statistics Table on the next page reports performance statistics for the wireless LAN adapter and corresponds to the pwireless statistics table parameter 10 28 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Wireless Statistics Table Entry Description Number of Hops The number of hop periods Number of Searches The number of searches for other Masters Times Master The number of times the terminal has been Master Times Resync The number of times the terminal synchronized to a new master Missed Syncs The number of sync messages missed RX Packets The number of data packets received TX Packets The number of data packets transmitted Lost CTS The number of times RTS was sent without receiving a CTS CTS Errors The number of times CTS retries expired ACK Errors The number of times ACK retries expired SID Mismatch The number of mismatched security IDs Missed SOBs The number of Start of B messages missed Corrupted Packets The number of packets that passed CRC but not length check Adapter Resets The number of times the wireless adapter had to reset for initialization or error recovery Send Timeouts The number of transmit timeouts Receive Timeouts The number of receive timeouts Antenna Status Changes The number of antenna status change connect disconnect interrupts received Roam Alarms
244. algorithm type 10 21 tcp send buffer size 5 32 9 36 TELNET for terminal configuration 6 28 for viewing messages 18 4 ports Configuration daemon 9 19 Diagnostic daemon 9 20 for configuring terminals 6 28 to 6 29 Local File Manager 9 21 User Preferences daemon 9 20 services in Terminal Host Chooser 12 3 Index Telnet Port Number Change Setup Parameters for Configuration daemon 9 19 for Diagnostic daemon 9 20 for Local File Manager 9 21 for User Preferences daemon 9 20 TERM messages 18 109 term see Terminal Emulator term default connect timeout 9 39 term default hosts 9 39 term delay lat display 9 39 terminal configuration access control 6 30 to 6 34 Boot Monitor Setup menus 11 12 to 11 19 default terminal configuration defined 6 2 diagnostic messages 18 17 methods overview 6 2 to 6 5 NVRAM utility 11 20 to 11 37 parameters groups 6 6 to 6 7 types 6 5 Setup menus Console 9 1 to 9 54 using SNMP 16 7 using TELNET 6 28 see also remote configuration remote configuration files Setup menus Console Setup Boot Monitor NVRAM Utility Terminal Default Connect Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 39 Terminal Emulator answer back message 12 12 character coding 12 51 to 12 59 character sets supported 12 51 color text configuring 12 30 configuration parameters for 9 6 9 39 Cursors menu 12 11 dead key support 12 44 diagnostic messages 18 109 disconnecting delay 12 12 Terminal Emulator continued escape sequenc
245. anation The Configuration daemon cannot find the network name of the system or terminal specified by the IP address User Action Verify that J The IP address is correct 1 The terminal s configuration database identifies the system that is to provide name service for the terminal 1 The name server is running and is accessible via the network NOIPLOOPBACK unable to set interface address for inet loopback message NOIPNETWORK Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set the Internet loopback address User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support unable to set IP address IP interface disabled message Severity Error Explanation The message should either be empty or address in use by another host User Action If the message is address in use by another host please contact NCD Technical Support Otherwise no action is needed X Server Messages 18 23 CONFIGD Messages NOLATGROUP unable to set LAT group codes message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set up the terminal as part of a LAT service group as requested User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support NOLOCALCONFIG no config file on local file system trying network Severity Information Explanation The X server cannot locate a configuration file on the local file system so it is trying to locate one on the network
246. ands Continued Command Function pi timeout NCD_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask Using ICMP protocol pings the host to determine the round trip time to get to the host and get back The default time before timing out timeout is 10 seconds Always specify the IP address of the terminal NCD_IP and the IP address of the host host_IP If you are pinging through a gateway supply the address of the gateway gateway_IP and the subnet mask subnet_mask if any rs Resets the terminal se Displays the initial Boot Monitor Setup menu See Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals on page 11 12 sm Shows the memory configuration tr 4 16 Sets the Token Ring interface speed ud Uploads an X server image to a host on a DECnet network un file NCD_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask Uploads an X server image to a host on a TCP IP network using NFS You can specify the X server image file file the IP address of the terminal NCD_IP and the IP address of the host host_IP If you are specifying either the host or IP address you must specify both and specify the filename If you are uploading through a gateway supply the address of the gateway gateway_IP and if you are using one the subnet mask subnet_mask Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 9 Using Boot Monitor Commands Table 11 2 Boot Monitor Commands Continued Command
247. ange User Preferences is composed of a series of hide boxes providing access to fields that correspond to remote configuration parameters in the pref group Change User Preferences has a menu bar with a File menu and a Sections menu a messages area and several buttons 1 The File menu provides commands for writing values to and reading values from files and NVRAM Save to File Specifies the name of a file to which all current parameter settings should be written A popup dialog box presents the default filename or the last filename entered during this session Read from File Specifies a file from which all parameter settings should be read for display in the Change User Preferences window Presents the default filename or the last filename entered during this session Connect to New Unit Presents a popup box requesting a terminal name and the config pref read only password or config pref read write password required for configuration data access Displays that terminal s Change User Preferences window Close Closes Change User Preferences 1 The Sections menu contains a listing of the Change User Preferences hide boxes allowing you an alternative way to select one to open You can also select a command to open or hide all hide boxes Using Configuration Menus 9 43 Using Change User Preferences The Messages area below the hide boxes displays Preferences daemon messages 1 The four buttons a
248. anges the terminal emulator from 80 to 132 column mode Clear Screen With clearScreenWithBlanks Specifies whether the terminal emulator clears Blanks the screen by erasing the entire screen or by inserting a screen full of blanks Enabling this option allows scrolling to previously displayed information on terminals connected to certain hosts The drawback to using this option is that it may use up the save line buffer quickly The default is false which clears the screen by erasing Curses Emulation curses Emulates a bug in the UNIX curses screen handling package Margin Bell marginBell Rings a bell when the cursor reaches the margin Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 9 Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus Table 12 3 Options Menu and Associated Resources Continued Menu Item Resource Name Action Strip Parity stripParity Strips parity from any data sent from the host so that the terminal emulator looks only at seven bit bytes Grab Keyboard secureKeyboard Directs keyboard input to the terminal Input emulator window Prevents another user from seeing key events being sent to the window ISO Latin 1 Font latin1Font Enables use of the ISO Latin Alphabet supplemental character set which includes letters with accents and diacritical marks required in many European languages Blink Cursor blinkCursor Specifies whether the cursor should blink Visibl
249. any parameter settings made by this user to be overridden by assignments in the two other included files the other files would have to be listed after the user s files For more information about saving files from Change Setup Parameters and Change Quick Setup see Configuring the Apply Command on page 6 34 Note Users can set and save preference settings using Change User Preferences and their settings can be loaded at session reset using the ncdloadprefs 1 utility invoked from a startup file such as an xsession or Xsession file For more information about saving and loading user preferences see the System Administrator s Guide Specifying Hosts for Loading Configuration Files You can designate one or two hosts called the primary and secondary initial file servers from which the terminal can download its configuration file Note If you do not designate initial file servers the terminal attempts to download a configuration file from the boot host the host from which the terminal downloaded its X server The terminal first attempts to download a configuration file from the primary file server host If that attempt fails the terminal tries the secondary file server host Terminals booted locally from a PCMCIA card can load configuration files from the network if you designate a default file server host For information about designating initial file servers and a default file server for a locally booted terminal see C
250. ap Fonts and the Font Server 7 3 Font Use Overview Wildcards in Font Names Any field in a font specification can be replaced by a wildcard which is a special character that allows any font to match the property represented by a wildcard 1 The asterisk wildcard replaces an entire field 1 The question mark wildcard replaces any single character For example the font name fixed bold r normal 13 120 _ matches these fonts misc fixed bold r normal 13 120 75 75 c 70 iso08859 1 misc fixed bold r normal 13 120 75 75 c 80 iso08859 1 When searching for a font the X server uses the first font it finds that meets all the criteria specified in the font name If you use wildcards instead of specifying all properties the X server uses the first font that matches the properties you specify Wildcards provide flexibility because a usable font can be substituted if the intended font is not found A complete font name specification with no wildcards may cause a client to fail if the X server cannot find the font that exactly matches the specification Bitmap and Outline Font Naming Bitmap font names differ from outline scalable font names in the amount of information specified A bitmap font name has data in all fields An outline font name has Os zeros in all of the size fields the size of the characters in pixels the size in tenths of points horizon
251. applies the appropriate scaling algorithm and sends the scaled bitmap to the X server Using a font server allows the X server to perform other operations while the font server locates parses and scales fonts and then returns the requested bitmaps to the X server When the X server receives the requested font it loads Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 19 Font Server Issues the font into its internal database making the font available to the client To the X server the font server is simply an element in its font path See Figure 7 1 Font Server mah Bitmap Fonts Outline Fonts Figure 7 1 Font Server Architecture The font server can be configured to forward requests that it cannot fulfill to an alternate font server Such daisy chained font servers are useful for load sharing and to widen the range of font sources The font server includes a security feature for limiting the X servers permitted to access fonts Usable Font Formats with a Font Server With a font server NCD terminals can use the following fonts T Outline fonts IBM Type 1 Adobe Bitstream Speedo I Bitmap fonts NCD SNF Server Normal Format PCF Portable Compiled Format BDF Bitmap Distribution Format DWE DECwindows Format HP SNF Hewlett Packard SNF 7 20 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Server Issues IBM SNF International Business Machine SNF DEC SNF
252. arker Size Table 14 18 pref pex nominal marker size Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 integer Standard width of marker primitives in pixels Range 1 to 64 Specifying Surface Dithering The pref pex dither flat shaded surface parameter controls flat shaded surface dithering Setup Change User Preferences PEX gt Dither Flat Shaded Surface Table 14 19 pref pex dither flat shaded surface Parameter Possible Values Result default by request by request Flat shaded surfaces are dithered only when the client requests it off Flat shaded surfaces are never dithered on Flat shaded surfaces are always dithered The pref pex dither interpolated surface parameter controls Gouraud shaded surface dithering half toning Setup Change User Preferences PEX gt Dither Interpolated Surface 14 10 Configuring PEX Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Table 14 20 pref pex dither interpolated surface Parameter Possible Values Result default on on Gouraud shaded surfaces are always dithered by request Gouraud shaded surfaces are dithered only when the client requests it off Gouraud shaded surfaces are never dithered Specifying Surface Interior Style Shading and Lighting The pref pex surface interior style parameter specifies how to render the interiors of surfaces Setup Change User Preferences PEX Surface I
253. ast information is affected by some escape sequences such as those that clear certain regions of the screen and by how much information the terminal emulator can store Scrolling affects terminal memory usage For more information about scrolling and memory usage see the description of the saveLines resource in the ncdterm 1 man page To turn off the scroll bars or change their location use the scrollbar resource also described in the ncdterm 1 man page Terminal Emulator Menus The menu bar provides access to menus for controlling other terminal emulation features The menu bar can be disabled using the menuBar resource Five menus are accessible from the menu bar File Options Fonts Cursors and Keys The File Menu Table 12 2 summarizes the commands in the File menu Table 12 2 File Menu Menu Item Action Redraw Redraws the contents of the display window Soft Reset Resets the terminal to the default state Hard Reset Does a soft reset deletes all content and clears any selection Close Connection Closes the current session and returns to the Terminal Host Chooser This item can be disabled using the disableExits resource For more information see the ncdterm 1 man page Start Debugging Log Writes the contents of the session to a log file This function requires special setup to execute correctly For more information see the ncdterm 1 man page 12 6 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulato
254. atement in line n ECTNUMBER Line n expecting number instead of arg Severity Error Explanation At line n anumber type argument is needed instead of arg User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n X Server Messages 18 59 KBM Messages EXPECTQUOTE Line n expecting quoted string instead of arg Severity Error Explanation At line n a quoted string such as a filename is needed instead of arg User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n INVALIDLEDCMD Line n invalid LED command command Severity Error Explanation The LED command is an invalid operation User Action Check the syntax and usage of the LED command in line n INVALIDLEDFUNC Line n invalid LED function function Severity Error Explanation The LED function is an invalid action User Action Check the syntax and usage of the LED function in line n INVALIDLEDNUM Line n invalid LED number LEDn must be in the range of 1 ton Severity Error Explanation The LED commands must refer to LEDs numbered in the range of 1 to the maximum number of LEDs n LEDn does not fall in that range User Action Check the syntax and usage of the LED command in line n INVALIDNUMLED Line n invalid number of LEDs LEDn must be in the range of O to 4 Severity Error Explanation At line n the number of LEDs must be in
255. ater than zero User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support ETSOCKETOPT unable to set protocol socket option option message Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot set the specified socket option for the reason given User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 9 Messages Common to All Modules BADSOCKET module unable to create protocol socket message BADWRITE Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot create the specified socket for the reason given User Action If the reason given is no buffer space try increasing the buffers allocated in the net minimum data buffers parameter Otherwise please contact NCD Technical Support write error on file message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot write to the specified file for the reason given This situation usually occurs if the file does not have write access or if there is not enough memory User Action Verify that 1 The file has write access LI The filename is specified correctly 1 There is sufficient memory to perform the operation CLOSE closing file_type file INITUI Severity Information Explanation The reporting module is closing the specified file as requested User Action None unable to initialize user interfac Severity Fatal Explanation The reporting module cann
256. atically on boot automatically true boot automatically yes 6 12 Terminal Configuration Methods The Configuration Language Choices Many parameters take specific choices For example the exec startup commands parameter takes the command names of local clients such as term and login 4 Filenames For parameters that take filenames as arguments you can always specify filenames as absolute pathnames in the form a b c Parameters for which there is a default directory accept relative pathnames as well Syntax Rules Syntax rules for setting remote configuration parameter values are described in the following list 1 Case Uppercase and lowercase characters are not distinguished in parameter names choices or Boolean values You may enter them in the form you find most readable For example the following assignments are identical functionally boot automatically true Boot automatically True BOOT AUTOMATICALLY TRUE When values are not part of the configuration language however case is preserved For example In the xserver initial x resources parameter you can set client resources Values must follow the same form as the resource settings in a resources file such as Xdefaults Filenames are interpreted exactly you enter them Quoted strings are interpreted as you enter them 1 End of line If a statement extends past the end of line you can use a backslash to
257. ating and site licenses you must use the Imreread utility to instruct Imgrd to reread the license dat file and you must restart ncdlicense NACK received NACK integer Severity Information Explanation Licenses for the requested feature are unavailable The integer must be interpreted by NCD Technical Support User Action None NOCONN connection to host_IP failed message NOFORF RIT Severity Error Explanation The terminal failed to connect to the license agent running on host_IP The X server reports the UNIX error description message User Action Verify that ncdlicense and Imgrd are running on host_IP failed to send LM_FORFEIT Severity Error Explanation The terminal was unable to return a license to the license manager The terminal will not include the feature in its heartbeat routine status message to ncdlicense so the license eventually returns to the license pool User Action None 18 72 X Server Messages LICENSE Messages NOHEARTBEAT failed to send LM_HEARTBEAT Severity Error Explanation The terminal failed to send a heartbeat routine status message to ncdlicense which results in its licenses being returned to the license manager The terminal must then request new licenses User Action If the problem persists reboot the terminal If it continues after rebooting contact NCD Technical Support NOLICENSE failed to obtain license for featureA
258. ation Explanation The X server is using the specified domain for this terminal User Action None X Server Messages 18 19 CONFIGD Messages FORMATFAILED failed to format filesystem_name filesystem Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot format the specified file system as requested User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support FORMATSUCCESS successfully formatted filesystem_name filesystem Severity Information Explanation The X server successfully formatted the specified file system as requested User Action None FORMATTING formatting filesystem_name filesystem Severity Information Explanation The X server is formatting the specified file system as requested User Action None GATEWAYBADNET gateway nnn nnn nnn nnn is not on local net Severity Error Explanation The specified gateway does not reside on the local network User Action Correct the gateway address GETONLY line n parameter parameter is get only Severity Error Explanation The specified parameter on the given line has read only access it cannot be changed to a different value User Action To change the value of the parameter first remove the get only protection reboot the terminal then change the parameter s value 18 20 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages HOSTNAME hostname for this unit hostname Severity Information Explanation The X serve
259. atistics on name service protocols in a TCP IP network TCP IP Name Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Name Requests Number of times the name resolver was invoked tcpip name requests Numerical Addresses Number of invocations in which the name was in numerical format such as 192 43 154 7 tcpip name numerical addresses Name Cache Hits Number of invocations in which the answer was found in the local name cache tcpip name cache hits Name Server Hits Number of invocations in which the answer was found by consulting the name servers tcpip name server hits Name Cache Overflows Number of times a valid entry in the local name cache was deleted to make room for a new entry tcpip name cache overflows Errors section No Such Name Errors Number of No Such Name errors returned by the name servers tcpip no such name errors Bad Name Errors Number of Bad Name errors returned by the name servers tcpip name bad name errors Name Server Response Errors Number of badly formed responses returned by the name servers tcpip name server response errors No Server Responses Number of times no response was received from the name servers tcpip name no server responses System Errors Number of times the name resolver encountered a general system error tcpip name system errors 10 24 Statistics Menus
260. atures Change Setup Parameters 9 28 licenses configuration parameters for 9 5 9 28 diagnostic messages 18 67 error log file 18 67 license server supplemental documentation for 1 4 light pen configuration parameters for 9 25 diagnostic messages 18 15 Light Pen Blue Flood Change Setup Parameters 9 25 Load Initial File Change Setup Parameters 9 18 Load Policy Change Setup Parameters 9 29 Loadable Modules Directory Change Quick Setup 9 4 Loadable Modules Directory Change Setup Parameters 9 29 LOADB messages 18 74 loader diagnostic messages 18 103 local clients configuration parameters for 9 18 diagnostic messages 18 40 environment variables setting 9 47 Local Dead Key Support Change Setup Parameters 9 25 Index 14 Local File Manager configuration parameters for 9 21 diagnostic messages 18 44 starting from Terminal Emulator 12 2 see also local file system local file system booting from 11 7 configuration parameters for 9 22 diagnostic messages 18 77 messages 18 44 see also Local File Manager Local Name Cache Change Setup Parameters 9 32 9 37 LOCALDEV messages 18 77 Lock Screen Default Password Change User Preferences 9 46 lock screen configuration parameters for 9 46 Log File Change Setup Parameters 9 20 Login Console diagnostic messages 18 78 LOGIN messages 18 78 Login Name Change Setup Parameters 9 30 Login Password Change Setup Parameters 9 30 login see XDM login default hosts 9 29 log
261. atus field Bad Variable Values Number of PDUs delivered to snmp bad variable values error Error Responses SNMP for which the value of the responses received Received error status field is bad Value Read Only Variable Error Responses Received Number of valid PDUs that are delivered to SNMP for which the value of the error status field is readonly Generating such a PDU is a protocol error snmp read only variable error responses received General Error Responses Received Total number of PDUs generated for which the value of the error status field is genErr snmp general error responses received Variable Gets Total number of MIB objects snmp variable gets completed Completed successfully retrieved as the result of receiving valid Get Request and Get Next PDUs Variable Sets Total number of MIB objects snmp variable sets completed Completed changed after receiving valid Set Request PDUs Get Requests Received Total number of Get Request PDUs accepted and processed snmp get requests received Statistics Menus 10 19 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes SNMP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Get Next Requests Received Total number of SNMP Get Next PDUs accepted and processed snmp get next requests received Set Requests Received Total number of Set Requests PDUs accepted
262. ay be caused by intermittent communication between the terminal and the Access Point and may indicate that there are not enough Access Points to provide adequate coverage of the area User Action If this problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support reset failure reason_code Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal failed to reset the LAN adapter card User Action None but if the message persists please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support RTIM EOUT r ED wireless adapter restarted Severity Information Explanation The wireless adapter has restarted This usually occurs when the adapter is recovering from a communication error User Action Make sure the LAN adapter card is fully inserted in the slot and the antenna is properly connected If the problem persists please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support ceive timeout error reason_code Severity Error Explanation The software timed out on receipt of a packet Usually the LAN adapter is restarted in an attempt to recover from this error This problem may be caused by intermittent communication between the terminal and the Access Point and may indicate that there are not enough Access Points to provide adequate coverage of the area User Action If this problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 131 WIRELESS Messages TOFAIL TRANSMIT TTIMEOUT
263. ble Table listing the current characteristics of the Parallel daemon s parallel daemons table PEX Parameters The parameters in the PEX hide box govern characteristics of the PEX extension For other PEX parameters see PEX Color Parameters on page 9 34 and the PEX hide box in the Change User Preferences client This hide box appears on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only PEX Field Description Corresponding Parameter Maximum Model Clip Maximum number of half spaces pex max model clip planes Planes that can be defined for model clipping Maximum Non Ambient Lights Maximum number of non ambient light sources that can be defined pex max non ambient lights Maximum Nameset Names Maximum number a power of two of NameSet names identifiers that can be defined pex max nameset names Using Configuration Menus 9 33 Using Change Setup Parameters PEX Color Parameters The parameters in the PEX Color hide box govern monitor reference luminance and chromaticity For other PEX parameters see PEX Parameters on page 9 33 and the PEX hide box in the Change User Preferences client This hide box appears on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only PEX Color Field Reference Red Chromaticity u Description The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the red color component of a properly adjusted monitor Corresponding Parameter pex monitor reference red u Re
264. board Q Pressing a key in the cursor keypad or edit keypad results in an escape sequence The cursor keypad can also be used in either application mode or non application mode The Options menu includes a toggle Application Cursor Mode to alter the mode 12 34 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Keyboard Escape Sequences m The following tables list the edit keypad escape sequences Table 12 11 N 101 N 102 keyboard Table 12 17 N 108LK keyboard The following tables list the cursor keypad escape sequences Table 12 12 N 101 N 102 keyboard Table 12 15 N 108LK keyboard Escape sequences for the Break Shift and Control keys for the N 108LK keyboard in the serial terminal emulator are listed in Table 12 16 N 101 N 102 Keyboard Escape Sequences The tables in this section list escape sequences for N 101 N 102 keyboards Table 12 9 N 101 N 102 Keypad Escape Sequences Application Mode Set Key Application Mode Reset 8 bit 7 bit 0 0 SS3 p Esc O p 1 1 SS3 q EscOq 2 2 SS3 r EscOt 3 3 SS3 s Esc O s 4 4 SS3 t EscOt 5 5 SS3 u EscO u 6 6 SS3 v Esc O v 7 7 SS3 w Esc O w 8 8 SS3 x Esc O x 9 9 SS3 y Esc O y Enter Return SS3 M Esc O M SS3 m EscOm SS3 n Esc On Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 35 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Table 12 9 N 101 N 102 Keypad Escape Sequences Continued Key Application Mode Reset
265. cannot sense the keyboard type it defaults to the IBM PS 2 type in the N 101 N 102 group The keyboard types in each keyboard group for use with the xserver keyboard type parameter or in Setup Parameters gt Input Devices gt Keyboard Type are listed in Table 17 1 Table 17 1 Specifying Keyboards Group Keyboard Type Capella N 97 N 101 N 102 N 101 Icelandic IBM PS 2 1 Ttalian Belgian UK Norwegian Belgian French Norwegian Tandberg English UK OADG Kana Canadian Portuguese Canadian French CSA 1988 Siemens German Canadian French CSA 1992 Spanish Danish Spanish Latin America Dutch Swedish Finnish Flemish Swiss French French Swiss German German VT 220 VT220 US VT220 Italian VT220 Canadian VT220 Norwegian VT220 Danish V T220 Portuguese VT220 Dutch VT220 Spanish VT220 Finnish VT220 Swedish VT220 Flemish VT220 Swiss French VT220 French VT220 Swiss German VT220 German VT220 UK VT220 Hebrew 17 2 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions Specifying the Keyboard Type Table 17 1 Specifying Keyboards Continued Group Keyboard Type N 108 N 108 US N 108 Italian N
266. cates the set of unit tcpip service level network services that the terminal offers Code Memory Amount of code RAM installed in the unit code memory installed Installed bytes terminal Memory Installed Total amount of installed RAM does unit memory installed bytes not include special purpose RAM such as video memory Statistics Menus 10 27 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Unit Field Description Corresponding Parameter Memory Available Amount of unallocated RAM unit memory available bytes Block of Available Number of non contiguous blocks of unit blocks of available Memory unallocated memory memory Floating Point Total number of floating point unit floating point exceptions Exceptions exceptions Wireless LAN Statistics The parameters in the Wireless LAN hide box report statistics on wireless operations Explora 400 450 terminals only The Interface Table reports the status of the wireless LAN adapter and corresponds to the pwireless interface table parameter Wireless Interface Table Entry Domain Description The domain used by the wireless PCMCIA card Master Name The current Master Access Point name Master Node ID The current Master Access Point node Channel The current channel Subchannel The current subchannel ROM Version The ROM version of the PCMCIA card Country Code The country code Signal Strength The sign
267. cations If you need additional assistance refer to your PPP product documentation or contact NCD Technical Support NOCTLSOCK Unable to create IP control socket Severity Error Explanation The X server has encountered an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support NOLOCALADDR Port n no local IP address NOM Severity Error Explanation The X server does not have an IP address assigned User Action Assign the X server s IP address in one of two ways m Make sure the terminal s PPP SLIP Interfaces Table contains the terminal s IP address LI If the IP address is assigned by the host system verify that the host resident PPP product assigns IP addresses correctly EM Not enough memory Severity Error Explanation The X server does not have sufficient memory to perform the requested action User Action Close any unused local clients to free memory for the desired function 18 98 X Server Messages PRINTAPIS Messages UP Port n RESTART Port n protocol_layer is being restarted Severity Information Explanation The remote host sent a termination message which closed the connection the X server is attempting to re establish communications at the specified communications protocol layer User Action None TERMREQ Port n protocol_layer terminate request received Severity Information Explanation The terminal
268. ce NCDware 4 1 known problems and problems fixed NCDware CD Insert instructions for using NCD installation scripts to install NCDware on UNIX and WinCenter hosts NCDware User s Guide introductory manual providing information to assist users in becoming productive with their NCD terminals Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference description of remote configuration parameters for terminal configuration NCDware Publications Roadmap high level index of major topics in NCD manuals points the reader to the documents or chapters in which the topics are addressed FLEXIm End User Manual a detailed description of how to use and configure FLEXIm license management software Using the 3270 Terminal Emulator how to use and configure NCD s 3270 terminal emulation software Installing Your PCMCIA Card how to install and use a PCMCIA card with your terminal In addition the online man pages have been updated for this release Man pages are installed along with NCDware 1 4 About this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual For documents describing NCD s WinCenter software see the WinCenter manuals accompanying the WinCenter software See the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems the index of this manual and the NCDware Publications Roadmap for references to configuring NCDware for use with WinCenter Conventions Used in this Manual The following typographical conventions are used in this ma
269. ces DisplayManager xrdb usr openwin bin xrdb Configuring the XDM Xresources File The Xresources file sets resources for clients that run before the user logs in such as the login banner and is read by each X server as it connects to XDM The class name for the login prompter is xlogin You should edit the following entry in the file so the desired greeting is displayed in the login banner xlogin greeting your greeting The XDM Error Logging File The xdm errors file logs errors reported by XDM It must be world writable 8 14 Login and X Session Management Starting XDM Manually Starting XDM Manually If you did not use ncdinstall to configure system files to start the xdm daemon or you need to start the daemon on additional hosts you can start it manually To start the daemon on each manager host from a command line type usr bin X11 xdm To determine whether the xdm daemon is running type netstat a grep xdm To start the daemon automatically when the host reboots complete the following steps 1 Make sure there is an entry in a startup file for example etc re or etc rc local on each manager host to automatically start the xdm daemon For example Start the xdm daemon if f usr bin X11 xdm then usr bin X11 xdm echo n xdm gt dev console fi 2 On SunOS hosts that have only OpenWindows software no MIT X Window System software set LD_LIBRARY_PATH in the etc rc local fi
270. ces Field Description Corresponding Parameter Current Pointing Whether the pointer is a mouse or pref xserver current pointing Device other device device Mouse section Threshold Distance Number of pixels the mouse must pref mouse threshold pixels be moved before the acceleration factor is applied Acceleration Ratio percent Percentage by which the mouse motion threshold is multiplied to change the speed at which the pointer is moved pref mouse acceleration Button Arrangement Right or left handed mouse button mapping pref mouse arrangement Touchscreen section Button Press Threshold Relative force exerted on the touch screen before a button press event is generated pref xserver touchscreen button press threshold Button Release Threshold Relative force exerted on the touch screen before a button release event is generated pref xserver touchscreen button release threshold Using Configuration Menus 9 51 Using Change User Preferences Power Management Preferences The parameters in the Power Management hide box affect power management on VESA compliant monitors Power Management Field Description Corresponding Parameter Enable VESA Monitor Power Management Enables power management WARNING Enabling power management on equipment that is not VESA compliant can cause serious risk of personal injury or equipment da
271. ces Table gt Current Port Use has been configured for printing OPEN opened session on port Severity Information Explanation The print daemon connected to the Serial or Parallel daemon on the specified port User Action None 18 138 X Server Messages XSERVER Messages XSERVER Messages XSERVER messages pertain to MIT X server code If you are looking for a message that refers to the XSERVER module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 AUDIOINITFAIL unable to initialize Network Audio Server Severity Error Explanation The audio X server module was not loaded User Action Make sure the audio module is loaded BADAUTH host host_address tried to connect with bad n authorization Severity Warning Explanation The X server received a request from an unauthorized client User Action Verify that the authorization level is correct for the client that is attempting to connect BADFONTPATH failed to set default font path font_path Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set the specified font path as requested User Action Verify that the font path is set correctly and that the file service table is configured appropriately If the font path specifies a font server make sure that the entry uses the proper syntax and that the font server is accessible via the network BADFONTPATHELEMENT failed to add font_path_entry to font path Severit
272. clients and the font server Use Backing Store How backing store is provided to pref xserver backing store client windows SIE Sampling Method SIE sampling method used in pref sie sampling method scaling SIE Contrast Threshold Contrast value used in SIE scaling pref sie contrast threshold operations 9 54 Using Configuration Menus 10 Statistics Menus This chapter describes the controls and fields in the Show Statistics stats local client Show Statistics displays statistical parameters that report on terminal functions The following topics are covered in this chapter LI Accessing Statistical Parameters on page 10 1 LY Components of the Show Statistics Window on page 10 1 I Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes on page 10 2 For information about the other menu items under Statistics in the Console menu bar see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Accessing Statistical Parameters To access the statistical parameters from the Console select the Show Statistics item in the Console window s Statistics menu Statistics Show Statistics Clicking on a hide button displays the contents of the hide box For other ways to display and start this client and information about disabling the client see the System Administrator s Guide Components of the Show Statistics Window Show Statistics is composed of hide boxes providing access to fields that correspond to read only remot
273. configuration methods The utility also allows you to set security levels for the optional security keyboard This section describes how to use the NVRAM utility and lists the contents of NVRAM Starting the NVRAM Utility To start the NVRAM utility type gt nv NVRAM Utility C add change location add D display contents Q return to monitor L load defaults R reload NVRAM values S save new values gt gt Type NVRAM utility commands after the gt gt prompt and follow all commands with a carriage return NVRAM Utility Commands Table 11 6 lists NVRAM utility commands options syntax and functions NVRAM commands modify a copy of NVRAM residing in RAM The NVRAM utility does not write changes to NVRAM until you use the s save command 11 20 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 6 General Purpose NVRAM Utility nv Commands Command Function c address Changes the virtual contents of the location address If you do not include an address location 0 is used as the starting location Press Return to continue to the next location Press hyphen then Return to go to the previous location All values shown and data entered are in hexadecimal notation A non hexadecimal value terminates the command d start end Displays the virtual contents of NVRAM in hexadecimal 1 Loads the terminal s factory defaults into
274. control default Control Default requests to the NFS server daemon NFS Server Access Hosts that do not follow the default file nfs access control list Control List access control policy File Manager section Password Password for access to the File file manager password Manager daemon Enable File Manager Enables host based access control file manager access control Access Control List for remote access to the File Manager daemon enabled File Manager Access Control List Hosts allowed to access the File Manager daemon file manager access control list Local Command Execution Daemon section Enable Execution Host Access Control Access control is enabled for the Local Command Execution daemon exec access control enabled Execution Access Control List Hosts allowed to access the Local Command Execution daemon exec access control list Enable Execution User Access Control Restricts requests for local command execution to the user logged into the terminal The NCD Display Manager must be running on the login host exec user access control Serial and Parallel Daemon section Serial Daemon LAT Service Passwords LAT service passwords for accessing the Serial daemon serial daemons lat service passwords Parallel Daemon LAT Service Passwords LAT service passwords for accessing the Parallel daemon parallel daemons lat service passwords 9 12 Using Confi
275. cp passive connects attempts Attempts connections made a direct transition to the SYN RCVD state from the LISTEN state Statistics Menus 10 21 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes TCP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Failed Connect Attempts Number of times TCP connections made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN SENT state or the SYN RCVD state and to the LISTEN state from the SYN RCVD state tcp failed connect attempts Established Connections Number of TCP connections whose current state is either ESTABLISHED or CLOSE WAIT tcp established connections Connections Timed Out on Retransmissions Number of connections that progressed directly to the CLOSED state because too many retransmissions were sent tcp connections timed out on retransmissions Connections Timed Out on Keepalives Number of connections that progressed directly to the CLOSED state because too many keepalives were sent tcp connections timed out on keepalives Connections Reset Number of times connections made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from the established state or the CLOSED WAIT state tcp connections reset Packets Received Total number of segments received including those received in error includes segments received on currently established connections tcp packets received Packets Transmitted To
276. ct and Broadcast Entries in the Xaccess File 8 12 Indirect Entries in the Xaccess File 8 13 Configuring the xdm config File 8 13 Configuring the Polling Interval 8 14 Configuring the Version of xrdb to Use 8 14 Configuring the XDM Xresources File 8 14 The XDM Error Logging File 8 14 Starting XDM Manually 8 15 XDM Access Control 8 15 If XDM Cannot Write to a User s Home Directory 8 16 Configuring Terminals for XDM 8 17 Configuring the Login Chooser Redisplay 8 17 Configuring the Terminal s Action when XDM Terminates 8 17 Configuring XDM Keepalives 8 18 Using XDM xX11R3 Version 8 19 xi Contents hapter 9 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Quick Setup 9 1 Components of the Change Quick Setup Window 9 1 Contents of the Change Quick Setup Hide Boxes 9 3 Booting Parameters 9 3 Files Parameters 9 3 Fonts Parameters 9 4 Licenses Parameters 9 5 Network Parameters 9 5 Session Parameters 9 6 Using Change Setup Parameters 9 7 Components of the Change Setup Parameters Window 9 7 Contents of the Change Setup Parameters Hide Boxes 9 8 Access Control Parameters 9 9 ARP Parameters 9 13 Booting Parameters 9 13 Browser Parameters 9 16 Commands and Startup Parameters 9 18 Configuration Parameters 9 18 Diagnostics Parameters 9 20 Display PostScript Parameters 9 21 File Manager Parameters 9 21 File Service Parameters 9 22 Fonts Parameters 9 23 Input Devices Parameters 9 24 IP Parameters 9 25 Java Parameters 9 27 L
277. d Change User Preferences 9 50 Surface Reflection Model Change User Preferences 9 50 Suspend After Change User Preferences 9 52 system console configuring terminal as 15 9 T TCP configuration parameters for 9 36 default linger time configuring 5 33 maximum retransmissions configuring 5 33 performance tuning 5 31 to 5 34 ports 3270 terminal emulator 9 42 Configuration daemon 9 19 Diagnostic daemon 9 20 for configuring terminals 6 28 to 6 29 Local File Manager 9 21 NCD Display Manager 9 30 User Preferences daemon 9 20 XRemote 9 41 segment sizes larger than the default 5 33 send and receive buffers 5 31 statistics 10 21 to 10 23 timeout configuring 5 32 Index 27 Index TCP Port Number Change Setup Parameters for Configuration daemon 9 19 for Diagnostics daemon 9 20 for Local File Manager 9 21 for User Preferences daemon 9 20 for XRemote 9 41 TCP IP Name Servers Change Quick Setup 9 5 TCP IP Name Service Protocol Change Quick Setup 9 5 TCP IP Broadcast Boot Request Change Setup Parameters 9 15 TCP IP Desired Server Change Setup Parameters 9 14 tcp ack only packets transmitted 10 23 tcp ack packets received 10 23 tcp active connect attempts 10 21 tcp connections reset 10 22 tcp connections timed out on keepalives 10 22 tcp connections timed out on retransmissions 10 22 tcp connection table 10 23 tcp connect timeout 5 32 9 36 tcp default linger time 5 33 9 36 tcp default mss for non local
278. d Transmitted PDUs generated Get Responses Transmitted Total number of Get Response PDUs generated snmp get responses transmitted 10 20 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes SNMP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Traps Transmitted Total number of trap PDUs generated snmp traps transmitted TCP Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on terminal communications using TCP TCP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Retransmission Algorithm that determines the tcp retransmission algorithm Algorithm Type timeout value used for type retransmitting unacknowledged octets only the Van Jacobson algorithm is supported Minimum Minimum time in seconds tcp minimum retransmission Retransmission Time permitted for the retransmission timeout time Maximum Retransmission Time Maximum time in seconds permitted for retransmission tcp maximum retransmission time Maximum Number of Connections Limit on the total number of TCP connections supported should be 1 in a terminal whose maximum number of transmissions is dynamic tcp maximum number of connections Active Connect Number of times TCP tcp active connect attempts Attempts connections made a direct transition to the SYN SENT state from the CLOSED state Passive Connects Number of times TCP t
279. d 9 32 net total buffers 10 11 net total cluster buffers 10 11 network buffers statistics 10 11 connection requests diagnostic daemons 18 87 interfaces statistics 10 13 TCP performance tuning 5 31 to 5 34 network services address discovery 3 1 to 3 16 address resolution 5 5 to 5 6 booting 4 1 to 4 19 defaults 5 3 to 5 4 file access 5 13 to 5 24 name service 5 7 to 5 12 overview 5 1 to 5 2 routing 5 25 to 5 31 time service 9 38 X server loading 4 1 to 4 19 nf command Boot Monitor 11 8 NFS Network File System auto save of configuration data 6 35 booting 4 3 4 5 4 8 4 13 file service 5 22 to 5 23 font service 7 6 message logging 18 5 statistics 10 13 to 10 16 unmount timer 5 23 NFS Directory Change Setup Parameters 9 15 NFS Server Access Control Default Change Setup Parameters 9 12 NFS Server Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 12 NFS Unmount Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 22 nfs directory contents requests 10 14 nfs directory create requests 10 14 nfs directory remove requests 10 14 nfs file create requests 10 14 nfs file remove requests 10 14 nfs file rename requests 10 14 nfs get attributes requests 10 13 nfs get file system stats requests 10 15 nfs get root requests 10 13 nfs link create requests 10 14 nfs null requests 10 13 nfs path lookup requests 10 13 nfs read data requests 10 14 nfs read symlink requests 10 13 nfs received directory contents requests 10 16 nfs
280. d Escape Sequences An escape sequence is a series of non printing characters beginning with an Escape character that sends a command to a device Escape sequences are used by some legacy applications for printing communications and display management The command in an escape sequence results in specified actions by devices Escape sequences are also called control codes or control sequences The tables in this section describe the escape sequences sent to the terminal emulator from the following NCD keyboards N 101 N 102 VT220 N 108LK and N 97 N Kana Escape key sequences are sent by the following types of keys 1 Pressing a function key sends an escape sequence to the terminal emulator The following tables list the function key escape sequences for NCD keyboards Table 12 10 N 101 N 102 keyboard Table 12 14 VT220 N 108LK keyboard Table 12 19 N 97 N Kana keyboard 1 The keypad can be set in one of two modes numeric or application In numeric mode pressing a keypad key results in a digit numeric operator or enter character In application mode the keypad keys are similar to the function keys in that pressing a key generates an escape sequence The appCursorMode resource controls the mode the Options menu includes a toggle Application Cursor Mode for local control The following tables list the keypad escape sequences for NCD keyboards Table 12 9 N 101 N 102 keyboard Table 12 13 VT220 keyboard Table 12 18 N 97 N Kana key
281. d file systems Routing Routes are automatically placed into the Manually configure Configuring Routing routing table the routing table Accessing Remote f Networks on page 5 25 The boot host is the default gateway Specify default gateways Router discovery is used to discover Turn off router neighboring gateways discovery TCP Performance TCP performance parameters have default Customize the TCP Setting TCP values performance Performance parameters Parameters on page 5 31 5 4 Configuring Network Services Configuring the ARP Cache Resolved Addresses Configuring the ARP Cache Resolved Addresses A terminal attempting to contact another host broadcasts the IP address of the host via the ARP protocol and receives the host s Ethernet address These resolved addresses are maintained in the terminal s ARP cache a local table of resolved addresses The terminal checks its ARP cache before attempting to contact a host to see if the address has already been resolved The tcpip arp cache parameter contains all of the addresses that ARP has resolved or attempted to resolve Setup Change Setup Parameters gt ARP ARP Cache Table 5 2 lists the entries in a row in each row of the table You can manually add entries to the ARP cache if necessary Table 5 2 tcpip arp cache Table Entries Table Entry Possible Values Result ethernet address default 00 00 00 00 00 00
282. d host access control The System Administrator s Guide describes how to use the Change Setup Parameters and Change Quick Setup local clients The configuration clients including all their fields are described in Chapter 9 Using Configuration Menus T Interactive configuration through Change User Preferences This local client accessible through the Console allows users to configure user preferences parameters such as keyboard LED usage and mouse acceleration locally for the current session Users can also write their preference settings to a file in their home directories and you can use the ncdloadprefs utility in a startup file to load the file each time the X server resets This allows users to retain their own preference settings no matter which terminal they are using This utility is described in the System Administrator s Guide From one terminal s Change User Preferences client you can modify or display another terminal s user preference parameters You can disable the client or require passwords to use it The Change User Preferences client including all of its fields is described in the User s Guide and in Chapter 9 Using Configuration Menus I The NVRAM utility and Boot Monitor Setup menus From the Boot Monitor you can use these utilities to configure many parameters saved in NVRAM The NVRAM utility allows you to change some parameters that cannot be accessed in any other way For information about usi
283. d in the usr lib X11 xdm directory Table 8 2 lists the files on the NCDware distribution along with the function of each file and whether it is required Table 8 2 XDM Binary and Configuration Files File Name Function Optional or Required xdm Host software Required Xsession Startup script used by all terminals to manage the X Required for all versions session of XDM xsession Startup script for an individual user Optional xdm config Resources for XDM some of which are pointers to the Required for all versions other configuration files in this table of XDM Xaccess Controls how XDM responds to the different types of Required for X11R5 and queries from the terminal and implements the Login X11R6 xdm only Chooser Xresources Resources that specify the characteristics of the login Required for all versions banner and Login Chooser of XDM Xstartup A script that runs before starting user sessions Optional 8 6 Login and X Session Management Configuring XDM Hosts Table 8 2 XDM Binary and Configuration Files Continued File Name Function Optional or Required Xreset A script that runs before ending user sessions Optional Xservers A list of terminals to be managed by XDM X11R3 XDM only Configuring the System Wide XDM Session Management File This section describes the system wide Xsession file which typically performs the following functions m
284. derscore 79 F10 80 F14 81 Help 82 quoteright quotedbl 83 backslash bar 84 bracketleft braceleft 85 equal plus 86 87 KP_F4 88 89 Shift_R 1 90 Return 91 bracketright braceright 92 93 94 95 KP_F3 96 Down 97 Left 98 F3 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 27 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 4 VT220 Compatible N 108 Default Keysyms for ULTRIX Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 99 Up 100 Remove 101 Select 102 Delete 103 Insert 104 105 KP_1 106 Right 107 KP_4 108 KP_7 109 Next 110 Find 111 Prior 112 KP_0 113 KP_Decimal 114 KP_2 115 KP_5 116 KP_6 117 KP_8 118 KP_F2 119 Multi_Key 2 120 Multi_Key 121 KP_Enter 17 28 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 4 VT220 Compatible N 108 Default Keysyms for ULTRIX Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 122 KP_3 123 124 KP_Separator 125 KP_9 126 127 Menu 128 F17 129 F18 130 F19 131 F20 132 KP_Subtract 1 If the pref compatibility decwindows keyboard parameter is set to true this right modifier is translated to a left modifier 2 This keysym exists only for the N 108 keyboard Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 29
285. ding the previous assignment The only exception to this rule is the unit license key parameter which must be assigned for each license key when using node licensing For more information about licensing see the System Administrator s Guide Listing Commands in Order Assignment commands are interpreted in the order in which they appear This affects assignments that depend upon the prior execution of other statements and parameters assigned more than once 6 14 Terminal Configuration Methods The Configuration Language Although most parameters do not depend on other parameters being set previously there are a few exceptions For example when using a name service you may specify hosts by their names instead of their addresses Before you can refer to a host by its name in the remote configuration file you must set the name service parameters For example Set the name service parameters tcpip name server protocol dns tcpip name servers 192 43 153 16 192 43 153 24 apply Set a parameter to a host name boot tcpip desired server peregrin Note The parameters that specify the name service must be followed by an apply command If a parameter is assigned more than once in a configuration file the last assignment supersedes all previous assignments Saving Parameters in NVRAM When the X server reads a configuration file it automatically saves settings to NVRAM when it reaches the end of the file
286. display name is correct Verify that the specified display is running and that it is accessible via the network 18 126 X Server Messages VIDEO VIDEODECODER and VIDEOPLAYER Messages XERROR description error from request code nn nn on value hex_value Severity Error Explanation This message indicates there is an error in the MIT X server User Action Refer to Xlib documentation for information about the specified error VIDEO VIDEODECODER and VIDEOPLAYER Messages Messages that pertain to video software support including VIDEO VIDEODECODER VIDEOPLAYER and MPEGPLAY modules are all listed in MPEGPLAY Messages on page 18 82 WINCEN Messages WINCEN messages pertain to starting WinCenter from the terminal using the wincen command For messages that refer to WINCEN but do not appear here see Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 CMDLINE sending command command Severity Information Explanation A wincen local command is being sent to start WinCenter from the terminal User Action None USAGE Usage wincen WinCenterhost optional arguments initial program Severity Error Explanation The user typed an incorrect wincen command User Action Retype the command line correctly X Server Messages 18 127 WIRELESS Messages WIRELESS Messages ACC ANTCHG ANTCON WIRELESS messages pertain to the wireless LAN adapter For messages that refer to WIRELESS b
287. dots per inch Keyboard type The Boot Monitor Setup menus provide a help menu and help text for each item Ly Ly m m The content of the Setup menus differs slightly depending on the Boot Monitor version you are using Parameters are saved to NVRAM when you exit the Setup menus unless you specify otherwise in the Done submenu Starting Boot Monitor Setup To start Boot Monitor Setup from within the Boot Monitor at the gt prompt press the Setup key or type the se command The Boot Monitor Setup Menu bar and Help window appear The menu bar displays the names of the six submenus LI Help how to access the windows move from item to item within the windows and exit from Boot Monitor Setup Keyboard keyboard type Monitor monitor resolution refresh rate and dpi Network IP and NCDnet addresses Boot names and location of boot and configuration files and specify file transfer protocol preferences O O C D Done save changes reboot the terminal return to the Boot Monitor and restore original parameter settings 11 12 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals Navigating in Boot Monitor Setup To move from one menu to the next use the left and right arrow keys The active menu name is highlighted and the corresponding window or submenu appears Note If you are using a keyboard that does not have arrow keys you can remap the movement functions t
288. e tftpboot Xncdhmx 80 for an HMX family terminal with 8 megabytes of memory 8 For example tftpboot Xncdhmx b Requests to the broadcast address The Boot Monitor broadcasts the 8 requests shown in 1 through 8 to the network 4 2 Booting X Server Loading Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Table 4 1 Default Server Loading Sequence 2 MOP Requests The Boot Monitor asks mop_mom to download an X server Potentially the Boot Monitor can issue two different multicast requests The first host responding to a request sends a MOP volunteer packet to the terminal and the terminal attempts to download an X server a The first request does not specify a filename b The second request specifies the filename Xnedxxx sys where xxx represents the product name For example Xncdhmx sys NFS Requests The Boot Monitor asks NFS to download an X server Potentially the Boot Monitor can issue 16 different requests as described for TFTP in Step 1 in this table The default NFS X server directory is tftpboot Local Booting The Boot Monitor attempts to boot from a local file system on a PCMCIA card If the terminal has a PCMCIA card NVRAM contains factory default settings and the terminal has not booted from the network this attempt is made before the TFTP MOP and NFS requests Boot Monitor If all attempts to load an X server fail the Boot Monitor displays its pro
289. e Change Quick Setup 9 4 config file font server 7 23 Config Read Only Password Change Setup Parameters 9 9 Config Read Write Password Change Setup Parameters 9 9 config access control enabled 6 30 6 31 9 10 9 19 config access control list 6 31 9 10 config add domain to unit name as filename 6 23 9 20 config auto saved info 6 37 9 20 config auto save file 6 36 9 20 config auto save file name 6 36 9 20 config auto save nvram 6 35 9 19 config custom file 6 23 9 18 CONFIGD messages 18 17 config default file 9 2 9 4 9 7 9 8 9 19 9 44 config enforce passwords locally 9 9 config generic file 6 24 9 19 config load initial file 6 27 9 18 config ncdnet object name 9 19 config persistent loading 6 22 9 18 config pref enforce passwords locally 9 10 config pref ncdnet object name 9 20 config pref read only password 9 10 config pref read write password 9 10 config pref tcp port 6 29 9 20 config pref telnet port 6 29 9 20 config read only password 9 8 9 9 9 43 config read write password 9 8 9 9 9 43 config tcp port 6 28 9 19 config telnet port 6 27 6 28 9 19 config unit ethernet address file 6 23 9 19 config unit ip address file 6 24 9 19 config unit name file 6 23 9 19 config unit ncdnet address file 6 24 9 19 config unix directory 6 26 9 4 9 18 Configuration daemon configuration parameters for 9 19 defined 6 2 diagnostic messages 18 17 ports for accessing 6 28 starting from Terminal Emulator 12 2 con
290. e cycling through the specified download sequence until a configuration file is found 6 22 Terminal Configuration Methods Using Optional Names for Configuration Files Using Optional Names for Configuration Files Table 6 5 lists the remote configuration filenames and the order in which the terminal tries to download these files The table also indicates whether the terminal tries to read the file by default or if the parameter must be enabled to read the file The first five attempts listed in the table allow you to specify an individual file for a terminal while the sixth allows for a standard file that can be booted by many terminals Table 6 5 Configuration Filenames and Download Sequence Download _ s noan Order File Description Parameter Name by Default 1 Custom filename 1 config custom file No Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Configuration Initial Configuration File section Custom File 2 File named using the config unit name file No terminal s hostname or Setup Change Setup Parameters gt domain name Configuration Initial Configuration File For example ncdu21 or section Try Unit Name as Filename ncdu21 ncd com 2 config add domain to unit name as No filename Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration Initial Configuration File section gt Add Domain to Name as Unit Filename 3 File named using the config unit ethernet address file No terminal
291. e including the terminal s local file system font Read only X server font statistics icmp Read only ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol statistics ip Internet protocol including IP addresses and routing java Java parameters lat LAT Local Area Transport protocol login Login services including XDM X Display Manager and the Login Chooser modules X server module parameters nced3270 3270 terminal emulation parameters ncdnet NCDnet DECnet networking including name service net Network interface options 6 6 Terminal Configuration Methods Parameter Types and Groups Table 6 1 Parameter Groups Continued Group Name Description nfs Read only NFS Network File Service statistics parallel Parallel daemon parameters pex PEX parameters some PEX parameters are in the pref group ppp PPP Point to Point Protocol and SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol pref User preference items audio bell compatibility console commands fonts input devices OpenGL PEX power management screen saver screen background SIE graphics and touch screen pwireless Read only wireless statistics serial Serial daemon including access control for both the Serial and Parallel daemons and serial port configuration snmp SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol tcp TCP Transmission Control Protocol statistics and characteristics tcpip TCP IP networking
292. e ISO 6429 standard for selection of basic colors for foreground and background LY The Hewlett Packard color pair model in which you can select pairs of any X colors for text X colors are listed in the file usr lib X11 ncd rgb txt 12 30 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences The color selection code is limited to eight combinations of colors at any given time The number of combinations can be effectively doubled by using the inverse graphics rendition but the number of colors that can be displayed on the screen simultaneously is limited ISO 6429 Color Usage The ISO specification defines SGR sequences to change the foreground and the background pens as listed in Table 12 7 Table 12 7 SGR Sequences for Foreground and Background Pens Foreground Selection Background Selection 30 black 40 black 31 red 41 red 32 green 42 green 33 yellow 43 yellow 34 blue 44 blue 35 magenta 45 magenta 36 cyan 46 cyan 37 white 47 white For example CSI 31 m or ESC 31L mi renders foreground text in red and CSI 44 m or ESC 31 m renders background text in blue These selections can be mixed to use combinations of the foreground and background colors when rendering text However only eight combinations are permitted simultaneously on the screen The eight color cells are reused as needed Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator
293. e Status Line statusLine Displays a 25th line at the bottom of the window used by applications to display status information Log Output to File Not applicable Logs output to the file opened from the File menu If no file is available for output logging the item is not active in the Options menu The Fonts Menu The Fonts menu allows you to change the size of the display font dynamically The fonts generated through the Fonts menu are defined using a single set of resource specifications The specification set defines the Default menu selection and the terminal emulator uses the Default to generate the other sizes offered through the menu The default font is terminal medium normal 140 Table 12 4 lists the choices available through the menu and the resources for defining the Default item 12 10 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus Table 12 4 Fonts Menu and Associated Resources Menu Item Resource Names soo Selected Default foundry family pointSize subFont 14 point foundry The developer of the font for example adobe Default the wildcard character which ensures that any foundry matches the font request family The family name for example courier Default terminal pointSize The point size of the Default menu selection in tenths of a point Default 140 subF
294. e X Enables host based access control xserver access control Access Control by default for client connections enabled default Enable X Access Control Enables host based access control for client connections xserver access control enabled X Access Control List List of authorized hosts xserver access control list Config Daemon section Config Read Only Password Password required for read only access to the configuration database config read only password Config Read Write Password Password required for read write access to the configuration database config read write password Enforce Config Passwords Locally Requires a password to access configuration information from the terminal config enforce passwords locally Using Configuration Menus 9 9 Using Change Setup Parameters Access Control Field Description Corresponding Parameter Enable Config Access Control Checks remote requests for connections to the Configuration daemon against the access control list config access control enabled Config Access Control List Hosts in the Configuration daemon host access list config access control list User Preferences Daemon section User Preferences Read Only Password Password required for read only access to User Preferences information config pref read only password User Preferences Read Write Password Pas
295. e X server and module directories and other required files are world readable 3 If you make any changes to the etc inetd conf file restart the inetd daemon to force it to reread the configuration file and start tftpd running You can restart the daemon by finding its process id and sending it a hangup signal For example ps acx grep inetd 17601 I 0 12 inetd kill HUP 17601 On some systems the command is ps ef grep inetd 4 Ifyou are using secure TFTP make sure that all files to be accessed through TFTP are installed in the directory specified by the TFTP entry in the etc inetd conf file For example on SunOS systems the enabling line in etc inetd conf for secure TFTP is tftp dgram udp wait root usr etc in tftpd in tftpd s tftpboot Configuring Network Services 5 21 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files This line makes it impossible for the NCD terminal to access fonts and configuration files because secure TFTP cannot reach usr lib X11 ncd This directory is outside the secure directory which TFTP treats as its root directory One solution is to change s tftpboot to s usr tftpboot Restart the inetd daemon as directed in Step 3 Then move the X servers to usr tftpboot and move usr lib X11 ncd to usr tftpboot usr lib X11 ncd On HP UX systems after Version 7 TFTP is secure the TFTP daemon s home directory is the secure directory usr tftpdir Any files that the terminal accesses via
296. e configuration parameters The Show Statistics window has a menu bar with a File menu and a Sections menu a messages area and several buttons d The File menu provides the following commands Connect to New Unit Presents a popup box requesting a terminal name and the password required for access to the statistical database on that terminal and displays the terminal s Show Statistics window Statistics Menus 10 1 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes You can use the Configuration daemon read write password the Configuration daemon read only password default is public or the global password Close Closes the Show Statistics window 11 The Sections menu lists the Show Statistics hide boxes giving you an alternative way to open or to open or close all hide boxes with one selection The Messages area located below the hide boxes displays messages from the client 1 The three buttons along the bottom of the window are Update Updates the statistical displays Clear Al1l Resets all statistics to zero Cance1 Closes the Show Statistics client Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes This section describes the hide boxes in the Show Statistics window including a description of each parameter and the name of the corresponding remote configuration parameter Ethernet Statistics The parameters in the Ethernet hide box report statistics on the terminal s Ethernet interface Eth
297. e dependent Default keyboard LEDs 1 bit set by the Boot Monitor Reserved 2 bits Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 29 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Continued Location Description Size Values Default in Bold 0x3A Monitor type 1byte Use the Boot Monitor Setup menus to set this parameter 0x3B Monitor dots per inch 1byte Use the Boot Monitor Setup menus to set this parameter Platform Specific Monitor Timing 0x3C 0x50 Reserved 24 bytes Tagged Strings 0x51 Boot Monitor tagged strings 128 Automatically set by the bytes X server See Table 11 9 F for the names of the 0xD1 Tagged strings 1 38 parameters saved in this bytes area OxF7 Tagged strings 2 128 bytes Keymapper for Boot Monitor Setup Menus 0x177 Keymap for programmable Setup menu 10 Automatically set by the navigation keys bytes Boot Monitor Platform Specific Monitor Timing 0x181 0x191 Reserved 15 bytes 11 30 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Continued Location Description Size Values Default in Bold Miscellaneous 0x192 NFS read size 2bytes Block size set by the Boot Monitor nf command 0x194 RARP address discovery priority upper 1 Try RARP first 4 bits 2 Try RARP second 3 Try RARP last 15 Disable RARP BOOTP address di
298. e filesystem Severity Information Explanation The X server is verifying the structure of the specified file system as requested User Action None 18 28 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages VERIFYSUCCI ESS successfully verified filesystem_name filesystem Severity Information Explanation The X server has verified the structure of the specified file system as requested User Action None WRONGBOOTMON current Boot Monitor does not support parameter or WRONGBOOTMON current Boot Monitor does not support NFS WROT ENVRAM Severity Error Explanation You are trying to set a configuration parameter that is not supported by the Boot Monitor installed in the terminal User Action Obtain upgraded an Boot Monitor or use another method of network service such as TFTP wrote settings to NVRAM Severity Information Explanation The configuration settings selected have been written to NVRAM User Action None X Server Messages 18 29 CONFUI Messages CONFUI Messages CONFUI messages pertain to the Configuration daemon user interface If you are looking for a message that refers to the CONFUI module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ALRDYUP already running Severity Error Explanation The Configuration daemon user interface is already running on this terminal User Action Use the existing user interface or shut it down a
299. e module has been disabled Severity Error Explanation The module has been configured to be disabled User Action Change the load policy for the module in the modules load policy remote configuration parameter LONGCMD command string too long Severity Error Explanation The command that has been entered exceeds the limit of 512 characters User Action Re enter the command limiting the entry to 512 characters LONGUSER user name too long Severity Error Explanation The user name that has been entered is too long User Action Re enter the user name limiting the entry to 16 characters 18 42 X Server Messages EXECD Messages NOERRCONN NOERRPORT NONIP NORESPORT unable to connect to error socket message Severity Error Explanation The network connection has failed User Action Verify that the host is operational that it is communicating on the network and that the network is working unable to read port number from request Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support ERRPORT error port given on non IP connection Severity Error Explanation The X server has specified a port number when communicating across a DECnet network User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support no reserved ports available Severity Erro
300. e output of these programs All other clients are executed in the background The last client executes in the foreground the script exits and the user is logged out In NCDware users can log out by using the Logout utility in the Console menu If you do not want to use the Logout utility you can use the logout method described in The Default Xsession File on page 8 8 Note If your Xsession file does not execute properly you may not be able to log in through XDM You must log in through the NCD Terminal Emulator For more information about XDM troubleshooting see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems The Default Xsession File The default Xsession file included on the NCDware distribution follows Note tha I m m m m m bin sh Xsession if f HOM t The file is executed by the Bourne shell The file must be world executable The if then else clause attempts to run a xsession file in the user s home directory if no xsession file is found the remaining commands in the Xsession file are executed The file starts the twm window manager and an xterm window on the login host The last client runs in the foreground when the user exits from this xterm the X session ends and the user is logged out Using exec to start clients saves a process slot on the host E xsession then if x S HOME xsession then exec SHOME xsession else
301. e parameters are saved in NVRAM The method specified in boot second source is used if the method specified in boot desired source does not succeed Table 4 9 boot second source Parameter Possible Result Values default None tftp The terminal attempts to boot via TFTP tcpip is included for backward tcpip compatibility and also results in TFTP booting nfs The terminal attempts to boot via NFS ncdnet The terminal attempts to boot via MOP over an NCDnet DECnet local The terminal attempts to boot from a local file system on a PCMCIA card prom is prom included for backward compatibility and results in local booting Booting xX Server Loading 4 9 Configuring X Server Module Loading The method specified in boot third source is used if the method specified in boot second source does not succeed Table 4 10 boot third source Parameter Possible Result Values default None tftp The terminal attempts to boot via TFTP tcpip is included for backward tcpip compatibility and also results in TFTP booting nfs The terminal attempts to boot via NFS ncdnet The terminal attempts to boot via MOP over an NCDnet DECnet local The terminal attempts to boot from a local file system on a PCMCIA card prom is prom included for backward compatibility and results in local booting Configuring X Server Module Loading Most of the loc
302. e some local clients to free more memory You may need to add memory to the terminal ERSYET Line n warning no modifiers defined yet Severity Warning Explanation At line n the modifier command included a keysym that had not already been defined in the keycode section of the file User Action Define the keysym in the keycode section of the file NOOPERATION Line n unknown command operation var NUMERRORS Severity Error Explanation At line n the operation requested for the command is invalid User Action Check the syntax and usage of command in line n Total errors n Severity Information Explanation Reports the number of parsing errors the X server encountered during reading the file User Action None 18 64 X Server Messages KBM Messages ONEKEYCODE Line n must have at least one keycode Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode command requires at least one scancode to keycode value definition User Action Check the syntax and usage of scancode command in line n ONESCANCODE Line n must have at least one scancode Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode command requires at least one scancode to keycode value definition User Action Check the syntax and usage of the scancode command in line n OPENINCLUDE Opening include file file Severity Information Explanation Reports the full pathname of an incl
303. e specified directory This message occurs only when the X server attempts to find fonts residing in the local file system and the local file system does not contain any font files User Action If the font path specifies the local file system make sure that fonts reside in the local file system If the font path specifies the local file system when it should not remove the local file system entry FONTMISSINGNAME no FONT property in font file using font Severity Warning Explanation The specified font file does not contain the specified font name This message occurs only when the X server attempts to find a font residing in the local file system User Action None FSBADCONN failed to connect to font server font_server F SBADNAME sy Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot connect to the specified font server either because the font server name is incorrect the font server is not running the network is not working or the X server is running low on memory User Action Verify that J The the font server name is correct The font server is running m 1 The font server is accessible via the network 1 The X server has sufficient memory to access the font server font server name font_server illegal or unresolvable Severity Error Explanation The X server does not recognize the specified font server User Action Make sure the font server name is correct and conforms to the followin
304. e that Display PostScript needs for operation The DPS extension uses two types of virtual memory 1 Shared VM holds system fonts and other resources shared by all contexts 1 Private VM holds fonts specific to each context The Color Rendering File The color rendering file CIE dict19c dat contains a PostScript rendering dictionary that allows the DPS extension to provide device independent color This file is loaded for each DPS context The information in the file allows all requests for color to be honored The output generated by DPS depends on the output device L On monochrome monitors the output consists of dithered halftone patterns of black and white pixels 1 On grayscale monitors the output consists of halftone patterns using gray levels 4 Oncolor monitors the output consists of the requested color or a dithered pattern of RGB pixels that approximates the color The Context Initialization File The context initialization file InitProc dat executes arbitrary PostScript code when a context is created You can use the file to set various user parameters or to initialize local virtual memory Configuring Display PostScript 13 7 Adobe Fonts for DPS Adobe Fonts for DPS NCDware includes the following fonts for use with the DPS extension L1 Adobe outline fonts L Font metrics in AFM Adobe Font Metric format LY Adobe fonts in hand tuned bitmap format Table 13 1 lists the fonts included in the distrib
305. e that refers to the DIR module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 MSGSRCVD received n messages Severity Information Explanation The DTR module has received the specified number n of messages User Action None EXECD Messages EXECD messages pertain to the execution of local clients If you are looking for a message that refers to the EXECD module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADCMD invalid command command Severity Error Explanation The EXEC daemon does not recognize the specified command usually a local client command User Action Check the System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems or the client man page to determine the correct command for the desired local client BADERRPORT invalid error port number in request Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 40 X Server Messages EXECD Messages BADLIC ENSE terminal not licensed for feature Severity Error Explanation The terminal does not have a license for the specified feature such as DPS User Action Contact NCD to obtain a valid license for the desired feature and enter it in the terminal s remote configuration file NVRAM or license dat file BADMODDIR bad modules directory dir BADPARA
306. e when the boot tcpip third server primary and secondary boot servers are not available 9 14 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Booting Fields Description Corresponding Parameter Try TCP IP Unit Puts an X server named for the boot tcpip unit address file Address File terminal s IP address in f hexadecimal in the terminal s A Try TCP IP Unit l booting sequence relative boot tcpip unit address with Address with Path File pathname or prefixed by tftpboot path file Try TCP IP Product Puts an X server named for the boot tcpip product name and Name and Memory Size File model and memory size as a filename suffix in the terminal s booting sequence relative memory size file Try TCP IP Product pathname or prefixed by tftpboot boot tcpip product name and Name and Memory memory size with path file Size with Path File Try TCP IP Product Puts an X server named for the boot tcpip product name file Name File terminal model in the terminal s default booting sequence relative i Try TCP IP Product pathname or prefixed by tftpboot boot tcpip product name with Name with Path File path file Send Broadcast ICMP The terminal sends an ICMP boot send broadcast icmp for for Subnet Mask message to determine the subnet subnet mask mask at boot TCP IP Broadcast Boot The terminal broadcasts for an X boot tcpip broadcast boo
307. e_switch key is latched latch add LISTofKEYSYM Specifies additional keys that should latch without clearing the latch list latch remove LISTofKEYSYM Removes a key from the latch list repeat LISTofKEYSYM Specifies keys that should repeat automatically when pressed repeat add LISTofKEYSYM Specifies additional keys that should repeat without clearing the repeat list repeat remove LISTofKEYSYM Removes a key from the repeat list led NUMBER LED ACTION Specifies when keyboard LEDs should light up NUMBER is the LED number 1 2 3 or 4 and LED ACTION is one of the following Weer NX DM Weiss bar i Kid control num warn net Meh te caps moai mod2 mod3 mod4 mod5 17 58 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Table 17 8 Keyboard Description File Statements Continued Statement Keyword Value Description led map NUMBER NUMBER Changes the mapping of the LEDs for keyboards in which the LEDS are not in sequential number led invert NUMBER Reverses the sense of the LED for keyboards with inverted LED sense led total NUMBER Sets the maximum number of LEDs that the keyboard supports led enable Enables the 1ed commands if they have been disabled led disable Disables 1ed commands to the keyboard setup
308. ecifying Name Server Hosts You can specify as many name server hosts as you need If you do not specify a name server the terminal uses the boot host for name service Enter the IP addresses of hosts offering name service into the tcpip name servers table Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service gt Name Servers If you enter an address of 0 0 0 0 the boot host is used for name service If you use BOOTP DHCP and specify name servers for this terminal in the bootptab file those name servers are placed in the table automatically This parameter is saved in NVRAM 5 8 Configuring Network Services Using a Name Service Table 5 6 tcpip name servers Parameter Table Entry Possible Values Result server default 0 0 0 0 IP address The name server with this IP address is used to map host IP addresses to symbolic names For example tcpip name servers 922 435 0 004 o 192 43 150 005 Specifying the Default Domain Suffix for DNS If you are using DNS and set this parameter you do not have to specify a fully qualified domain name when specifying hostnames Set the tcpip dns default domain parameter to the default domain suffix to be appended to hostnames in searches Setup Change Setup Parameters gt TCP IP Name Service gt DNS Default Domain The suffix is not appended to fully qualified names names that contain all the components of the domain name The default dom
309. ect password has been entered for the specified level of access that is either read only or read write access User Action None OPENFAILED failed to open filesystem_name filesystem for verification Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot open the specified file system as requested User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 26 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages PARAMNOTTABLE line n parameter parameter is not a table Severity Error Explanation The entry on the given line treats the specified parameter as if it were a table when it is not User Action Re enter the information using a simple statement parameter value READNVRAM read in NVRAM settings Severity Information Explanation The setup client or configd is reading the values saved in NVRAM as requested User Action None ETGROUP line m can t set a group n Severity Error Explanation The command entered on the given line attempts to set a value for an entire parameter group User Action Set values for parameters individually ETPROTECTED line n parameter parameter is set protected n Severity Error Explanation The specified parameter on the given line has been protected against setting it to a different value User Action To change the value first remove the parameter s protection reboot the terminal and then change its value E
310. ect the terminal s communication with a time server Time Field Description Corresponding Parameters Time Server The hostname or IP address of a host supplying current time from UDP port 37 time server Time Server Timeout seconds How long the terminal waits for a reply from the time server time server timeout Time Server Retries Maximum number of attempts to contact the time server time server retries Timezone Name of the zone file for the terminal s location time zone Offset from Greenwich Mean Time minutes Offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT time offset from gmt Unit Parameters The Unit hide box contains parameters that provide information about miscellaneous terminal attributes Unit Field Description Corresponding Parameter Query for Unit Name at The terminal requests its unit query for name at boot Boot hostname at boot time Unit Name The terminal s hostname unit name Physical Location The physical location of the terminal unit location Administrative Contact Person in charge of the terminal unit contact Administrative Status Administrative status of the terminal unit administrative status 9 38 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Unit Field Description Corresponding Parameter Show Low Memory Threshold for displaying the Low unit lo
311. ectronic mail server host browser smtp email server Printers section Browser Printer Table Printers available for printing from the Browser browser printer table Using Configuration Menus 9 17 Using Change Setup Parameters Commands and Startup Parameters The parameters in the Commands and Startup hide box affect local client availability Commands and Startup Field Description Corresponding Parameter Startup Commands Commands executed when a session starts exec startup commands Disabled Commands Commands users are not permitted to access exec disabled commands Command Menu Contents of the window manager default root menu exec command menu Configuration Parameters The parameters in the Configuration hide box affect remote configuration files and the actions of the Configuration and Preferences daemons Configuration Fields Description Corresponding Parameter Initial Configuration File section Load Initial File An initial configuration file is downloaded at boot config load initial file Persistent Loading The terminal does not boot unless a configuration file is loaded config persistent loading configuration file VMS X server UNIX Directory Directory searched for a config unix directory configuration file VMS Directory Directory searched for a config vms directory Custom File
312. ed to use the Display Manager For information on the Display Manager see the System Administrator s Guide Configuring XDM Hosts This section summarizes the configuration requirements of X11R4 X11R5 and X11R6 XDM on manager hosts For more detailed information see the X Window System Administrator s Guide from O Reilly and Associates For information about X11R3 XDM see Using XDM xX11R3 Version on page 8 19 All manager hosts require 1 XDM configuration files installed Installing XDM binaries and configuration files is an ncdinstall option so you may have already installed the files If you are already using XDM or you have installed files from other sources you do not need to reinstall them 1 A system wide session management file Login and X Session Management 8 5 Configuring XDM Hosts T An operating XDM daemon System files should be configured to start the daemon automatically when the host reboots The following are optional on manager hosts LI Customized XDM configuration files 1 Access control to authorize clients to connect to the terminal LI Individual session management files for users Installing the XDM Binary File The xdm 1 program binary is installed in the usr bin X11 directory and must be installed on each XDM manager host Installing XDM Configuration Files XDM binaries and configuration files must be installed on each XDM manager host Configuration files are installe
313. efault size from which other line sizes are derived by applying a scaling factor Setup Change User Preferences PEX Nominal Line Width This parameter allows you to match the appearance of lines and curves on an NCD terminal to their appearance on other displays Table 14 16 pref pex nominal line width Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 integer Standard width of lines and curves in pixels Range 1 to 64 Specifying the Nominal Edge Width The pref pex nominal edge width parameter controls the nominal width in pixels of edges of surface primitives when such edges are displayed The nominal edge width is a default width from which other edge sizes are derived by applying a scaling factor Setup Change User Preferences gt PEX Nominal Line Width Table 14 17 pref pex nominal edge width Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 integer Standard width of surface primitive edges in pixels when edges are displayed Range 1 to 64 Configuring PEX 14 9 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Specifying the Nominal Marker Size The pref pex nominal marker size parameter controls the nominal size in pixels of marker primitives For example if a plus marker is 3 pixels wide a nominal marker size of 2 makes the plus marker 6 pixels wide Other marker types except for dot markers are scaled accordingly Setup Change User Preferences PEX Nominal M
314. efer to them either as absolute pathnames or as pathnames relative to the configuration file directory Included files must be accessible through the file service table described in Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services Files can be nested to 10 levels By combining terminal specific configuration files and one or more standard files you can assign individual values to some parameters and maintain the common values in the standard files The following example shows two read commands in the terminal specific configuration file C02B9A57 Parameters common to all terminals on the Terminal Configuration Methods 6 19 Creating Remote Configuration Files network are in the file ncd_std Parameters common to a subgroup of terminals are in the file mktg_specific Configuration file for IP address 192 9 200 23 read ncd_std read mktg_specific Parameter specific to IP address 192 9 200 23 snmp allow reset yes When the terminal is booted the X server loads the C02B9A57 file reads the ncd_std file and the mktg_specific file and then resumes reading the C02B9A57 file The assignment in the last line of the C02B9A57 file overrides any assignments in the included files because later assignment takes precedence over earlier assignment Including the User s Settings in Remote Configuration Files You can allow users to save their preferred settings from Change Setup Parameters or Change Quick Setup in a fi
315. elds corresponding parameters 10 2 to 10 31 fields descriptions 10 2 to 10 31 remote terminal connecting to 10 1 starting 10 1 Show Tool Bar Change Setup Parameters 9 16 SIE configuration parameters for 9 54 diagnostic messages 18 108 SIE Contrast Threshold Change User Preferences 9 54 SIE Sampling Method Change User Preferences 9 54 SLIP configuration parameters for 9 35 diagnostic messages 18 96 sm command Boot Monitor 11 9 SMTP Email Server Change Setup Parameters 9 17 SNMP Read Only Community Change Setup Parameters 9 10 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol access control 16 3 to 16 7 community names 16 3 to 16 7 components 16 1 connecting to a terminal 16 10 diagnostic messages 18 108 host requirements 16 1 16 3 manager hosts 16 4 Index 25 Index SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol continued MIB files default locations 16 2 defined 16 2 mib my file 16 2 mib txt file 16 2 MIBFILE environment variable 16 3 monitor hosts 16 5 to 16 6 ncdquery 16 7 to 16 9 ncdreset 16 10 16 11 object names and paths for configuration parameters 16 2 overview 16 1 to 16 3 rebooting 16 10 remote reset reboot 16 10 to 16 12 statistics 10 18 to 10 21 trap events 16 6 variables reading 16 7 writing 16 9 X session restarting 16 10 SNMP Read Only Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 11 SNMP Read Only Alternative Community Change Setup Parameters 9 10 SNMP Read Write Access Control List
316. emental Graphic QO ISO Latin Alphabet 1 supplemental graphic QO 12 National Replacement Character sets The default character set configuration in the NCD Terminal Emulator is called the Digital Multinational character set It is composed of the ASCII character set and the Digital Supplemental Graphic character set The NCD Terminal Emulator maps the ASCII character set into the left side of the character table see Table 12 21 as the GL codes It maps the Digital Supplemental Graphic set into the right half see Table 12 23 as the GR codes The ISO Latin Alphabet 1 supplemental graphic set is composed of the ASCII set and the ISO Latin 1 supplemental set See Table 12 22 It includes many of the accented characters and diacritical marks used in European languages To use the ISO Latin Alphabet 1 supplemental graphic character set you select the ISO Latin 1 Font toggle in the Options menu By default the NCD Terminal Emulator s ASCII character set is 8 bit ASCII To change to 7 bit mode use the Strip Parity toggle in the Options menu The 12 National Replacement Character sets are 7 bit character sets used with European language keyboards See Table 12 24 Each varies slightly from the ASCII character set as required by the European language for which it is used Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 51 VT320 Character Coding Conventions Character Code Tables The code tables in this section describe the character codes
317. enabled 9 11 16 4 16 11 snmp read write access control list 16 4 16 11 snmp read write community 9 11 16 11 snmp read write community alt 9 11 snmp set requests received 10 20 snmp set requests transmitted 10 20 Index snmp too big error responses received 10 19 snmp too big error responses transmitted 10 20 snmp trap monitors 9 11 snmp traps received 10 20 snmp traps transmitted 10 21 snmp variable gets completed 10 19 snmp variable sets completed 10 19 SOCKS Host Change Setup Parameters 9 17 SOCKS Port Change Setup Parameters 9 17 Solid Color Change User Preferences 9 52 Standby After Change User Preferences 9 52 Startup Commands Change Setup Parameters 9 18 Starworks volume file Change Setup Parameters 9 39 statistics DECnet 10 9 to 10 11 displaying 10 1 Ethernet 10 2 font usage 10 3 ICMP 10 3 to 10 5 IP 10 6 10 8 memory 10 27 name service 10 24 to 10 25 network buffers 10 11 network interfaces 10 13 FS 10 13 arallel port 10 16 erial port 10 17 to 10 18 NMP 10 18 10 21 CP 10 21 to 10 23 FTP 10 25 JDP 10 26 wireless 10 28 to 10 29 X server modules 10 8 XRemote 10 30 to 10 31 Z DO WN CHH subnet mask setting 3 13 to 3 15 storing in NVRAM 3 11 Subnet Mask Change Quick Setup 9 5 Subnet Mask Change Setup Parameters 9 25 Sun Type 4 compatible keyboard 17 36 Sun Type 5 compatible keyboard 17 44 Surface Interior Style Change User Preferences 9 50 Surface Interpolation Metho
318. ends a three second break from the specified serial port when either the host system or the X server closes the serial connection The default serial interfaces table is serial interfaces table 1 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none 2 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none 3 terminal terminal 9600 8 1 none none none Specifying Serial Port Software Characteristics The serial daemons table specifies Serial daemon operating characteristics for each port Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Serial Serial Daemons Table 15 6 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports Configuring Port Operating Characteristics Table 15 2 serial daemons table Parameter Table Entries port number Possible Values Range 1 3 read only Results The identifying number of the serial port use serial protocol default false false A protocol for reporting serial status to host printing software is not used true A protocol for reporting serial status to host printing software is used This does not work unless hostside printing software has been enabled For more information about hostside printing software contact NCD Technical Support tcp port default Port 1 87 Port 2 5962 Port 3 5963 integer TCP IP port number used by the hosts connecting to the Serial daemon Range 1 to 65535 ncdnet object name default seriald stri
319. eng logic operations Fast Perspective Rendering Enables fast perspective for rendering primitives in perspective viewing situations pref openg fast perspective Activate Alpha Buffer for Allows built in non zero depth pref openg have alpha buffer RGBA Visuals alpha buffers to be used Enable 8 bit Color Index Advertises 8 bit color index pref openg l have 8cidb double buffered Visual double buffered visual type to clients Enable 8 bit Color index Advertises 8 bit color index pref openg have 8cisb single buffered visual single buffered visual type to clients Enable 8 bit RGBA double buffered visual Advertises 8 bit RGBA double buffered visual type to clients pref openg have 8rgbdb Enable 8 bit RGBA single buffered visual Advertises 8 bit RGBA single buffered visual type to clients pref openg have 8rgbsb Enable 24 bit RGBA Advertises 24 bit RGBA double pref opengl have 24rgbdb double buffered Visual buffered visual type to clients Enable 24 bit RGBA Advertises 24 bit RGBA single pref openg have 24rgbdb single buffered Visual buffered visual type to clients Using Configuration Menus 9 49 Using Change User Preferences PEX Preferences The parameters in the PEX hide box control certain aspects of applications that are based on the PEX extension For descriptions of other PEX options see PEX Parameters on page 9 33 and PEX Color Parameters
320. ents modification Once protected a parameter can be unprotected only by removing protection and rebooting the terminal You can protect parameters in a remote configuration file or through a TELNET connection You can use protection commands to protect certain parameters while allowing users to change others You can protect individual parameters entire groups or all parameters All protected parameters are commented that is a pound sign is inserted in front of their names If you try to display a parameter that is protected from display its value as shown as lt GET PROTECTED gt If you try to change a parameter that is protected from modification an error message is displayed Using the protect Command The protect command prevents both display and modification of parameter values The protect command has three forms protect parameter Protects one or more specific parameters from display and modification protect group Protects one or more groups of parameters protect all Protects all parameters For example the following command protects all parameters in the serial group ensuring that serial port configuration is not changed protect serial 6 32 Terminal Configuration Methods Protecting Configuration Parameters Using the get protect Command The get protect command prevents display of parameter values Parameters protected with this command can be modified but not displayed The get protect co
321. ents or remote clients until the terminal has more memory available NOW The browser is running if you wish to start a new window pane include the w parameter as the first parameter in the command Severity Warning Explanation Only one copy of the browser can run at any time you must use the w flag to open a new window User Action If you want to open a new window after the browser is already running specify w as the first flag after the browser command to open a new window in the currently running browser Only the current URL flag will be forwarded to the browser X Server Messages 18 75 LOADB Messages PARMM EM Not enough free memory for browser parameter string Loading of browser terminated Severity Error Explanation The browser ran out of memory before it started to load User Action Stop local clients and remote clients to free more memory PROURL The requested URL is already being processed This URL request will be ignored Severity Information Explanation The browser was started again with the same URL that is being loaded It is assumed that only one of the windows is desired User Action If you want multiple copies of the same URL wait until the first is loaded before loading any others TIMEOUT Timeout sending URL to browser Severity Error Explanation The browser seems to be running but is not able to accept a new URL from the command line Either the current browser i
322. er changes Changes made to the terminal s default configuration by using Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup Change User Preferences or a TELNET connection including the current contents of the auto save file if any are written to the auto save file all changes All changes made to the terminal s default configuration including the current contents of the auto save file and the initial configuration file downloaded by the terminal are written to the auto save file all info Allread write configuration parameters are written to the auto save file Terminal Configuration Methods 6 37 Configuring the Apply Command 6 38 Terminal Configuration Methods 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server This chapter provides information about conventional bitmap font service and font servers The following topics are covered in this chapter Font Use Overview on page 7 1 Alternative Methods of Changing the Current Font Path on page 7 11 Setting the Default Font on page 7 13 Changing the Size of the Font Cache on page 7 14 Renaming the Font Management Files on page 7 15 Specifying Font Path Aliases on page 7 16 Displaying and Logging Font Diagnostic Messages on page 7 17 Getting Font Information on page 7 17 COOUOCCCOUC Font Server Issues on page 7 19 Font Use Overview The X server depends on downloading fonts from hosts to satisfy most client
323. er of Clipping Planes The pex max model clip planes parameter specifies the maximum number of half spaces that can be defined for the purpose of model clipping Half spaces are defined by the clipping plane A half space is an infinite region of modeling coordinate space bounded on one side by the clipping plane Table 14 1 pex max model clip planes Parameter Possible Values Result default 64 integer The maximum number of model clipping half spaces that can be defined Range 6 to 65535 Specifying the Number of Name Sets The pex max nameset names parameter specifies the maximum number of name set identifiers that can be defined This value must be a power of two Setting this parameter to an integer that is not a power of two causes the parameter setting to be ignored A name set provides an identifier unique name for an individual primitive or a group of primitives The identifier can then be used to pick or highlight all the primitives in the group or make them invisible Table 14 2 pex max nameset names Parameter Possible Values Result default 256 64 128 256 512 The maximum number of identifiers that can be defined 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 or 32768 Specifying the Number of Non Ambient Light Sources The pex max non ambient lights parameter specifies the maximum number of non ambient light sources that can be defined The non ambient light source types are direct
324. er open timeout parameter User Action Verify that the font server is running that it is accessible via the network and that the time out limit specifies a reasonable amount of time such as the default 30 failed to set font server catalogue font_server Severity Warning Explanation The X server has failed to initialize a font server connection User Action Verify that the font server is accessible over the network FSLIST listing fonts on server font_server font FSLISTINFO 18 52 X Server Severity Information Explanation The X server is listing the available fonts on the specified font server as requested by the xlsfonts client User Action None listing fonts with info on server font_server font Severity Information Explanation The X server is listing the available fonts on the specified font server and additional information as requested by the xlsfonts client with the 1 command line option User Action None Messages FONT Messages FSREADT IMI FSRI FOUT timed out reading from font server Severity Warning Explanation The X server requested a font from a font server but the response time exceeded the read font time out limit which is defined in the xserver fontserver read timeout parameter User Action Verify that the font server is running that it is accessible via the network and that the read time out limit specifies a reasonable amount of time such as
325. er the cursor reaches the right border replaces the character at the end of the line Reverse Wraparound reverseWrap Allows the cursor to wrap from the leftmost column on the line to the rightmost column of the previous line allowing you to backspace to the previous line Auto Linefeed autoLineFeed Generates a linefeed automatically This is for use with programs that generate carriage returns without dropping down a line on the screen 12 8 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus Table 12 3 Options Menu and Associated Resources Continued Menu Item Resource Name Action Application Cursor appCursorMode Generates ANSI escape sequences rather than Mode standard cursor movements when you use arrow keys Application appKeypadMode Generates control functions rather than Keypad Mode numeric characters when the keypad is used Local Flow Control localFlowControl Determines whether flow control characters such as Ctrl S are passed to the host By default local flow control is enabled If local flow control is disabled flow control characters are passed to the host Allow 80 132 c132 Allows the terminal emulator to display in the Switching 132 column format required by some applications 80 132 Font useCondensedFont Switches from the default font to a condensed Switching font upon receipt of the control sequence that ch
326. erial terminal emulator only Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 39 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Table 12 15 N 108LK Cursor Keypad Sequences Cursor Key Mode Reset Cursor Key Mode Set Arrow Key 8 bit 7 bit 8 bit 7 bit Up CSI A Esc A S53 A EscO A Down CSI B Esc B SS3 B Esc O B Right CSI C Esc C SS3 C Esc O C Left CSI D Esc D SS3 D Esc O D Table 12 16 N 108LK Escape Sequences Break Shift and Control Key Code Sent Break 250 millisecond Break Shift Break 3 5 second Break amp drop DTR Control NULL Control Space NULL Control Shift Space NULL Break and Shift Break apply to the serial terminal emulator only 12 40 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Table 12 17 N 108LK Editing Keypad Escape Sequences VMS ULTRIX Key 8 bit 7 bit 8 bit 7 bit Find CSI 1 Esc 1 CSI 1 Esc 1 Insert CSI 2 Esc 2 CSI 2 Esc 2 Remove CSI 3 Esc 3 CSI 3 Esc 3 Select CSI 4 Esc 4 CSI 4 Esc 4 Prior CSI 5 Esc 5 CSI5 Esc 5 Next CSI 6 Esc 6 CSI 6 Esc 6 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 41 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences N 97 N Kana Keyboard Escape Sequences The tables in this section list escape sequences for N 97 and N Kana
327. erify that the identified key sequence is entered correctly X Server Messages 18 33 CONSOLE Messages BADSEL unknown selection selection_name or target information_type Severity Error Explanation An application has requested the specified unknown type of information from the Console User Action Modify the application so that it requests the correct information FIONREAD data from diagd missing errno n Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support LOCKED screen locked Severity Information Explanation Utilities Lock Screen has locked the terminal s screen as requested User Action None LOGOUT shutting down all windows NOFONTPATH Severity Information Explanation The X server is shutting down all windows as requested User Action None unable to rescan font path Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot rescan the font path as requested because there is no current font path configured for the terminal User Action Verify that the terminal is configured for a default font path and a current font path 18 34 X Server Messages CONSOLE Messages POWERMANAGE automatic powerdown to state state after n minutes idle time Severity Warning Explanation The X server is powering the terminal to the state state after n minutes of idle
328. erminals between locations or change IP addresses Use the decimal version if you find it inconvenient to work with hexadecimal addresses Use the Ethernet address filename if the configuration of the terminal applies only to the terminal itself and not to the location where it is used Use the NCDnet address filename if the configuration applies to the location and not the terminal and the terminal is on a DECnet network Use the generic filename if all terminals use the same settings or there are only a few special situations Disabling Specific Configuration File Download Attempts To disable a specific download attempt set the relevant configuration parameter from Table 6 5 to false For example to disable the attempt to download the generic file use config generic fil fals Terminal Configuration Methods 6 25 Specifying a Different Configuration File Directory Specifying a Different Configuration File Directory By default the X server searches for configuration files in the directory ust lib X11 ncd configs when the terminal is booted You can specify a different directory which must be located on one of the initial file server hosts or the boot host The directory you specify becomes the default directory for saving parameters to a file from Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup and Change User Preferences As this parameter consumes space in the tagged string area of NVRAM you should keep the filena
329. ernet Field Description Corresponding Parameter Interfaces Table Table of read only Ethernet interface enet interfaces table statistics 10 2 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Font Usage Statistics The parameters in the Font Usage hide box report statistics on font usage Font Usage Field Description Corresponding Parameter Cache Size Size of the font cache in bytes font cache size Cache Used Portion of the font cache in use in font cache used bytes Number of Fonts in Number of fonts in the cache font number of fonts in cache Cache Total Fonts Loaded Number of fonts loaded since the font total fonts loaded terminal was last reset Objects Currently in Number of font objects currently in font objects currently in use Use use Cache Hits Number of font cache hits font cache hits Object Count Number of font objects font object count ICMP Statistics The parameters in the ICMP hide box report statistics on terminal communications using ICMP ICMP Statistics Field Packets Received Description Total number of ICMP messages received by the terminal including all messages counted by icmp packets received with errors Corresponding Parameter icmp packets received Packets Received with Errors Number of ICMP messages received by the terminal and determined to have ICMP specific errors icmp packets received with error
330. es 12 13 to 12 33 File menu configuring 12 6 fonts choosing 12 5 Default 12 10 Fonts menu 12 10 icon titles configuring 12 30 key translations 12 4 keyboards compose sequences 12 44 to 12 50 downloadable descriptions 17 54 escape sequences 12 34 to 12 43 Keys menu 12 11 N 108LK function keys programming 12 28 Options menu configuring 12 8 resources answerbackString 12 12 appCursorMode 12 9 appKeypadMode 12 9 autoLineFeed 12 8 autoWrap 12 8 blinkCursor 12 10 e132 12 9 clearScreenWithBlanks 12 9 curses 12 9 defaultHost 12 7 disableExits 12 6 12 7 disconnectDelay 12 12 family 12 11 foundry 12 11 jumpScroll 12 8 latin1Font 12 10 localFlowControl 12 9 marginBell 12 9 menuBar 12 6 12 8 pointSize 12 11 printerHost 12 7 rectangularCutLineTerminator 12 12 reverseVideo 12 8 Index 29 Index Terminal Emulator continued resources continued reverseWrap 12 8 saveLines 12 6 scrollbar 12 6 secureKeyboard 12 10 showAvailableLat 12 3 showCTerm 12 3 showDefaultLat 12 3 showLocal 12 2 showSerial 12 3 showTelnet 12 3 statusLine 12 10 stripParity 12 10 subFont 12 11 useCondensedFont 12 9 visualBell 12 8 scroll bars configuring 12 6 selecting text terminator for 12 12 serial connections configuring 12 3 status line configuring 12 27 Terminal Host Chooser local service connections 12 2 X resources for 12 3 window titles configuring 12 30 Terminal IP Address At Next Boot Change Quick Setup 9 5 Terminal S
331. es 5 25 Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks Table 5 27 ip initial default gateway 2 Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The gateway is the boot host IP address or hostname A default gateway The IP Routing Table NCD terminals maintain an internal routing table that contains current routes to remote hosts and networks When attempting to reach a host outside the local network the terminal tries the following methods of finding a route in the order given 1 A route to the specific host 2 A route to the network or subnet the host is on 3 The default route either as specified in ip initial default gateway or obtained via router discovery 4 Proxy ARP if enabled by ip use proxy arp The routing table can contain multiple routes to a single destination If there is more than one matching route the terminal uses the route with the greatest preference value The routing table changes over time due to normal operation Routes are placed in the table by D Actions of network protocols proxy ARP router discovery and ICMP redirects See Finding Routes to Hosts through Proxy ARP on page 5 29 and Discovering Neighboring Gateways through Router Discovery on page 5 30 d Default gateway parameter settings These are the first entries in the table after the terminal boots For more information about the default gateway parameters see Specifying Default Ga
332. es in the default directory Using the following procedures you can create a configuration file and have it downloaded the first time the terminal boots This procedure assumes that you are installing the configuration files on the boot host or on one of the initial file server hosts See Specifying Hosts for Loading Configuration Files on page 6 21 for more information on configuration file hosts and see Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading for more information on initial file servers Complete the following steps to establish a configuration file 1 If you did not install the example configuration file when you installed NCDware copy the example configuration file from the NCDware distri bution into the usr lib X11 ncd configs directory on the boot host Follow the directions in the README file included with the example configura tion files 2 Make sure the filename is correct If this is a generic file the name is ncd_std If this isa file for an individual terminal the name is the hexadecimal equivalent of the terminal s IP address To convert an IP address to its hexadecimal equivalent convert each octet to a hexadecimal number for example to convert the IP address 192 40 154 4 using the UNIX bc 1 utility Terminal Configuration Methods 6 17 Creating Remote Configuration Files be obase 16 192 40 154 4 CO 28 9A 4 The resulting filename is C0289A04 Each octet of the address must have
333. escription Corresponding Parameters Enable 3270 Terminal Enables 3270 emulation ncd3270 enable 3270 emulation Emulation NCD3270 Default Default connection protocol ncd3270 default protocol Protocol NCD3270 Default Model Default 3270 model type ncd3270 default model TN3270 Default Host Default host for TN3270 ncd3270 tn default host connections TN3270 Default tcp Port Default TCP port for TN3270 ncd3270 pu21 default port connections PU2 1 Default Host Default host for Brixton PU2 1 connections ncd3270 pu21 default host PU2 1 Default tcp Port Default TCP port for Brixton PU2 1 connections ncd3270 pu21 default port EHLLAPI A Default tcp Default TCP port for EHLLAPI ncd270 ehllapia default port Port connections Default Hosts Hosts presented by default in ncd3270 default hosts the 3270 Host Chooser 9 42 Using Configuration Menus Using Change User Preferences Using Change User Preferences Change User Preferences allows users or system administrators to set user preferences By default you access Change User Preferences from the Console window s Setup menu Setup Change User Preferences For other methods of displaying this local client information about disabling it and directions for creating a user preferences file that is loaded when the user logs in see the System Administrator s Guide Components of the Change User Preferences Window Ch
334. ess which is set in NVRAM at the factory To participate on a network a terminal must be able to discover its network address Depending on your network setup the terminal may need other information The three ways for the terminal to discover addresses and other information before loading the X server are DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol DHCP and BOOTP are widely available protocols and are the recommended methods of address discovery By default an NCD terminal broadcasts alternating DHCP BOOTP and RARP requests when it boots These requests contain the terminal s Ethernet or Token Ring address A host running the DHCP or BOOTP daemon and configured with information about the terminal responds with the IP address of the terminal Booting Address Discovery 3 1 Changing the Order of Network Information Requests Depending upon the protocol implementation and the information in the host s database it can return other addresses and permit the terminal to boot from a host on a different subnet It can also specify the X server that each terminal boots For more information about DHCP and BOOTP see Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery on page 3 3 D RARP Reverse Address Resolution Protocol RARP is another widely available address discovery protocol By default an NCD terminal automatically broadcasts alternating DHCP BOOTP and RARP requests when it boots These request
335. essages 18 77 LOGIN Messages WRITEERROR error flushing data to flash card Severity Error Explanation A write error occurred when writing to the PCMCIA card The PCMCIA card may be corrupted User Action You may need to reformat the card and recopy the contents onto it LOGIN Messages LOGIN messages pertain to the login local client Login gt Login New X Session For messages that start with LOGIN but do not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADAUTHENTICATION bad authentication_type authentication given by XDMCP host Severity Warning Explanation The specified type of authentication has failed during initial connection usually due to an incorrect password User Action Verify that the password being entered is correct for the desired type of authentication BADAUTHORIZATION bad authorization_type authorization given by XDMCP host Severity Warning Explanation The authorization information contained in the packet from the host system is incorrect User Action Verify that the passwords contained on the host system and in the X server are the same 18 78 X Server Messages LOGIN Messages DWBADAUTHORIZATION unable to login to DECWindows host host Severity Error Explanation The specified DECwindows host has refused the user s login attempt This message usually occurs when the user s password is incorrect User Action Veri
336. ession Change Quick Setup 9 6 term restrict host choices 9 39 Tertiary Boot Source Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Tertiary TCP IP Server Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Test RAM at power up Change Setup Parameters 9 13 TFTP auto save of configuration data 6 35 booting 4 2 4 5 4 8 4 12 file service 5 20 to 5 22 statistics 10 25 Index 30 TFTP Directory Change Setup Parameters 9 15 tftp ack packets received 10 25 tftp ack packets transmitted 10 26 tftp bad access error responses received 10 25 tftpboot directory 4 15 tftpd 8 5 21 tftp data packets received 10 25 tftp data packets transmitted 10 25 tftp disk full error responses received 10 25 tftp file read requests transmitted 10 25 tftp file write requests transmitted 10 25 tftp no available buffer errors 10 25 tftp no file error responses received 10 25 tftp packets retransmitted 10 26 Threshold Distance Change User Preferences 9 51 Time Server Change Setup Parameters 9 38 Time Server Retries Change Setup Parameters 9 38 Time Server Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 38 time service configuration parameters for 9 38 time offset from gmt 9 38 time server 9 38 time server retries 9 38 time server timeout 9 38 Timestamp Frequency Change Setup Parameters 9 20 time zone 9 38 Timezone Change Setup Parameters 9 38 TN3270 Default Host Change Setup Parameters 9 42 TN3270 Default tcp Port Change Setup Parameters 9 42 Ind
337. eters ARP gt Incomplete Entry Timeout Table 5 4 tcpip arp incomplete entry timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 integer How long to wait in minutes before deleting an incomplete entry Range 1 255 5 6 Configuring Network Services Using a Name Service Using a Name Service A name service translates between IP addresses and hostnames Name service is optional but you must use it if you want to specify hosts by their hostnames instead of their IP addresses It is simpler and more meaningful to specify hostnames in remote configuration files Setup menus and commands If you try to specify a hostname without using a name service the terminal cannot find the host NCD terminals can use both DNS Domain Name System and IEN 116 name services Making Sure a Name Service is Running on the Local Network To make sure DNS is available on the name server host 1 Verify that the daemon named or in named is configured in the relevant startup file on the name server host You can use a command similar to the following to find the command line starting up the name daemon grep named etc rc etc rce local if f usr etc in named 1 f etc named boot then in named echo n named gt dev console 1 Make sure that the name server host s DNS database files are set up To make sure IEN 116 name service is available on the name server host L Verify that the daemon most c
338. ex Token Ring configuration parameters for 9 32 current and built in addresses 3 7 diagnostic messages 18 122 interface speed setting HMX terminals 11 9 TOKENRING messages 18 122 Token Ring Speed Change Setup Parameters 9 32 tokring interface table 10 26 tokring statistics table 10 26 touch screen configuration parameters for 9 25 9 51 diagnostic messages 18 16 tr command Boot Monitor 11 9 Transaction Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 28 Try All Matches on Open Change Setup Parameters 9 22 Try Generic Filename Change Setup Parameters 9 19 Try MOP Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try MOP with File Name Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try TCP IP Product Name and Memory Size File Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try TCP IP Product Name and Memory Size with Path File Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try TCP IP Product Name File Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try TCP IP Product Name with Path File Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try TCP IP Unit Address File Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try TCP IP Unit Address with Path File Change Setup Parameters 9 15 Try Unit Ethernet Address as Filename Change Setup Parameters 9 19 Try Unit IP Address as Filename 9 19 Try Unit Name as Filename Change Setup Parameters 9 19 Try Unit NCDnet Address as Filename Change Setup Parameters 9 19 U ud command Boot Monitor 11 9 UDP statistics 10 26 udp listener table 10 27 udp packets received 10 26 udp packets received
339. eys more than the maximum usually four keys are used to define a Boot Monitor access key combination User Action Change the Boot Monitor access key combination definition to max_n or fewer keys MAXSETUPKEYS Line n found setup_n setup combination keys max_n maximum Severity Error Explanation At line n setup_n more than the maximum usually four keys are used to define a Setup key combination User Action Change the Setup key combination definition to max_n or fewer keys MOREKEYSCAN Line n more keycodes key_n given than scancodes scan_n Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode command has more keycodes key_n than scancodes scan_n User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n MORESCANKEY Line n more scancodes scan_n given than keycodes key_n Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode command has more scancodes than keycodes User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n 18 62 X Server Messages KBM Messages NODEADKEYSY ET Line n warning no deadkeys defined yet Severity Warning Explanation A dead key command used a dead key keysym that had not already been defined in the keyboard definition file User Action Define the dead key keysym in the keycode section of the file NOFILE Cannot open file file Severity
340. ference Red Chromaticity v The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the red color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference red v Reference Red Luminance Y The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the red color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference red y Reference Green Chromaticity u The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the green color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference green u Reference Green Chromaticity v The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the green color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference green v Reference Green Luminance Y The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the green color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference green y Reference Blue Chromaticity u The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the blue color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference blue u Reference Blue Chromaticity v The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the blue color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference blue v Reference Blue Luminance Y The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the blue color component of a properly adjusted monitor pex monitor reference blue y 9 34 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters PEX Color Field Description Correspo
341. ffers Number of unallocated network net available buffers buffers Total Cluster Buffers Total number of large contiguous network buffers in the terminal net total cluster buffers Available Cluster Buffers Number of unallocated large contiguous network buffers net available cluster buffers Reserved Data Buffers Number of network buffers storing user data within the protocol stacks reserved but not yet allocated for net reserved data buffers Buffer Not Available Number of times the networking net buffer not available errors Errors code initiated error recovery procedures because it could not allocate a network buffer Buffer Waits Number of times the networking net buffer waits code blocked while waiting for network buffers to become available Statistics Menus 10 11 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Network Buffers Field Description Corresponding Parameter Used Buffers section Packet Data Buffers Number of packet data buffers net packet data buffers Packet Header Buffers Number of network buffers net packet header buffers allocated for storing protocol header information Packet Fragment Reassembly Buffers Number of network buffers allocated for storing IP packet fragments for reassembly net packet fragment reassembly buffers Connection Control Structure Buffers Number of network buffers allocated for storing connection
342. figuration file directory 6 26 Index 5 Index configuring terminals see terminal configuration remote configuration remote configuration files Setup menus Console Setup Boot Monitor NVRAM utility config use decimal ip address notation as filename 6 24 9 19 config vms directory 9 4 9 18 CONFUI messages 18 30 Connect Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 27 9 31 9 36 Console configuration parameters for 9 10 9 46 diagnostic messages 18 33 disabling 6 34 key sequence for displaying 9 46 Console Display Password Change Setup Parameters 9 10 Console Key Sequence Change User Preferences 9 46 CONSOLE messages 18 33 CTERM Terminal Host Chooser automatic display of hosts 12 3 see also Terminal Emulator Current Font Path Change User Preferences 9 47 Current Pointing Device Change User Preferences 9 51 Custom File Change Setup Parameters remote configuration file 9 18 X server file 9 14 D da command Boot Monitor 11 8 Data Compression Mode Change Setup Parameters 9 41 Index 6 DECnet configuration parameters for 9 31 to 9 32 statistics 10 9 to 10 11 DECwindows configuration parameters for 9 30 9 45 Default Colormap Change Setup Parameters 9 41 Default File Change Setup Parameters 9 19 Default Font Path at Reset Change Quick Setup 9 4 Default for Enable X Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 9 Default home page Change Setup Parameters 9 16 Default Hosts Change Setup Pa
343. figuration files in a non standard location look for the default location usr lib X11 ncd configs in the local unix mount point field In Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service gt File Service Table look for Local UNIX Mount Point with the default location In the server mount point field enter the actual file access point on the host In the File Service Table click on the Server Mount Point entry you want to change then type the actual file access point in the text entry box If the actual file access point is on a host other than the boot host or an initial file server enter the name or IP address of the host in the server field In the File Service Table click on the Server entry you want to change then type the name or IP address of the host in the text entry box Note Local file systems are not entered into the file service table Table 5 19 file service table Parameter Table Entries Possible Values Result local unix mount point default nil pathname The terminal s local UNIX style pathname for this file service access point local vms mount point default nil pathname The terminal s local VMS style pathname for this file service access point server default nil network address The file server host or hostname 5 16 Configuring Network Services Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Table 5 19 file service table Parameter Continued
344. file and you must restart ncdlicense ERRBIND bind failed message Severity Error Explanation The bind system call failed on the terminal Message is the UNIX error description User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support 18 68 X Server Messages LICENSE Messages ERRORSENDPKT sendto failed message Severity Error Explanation The sendto system call failed on the terminal Message is the UNIX error description User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support ERRPORTACCESS access to port port_n denied Severity Error Explanation Access to port_n was denied User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support ERRRECVPKT recvfrom failed message Severity Error Explanation The recvfrom system call failed on the terminal Message is the UNIX error description User Action Try again If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support ERRRECVZERO empty packet received message Severity Error Explanation The license packet received by the terminal was empty Message is the UNIX error description User Action Reboot the terminal If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 69 LICENSE Messages ERRSENTDO sendto failed message Severity Error
345. file to which error messages should be logged 1 Using UNIX syslog 3 I No logging The error file parameter specifies a name of a file for logging error messages when the error handling method specified using error method is set to file Example NCD Font Server Configuration File The size cache size Font server configuration data is stored in a font server configuration file called config in the directory usr lib X11 ncd fs All of the parameters that make up the font server configuration file are described in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems The following sample font server configuration file includes values for every font server parameter The NCDware distribution also contains a sample font server configuration file Sample Font Server Configuration File UNIX Hosts in bytes of the font server cache 2000000 Directories searched for fonts The first is an SNF font The second is a set of Speedo outlines the third is a set of misc bitmaps and the last is a set of 100dpi bitmaps Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 23 Font Server Issues catalogue ibm usr lib X11 ncd fonts aix 100dpi usr lib fonts speedo usr lib X11 ncd fonts misc usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi Names of alternate font servers for clients to use alternate servers tcp green 7001 tcp green 7002 Allow a maximum of 10 clients to connect to this font server client limit 10 When
346. fter Screen Saver Change User Preferences 9 53 Allow Logical Operations Change User Preferences 9 49 Allow MOP Reset Change Setup Parameters 9 31 Allow Polygon Stipple Change User Preferences 9 49 Index 1 Index Allow Scissor Test Change User Preferences 9 48 Allow SNMP Reset Change Setup Parameters 9 11 Allow Stencil Test Change User Preferences 9 48 Allow XRemote TCP Connection Change Setup Parameters 9 41 AppletViewer Command Change Setup Parameters 9 27 apply command Configuration language 6 34 to 6 37 Arc Cache Maximum Size Change Setup Parameters 9 40 arc caching memory used for 9 40 ARP Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache 5 5 to 5 6 configuration parameters for 9 13 proxy ARP 5 29 ARP Cache Change Setup Parameters 9 13 Audio Enabled Change Setup Parameters 9 40 Authorize XRemote Clients Change Setup Parameters 9 41 Auto Save Change Setup Parameters 9 8 Auto Save File Change Setup Parameters 9 20 Auto Save File Name Change Setup Parameters 9 20 Auto Save NVRAM Change Setup Menus 9 19 Auto Saved Info Change Setup Parameters 9 20 Automatic Lock Screen After Change User Preferences 9 46 Automatic Logout After Change User Preferences 9 46 Automatic Logout Cancel Delay Change User Preferences 9 46 Automatically load images Change Setup Parameters 9 16 Index 2 Autorepeat Begin After Change User Preferences 9 47 Autorepeat Rate Change User Preferences 9
347. fy that d The directory to which the logfile should be written has world write access 1 The terminal s file service table contains an entry for the desired directory E The file service entry specifies NFS transport The NFS protocol is available on the network on which the terminal resides LOWMEM Memory very low Can t allocate selection buffer Severity Warning Explanation The X server is running low on memory and cannot allocate enough memory for the selection buffer User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the desired action Close any unused local clients to free local memory X Server Messages 18 113 TERM Messages MI ENUBAR Can t create the interface menubar Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot create the menu bar This situation usually occurs when the terminal is running low on memory User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the action Close any unused local clients to free local memory Can t create the interface menus Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module cannot create the menus This situation usually occurs when the terminal is running low on memory User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the action Close any unused local clients to free local memory MISSARG Missing argument for option Severity Warning Explanation The specif
348. fy that the font server is running and that it is accessible to the network NOACCESS denied access to font server font_server Severity Error Explanation The X server is not included in the list of trusted clients that the font server maintains and is therefore refused access to the font server User Action Add the terminal to the font server s list of trusted clients maintained in the trusted clients parameter in the font server configuration file if the terminal should have access to the fonts on that font server If no values are in the parameter the default is to accept any connection REQ requesting font font Severity Information Explanation The X server is requesting the specified font for display on the screen User Action None 18 54 X Server Messages IPROUTE Messages RETAINFONTS retained font path over server reset Severity Information Explanation As requested the X server retained the default font path even though the X server was reset User Action None RETAINFONTSFAIL failed to retain font path over server reset Severity Information Explanation The X server attempted to retain the default font path after the X server was reset but could not This usually occurs when a font server is included in the font path or if the font path has changed since the last reset of the X server User Action None TRYINGALTERNATE attempting connection to alternate
349. fy that the user enters the correct password when logging in to the DECwindows host DWERROR n error while action host host Severity Error Explanation The X server detected the specified error indicated by the error number while attempting to connect to the specified host User Action Make sure that the host is connected to the network that the network is running and that the host system s NCP database contains the correct network addresses for the terminal and the host system KEEPALIVEOK login host finally responding to keepalives Severity Information Explanation The host is responding to XDM keepalive packets User Action None NOAUTHORIZATION no authorization allowing access to host host Severity Warning Explanation The user attempted to connect to the specified host with XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 but the attempt failed Access is granted using MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 authorization instead User Action Verify that the password being entered is correct for the desired type of authentication X Server Messages 18 79 LOGIN Messages NOSESSION login prompter on host host failed to start session Severity Fatal Explanation The specified host has not started the login program because it detects other clients running on the terminal User Action Close any existing client connections to the terminal before requesting login services XDMCPFAIL XDMCP error message sta
350. g Method The pref pex color clipping method parameter specifies the method for clipping colors that cannot be displayed because their RGB red green blue components are outside the displayable range 0 0 through 1 0 Although the display hardware automatically clips values that are out of range the resulting displayed color is unpredictable Setup Change User Preferences PEX Color Clipping Method Color components may exceed the displayable range for example when numerous light sources are applied 14 12 Configuring PEX Specifying the Input Device for PEX Table 14 24 pref pex color clipping method Parameter Possible Values Result default none none The RGB components are not corrected scale The RGB components are scaled proportionately if any components exceed 1 0 For example if the red component has a value of 1 2 it is scaled to 1 and the green and blue components are scaled by the same percentage Hue and saturation are maintained while intensity is clipped desaturate The color saturation contrast of the RGB components is clipped while the hue and intensity are maintained clamp The RGB components are set to 0 if they are less than 0 0 or to 1 0 if they are greater than 1 0 Clamping can potentially alter hue saturation and intensity Specifying the Input Device for PEX When using the PEX server you can attach one of the following special input devices to the seri
351. g guidelines 18 50 X Server Messages FONT Messages FSCANCI FSCLOS 1 Font server names are case sensitive make sure the desired name is typed correctly 1 Font servers residing on DECnet networks require two colons after the hostname or address while those residing on TCP IP networks require one colon d The DECnet object name for a font server residing on a DECnet network must contain the prefix FONT EL flushing pending requests to font server font_server Severity Information Explanation The font server has stopped running current applications are waiting for fonts from the font server and the user has selected the Abort Waiting Fonts option in the Console window Console Abort Waiting Fonts User Action None ECONN disconnecting from font server font_server Severity Information Explanation The X server is shutting down communications with the specified font server User Action None FSCONN connecting to font server font_server Severity Information Explanation The X server is establishing communications with the specified font server User Action None X Server Messages 18 51 FONT Messages FSCONNTIMEOUT timed out connecting to font server FSINITERROR Severity Warning Explanation The X server attempted to connect to a font server but the connect time exceeded the open connection time out limit which is defined in the xserver fontserv
352. ge User Preferences 9 49 Enable Bell Change User Preferences 9 45 Enable Benchmark Optimizations Change User Preferences 9 54 Enable Config Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 10 Enable Diagnostic Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 11 Enable Execution Host Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 12 Enable Execution User Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 12 Enable File Manager Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 12 Enable Floppy Filesystem Change Setup Parameters 9 23 Enable Graphics Optimizations Change User Preferences 9 54 Enable Keyboard Autorepeat Change User Preferences 9 47 Enable NFS Server Change Setup Parameters 9 23 Enable Screen Saver Change User Preferences 9 53 Enable Serial and Parallel Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 13 Enable SNMP Read Only Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 11 Enable SNMP Read Write Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 11 Index 8 Enable VESA Monitor Power Management 9 52 Enable X Access Control Change Setup Parameters 9 9 enet interfaces table 10 2 Enforce Config Passwords Locally Change Setup Parameters 9 9 Enforce Console Password Locally Change Setup Parameters 9 10 Enforce User Preferences Passwords Locally Change Setup Parameters 9 10 Environment Variables Change Setup Parameters for the NCD Mosaic Browser 9 16 Environment Variables Change User Preferences for local clients 9 47
353. ges NETFILE Messages DAPWAITERROR NCDnet DAP write error waiting for socket buffer space LOCALERROR Severity Error Explanation The terminal was unable to send a DAP packet to the host User Action Make sure that the host is operating properly open for file failed message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot open the specified file in the terminal s local file system This message appears only if extended file diagnostics is enabled User Action Make sure the specified file exists in the terminal s local file system that its name is entered correctly and that the file service table is properly configured for access to the local file system MATCHATTEMPT attempting protocol open of filel on host for file2 Severity Information Explanation The X server is using the specified protocol to open the specified file file1 on the specified host using file2 the name of the file as the host system recognizes it The values for file1 and file2 are usually the same User Action None MATCHFAIL protocol open attempt for file returns message Severity Warning Explanation The X server matched the specified filename with an entry in the file service table but failed to open the specified file User Action Verify that the file exists in the correct location on the host system and that it has the correct permission assigned MKDIRATTEMPT attempting mkdir for file Severity Info
354. ges pertain to communications using Point to Point Protocol PPP or Serial Line Interface Protocol SLIP If you are looking for a message that refers to the PPPD module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADIOCTL Port n internal I O error message Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support BADLDISC Port m unable to start protocol line discipline Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support BADOPEN Unable to open serial port n Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support BADREAD Port m read error Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 96 X Server Messages PPPD Messages BADSPMGR CNFGFAIL IPCPFAIL LCPFAIL Error talking to Serial Port Manager message Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support Port n config error message Severity Error Explanation The X server
355. ges result To find out where the X server is looking for modules and correct the location you can use the Change Quick Setup local client to display and change the current value of Files Loadable Modules Directory or Change Setup Parameters Loadable Modules Loadable Modules Directory If you change the location of the server modules on the host you must change the value of the modules directory parameter to the new location For example modules directory usr vendor ncd modshmx Changes are automatically recorded in the file service table Using TFTP for X Server Downloading The terminal automatically tries to download the X server first using TFTP You must configure the terminal if the X server is in a non standard location Making Sure TFTP is Enabled If you are not certain whether TFTP is enable on the boot host see Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services for information about enabling TFTP Specifying a Custom X Server Directory You can specify a custom directory for X servers by changing the default value which is tftpboot or usr tftpboot If you are using secure TFTP make sure that the directory is physically under the default TFTP home directory and in the same file system partition To specify a different directory change the boot tftp directory parameter Setup gt Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section gt TFTP Directory Save the new value in NVRAM 4 12 Booti
356. giving up Range 0 25 Getting Information about the Font Server The ncdfsinfo font server information utility displays information about the font server including the name of the host and the font server version number the maximum request size in longwords and bytes the number and names of catalogues the number and names of alternate servers and the number of extensions The ncdfsinfo utility syntax is ncdfsinfo server font server If you use the server flag use the syntax tcp host port for font server where host is the network name or IP address of the host on which the font server resides and port is the TCP port on which the font server listens for connections 7 26 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Server Issues You must set the FONTSERVER environment variable to specify the default font server in use for the ncdfsinfo utility Use the syntax described in the preceding paragraph for the font server variable to define the FONTSERVER variable For more information about ncdfsinfo see the ncdfsinfo man page Getting Information about Fonts from the Font Server The ncdfslsfonts font information utility lists the fonts available on the font server You can request a subset of the available fonts by defining a pattern for the utility to match Additional options specify the name of the font server you wish to query the level of detail you want in the listing and the format of the output T
357. gramming Navigation Keys for Boot Monitor Setup Menus 11 18 XV Contents xvi Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals 11 20 Starting the NVRAM Utility 11 20 NVRAM Utility Commands 11 20 Sample NVRAM Utility Sessions 11 21 Changing Contents Byte by Byte 11 21 Changing Individual Bits in a Byte 11 23 NVRAM Contents 11 24 Keyboard Type Settings 11 32 Parameters Saved in the Tagged Strings Area 11 37 Remote Configuration Parameters Saved in NVRAM 11 38 hapter 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulato Other Sources of Information on the Terminal Emulator 12 1 Configuring Local Services in the Terminal Host Chooser 12 2 Configuring a Terminal for Serial Terminal Emulation 12 3 Configuring Key Translations 12 4 Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus 12 5 Terminal Emulator Fonts 12 5 Terminal Emulator Scroll Bars 12 6 Terminal Emulator Menus 12 6 The File Menu 12 6 The Options Menu 12 8 The Fonts Menu 12 10 The Cursors Menu 12 11 The Keys Menu 12 11 Selecting in the Window 12 12 Configuring the Window Disconnect Delay 12 12 Configuring the Answer Back Message 12 12 Contents Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences 12 13 Configuring the Status Line 12 27 Programming Function Keys on N 108LK Keyboards 12 28 Configuring Window and Icon Titles 12 30 Configuring Color Text 12 30 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences 12 34 N 101 N 102 Keyboard Escape Sequences 12 35 N 108LK VT220 Style Keyboard
358. ground text color 30 Black 31 Red 32 Green 33 Yellow 34 Blue 35 Magenta 36 Cyan 37 White Background text color 40 Black 41 Red 42 Green 43 Yellow 44 Blue 45 Magenta 46 Cyan 47 White continued on next page Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 21 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued Escape Sequence Action continued from previous page CSI ps ps ps m Esc ps ps ps m Select graphic rendition visual attributes Color pair selection NCD specific values 90 Color pair0 91 Color pair1 92 Color pair2 93 Color pair3 94 Color pair4 95 Color pair5 96 Color pair6 97 Color pair7 Control Function 12 22 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI psn Device status reports DSR Esc psn r ps Meaning Response CSI psn 5 Status report CSI 0 n Esc ps n 6 Cursor position report CSI r c R 15 Printer ready CSI 10 n No printer CSI 13 n 00 25 User defined key status CSI 20 n unlocked 26 Keyboard dialect CSI 27 type n Permissible values for type 1 North American 2 British 3 Flemish 4 Canadian French 5 Danish 6 Finnish 7 German 8 Dutch 9 Italian 10 Swiss French 11 Swiss German 12 Swedish 13 Nor
359. guration Menus Using Change Quick Setup Licenses Parameters The Licenses hide box contains parameters that affect licensed features Licenses Field Description Corresponding Parameter License Key License key for the enabled software features that require a license unit license key Licensed Features Features licensed on the terminal unit licensed features Network Parameters The Network hide box contains parameters that set network addresses and specify hosts that provide services to the terminal Some of the fields shown below do not appear in the XRemote X server Network Field Description Corresponding Parameter Terminal IP Address At Terminal s IP address the next ip address at next boot Next Boot time it boots Gateway IP Address Primary default gateway host ip initial default gateway 1 Subnet Mask Subnet mask for this network ip subnet mask segment Broadcast IP Address Broadcast address ip broadcast address Use Address Discovery Addresses supplied by ip use address discovery BOOTP DHCP or RARP are used by the terminal TCP IP Name Service Name service protocol for tcpip name server protocol Protocol contacting the name servers TCP IP Name Servers List of name server hosts tcpip name servers NCDnet Address Current NCDnet address for ncdnet address terminals on a DECnet network NCDnet Address at NCDnet address for the terminal ncdne
360. guration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Access Control Field Description Corresponding Parameter Enable Serial and Parallel Access Control Access control is enabled for connecting to the Serial and Parallel daemons serial access control enabled Serial and Parallel Access Control List List of hosts from which the Serial and Parallel daemons can be accessed serial access control list ARP Parameters The ARP Address Resolution Protocol hide box affects address resolution Address Resolution Protocol Field Complete Entry Timeout minutes Description Number of minutes a complete ARP table entry can exist without being used Corresponding Parameter tcpip arp complete entry timeout Incomplete Entry Timeout minutes Number of minutes an incomplete ARP table entry can exist without being used tcpip arp incomplete entry timeout ARP Cache ARP table used for mapping from IP addresses to physical addresses tcpip arp cache Booting Parameters The Booting hide box contains parameters that affect the Boot Monitor and X server loading Booting Fields Boot automatically at power up Description The terminal boots an X server instead of stopping in the Boot Monitor Corresponding Parameter boot automatically Test RAM at power up Enables RAM tests at start up boot test ram Using Configuration Me
361. h a list of hosts that have access to a terminal s configuration data 1 Enable host access control by setting config access control enabled to true Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control gt Configuration Daemon section Enable Config Access Control Table 6 13 config access control enabled Parameter 7 Possible Values Result default false false Requests from outside the terminal for access to the terminal s configuration data are not checked against the access control list A user from any host who possesses the proper password may access the daemon true Requests from outside the terminal for access to configuration data are checked against the access control list Only users from listed hosts may access the daemons 6 30 Terminal Configuration Methods Setting Up Host Based Access Control for Configuration Data J List all of the hosts that have access in the config access control list table Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control Configuration Daemon section Config Access Control List Table 6 14 config access control list Table Entries Entry Default Result host nil If access control is turned on no hosts are allowed to access the terminal s Configuration and User Preferences daemons remotely hostname or A host granted permission to access the terminal s Configuration and IP_address User Preferences daemons remotely th
362. hange Setup Parameters 9 24 OpenGL configuration parameters for 9 48 diagnostic messages 18 94 Optional Features Change Setup Parameters 9 28 outline fonts see font server P Parallel Daemon LAT Service Passwords Change Setup Parameters 9 12 Index 20 Parallel Daemons Table Change Setup Parameters 9 33 parallel port access control 15 10 configuration parameters for 9 33 configuring 15 8 statistics 10 16 uses for 15 2 parallel daemons lat service passwords 9 12 parallel daemons table 9 33 Password Change Setup Parameters File Manager Section 9 12 passwords displaying 6 5 LAT 9 12 lock screen 9 46 saved in NVRAM optional string space 11 37 SNMP community names 16 5 16 6 PCMCIA cards messages 18 77 see also local file system Local File Manager Permit Old X Bugs Change User Preferences 9 45 Persist in Loading Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Persistent Loading Change Setup Parameters 9 18 PEX 3D mouse 14 13 configuration parameters for 9 33 to 9 35 9 50 14 3 to 14 13 digitizing tablet 14 13 fonts 14 2 input devices 14 13 licensing 14 3 requirements 14 3 terminals supported on 14 1 troubleshooting 14 14 pex max model clip planes 9 33 14 4 pex max nameset names 9 33 14 4 Index pex max non ambient lights 9 33 14 4 pex monitor reference blue u 9 34 14 6 pex monitor reference blue v 9 34 14 6 pex monitor reference blue y 9 34 14 6 pex monitor reference green u 9 34 14 6 pex
363. hapter 5 Configuring Network Services Terminal Configuration Methods 6 21 Enabling Persistent Loading of the Configuration File Enabling Persistent Loading of the Configuration File By default the terminal displays error messages and continues to boot if it cannot locate a configuration file to download You can configure a terminal to persist in trying to load a configuration file in that case the terminal does not boot until it reads a file successfully This may be useful in certain environments including LY Situations in which it is not acceptable for a user to have a different environment from the environment specified in the configuration file A heavily loaded network with many terminals booting at the same time Persistent loading ensures a file is downloaded in situations where the download request might otherwise time out T Sites where it is necessary to allow time for the file server host to come on line To configure a terminal to persist in attempting to load a configuration file set the config persistent loading parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration Persistent Loading Table 6 4 config persistent loading Parameter Possible Values Result default false false The X server does not persist in trying to load a configuration file after trying all the files in the specified download sequence true The X server persists in trying to load a fil
364. he Screen Saver hide box affect the screen saver Screen Saver Field Enable Screen Saver Description Turns on the screen saver Corresponding Parameter pref screensaver enable Allow Exposures After Screen Saver Causes clients to redraw themselves when the screen saver restores the screen pref screensaver exposures Save Screen After seconds How long the terminal is idle before the screen saver starts pref screensaver time Change Screen Saver After seconds How long the screen saver waits before modifying its pattern pref screensaver interval Screen Saver Style Type of screen saver image pref screensaver style Screen Saver Bitmap File Bitmap file if screen saver style is bitmap prtef screensaver bitmap file Using Configuration Menus 9 53 Using Change User Preferences X SIE and Graphics Preferences The parameters in the X SIE and Graphics hide box affect X graphics and performance attributes cee and Graphics Description Corresponding Parameter Enable Benchmark Optimizes some graphics pref xserver benchmark Optimizations operations for benchmark testing optimizations Enable Graphics Optimizes some graphics pref xserver graphics Optimizations operations with a possible loss in optimizations accuracy Screen Resolution dots The resolution reported by the X pref xserver screen resolution per inch server to
365. he X server X Server Messages 18 45 FILED Messages FORMATSUCCESS format completed successfully Severity Information Explanation The local file manager formatted the PCMCIA card successfully as requested User Action None INFOFAILED failed to read local info action failed message Severity Error Explanation The local file manager could not perform the specified action when it attempted to obtain information about the PCMCIA card This situation may occur if no PCMCIA card is installed in the terminal base or if the PCMCIA card is unformatted User Action Verify that the PCMCIA card is installed that it is properly seated in the socket and that it is formatted LISTFAILED failed to list device action failed message Severity Error Explanation The Local File Manager could not perform the specified action when it attempted to list the files on the specified device This situation may occur if no PCMCIA card is installed in the terminal base or if the PCMCIA card is unformatted User Action Verify that the PCMCIA card is installed that it is properly seated in the socket and that it is formatted NOPASSWD no password configured denying access Severity Warning Explanation The terminal s configuration database does not have a password specified for access to the local file manager and therefore is denying access User Action Establish a password for access to the terminal s Local F
366. he file service table contains an entry for the specified directory 18 12 X Server Messages Messages Common to All Modules m The specified file has read access NOWRITE unable to write file_ type file message Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot write information to the specified file for the specified reason User Action Make sure m m m m The filename is correct The file exists in the specified directory The file service table contains an entry for the specified directory The specified file has write access NOX unable to connect to display display Severity Fatal OP zs Explanation The reporting module cannot connect to the specified terminal User Action Make sure that the name specified is correct for the desired terminal If the terminal name is correct verify that the network is operational and that the terminal is running and is connected to the network EN opening file_type file Severity Information Explanation The reporting module is opening the specified file as requested User Action None EAD reading file_type file Severity Information Explanation The reporting module is reading the specified file as requested User Action None X Server Messages 18 13 Messages Common to All Modules START starting up Severity Information Explanation The specified module is starting as requested User Action None STOP
367. he key legends F12 for keycode 8 SunF36 for keycode 86 SunF37 for keycode 94 and F11 for keycode 130 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 43 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details N 123 Sun Type 5 compatible keyboard group contains 123 key keyboards Figure 17 6 illustrates the key legends and keycodes for the N 123 US North American type N 123NA Table 17 7 lists the keysyms for an N 123NA keyboard when used with OpenWindows N 123 keyboards have four LEDs Their default values are LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4 Net on HMxX series X1 on all Explora series Caps lock Num lock x4 To access the Boot Monitor from an N 123 keyboard after booting use the Stop A L1 A key combination 17 44 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Control Help 17 09 Stop 10 Again i Props 2 Undo I Front 2 32 Find w Cut Copy 24 Paste 40 Shift Z X fn 18 26 34 Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 E 133 15 23 31 39 47 55 _ 63 71 79 86 os 7 f d amp ii Back ul 1 2l 33 l4 3 5 46 6 sa 7 all8 02 9 x Os 7s 85 EP 12 Tab gt 1 Q Iw IIE R IT ITY I oO P IK
368. he syntax of the ncdfslsfonts utility is ncedfslsfonts options fn pattern In specifying a subset of fonts you can use the wildcard character to match any sequence of characters or none and to match a single occurrence of any character You must put quotation marks around the wildcard characters to prevent them from being expanded by the shell For detailed information about ncdfslsfonts see the ncdfslsfonts man page Displaying Font Server Fonts Two NCD utilities provide ways to examine font server fonts The ncdshowfont utility reports information about a font and displays a representation of each character in the font When specifying a font you can use the asterisk and question mark as wildcard characters The asterisk matches any sequence of characters the question mark matches any single character The wildcard characters must be enclosed in double quote marks The syntax for ncdshowfont is nedshowfont options fn font where options are any of the options listed in the ncdshowfont man page and font is the XLFD name of the font you want to examine Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 27 Font Server Issues The nedfstobdf utility reads a font from a font server and displays the contents of the font file in BDF format This allows you to recreate a font and is useful when testing servers debugging font metrics and reproducing lost BDF fonts The syntax for ncdfstobdf is nedfstobdf f
369. he terminal in the IP header destination field including invalid addresses addresses of unsupported classes and non local addresses ip packets received with incorrect address Packets Forwarded Number of input datagrams for which the terminal was not the final IP destination resulting in attempts to find routes to forward them to their final destinations ip packets forwarded Packets Received with Unknown Protocols Number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol ip packets received with unknown protocols 10 6 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes IP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Received Packets Discarded Number of input datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their continued processing but were discarded anyway for example for lack of buffer space does not include datagrams discarded while awaiting assembly ip packets received and discarded Received Packets Delivered Number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including ICMP ip packets received and delivered Packet Transmission Requests Number of datagrams that local IP user protocols including ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission does not include datagrams counted in ip packets forwarded ip packet transmission reques
370. he variable parameter ps Esc ps indicates the status line to use Permissible values See Configuring the Status Line on page 12 27 for 0 No status line more information 1 Indicator status line no op 2 Host writable status line CSI p Soft reset Esc p CSI gt c Request secondary device attributes Responseis DA Esc gt c C S I gt id ver Q0c in which id is terminal or identification and ver is version CSI gt 0 c Default response CSI gt 1 1 0c Esc gt 0ce CSI ps J Selective erase in display DECSED Esc ps J Permissible values for ps 12 14 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI ps K Selective erase in line DECSEL Esc ps K Permissible values for ps are 0 Cursor to end of line 1 Beginning to cursor 2 Entire line CSI ps ps h Set Digital private mode Esc ps ps h Permissible values for ps 1 Cursor keys mode keypad application DECCKM 3 Column mode 132 column DECCOLM 4 Scrolling mode smooth scroll DECSCLM 5 Screen mode reverse video DECSCNM 6 Origin mode DECOM 7 Autowrap mode DECAWM 8 Auto repeat mode DECARM 9 Send MIT mouse row and column on button press 25 Text cursor enable mode cursor visible DECTCEM 40 Allow 80 to 132 mode 41 curses 1 fix 42 National replacement character set mode DECNRCM enabled 44
371. host_IP For example bt Xncdhmx 192 43 153 225 192 43 153 23 If you are specifying either the host or IP address you must specify both and specify the filename If you are booting through a gateway supply the address of the gateway gateway_IP and if you are using one the subnet mask subnet_mask da Displays the Ethernet IP and node addresses of the terminal along with the subnet mask and the Ethernet IP and node addresses of the boot host dm address Displays memory dr Displays registers ds Displays DLC IP TFTP and MOP statistics ex Displays the Extended Tests menu Tests available depend on the terminal from which you run the command The extended tests are for use of NCD Technical Support If your terminal requires their use an NCD Technical Support person will help you to run the test and will interpret the results km Maps navigation functions for the Boot Monitor Setup menus See Programming Navigation Keys for Boot Monitor Setup Menus on page 11 18 ks Displays keyboard statistics nf readsize Sets the NFS and TFTP read size The read size must be from 128 bytes to 8192 bytes nv Runs the NVRAM utility for reading and changing the contents of the terminal s NVRAM See Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals on page 11 20 for more information 11 8 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using Boot Monitor Commands Table 11 2 Boot Monitor Comm
372. icient memory invoke the terminal emulator a second time If the situation persists please contact NCD Technical Support 18 118 X Server Messages TERM Messages SHELLPRC SIXEL ETADDR Can t set the address for the network connection Severity Error Explanation The hostname entered in the terminal chooser does not exist or the host cannot be accessed User Action Verify that the name of the desired host is spelled correctly and that the network is operational SETTERM Can t set the terminal for network connection Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has detected an error with the network User Action Verify that the network is running and that the terminal is securely attached to the network Can t create connection subshell process Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module does not have enough memory to perform the desired action User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory to perform the desired action Close any unused local clients to free local memory Sixel graphics is not supported Severity Error Explanation The X server does not support sixel graphics User Action If possible use an alternate application that does not require sixel graphics STARTLOG Start logging to file Severity Information Explanation The TERM module is logging information to the specified file as requested User Action None X Server Messages 18 119
373. iderations in Using Downloaded Fonts Font files require a lot of disk space so make sure you install only the fonts you need Fonts in the NCDware distribution may be duplicates of fonts already installed on network hosts Fonts can be installed on any computer on the network and the fonts used by a given terminal can be distributed on several hosts The font path uses terminal memory so you should include in the font path only the directories required by clients you are running Problems with Client Font Requests When a client requests a font that the X server cannot find an error response is sent to the client Usually clients continue to run using the X server s default font Occasionally a client crashes when requested fonts are not available Problems with client font requests can be overcome by changing the font path using font aliasing using X resources to change the fonts requested by the client using wildcards in font requests or installing the fonts needed by the client The Font Path A terminal s font path is made up of two types of elements font directories and font servers An NCD terminal attempts to access only fonts represented by elements in its font path The X server searches the font directories and 7 6 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Use Overview font servers in the order in which they are listed in the font path and uses the first match it finds Fonts are usually stored in subd
374. ied command line option does not include the necessary argument User Action Re enter the command with the necessary argument MLCONN Can t initialize toolkit connection Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module does not have sufficient memory to execute properly User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory Close any unused local clients to free local memory ETCONN Can t create network connection Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has detected a problem with the network User Action Verify that the network is running and that the terminal is securely attached to the network 18 114 X Server Messages TERM Messages NOLOGDIR Can t create log directory directory Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module cannot create the specified log directory as requested User Action Confirm that the file service table contains an entry for the log directory this directory must be accessible via NFS Verify that the directory exists is available to the network and has the appropriate permissions NOLSTLOG Can t create lastlog file logfile name error_number NOM Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module cannot create the specified log file as requested User Action Confirm that the file service table contains an entry for the directory in which the log file resides this file must be accessible via NFS Verify that the file exists is available
375. ient nfs null requests Get Attributes Requests Number of NFS Get Attributes operations requested by the NFS client nfs get attributes requests Set Attributes Requests Number of NFS Set Attribute operations requested by the NFS client nfs set attributes requests Get Root Requests Number of NFS Get File System Root operations requested by the NFS client nfs get root requests Path Lookup Requests Number of NFS File Name Component Lookup operations requested by the NFS client nfs path lookup requests Read Symlink Requests Number of NFS Read Link operations requested by the NFS client nfs read symlink requests Statistics Menus 10 13 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes NFS Field Description Corresponding Parameter Read Data Requests Number of NFS Read operations nfs read data requests requested by the NFS client Write Data Cache Number of NFS Write Data Cache nfs write data cache requests Requests operations requested by the NFS client Write Data Requests Number of NFS Write Data Cache nfs write data requests operations requested by the NFS client File Create Requests Number of NFS File Create nfs file create requests operations requested by the NFS client File Remove Requests Number of NFS File Remove operations requested by the NFS client nfs file remove requests File Rename Requests Number of NFS File Rename operations reque
376. iguration information User Action Establish a read write or read only password for the terminal NOROW row n does not exist NOSUCHCLII Severity Error Explanation The specified row does not exist for a parameter that is being modified User Action Verify the row numbers of the desired parameter ENT no such local client client Severity Error Explanation The specified client does not exist User Action Verify that the name of the client is correct X Server Messages 18 25 CONFIGD Messages NOTIME unable to get current time from IP_address of time server Severity Error Explanation The time server did not respond so the internal clock was not set Could affect Java applications and other applications that rely on the correct time User Action Check the configuration of the terminal s time parameters Check the network connection to the time server and the host s configuration NVRAMTSS length exceeds available NVRAM space by m characters Severity Error Explanation The string value entered exceeds the amount of optional string space available in NVRAM by the specified number of characters User Action Either shorten the value assigned to the parameter you are modifying or review the other values held in optional string space in NVRAM and shorten one of them so that the new value will fit OKPASSWD correct access_level password entered Severity Information Explanation The corr
377. ile Manager in the terminal s configuration database 18 46 X Server Messages FILED Messages OKPASSWD correct password entered Severity Information Explanation The correct password has been entered for access to the local file manager User Action None OPFAILED var var var Severity Error Explanation Typically the variables state either 1 an operation that failed 2 a file or directory operation failed or 3 an error For example the user may have entered a bad file or directory name User Action Correct the error indicated in the message ve ECLAIMFAILED failed to reclaim local dirty space action failed message Severity Error Explanation The Local File Manager could not perform the specified action when it attempted to reclaim unused file space User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support RECLAIMSUCCESS reclaim completed successfully Severity Information Explanation The Local File Manager has reclaimed previously used file space as requested User Action None SYNTAX line n syntax error at string Severity Error Explanation The specified line contains an error beginning with the specified string User Action Make sure that the command entered is correct X Server Messages 18 47 FONT Messages Vi lt ERIFYFAILED failed to verify local action failed message Severity Error Exp
378. iles For example assume that the pathname requested by a client program is usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi 10x20 snf and the following local mount points are in the file service table usr lib X11 ncd fonts 100dpi usr lib X11 ncd fonts usr lib X11 ncd usr nca The first five mount points match this request and the terminal Configuring File Access through TFTP Terminals can use TFTP to download the X server and other files at boot and for ongoing file access NCD does not recommend using TFTP for writing to diagnostic log files TFTP is implemented by a daemon program tftpd 8 and configured in the boot host s etc inetd conf file Secure versus Non Secure TFTP TFTP can run in two modes secure mode also called restricted mode and non secure mode Secure Restricted TFTP Secure TFTP enhances security because it requires that the host perform a change root operation chroot 8 to the directory specified when TFTP is invoked The directory specified when TFTP is invoked is TFTP s default home directory usually tftpboot Because of the chroot all files to be accessed using secure TFTP including X servers fonts and remote configuration files must be physically installed under the directory and in the same file system partition Symbolic links do not work If installing all files in the secure directory makes the directory too large you can mount a file system partition using the secure director
379. ility Boot Monitor Setup menus are described in Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals on page 11 12 and the NVRAM utility is described in Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals on page 11 20 The other configuration methods are described in Chapter 6 Terminal Configuration Methods Chapter 9 Using Configuration Menus and the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems X Server Downloading After obtaining the terminal s network address and subnet mask the Boot Monitor sends multiple requests for an X server and loads an X server and support files from a host answering the request or from a local file system on a PCMCIA card The Boot Monitor interleaves TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol NFS Network File System and MOP Maintenance Operation Protocol requests to download an X server and support files You can use remote configuration parameters or the Boot Monitor Setup menus to disable file transfer requests selectively and you can use the Boot Monitor Setup menus to change the order of the requests The Boot Monitor supports downloading from multi homed hosts hosts with more than one interface on the same network 11 4 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Boot Monitor Functions BOOTP DHCP may also supply a specific X server filename specification You can use the Boot Monitor s manual boot commands to override the filename specification in the BOOTP DHCP response When down
380. in disabled networks 9 29 login dwlogin name 9 30 login dwlogin password 9 30 login ncddm enabled 9 30 login ncddm tcp port 9 30 login restrict host choices 9 29 login window delay time 8 17 9 29 login xdm action on disconnect 8 17 9 30 login xdm authentication key 9 9 login xdm broadcasts 9 30 login xdm broadcast wait time 9 30 login xdm display class 9 29 login xdm indirects 9 30 login xdm keepalives begin time 8 18 9 30 Index login xdm keepalives wait time 8 19 9 30 logout configuration parameters for 9 46 M makepsres 1 13 5 Maximum Gain Change User Preferences 9 44 Maximum Keepalive Idle Time Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Maximum Model Clip Planes Change Setup Parameters 9 33 Maximum Nameset Names Change Setup Parameters 9 33 Maximum Non Ambient Lights Change Setup Parameters 9 33 Maximum Retransmissions Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Maximum Retries Change Setup Parameters 9 28 Maximum TCP IP connections Change Setup Parameters 9 16 memory displaying 11 8 11 9 information displaying 16 8 statistics 10 27 messages buffer size of 18 6 common to all modules 18 7 to 18 14 configuration parameters for 9 20 9 46 configuring 18 5 to 18 6 displaying Console Messages area 18 4 TELNET connection 18 4 explanations of CALIBLIGHTPEN 18 15 CALIBTOUCH 18 16 CONFIGD 18 17 CONFUI 18 30 CONSOLE 18 33 DESKTOP 18 36 DHCP 18 37 messages continued explanations of continued DIAGD 18 38 DOS 18
381. inal is booting through a gateway that is servers are installed on a host located on a remote network make sure the gateway to the boot host and subnet mask if used are specified in the bootptab file See the next section for more information about booting through a gateway Configuring the Gateway Device and Terminal for Booting through a Gateway For booting through a gateway the device serving as the gateway and the bootptab file on the boot host must be properly configured This section provides an example setup illustrated in Figure 3 1 for a Cisco router which is a commonly used gateway device The IP addresses of the gateway s Ethernet interfaces are 192 43 157 2 Ethernet Interface 0 for the remote network where the boot host is located 192 43 156 2 Ethernet Interface 1 for the local network where the terminals are located The IP address of the boot host is 192 43 157 40 3 8 Booting Address Discovery Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery The IP address of the NCD terminal is 192 43 156 171 Its Ethernet address is 0000a70023a3 Boot Host 192 43 157 40 subnet one LL oy y lS Ethernet Interface 0 192 43 157 2 Router Ethernet Interface 1 192 43 156 2 eee subnet two 192 43 156 NCD Terminal 1924431564171 0000a70023a3 Figure 3 1 Booting Through a Gateway On the router set the helper address to the address of the remote boot host by entering the fol
382. including name service term VT320 terminal emulation including terminal emulation choosers tftp Read only TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol statistics time Time zone and time servers tokring Read only Token Ring interface statistics udp Read only UDP User Datagram Protocol statistics unit Miscellaneous terminal attributes video Playing videos wincenter WinCenter colors and resources xremote XRemote configuration and statistics xserver X server attributes and access control including graphics color fonts X extensions keyboard font server X resources input devices and touch screen Terminal Configuration Methods 6 7 The Configuration Language The Configuration Language The configuration language is used in remote configuration files and for interactive configuration through a TELNET connection The configuration language provides commands for m m m m m Assigning and displaying parameter values Reading values from NVRAM and from files Writing values to NVRAM and to files Locking out other clients from the database Protecting parameters from modification or display Configuration Language Summary Table 6 2 lists the general purpose commands you can use in remote configuration files and for interactive configuration through a TELNET connection Table 6 3 lists commands for interactive configuration through a TELNET connection only Bold text indicates a parameter name square br
383. information about the specified error If you require more assistance please contact NCD Technical Support 18 142 X Server Messages Symbols command Boot Monitor 11 10 command Boot Monitor 11 10 Numerics 3270 terminal emulation configuration parameters for 9 42 A Acceleration Ratio Change User Preferences 9 51 access control configuration parameters for 9 9 to 9 13 font server 7 22 local clients disabling 6 34 parallel port 15 10 serial ports 15 10 SNMP 16 3 to 16 7 terminal configuration data 6 30 to 6 34 XDM X Display Manager 8 15 to 8 16 see also passwords Activate Alpha Buffer for RGBA Visuals Change User Preferences 9 49 Add Domain to Unit Name as Filename Change Setup Parameters 9 19 Add Timestamps Change Setup Parameters 9 20 Additional Escape Chars Change Setup Parameters 9 41 Index address discovery addresses in NVRAM 3 11 BOOTP DHCP 3 3 to 3 10 broadcast address 3 12 configuring in Boot Monitor Setup 11 15 protocols order of use 3 2 overview 3 1 to 3 2 RARP 3 10 subnet mask 3 13 address resolution 5 5 addresses see Ethernet IP Internet Protocol Token Ring Administrative Contact Change Setup Parameters 9 38 Administrative Status Change Setup Parameters 9 38 Allow Alpha Test Change User Preferences 9 48 Allow Blending Change User Preferences 9 48 Allow Depth Test Change User Preferences 9 48 Allow Dithering Change User Preferences 9 48 Allow Exposures A
384. ing or table User Action Verify that the value requested is the type of value accepted by the parameter XERROR X_name error request code mn value value Severity Error Explanation An error has occurred in the MIT X server User Action Refer to Xlib documentation for information on the specified error 18 32 X Server Messages CONSOLE Messages CONSOLE Messages CONSOLE messages pertain to the actions of the Console Utilities Lock Screen and Login gt Logout Console gt Reboot and Utilities Rescan Current Font Path If you are looking for a message that refers to the CONSOLE module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 AUTOLOCK automatic lock screen after n minutes n seconds idle time Severity Warning Explanation Utilities Lock Screen is locking the screen after waiting the specified amount of idle time as configured User Action None AUTOLOGOUT automatic logout after n minutes n seconds idle time Severity Warning Explanation Login gt Logout is logging the user out of the current X session after waiting the specified length of idle time as configured User Action None BADKEYSEQ bad console key sequence key_sequence using default Severity Error Explanation The CONSOLE module does not recognize the specified key sequence for invoking the Console and is using the default key sequence instead User Action V
385. ing broadcast to the network before you see the word loaded After you press the Escape key the Boot Monitor prompt appears Booting X Server Loading 4 17 Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor You can access the Boot Monitor after the X server is running by using a key combination listed in Table 4 16 Accessing the Boot Monitor while clients are running however may cause unpredictable behavior Table 4 16 Boot Monitor Access Key Combinations Keyboard Type Key Combination 101 key Ctrl Left Alt Setup Windows 95 compatible IBM PS 2 US English and CapsLock Left Alt Setup 102 key VT220 compatible Ctrl Compose F3 108 key Ctrl Left Alt F3 97 key Left Alt Caps Lock Setup 107 key Sun Type 4 compatible Stop A L1 A 122 key and 3270 compatible Lexmark Alt Rule Home 123 key Sun Type 5 compatible Stop A L1 A Manual Boot from a PCMCIA Card To load the server manually from a PCMCIA card use the bl command gt bl Manual Boot Using TFTP or NFS To load the server manually using TFTP use the bt command gt bt file terminal_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask To load the server manually using NFS use the bn command gt bn file terminal_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask where file Is the name of the server to load terminal_IP Is the IP address of the terminal host_IP Is the IP address of the boot host 4 18 Booting X Server Loading
386. ing for an X server set the boot tcpip broadcast boot request parameter to false Setup gt Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Broadcast Boot Request This parameter is saved in NVRAM Table 4 3 boot tcpip broadcast boot request Parameter Possible Values Result default true true The Boot Monitor attempts to download an X server by broadcasting false The Boot Monitor does not attempt to download an X server by broadcasting 4 4 Booting X Server Loading Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Disabling the MOP Request for an X Server By default after trying all of the TFTP requests the Boot Monitor tries to download an X server using the MOP protocol To prevent MOP download requests set the boot mop parameter to false Setup Change Setup Parameters Booting NCDnet Boot Options section Try MOP This parameter is saved in NVRAM Table 4 4 boot mop Parameter Possible Values Result default true true The Boot Monitor tries to download an X server using the MOP protocol false The Boot Monitor does not try to download an X server using the MOP protocol Disabling Selected TFTP or NFS Requests for an X Server The parameters listed in Table 4 5 control the X server filenames that the Boot Monitor requests via TFTP or NFS during the default X server download sequence All parameters are true by default and are saved NV
387. ing or creating the display list User Action Reduce the complexity of geometric data and or install more memory in the terminal 18 94 X Server Messages OPENGL Messages IMPLEMENTATION Implementation error var INTERNAL Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support Internal error var Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support PREFSETTING User has turned off feature UNIMPL EME Severity Information Explanation The user has disabled feature through Setup Change User Preferences OpenGL User Action None ED Unimplemented function function Severity Warning Explanation A function that is unimplemented in the OpenGL module has been called The OpenGL application may not function properly User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support WINDOWCLIPPING Error computing window clip parameters Severity Warning Explanation An internal error occurred while computing window clip parameters It may have damaged the occluding windows User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 95 PPPD Messages PPPD Messages PPPD messa
388. initial protocol 1 and file initial protocol 2 parameters specify the file access method for the initial file servers Setup Change Setup Parameters Initial Protocol 1 Initial Protocol 2 The default file access protocol is TFTP All of these parameters can be saved in NVRAM If you specify both file servers and the primary server is not available the terminal tries to load its configuration file from the secondary server If one of the initial file servers is set to IP address 0 0 0 0 the boot host is used as the file server and is automatically entered into the file service table Normally you cannot use the boot host for both initial file servers If the IP addresses of both initial file servers are set to 0 0 0 0 the secondary initial file server is ignored unless they are using different file service protocols Table 5 14 file initial server 1 Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The boot host is the initial file server IP address or hostname The primary initial file server Configuring Network Services 5 13 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Table 5 15 file initial server 2 Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The boot host is the secondary file server IP address or hostname The secondary initial file server Table 5 16 file initial protocol 1 Parameter Possible Values Result default tftp
389. inued Statement Keyword Value scancode SCANCODE KEYCODE scancode LISTofSCANCODE LISTofKEYCODE Description Sets values in the scancode to keycode table used by the keyboard driver By default scancodes are used as keycode values Individual scancodes can be replaced by individual values Destination keycodes must be in the range 8 to 254 for X operations LISTofSCANCODE and LISTofKEYCODE must be separated by blanks and must be equal in length and represent a one to one correspondence of scancode to keycode Scancodes are in a range of 0 to 255 keycode KEYCODE LISTofKEYSYM Sets a row in the keycode to keysym table that X applications use to convert keycodes into keysyms The list of keysyms can contain 0 1 2 3 or 4 keysyms Keycodes must be in a range of 8 to 254 keysym KEYSYM LISTofKEYSYM Changes an existing keyboard configuration by replacing a keysym that is currently bound toa keycode with one or more new keysyms It is usually placed at the end of the keyboard definition file deadkey KEYSYM LISTofKEYSYM KEYSYM Specifies a sequence of keys to press to generate another key when local dead key processing is enabled For more information about this statement see Specifying Dead Key Processing on page 17 60 modifier MODIFIER LISTofKEYSYM modifier add MODIFIER LISTofKEYSYM Specifies the list of keys associated with an X modifier All of the keycodes containing any of
390. invoke the ncdmkfontdir utility This utility reads the contents of the fonts scale file and any bitmap font files and then enters them in the fonts dir file Configuring Display PostScript 13 11 Freeing the DPS Cache 5 Add the font directory to the terminal s font path To change the terminal s current font path use the pref font path parameter Setup Change User Preferences gt Fonts gt Current Font Path To change the terminal s default font path use the xserver default font path parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters Fonts gt Default Font Path If you change the default font path only you must reset the terminal before the change takes effect X clients can now access the DPS outline fonts Freeing the DPS Cache By default the DPS module caches the contents of the color rendering file and the context initialization file when it is invoked for the first instance It also caches fonts as it uses them Caching this information speeds processing for subsequent contexts To free the font memory in the cache from the Console select Utilities Free DPS Memory Troubleshooting DPS If the DPS Extension Fails to Start If the DPS extension fails to start on a licensed terminal the X server generates an error message and displays it in the Console Messages hide box If the DPS extension fails to start because no license key has been entered no error messages appear the application simpl
391. ion If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support STRAYCMD stray command_type command command_code Severity Warning Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support STRAYINT stray interrupt_type interrupt Severity Warning Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 124 X Server Messages UI Messages TXFAIL transmit failed message Severity Error Explanation The Token Ring controller on the TRP board has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support WAITING waiting for adapter initialization Severity Information Explanation The X server is initializing the Token Ring adapter as requested User Action None UI Messages BADGCFLAGS BADGCMODE UI messages pertain to the X server s user interface If you are looking for a message that refers to the UI module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 routine invalid GC flags Severity Warning Explanation The specified routine has attempted to create an X internal structure with inappropriate properties User Action If you encounter this message
392. ion through a TELNET connection and in configuration files although in configuration files the apply command is automatic at end of file When the user clicks on the 6 34 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring the Apply Command Apply button in Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup or Change User Preferences an apply command is executed The extent of the information applied to the current configuration and written to NVRAM and the default file is configurable By default the information written consists of the user changes User changes are the current contents of the stp file if any plus any changes made during the session through a TELNET connection or Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup or Change User Preferences The following sections explain how to change the auto save defaults Protocols for Auto Save If you are using TFTP for auto save the file must already exist before you write to it and must be world writable You can create such a file by using the touch 1 utility If you are using NFS for auto save the directory in which the file is saved should have world write permission The auto save file itself generally is owned by nobody that is the terminal s default identity Configuring Auto Save to NVRAM By default changes are written to NVRAM after an apply command To prevent changes from being written to NVRAM when you use the apply command set the config auto save nvram parameter
393. ional light positional light and spot light 14 4 Configuring PEX Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Table 14 3 pex max non ambient lights Parameter Possible Values Result default 64 integer The maximum number of non ambient lights that can be defined Range 0 to 65535 PEX Color Parameters You may need to adjust PEX color parameters if 1 You are not using a monitor supplied by NCD 1 The factory setting of the monitor s brightness control is changed 4 The natural aging of the monitor causes its color display to change Color parameters specify the color components of the properly adjusted display monitor according to the CIE Commission Internationale de l Eclairage color space definition The three color components red green and blue and the reference white value each consist of three coordinates values Each value is a floating point number ranging from a minimum of 0 0 to a maximum of 1 0 The three values are Y the luminance value 1 u the chromaticity value on the u axis L v the chromaticity value on the v axis Color parameters do not directly affect colors displayed on the terminal A client can use these values for example to set up a colormap to send to the server but it is not required to use them Blue Color Component The following parameters specify the three values that make up the blue color component of the properly adjusted display monitor
394. ip use router discovery Use Router Solicit The terminal sends ICMP router discovery solicitation messages at boot time ip use router solicit Extended Routing Diagnostics The terminal generates more detailed diagnostic messages about IP routing ip extended routing diagnostics Default Packet Time to Live seconds Value inserted into the IP header s Time to Live field of datagrams originating at the terminal ip default packet time to live Respond to Broadcast ICMP The terminal responds to ICMP messages sent to the broadcast address ip respond to broadcast icmp Routing Table The current routes to remote hosts ip routing table and networks Equivalent IP List of IP addresses considered as ip equivalent addresses Addresses originating on the same host used to receive UDP packets from multi homed hosts 1 This field is read only 9 26 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Java Parameters The parameters in the Java hide box affect the Java local clients Java Field Description Corresponding Parameter Java Directory Directory in which Java files java directory shipped with NCDware are installed AppletViewer Java command line for starting the java appletviewer command Command AppletViewer Cache Class File Loads Java classes shipped with java cache class file NCDware and caches them in memory LAT Parameters
395. ir See Chapter 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server for more information about fonts Colormap Flash To get the proper colors make the window with the picture the focus window and press Alt F12 OPENWINHOME Variable If OPENWINHOME is not set or is set incorrectly T When you try to open an image from the ImageTool File Open menu the following error message appears File format not found Use Open As option to choose file 13 14 Configuring Display PostScript Troubleshooting DPS 1 If you use Open As to choose a file the following error message appears Error opening usr openwin share images PostScript file ps To solve this problem exit from ImageTool and set the OPENWINHOME variable Restart the application Running PageView Problems with this application are described in the following subsections No special fonts are required for PageView and you need not set the OPENWINHOME variable Displaying the Images Run PageView from the usr openwin bin directory When prompted by a goto request enter the path to the images for example usr openwin share images PostScript Support Files If the proper support files are not installed images are not displayed Make sure the following files are in the NCD PostScript directory the default directory is usr lib X11 ncd dps CIE dict19c dat InitProc dat NCDFILE MAP PSres upr VM_3_2 snf fonts prebuilts If any of the files are not installed copy
396. irectories of the usr lib X11 ncd fonts directory The default font path for NCD terminals assumes all fonts are located in subdirectories of this directory Font Formats The format of a font is revealed by its filename extension The font formats a terminal can use depend on whether the terminal is using a host based font server For information about fonts you can use with the NCD font server see Usable Font Formats with a Font Server on page 7 20 Without a font server NCD terminals use only bitmap fonts NCD terminals use the bitmap formats listed in Table 7 2 in either uncompressed or compressed format Table 7 2 Usable Font Formats without a Font Server Font Format PCF Portable Compiled Font The standard format for X11R5 and the format of pef Filename Description Extension fonts in the NCDware distribution PCF files may be shared among machines with different architectures SNF Server Normal Font A server dependent format NCD X servers can snf still read the SNF fonts supplied on previous NCDware distributions DWF DECWindows Format NCD terminals can read these fonts from VMS dwf hosts Bitmap fonts are often distributed in BDF Bitmap Distribution Format the format used to exchange fonts between systems BDF fonts are stored as ASCII text If you are not using a font server you must convert BDF fonts to a binary format such as PCF or SNF before the terminal can
397. is nobody With user and group IDs of 2 files and directories must be world readable and world writable Table 5 21 file nfs uid Parameter Possible Values Result default 2 2 Access is the same as the world permissions integer The user ID of the requestor Table 5 22 file nfs gid Parameter Possible Values Result default 2 2 Access is the same as the world permissions integer The group ID of the requestor Setting the Unmount Timer for NFS File Access The file nfs unmount timeout parameter Setup gt Change Setup Parameters File Service gt NFS Unmount Timeout controls how long to wait before unmounting file systems because of inactivity The default is 1800 seconds 30 minutes An unmounted file system is remounted the next time the terminal tries to access a file Table 5 23 file nfs unmount timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 1800 integer Timeout in seconds before file systems are unmounted due to inactivity Range 1 3600 Configuring Network Services 5 23 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Changing the Timeout for Failed File Servers The file failed server ignore timeout parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service Failed Server Ignore Timeout controls how long the terminal ignores a file server that has failed because of a network timeout error When the terminal attempts to open a ne
398. it is set to true the default Setup gt Change Setup Parameters IP Use Router Solicit This parameter can be saved in NVRAM 5 30 Configuring Network Services Setting TCP Performance Parameters Table 5 31 ip use router solicit Parameter Possible Values Result default true true The terminal solicits for routing information false The terminal does not solicit for routing information Setting TCP Performance Parameters To customize the terminal s TCP interactions you can change the TCP performance parameters described in this section The default settings work properly for most installations You should not need to adjust these parameters Caution Setting these parameters incorrectly might cause your terminal to stop working and lead to excess network loading Adjusting the TCP Send and Receive Buffers You can adjust the buffers used by the terminal in sending and receiving TCP packets The default of 4096 bytes works well for sending images For text oriented clients 2048 bytes works better These parameter settings should correspond to the TCP windows advertised by the host The tcp receive buffer size parameter specifies the maximum amount of received data that a TCP connection buffers in the terminal Setup gt Change Setup Parameters gt TCP Receive Buffer Size This corresponds to the TCP receive window advertised by the terminal to the peer device on the other
399. iumlaut i fi n tilde n o grave o o acute o o circumflex o 6 o tilde o 6 o umlaut o ce oe diphthong t oe o slash o u grave u u acute u u circumflex u Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 49 Using Compose Key Sequences Table 12 20 Compose Sequences Continued Character Name Keystrokes u u umlaut u y y umlaut y no break space sp sp i broken vertical bar Ilor logical not sf soft syllable hyphen registered trademark S RO 7 macron Va fraction three quarters 3 4 division sign x multiplication sign xX acute accent 5 cedilla diaeresis ae Y Y acute Y y y acute y P capital Icelandic thorn TH P small Icelandic thorn th capital Icelandic Eth D small Icelandic Eth d 1 12 50 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator The compose sequences for the currency sign and registered trademark symbol do not work VT320 Character Coding Conventions VT320 Character Coding Conventions This section introduces VT320 character coding conventions and NCD Terminal Emulator character sets It also includes code tables for NCD Terminal Emulator character sets VT320 character coding conventions and standards are described in detail in Digital publications Character Sets The NCD Terminal Emulator includes the following character sets 1 ASCII 7 bit and 8 bit DEC Suppl
400. k from the network see Using ICMP to Discover the Subnet Mask on page 3 14 LI Set the subnet mask explicitly in a remote configuration file the Console Setup menus or the Boot Monitor Setup menus and save it in NVRAM see Setting the Subnet Mask in NVRAM on page 3 14 Using ICMP to Discover the Subnet Mask As an alternative to setting the subnet mask through BOOTP DHCP or a terminal configuration parameter the terminal can discover its subnet mask at boot time through ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is included in the TCP IP protocol family In this method of discovering the subnet mask an ICMP message is sent to the broadcast address to determine the appropriate subnet mask when the terminal boots To discover the subnet mask through ICMP set the boot send broadcast icmp for subnet mask parameter to true This option can produce a lot of network traffic so you should use it only on networks with a small number of NCD terminals This parameter is saved in NVRAM Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section Send Broadcast ICMP for Subnet Mask Table 3 3 boot send broadcast icmp for subnet mask Parameter Possible Values Results default false false The terminal does not use an ICMP message to determine the appropriate subnet mask true The terminal uses an ICMP message sent to the broadcast address to determine the appropriate subnet mask
401. l 83 84 bracketleft braceleft 85 equal plus 86 F11 87 Linefeed Print Screen on the N 101PS and Windows 95 compatible 88 Control_R 1 89 Shift_R 1 90 Return 91 bracketright braceright 92 backslash bar unless bar and broken bar exist on same keyboard 17 18 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 101 Keyboard Details Table 17 3 N 101US and N 101PS Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysyms Shifted Keysyms 93 94 F12 95 Break Scroll Lock on the N 101PS and Windows 95 compatible 96 Down 97 Left 98 Setup 99 Up 100 Delete 101 End 102 Backspace 103 Insert 104 105 KP_1 106 Right 107 KP_4 108 KP_7 109 Page Down 110 Home 111 Page Up 112 KP_0 113 KP_Decimal Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 19 N 101 Keyboard Details Table 17 3 N 101US and N 101PS Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysyms Shifted Keysyms 114 KP_2 115 KP_5 116 KP_6 117 KP_8 118 Num_Lock 119 KP_Divide 120 121 KP_Enter 122 KP_3 123 124 KP_Add 125 KP_9 126 KP_Multiply 127 128 129 130 131 132 KP_Subtract 1 If the pref compatibility decwindows keyboard parameter is set to true this right modifier is translated to a left modifier 17 20 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions
402. l client cannot be disabled User Action Verify that the name of the specified local client is correct unable to connect to protocol control socket Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has detected an internal error when connecting to the specified control socket User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support no default file defined Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot read the default configuration file as requested User Action Verify that the terminal s configuration database specifies a default configuration file ECTED no file names selected Severity Warning Explanation The X server is configured to load an initial configuration file but none of the possible configuration filenames is enabled User Action Enable the appropriate configuration filename parameter 18 22 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages NOINITFILE NOIPHOSTNAM could not read any initial file Severity Error Explanation The X server attempted to read all enabled configuration filenames but could not read any of them User Action Verify that 1 The names of the desired configuration files agree with the configuration filename parameters that are enabled 1 The configuration files have read write or read access C1 File service is configured properly on the terminal E unable to find host name for IP address nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Warning Expl
403. l is attempting to connect to the correct XRemote host If it is modify the host access list on the terminal so that it includes an entry for the XRemote host CONNREJ new client connection rejected message Severity Information Explanation An XRemote client is attempting to connect to the X server but is unsuccessful as detailed in the message This situation usually occurs if the terminal is low on memory User Action Refer to the message for more information about the situation If the terminal is running low on memory close any unused local clients to free memory for the XRemote client connection FILETXFER error during file transfer message Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support for assistance 18 136 X Server Messages XREMOTE Messages NOMEM NOMORE REFUSE TXPORT out of memory message Severity Error Explanation The X server does not have sufficient memory to perform the requested action User Action Close any unused local clients to free memory for the desired function new connection_type connection refused XRemote already running Severity Error Explanation The X server has received a request to initiate XRemote communications when it is already running User Action Either use the original XRemote session or close the original XRem
404. l sequence is recognized the keyboard driver replaces the recognized sequence with events that generate the keysym specified on the right except when the keysym isn t on the keyboard The Shift Lock and Mode_switch bits in the modifier mask of the replacement event are synthesized as necessary to obtain the desired keysym all other bits in the modifier mask are the same as in the final event in the recognized sequence When conflicts arise over whether the keyboard driver should complete one sequence or continue to process for a longer superset the driver completes the shorter set Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 61 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files 17 62 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 18 X Server Messages This chapter lists messages issued by modules of the X server The following topics are covered in this chapter 1 Messages and Modules Overview on page 18 1 The Format of Messages on page 18 2 Displaying Messages on page 18 4 Logging Messages to a File on page 18 5 Configuring Message Logging on page 18 5 Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 A section for each module that issues its own unique messages beginning with CALIBLIGHTPEN Messages on page 18 15 These sections and the messages within each section are listed alphabetically DOGODO O O For more help in troubleshooting your terminal refer to the NCD
405. lanation The Local File Manager could not perform the specified action when it attempted to verify the structure of the local file system This situation may occur if the PCMCIA card is not installed or if the PCMCIA card is not formatted User Action Verify that the PCMCIA card is installed that it is properly seated in the socket and that it is formatted If no card is installed you may ignore this message ERIFYSUCCESS verify completed successfully Severity Information Explanation The Local File Manager verified its contents successfully as requested User Action None FONT Messages FONT messages pertain to font service and the NCD font server Most of the messages listed here appear only if the extended font diagnostics feature is enabled through the pref font extended diagnostics parameter Setup gt Change User Preferences gt Fonts Show Extended Font Diagnostics If you are looking for a message that refers to the FONT module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADALIAS failed to load font alias file file Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot load the specified font alias file User Action Verify that I The font alias file is specified correctly The font alias file resides in the specified location m I The file service table contains an entry for the desired font alias file LY The desired file has read access 18 48 X Server Messages
406. launcher configuration file launchre or LAUNCHRC DAT associates a button with a menu but selecting the button reveals no menu has been defined User Action Verify that the launcher configuration file contains the specified menu restarting Severity Information Explanation The local NCD Window Manager is restarting as requested User Action None ERROR error messagel socket n message2 Severity Error Explanation The X server has determined that communications across the specified socket are resulting in bad data User Action Check the socket on the host to verify that it is working properly VERSION protocol mismatch Got protocoll expected protocol2 Severity Warning Explanation The local NCD Window Manager encountered protocol1 when it expected to use a different network protocol protocol2 User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 135 XREMOTE Messages XREMOTE Messages XREMOTE messages pertain to communications using XRemote software If you are looking for a message that refers to the XREMOTE module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 CONNFAIL connection from host failed host not authorized Severity Error Explanation The terminal s X access control list does not include an entry for the XRemote host thereby preventing connection User Action Verify that the termina
407. le Values Result default true true The default segment size 536 bytes is used when communicating with non local hosts false Segment sizes larger than the default can be used when communicating with non local hosts 5 34 Configuring Network Services 6 Terminal Configuration Methods This chapter describes configuration topics that are either not covered or are covered in less detail in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems The following topics are covered in this chapter OCOOUOUOCUCXCCUCVCCUC D Coc Configuration Methods Overview on page 6 2 Parameter Types and Groups on page 6 5 The Configuration Language on page 6 8 Creating Remote Configuration Files on page 6 16 Specifying Hosts for Loading Configuration Files on page 6 21 Enabling Persistent Loading of the Configuration File on page 6 22 Using Optional Names for Configuration Files on page 6 23 Disabling Specific Configuration File Download Attempts on page 6 25 Specifying a Different Configuration File Directory on page 6 26 Disabling All Remote Configuration File Downloads on page 6 27 Specifying the File for Loading Configuration Defaults on page 6 27 Changing the Ports for Accessing Configuration Daemons on page 6 28 Setting Up Host Based Access Control for Configuration Data on page 6 30 Protecting Configuration Parameters on page 6 32
408. le and include this file in the terminal specific configuration file Users can save their settings by simply clicking on App1y in the client window provided that config auto saved info is set to user changes The default file in which their settings are saved is the name of the configuration file loaded when the terminal booted plus a filename extension stp For example if the configuration file loaded was called C02B9A57 the user s settings are saved in the file CO2B9A57 stp For example assume that the user of the terminal with the configuration file described in the previous section has saved settings in the file CO2B9A57 stp You can add another read statement to include the user s file Configuration file for IP address 192 9 200 23 read ncd_std read mktg_specific read CO2B9A57 stp Parameter specific to IP address 192 9 200 23 snmp allow reset yes 6 20 Terminal Configuration Methods Specifying Hosts for Loading Configuration Files The user s file is loaded after the files controlled by the system administrator This avoids the possible problem of a protect all command in a user s file restricting system administration set commands In addition the system administration files can use the protect command to protect sensitive parameters from user modification For more information about protecting parameters see Protecting Configuration Parameters on page 6 32 For
409. le to point to openwinhome lib usr lib 3 Make sure there is an entry for xdm in the etc services file on each manager host For example xdm 177 udp xdmcp X11 Display Manager XDM Access Control This section describes how XDM access control works The System Administrator s Guide describes how to configure the host and terminal for XDM access control The XDM access control mechanism ensures that only clients started by authorized users from authorized hosts can connect to a terminal Access control under XDM employs an authorization key known to the X server running on the user s terminal and to clients started by the user The Login and X Session Management 8 15 XDM Access Control authorization key is generated by XDM given to the X server and placed in a file in the user s home directory the Xauthority file each time the user logs in XDM creates this file automatically When the user starts a client the client obtains the authorization key by reading the user s Xauthority file Before connecting to the X server clients must present the correct key NCDware uses MIT MAGIC COOKIE 1 and XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 authorization methods 0 XDM AUTHORIZATION 1 requires X11R5 or X11R6 XDM this form of authorization uses the DES Data Encryption Standard method of encryption to encrypt the key Encryption prevents anyone from reading the authorization key as it is passed between the X server and clients 1
410. led because the disk is full 18 84 X Server Messages NCD Mosaic Browser Messages The main cache directory is invalid not a directory or The main cache directory is invalid you have insufficient access rights Explanation The user is editing the browser configuration files to change the main cache directory manually The main cache directory did not exist and an error was encountered while creating the directory Explanation The user is editing the browser configuration files to change the main cache directory manually No main cache directory provided Explanation The user is editing the browser configuration files to change the main cache directory manually file could not be found Explanation The browser tried to open a file but could not find it Please enter a non empty string to search for Explanation The user searched for an empty string There is already a hotlist item with this URL Explanation the user tried to create a hotlist item with the same name as one already in existence Invalid directory selected Explanation The user tried to configure a directory in preferences but the directory does not exist The About URL is not set correctly Explanation The About URL is not specified in the preference file Unable to locate Help directory Explanation The Help path must be specified in the X resource settings X Server Messages 18 85 NCDDM Messages The Help URL is not
411. lename entered during this session Read from NVRAM Loads all NVRAM settings into Change Quick Setup Restore Defaults Loads parameter settings from the file defined in the config default file parameter By default the value in this parameter is the initial configuration file loaded at boot time Connect to New Unit Presents a popup box requesting a terminal name and the config read only password or config read write password required for configuration data access Displays that terminal s Change Quick Setup dialog box Close Closes Change Quick Setup 1 The Sections menu contains a listing of the Change Quick Setup hide boxes allowing you an alternative way to select one to open or open or close all hide boxes with one selection The Messages area below the hide boxes displays Configuration daemon messages 4 The four buttons along the bottom of the window allow you to commit changes to the current X session to NVRAM or to the configuration database Apply Applies current changes to the current session Applies changes to NVRAM and to configuration files according to Auto Save settings Parameters may take effect immediately after you click on Apply at boot time at session startup or when a client is initialized When you click on Apply a message in the Messages area indicates when the change takes effect Restart Removes changes that have not been applied Defaults L
412. lity to distinguish light from dark xserver enable local lightpen blue flood Calibrate Light Pen Activates calibration mode for the light pen none 1 Explora Explora Pro and Explora 400 450 terminals only IP Parameters The parameters in the IP Internet Protocol hide box affect terminal communication using IP IP Field Description Corresponding Parameter IP Address 1 Current IP address of the terminal ip address IP Address At Next The terminal s IP address the next ip address at next boot Boot time it boots Subnet Mask Subnet mask ip subnet mask Broadcast Address Broadcast address used when ip broadcast address sending broadcast packets and for recognizing broadcast packets from a non standard broadcast address Initial Default Primary default IP gateway ip initial default gateway 1 Gateway 1 Using Configuration Menus 9 25 Using Change Setup Parameters IP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Initial Default Secondary default IP gateway ip initial default gateway 2 Gateway 2 Use Address Discovery IP addresses are discovered from ip use address discovery the network Use Proxy Arp Proxy ARP is used to resolve routes ip use proxy arp to hosts for which there are no routes in the IP routing table Use Router Discovery The terminal modifies its routing table based on receipt of ICMP router discovery messages
413. loading an X server using TFTP the Boot Monitor displays the names of the downloaded file and the boot host after X server download is completed and every time a TFTP transfer is attempted When downloading an X server using MOP the Boot Monitor retains the DECnet node number and displays the node number and name after X server download is completed To improve the reliability of downloaded files the Boot Monitor generates UDP checksums for network packages that it transmits and verifies Display Blanking The Boot Monitor blanks the monitor s display automatically after 10 minutes of idleness to avoid a burn in effect Interactive Boot Monitor Functions The interactive components of the Boot Monitor are d Boot Monitor commands Commands for controlling X server downloading troubleshooting and testing 1 Boot Monitor Setup A menu based utility for simplifying the initial configuration of a terminal when you are using only a few terminals when you are not using an address discovery protocol or when booting the terminal from a local file system The NVRAM utility A command line utility for reading and changing any information stored in the terminal s NVRAM The interactive components are described in following sections Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 5 Using Boot Monitor Commands Using Boot Monitor Commands Boot Monitor utility commands provide access to all interactive Boot Monitor functions including the Boot M
414. long the bottom of the window allow you to commit changes to the current X session or to the configuration database Apply Applies current changes to the current X session Applies changes to configuration files according to specifications set for the Auto Save feature Parameters may take effect immediately after you click on Apply at boot time at session startup or when a client is initialized When you click on Apply a message in the Messages area indicates when the change takes effect Restart Removes changes that have not been applied Defaults Loads parameter settings from the file defined in the config default file parameter By default the value in this parameter is the initial configuration file loaded at boot time Cancel Removes changes that have not been applied and quits the Change User Preferences utility closes the window Components of the Change User Preferences Hide Boxes The following sections describe the Change User Preferences hide boxes and the fields in them The tables describing the hide box contents include a description of each field and the name of the corresponding remote configuration parameter For more information about the preference parameters see the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference Audio Preferences The Audio hide box affects the maximum volume of audio clients Audio Field Description Corresponding Parameter Maximum Gain percent Maximum
415. lowing command ip helper address 192 43 157 40 On the boot host the bootptab file contains the following entries for this example Templat ntry very host uses this information global dummy sm 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask hd tftpboot Xncd 4 2 0 X server file directory Entries for each subnet subnet one Include the template and tc globa1 dummy gw 192 43 157 2 specify the gateway address Booting Address Discovery 3 9 Using RARP for Address Discovery Templat ntry very host uses this information global dummy subnet two Include the template and tc global dummy gw 192 43 156 2 specify the gateway address Entry for an NCD terminal ncdhmx1l tc subnet two Include the template ht ethernet Network interface type ha 0000a70023a3 Terminal Ethernet address ip 192 43 156 171 Terminal IP address b Xncdhmx X server filename Using RARP for Address Discovery You can use RARP instead of BOOTP DHCP to determine addresses however RARP returns only the IP address of the terminal and the boot host You must set other addresses needed by the terminal such as the gateway and subnet mask in NVRAM For information about configuring addresses in NVRAM see Storing Addresses in NVRAM on page 3 11 You cannot use RARP to specify the X server file to load instead the terminal uses the default download sequence to locate an X server For information about the download
416. lts host default empty list hostname or The network name or address of a host granted read only IP address access to the terminal s SNMP daemon Note To disallow read only access by all hosts leave the table empty and make sure snmp read only access control enabled is set to true 3 The community name must be specified in SNMP requests to obtain read only access to the terminal s configuration information You can specify up to two community names A community name is a string of alphanumeric characters of any length If you do not wish to use the default community name for read only access set the community name in Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP Read Only Community Set the second community name in Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP Read Only Alternative Community Configuring Terminals to Allow Trap Monitoring The two trap events defined for NCD terminals are 1 The cold start trap sent when the terminal is powered on LY The authentication failure trap sent when an attempt to access the terminal using SNMP fails To designate a host as a trap monitor list its hostname or IP address and a community name password in Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP Trap Monitors A community name is an alphanumeric string of arbitrary length 16 6 Using SNMP for Terminal Management Using SNMP to Read and Write Variables
417. lues The unshifted keys still work as usual you cannot programmatically rebind the unshifted state The two permissible formats of the escape sequences follow DCS pe pl Kyl Stl Kyn Stn ST DCS pe pl Kyl Stl Kyn Stn ST The parts of a function key definition are DCS Device control string pe Clear parameter 0 Clear all keys before starting reset 1 Clear one key at a time as overwritten pl Lock parameter no op on NCD terminals 0 Lock the keys 1 Unlock the keys Ky1 St1 or Ky1 St1 Key definition string There can be n of these separated by semicolons The format is a key selector number a slash then the rebinding See Table 12 6 The Ky1 St1 version requires that you supply the hexadecimal values of the letters in the key definition string NCD has added another option Ky1 St1 which allows you to supply ASCII characters for the string ST String terminator character or ESC 12 28 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 6 Key Selector Numbers Key Value F6 17 F7 18 F8 19 F9 20 F10 21 F11 23 F12 24 F13 25 F14 26 Help 28 Do 29 F17 31 F18 32 F19 33 F20 34 Examples of function key definitions follow spaces have been inserted for legibility but must not be included in the definition DESO N ST Clears all key rebindings DCS 1 0 ESC Locks keys n
418. m the terminal This parameter is used with NFS NFS TCP and TFTP Values below 512 bytes cause noticeably slow performance Range 0 8192 write size 1 default 8192 integer The amount of data in bytes requested in a single write request from the terminal This parameter is only used with NFS or NFS TCP Values below 512 bytes cause noticeably slow performance Range 0 8192 1 If the terminal is having trouble reading files with NFS across gateways try decreasing read size and write size to 1024 bytes An example file service table follows file service table usr lib X11 ncd nil eagle tftp usr local lib X11 nced unknown 3 30 8192 8192 var tmp nil eagle nfs var tmp unknown 3 30 8192 8192 Configuring the Matching Method When attempting a file access the terminal compares the file request with the local mount points in the file service table By default the terminal tries only the longest matching pathname or pathnames if there are matches of equal length The longest match is the most complete match the one that matches most or all of the elements in the pathname You can configure the terminal to try all matching pathnames instead 5 18 Configuring Network Services Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files The file try all matches on open parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters File Service Try All Matches on Open controls how the terminal uses file service
419. mage pref power manage enable Standby After minutes How long the terminal is idle before the transition to the standby state pref power manage standby time Suspend After minutes How long the terminal is idle before the transition to the suspend state pref power manage suspend time Powerdown After minutes How long the terminal is idle before the transition to the power down state pref power manage powerdown time Screen Background Preferences The parameters in the Screen Background hide box affect the screen background Screen Background Field Screen Background Type Description Appearance of the screen background Corresponding Parameter pref screen background type Solid Color Color if the screen background type is solid color pref screen background color Bitmap File Bitmap file if the screen background type is bitmap pref screen background bitmap file 9 52 Using Configuration Menus Using Change User Preferences Screen Background Field Description Corresponding Parameter Bitmap Foreground Color Color of the foreground if the screen background type is bitmap pref screen background bitmap foreground Bitmap Background Color Background color if the screen background type is bitmap pref screen background bitmap background Screen Saver Preferences The parameters in t
420. mation about setting up file services Using DPS Support Files The following DPS support files are included with NCDware and reside by default in usr lib X11 ncd dps 1 PSres upr the PostScript resource file 1 VM_3_2 SNF the virtual memory file CIE dict19c dat the color rendering file d InitProc dat the context initialization file The following sections describe these files in more detail The PostScript Resource File This section describes the PostScript resource file PSres upr which is essential for DPS operation and the NCD utility for creating a new resource file or updating a resource file When working with this file keep the following in mind If you change the default locations of the DPS support files or DPS font files you must modify the contents of the PostScript resource file to reflect the changes You may also need to add new file service table entries for information on the terminal s file service table see Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services 1 If you use other PostScript resource files make sure they follow the upr naming convention For more information about PostScript resource files refer to Programming the Display PostScript System with X from Adobe Systems Incorporated Sections in the PostScript Resource File The PostScript resource file contains the following sections d DPSVM This section identifies the VM Virtual Memory file The VM file must be loaded for DPS to work c
421. mber in the entry is incorrect for the given parameter User Action Verify that the correct row is specified when removing information from a parameter table X Server Messages 18 17 CONFIGD Messages BADMT BADPARAM BADPASSWD BADSET ESVRPROTO network server doesn t match file transfer protocol protocol Severity Error Explanation The Configuration daemon expected to use the specified file transfer protocol but the specified network such as TCP IP or DECnet does not support that protocol This message appears only at boot time User Action Verify the initial file protocols are established correctly for the system s providing boot services line n unknown parameter parameter Severity Error Explanation The Configuration daemon does not recognize the specified parameter that appears at the specified line in the configuration file User Action LI Verify the parameter name is correct specifically checking for typographical errors or other mistakes 1 Verify that you are not trying to connect to a terminal that is running a pre 5 0 version of NCDware incorrect password entered Severity Warning Explanation The password that has been entered for the Configuration daemon is incorrect User Action Confirm that the password is correct for access to the terminal s configuration information error setting parameter parameter message Severity Error Explanation The X ser
422. mber The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the green color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Table 14 9 pex monitor reference green y Parameter Possible Values Result default 1 0 floating point number The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the green color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Red Color Component The following parameters specify the three values that make up the red color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Each value can range from 0 0 to 1 0 Table 14 10 pex monitor reference red u Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 4288 floating point number The u CIE chromaticity coordinate for the red color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Table 14 11 pex monitor reference red v Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 5249 floating point number The v CIE chromaticity coordinate for the red color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Configuring PEX 14 7 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Table 14 12 pex monitor reference red y Parameter Possible Values default Result 1 0 floating point number The Y CIE luminance coordinate for the red color component of the properly adjusted display monitor Reference White Value The following parameters specify the three values that make up the reference white value of the
423. me 9 46 pref console blank screen delay 9 46 pref console key sequence 9 46 pref console lock screen default password 9 46 pref console show timestamps 9 46 pref environment 9 47 Preferences daemon configuration parameters for 9 20 defined 6 2 ports for accessing 6 29 starting from Terminal Emulator 12 2 pref font extended diagnostics 7 17 9 47 pref font path 7 12 9 47 pref keyboard auto repeat 9 47 pref keyboard auto repeat rate 9 48 pref keyboard auto repeat start 9 47 pref keyboard function key style 9 47 pref keyboard keyclick volume 9 48 pref keyboard leds 9 48 pref mouse acceleration 9 51 pref mouse arrangement 9 51 pref mouse threshold 9 51 pref pex color clipping method 9 50 14 12 pref pex dither flat shaded surface 9 50 14 10 pref pex dither interpolated surface 9 50 14 10 pref pex nominal edge width 9 50 14 9 Index 21 Index pref pex nominal line width 9 50 14 9 14 10 pref pex nominal marker size 9 50 pref pex surface interior style 9 50 14 11 pref pex surface interp method 9 50 14 11 pref pex surface reflect model 9 50 14 12 pref power manage enable 9 52 pref power manage powerdown time 9 52 pref power manage standby time 9 52 pref power manage suspend time 9 52 pref screen background bitmap background 9 53 pref screen background bitmap file 9 52 pref screen background bitmap foreground 9 53 pref screen background color 9 52 pref screen background type 9 52 pref screensaver bitmap file 9 5
424. me Cache Size 5 11 Setting Name Service Timeouts 5 11 Discovering the Terminal s Hostname when Booting Reverse Name Request 5 12 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files 5 13 Configuring the Initial File Servers 5 13 Configuring the File Service Table 5 15 Configuring the Matching Method 5 18 Contents vi Configuring File Access through TFTP 5 20 Secure versus Non Secure TFTP 5 20 Make Sure TFTP Is Enabled on the Host 5 21 Configuring File Access through NFS 5 22 Configuring the Host for NFS File Access 5 22 Setting User and Group IDs for NFS File Access 5 22 Setting the Unmount Timer for NFS File Access 5 23 Changing the Timeout for Failed File Servers 5 24 Issuing Extended File Service Diagnostic Messages 5 24 Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks 5 25 Specifying Default Gateways 5 25 The IP Routing Table 5 26 Finding Routes to Hosts through Proxy ARP 5 29 Discovering Neighboring Gateways through Router Discovery 5 30 Setting TCP Performance Parameters 5 31 Adjusting the TCP Send and Receive Buffers 5 31 Specifying the TCP Timeout 5 32 Specifying TCP Maximum Retransmissions 5 33 Specifying the TCP Linger Time 5 33 Allowing Larger Segment Sizes 5 33 Chapter 6 Terminal Configuration Method Configuration Methods Overview 6 2 Configuration Daemons 6 2 Configuration Parameters 6 2 Configuration Language 6 2 Default Configuration Values 6 2 Configuration Methods 6 3 Contents Access
425. me as short as possible The tagged string area is described in Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM To direct the terminal to search a specified directory for configuration files set the config unix directory parameter to the absolute pathname of the directory for all configuration files for this terminal Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration Initial Configuration File section UNIX Directory Change Quick Setup gt Files UNIX Config Directory The configuration file directory name can also be set in the Boot Monitor Setup menus Table 6 6 config unix directory Parameter Possible Values Results default The terminal searches the usr lib X11 ncd configs directory for configuration files pathname The terminal searches the specified directory for configuration files The directory must be world readable and can be world writable Note The name local is reserved for an optional local file system Consequently you cannot use a a file system that starts with local for host resident configuration files 6 26 Terminal Configuration Methods Disabling All Remote Configuration File Downloads Disabling All Remote Configuration File Downloads NCD terminals are configured initially to download a configuration file To disable configuration file download set the config load initial file parameter to false Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration Initial Configuration File sectio
426. ment in line n TOOMANYKEYSYMS Line n the maximum number of keysyms per keycode is key_n Severity Error Explanation At line n the keysym or keycode command exceeded the maximum of four keysyms per command User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n 18 66 X Server Messages KEYMAPPER Messages TOOMANYSCAN Line n too many scancodes found scan_n Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode command has scan_n scancodes more than the maximum of 256 User Action Check the syntax and usage of the scancode command in line n UNKNOWNKEYSYM Line n unknown keysym name name Severity Error Explanation At line n the terminal does not recognize the keysym name name User Action Check the syntax and usage of keysym in line n KEYMAPPER Messages KEYMAPPER messages pertain to the Keymap Editor If you are looking for a message that refers to the KEYMAPPER module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 USAGE usage_syntax Severity Fatal Explanation The user included an incorrect command line option User Action Review the usage and syntax instructions in the command s man page for the correct options and usage LICENSE Messages LICENSE messages pertain to use of the license management software If you need to call NCD Technical Support for a problem related to the LICENSE module make sure you ha
427. meters 9 41 wincen command diagnostic messages 18 127 WINCEN messages 18 127 WinCenter configuration parameters for 9 40 Index wincenter colors 9 40 wincenter resources 9 40 Window Delay Time Change Setup Parameters 9 29 window managers Motif Window Manager diagnostic messages 18 83 NCD Window Manager diagnostic messages 18 133 in session management files 8 9 Window Size Change Setup Parameters 9 40 Windows 95 compatible keyboard 17 13 wireless configuration parameters for 9 32 diagnostic messages 18 128 statistics 10 28 to 10 29 WIRELESS messages 18 128 WM messages 18 133 wr command Boot Monitor 11 10 Write Keyboard Description File Change Setup Parameters 9 24 17 54 ws command Boot Monitor 11 10 X X Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 9 X extensions disabling 9 40 X resources loading 8 7 X server diagnostic messages 18 1 directory default 4 2 4 3 non standard 4 7 4 14 filename links 4 14 filenames 4 2 default 4 2 disabling filenames 4 5 non standard 4 7 location of 4 7 4 12 4 13 X server continued modules configuration parameters for 9 29 load policy 4 10 to 4 12 loading diagnostic messages 18 103 statistics 10 8 protocols for loading 4 1 screen resolution reported by 9 54 version displaying 16 8 see also booting X session restarting with SNMP 16 10 see also XDM X Display Manager X Session Change Quick Setup 9 6 X settings retaining 9 40 Xaccess file 8
428. mmand has three forms get protect parameter Protects one or more specific parameters from display get protect group Protects one or more groups of parameters get protect all Protects all parameters Using the set protect Command The set protect command prevents modification of parameter values Parameters protected with this command can be displayed but not modified The set protect command has three forms set protect parameter Protects one or more specific parameters from modification set protect group Protects one or more groups of parameters set protect all Protects all parameters Removing Parameter Protection Once a parameter is protected no one can modify or display it without resetting the terminal or editing the configuration file The method for disabling parameter protection depends on whether the protect command was written to a configuration file 1 If you protected a parameter through a TELNET connection but did not write the parameter to a file log out and reboot the terminal The parameter is no longer protected 1 If you protected a parameter through TELNET and wrote it to a file or a configuration file contains one of the protection commands edit the configuration file to remove the protection and reboot the terminal The parameter is no longer protected Terminal Configuration Methods 6 33 Disabling the Configuration Utilities or the Console Disabling the Configuration Utilities or the Console
429. monitor reference green v 9 34 14 7 pex monitor reference green y 9 34 14 7 pex monitor reference red u 9 34 14 7 pex monitor reference red v 9 34 14 7 pex monitor reference red y 9 34 14 8 pex monitor reference white u 9 35 14 8 pex monitor reference white v 9 35 14 8 pex monitor reference white y 9 35 14 8 Physical Location Change Setup Parameters 9 38 pi command Boot Monitor 11 9 pointing devices configuration parameters for 9 51 ports 3270 terminal emulator 9 42 Configuration daemon 6 28 NCD Display Manager 9 30 Preferences daemon 6 29 XRemote 9 41 see also serial port parallel port power management monitor configuration parameters for 9 52 Powerdown After Change User Preferences 9 52 PPP configuration parameters for 9 35 diagnostic messages 18 96 PPP and SLIP Interfaces Table Change Setup Parameters 9 35 PPP Interfaces Table Change Setup Parameters 9 35 PPPD messages 18 96 ppp interfaces table 9 35 ppp slip interfaces table 9 35 pref audio maximum gain 9 44 pref bell duration 9 45 pref bell enable 9 45 pref bell pitch 9 45 pref bell volume 9 45 pref compatibility decwindows images 9 45 pref compatibility decwindows keyboard 17 12 17 20 17 29 17 35 pref compatibility decwindows keyboards 9 45 pref compatibility decwindows vendor string 9 45 pref compatibility permit old x bugs 9 45 pref console auto lock idle time 9 46 pref console auto logout cancel delay 9 46 pref console auto logout idle ti
430. mp Frequency Maximum frequency at which diag timestamp frequency for raw TCP connections to the Diagnostic daemon seconds timestamps are added to the diagnostic log Buffer Size bytes Maximum size of the diagnostic log diag buffer size Log File File to which diagnostic messages diag log file are written Telnet Port Number Port on which the terminal listens diag telnet port for Telnet connections to the Diagnostic daemon TCP Port Number Port on which the terminal listens diag tcp port 9 20 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Diagnostics Field Description Corresponding Parameter NCDnet Object Name NCDnet object on which the diag ncdnet object name terminal listens for NCDnet connections to the Diagnostic daemon DECnet Display PostScript Parameters The parameters in the Display PostScript hide box affect the Display PostScript server module This hide box appears on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only DPS X resource Path Path searched for DPS X resource dps resource path files File Manager Parameters The parameters in the File Manager hide box affect the Local File Manager File Manager Field Description Corresponding Parameter Telnet Port Number Port on which the terminal listens file manager telnet port for Telnet connections to the File Manager daemon TCP Port Number Port on which the terminal listens file manager tc
431. mpt and waits for a command You can enter a manual boot command Using remote configuration parameters you can change the default download sequence The configurable actions are 1 Disabling automatic booting Disabling all broadcast attempts Disabling the MOP request Disabling some of the TFTP or NFS requests Specifying a non standard X server filename Specifying a non standard X server directory DEGO C O Configuring the terminal to persist in trying to boot without going to the Boot Monitor when all attempts fail Configuring the sequence of boot protocols used sources Booting X Server Loading 4 3 Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Disabling Automatic Booting To prevent the terminal from booting automatically set the boot automatically parameter to false Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting Boot automatically at power up If automatic booting is disabled the terminal displays the Boot Monitor prompt instead of loading an X server This parameter is saved in NVRAM Table 4 2 boot automatically Parameter Possible Values Result default true true The Boot Monitor attempts to download an X server false The Boot Monitor does not attempt to download an X server Disabling Broadcast Requests for an X Server If the boot host does not respond the Boot Monitor directs X server download requests to the broadcast address To prevent broadcast
432. ms that the ip packet fragmentations Fragmentations terminal successfully fragmented completed Completed Packet Number of datagrams discarded ip packet fragmentations not Fragmentations Not because they could not be fragmented completed Completed at the terminal Packet Fragments Created Number of datagram fragments generated as a result of fragmentation at the terminal ip packet fragments created Subnet Address Current subnet address for the terminal ip subnet mask Loadable Modules Statistics The statistics in the Loadable Modules hide box report on the modules that are currently loaded Loadable Modules Field Description Corresponding Parameter Currently Loaded Information about currently loaded modules loaded modules including module name memory used and version 10 8 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes NCDnet Statistics The parameters in the NCDnet hide box report statistics on terminal communications using NCDnet DECnet ri AtanStieS Description Corresponding Parameter Node Address Current DECnet address of the ncdnet node address terminal Data Blocks Sent Number of data messages sent over ncdnet data blocks sent DECnet Data Blocks Received Number of data messages received ncdnet data blocks received over DECnet Bytes Sent Number of bytes transmitted over ncdnet bytes sent DECnet Bytes Received Number
433. n Load Initial File Table 6 7 config load initial file Parameter Possible Values Result default true true The X server attempts to download a remote configuration file false The X server does not attempt to download a remote configuration file The config load initial file parameter is saved in NVRAM If you want the new value to take effect the next time the terminal boots set the parameter interactively either through Change Setup Parameters or a TELNET connection and apply the new value Specifying the File for Loading Configuration Defaults When you select Restore Defaults from the File menu in the Setup Parameters or Quick Setup window the default action of the terminal is to read the parameter settings in the remote configuration file loaded by the terminal Using the config default file parameter you can specify a different file for this purpose Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration gt Configuration Daemon Service section Default File Table 6 8 config default file Parameter Possible Values Result default The configuration file loaded by the terminal filename The pathname of the file to be used as the default file Terminal Configuration Methods 6 27 Changing the Ports for Accessing Configuration Daemons Changing the Ports for Accessing Configuration Daemons Access to the terminal s Configuration and User Preferences daemons is through
434. n CSI ps ps r Store Digital private mode Esc ps ps r Permissible values for ps 1 Cursor keys mode normal application DECCKM keypad 3 Column mode 80 132 columns DECCOLM 4 Scrolling mode jump fast scroll DECSCLM 5 Screen mode normal reverse video DECSCNM 6 Origin mode normal origin DECOM 7 Autowrap mode no wrap wraparound DECAWM 8 Auto repeat mode auto repeat no auto DECARM repeat 9 Do not send send MIT mouse row and column on button press 25 Not implemented 40 Disallow allow 80 to 132 mode 41 Off on curses 1 fix 42 National replacement character set mode DECNRCM disabled 44 Off on margin bell 45 No reverse wraparound reverse wraparound mode 46 Stop start logging 47 Use normal alternate screen buffer Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 17 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI ps ps Restore Digital private mode Permissible values for ps 1 Cursor keys mode normal application DECCKM keypad 3 Column mode 80 132 columns DECCOLM 4 Scrolling mode jump fast scroll DECSCLM 5 Screen mode normal reverse video DECSCNM 6 Origin mode normal origin DECOM 7 Autowrap mode no wrap wraparound DECAWM 8 Auto repeat no auto repeat keys DECARM 9 Do not send send MIT mouse row and column on button press 25 Not implemented 40 Disallow allo
435. n Check the terminal s configuration and or the Console Messages to make sure that the light pen module lightpen was loaded Unknown class class Severity Warning Explanation The light pen support is not operating User Action Please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 15 CALIBTOUCH Messages CALIBTOUCH Messages CALIBTOUCH messages pertain to the touch screen software support If you are looking for a message that refers to the CALIBTOUCH module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 NODISPLAY Could not open display Severity Fatal Explanation The X server cannot find the X display and the touch screen support is not operating User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support NOTOUCH Could not open touchscreen Severity Fatal Explanation The X server cannot find the touch screen monitor User Action Make sure that the terminal is configured for touch screen support See the User s Guide for specific instructions NOXINPUT extension not present when listing input devices Severity Fatal Explanation The X server could not find the X Input Extensions User Action Check the terminal s configuration and or the Console Messages to make sure that the X Input Extension module xinput has been loaded UNKWNCLASS Unknown class class Severity Warning Explanation The input device class is neither Key Button n
436. n configure it statically The terminal tries higher numbered routes first Range 2147483648 to 2147483647 Configuring Network Services 5 27 Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks Table 5 28 ip routing table Parameter Continued and the routes used for SLIP Serial Line Internet Protocol connections are host routes Table Entry Possible Values Result Field Type type default static read write static The system administrator created the route and it cannot be deleted or marked unusable dynamic The network discovered the route by the proxy ARP ICMP or router discovery protocols and it can be deleted or marked unusable if the terminal detects failures when using the route creation default snmp read write method snmp SNMP set the route icmp ICMP set the route local The system administrator created the route proxy arp Proxy ARP created the route birth default 0 read only integer Amount of time in seconds after booting that the route was created time to live 1 The route should not be automatically deleted read write integer How long in seconds before the route is deleted This information is conveyed in router discovery messages Range 1 2147483647 destination default network read write type ze network The destination is a network Most routes are network routes host The destination is a host Proxy ARP routes
437. n font server font_server where font is the XLFD name of the font you want to display and font_server is the host on which the font server resides and the TCP port on which the font server listens for connections Specify font_server as tep host port 7 28 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 8 Login and X Session Management This chapter describes the X Display Manager XDM which supplies login and session management services The following topics are covered in this chapter DCO O O O m XDM Default Actions on page 8 2 XDM Overview on page 8 3 Configuring XDM Hosts on page 8 5 Starting XDM Manually on page 8 15 XDM Access Control on page 8 15 Configuring Terminals for XDM on page 8 17 Using XDM X11R3 Version on page 8 19 The NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems describes the basic usage and configuration of XDM The NCD Display Manager is described in the System Administrator s Guide Login and X Session Management 8 1 XDM Default Actions XDM Default Actions Table 8 1 lists the default XDM actions the alternatives and references for more information Table 8 1 Summary of XDM Defaults and Alternatives Default Alternative References After booting the terminal broadcasts an XDM query to the network Use direct queries to one or more hosts or use indirect queries System Administrator s Guide The terminal di
438. n the terminal 11 Extended messages for file and font access Configuring Message Time Stamps Messages collected in the buffer have time stamps appended to them although time stamps are not displayed in the Console message area Time stamps indicate when the message was issued relative to the last reboot of the terminal Time stamps follow the format d hh mm ss days hours minutes and seconds Some messages may have no time stamps because the next time stamp is not written until one second has elapsed This time interval is called the time stamp frequency By default time stamps are entered every second You can change the frequency with the diag timestamp frequency parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters Diagnostics gt Timestamp Frequency Specify the number of seconds as an integer X Server Messages 18 5 Configuring Message Logging Changing the Message Buffer Size The default size of the internal buffer used for logging messages is 8 192 bytes If you are not capturing all the messages you need you can change the size of the buffer with the diag buffer size parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Diagnostics gt Buffer Size Specify the number of bytes as an integer Enabling Extended Diagnostics You can configure a terminal to issue more detailed messages about the following services d File service To generate more detailed messages about the file service set the file extended diagnostic
439. n the terminal and the 18 132 X Server Messages WM Messages Access Point and may indicate that there are not enough Access Points to provide adequate coverage of the area User Action If this problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support WM Messages WM messages pertain to the local NCD Window Manager and application launcher If you are looking for a message that refers to the WM module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ALREADY window manager is already running Severity Fatal Explanation The X server has received a request to start the local NCD Window Manager when it is already running The duplicate request has failed User Action Locate the duplicate request for starting the local NCD Window Manager and remove it BADCMD unable to run command command BADCOMMAND Severity Error Explanation The application launcher cannot run the specified command User Action Verify that the command is correct in the launchre or LAUNCHRC DAT file Unrecognized launcher function n Severity Warning Explanation The WM module has encountered an unrecognized function with the specified function number User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 133 WM Messages BADCONFIG launcher config file file BADCONNI BADGI Severity Error Explanation The W
440. n xoff The terminal sends an XON Q signal when input buffers are available and an XOFF 4S signal when input buffers are nearly full dtr dsr The terminal raises the DTR Data Terminal Ready signal when input buffers are available and lowers DTR when input buffers are nearly full In addition the DCE Data Communication Equipment the device with which the terminal communicates raises the DSR Data Set Ready signal when it can receive data from the terminal The terminal stops sending data when the DCE lowers the DSR signal rts cts The terminal raises the RTS Ready to Send signal when input buffers are available and lowers RTS when input buffers are nearly full Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 15 5 Configuring Port Operating Characteristics Table 15 1 serial interfaces table Parameter Continued Table Entries Possible Values Results hangup default none none Neither the Serial daemon nor the NCD Terminal Emulator performs any action when the serial connection is closed by either the host or the X server drop dtr Depending on the value assigned to the mode field either the Serial daemon or the NCD terminal emulator drops the Data Terminal Ready signal on the specified serial port when either the host system or the X server closes the serial connection send break Depending on the value assigned to the mode field either the Serial daemon or the NCD Terminal Emulator s
441. nable to respond with appropriate information Check the ncddm error logs or turn on debugging Debugging is turned on through command line options see the ncddm man page User Action Please contact NCD Technical Support NETD Messages NETD messages pertain to the netd daemon which listens for network connection requests and launches the client or daemon assigned to handle them If you are looking for a message that refers to the NETD module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADVERSION bad version info var Severity Error Explanation The version of ncdrunwm being run on the host is not supported by the X server User Action Make sure that the correct version of ncdrunwm is in use NETFILE Messages NETFILE messages pertain to network file services If you are looking for a message that refers to the NETFILE module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADALLOC open failed allocation failure message Severity Error Explanation The X server tried to open a file and failed for the specified reason This message usually indicates that the terminal is low on memory User Action Check the amount of available memory If possible close some local clients to free more memory X Server Messages 18 87 NETFILE Messages BADNAME open failed badly formed name file Severity Error Explanation The
442. nd invoke it again BADPASS wrong password for host host Severity Error Explanation The password that has been entered is incorrect for the specified terminal User Action Obtain the correct password for the terminal to which you are trying to connect CONN can not create connection to host host Severity Error Explanation The CONFUI module cannot connect to the specified terminal User Action Make sure that the specified terminal name is correct Confirm that the specified terminal is operational If it is confirm that the terminal is connected to the network and that the network is working 18 30 X Server Messages CONFUI Messages CONNECT conflib_connect_type parameter failed Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error In this message type refers to the value type such as Boolean floating point integer string or table User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support GET conflib_get_type parameter failed Severity Warning Explanation The X server does not support the specified configuration parameter perhaps because the parameter is from a previous version of the X server In this message type refers to the value type such as Boolean floating point integer string or table User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support LOSTCONN lost connection to host host NOCONN Not Severity E
443. ndard set of protocols for network management in TCP IP network environments It provides mechanisms for monitoring and controlling terminals from a central location Using SNMP from a network host you can I Display or modify the values of all terminal configuration parameters LY Obtain additional information including network traffic levels network error levels basic system and network configuration data and the state of the font cache LY Configure network oriented timers 1 Remotely reset NCD terminals SNMP Components SNMP consists of four interrelated parts 1 An SNMP agent in the X server L SNMP manager software located on a host computer and available from a number of vendors Most management software includes utilities for Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 1 SNMP Overview collecting information from agents Some management software also includes utilities for generating reports and setting variables m MIB Management Information Base information defined by standard variables mandated in RFC 1212 plus variables added by NCD The NCDware distribution includes two versions of the MIB The combined NCDware MIB and MIB II file with the following name and default location usr lib X11 ncd snmp mib txt The new updated NCDware only MIB file that includes SNMP variables for all NCD remote configuration parameters with the following name and default location usr lib X11 ncd snmp mib my
444. nding Parameter Reference White The u CIE chromaticity coordinate pex monitor reference Chromaticity u for the white color component of a__ white u properly adjusted monitor Reference White The v CIE chromaticity coordinate pex monitor reference white v Chromaticity v for the white color component of a properly adjusted monitor Reference White The Y CIE luminance coordinate pex monitor reference white y Luminance Y for the white color component of a properly adjusted monitor PPP and SLIP Parameters The parameters in the PPP and SLIP hide box affect terminal communications using the PPP and SLIP protocols PPP and SLIP Field Description Corresponding Parameter PPP and SLIP Interfaces PPP and SLIP configuration ppp slip interfaces table Table parameters PPP Interfaces Table PPP configuration parameters ppp interfaces table Serial Parameters The parameters in the Serial hide box affect the serial port s and Serial daemon Serial Hide Field Description Corresponding Parameter Serial Interfaces Table Serial port parameters serial interfaces table Serial Daemons Table Serial daemon parameters serial daemons table Using Configuration Menus 9 35 Using Change Setup Parameters TCP Parameters The parameters in the TCP hide box affect terminal communications using the TCP protocol Transmission Control Protocol Field Descri
445. net host on the specified serial port User Action None 18 106 X Server Messages SERIALD Messages INETCLOSE port closed session from nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The Serial daemon has closed the serial session with the specified IP host on the specified serial port User Action None INETOPEN port opened session from nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The Serial daemon has opened a serial session with the specified IP host on the specified serial port User Action None LATCLOSE port closed session from host Severity Information Explanation The Serial daemon has closed a serial session with the specified LAT host on the specified serial port User Action None LATOPEN port opened session from host LOSTSTATUS Severity Information Explanation The Serial daemon has established a serial session with the specified LAT host on the specified serial port User Action None port lost status hex_value Severity Information Explanation The specified port using the serial protocol requested status of the RS 232 C line The buffer had no room for this information User Action None X Server Messages 18 107 SIE Messages SIE Messages SIE messages pertain to the Simple Imaging Extension If you are looking for a message that refers to the SIE module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All M
446. nfiguration Menus 9 45 Using Change User Preferences Console and Utilities Preferences The parameters in the Console and Utilities hide box affect the Console logout utility screen lock utility and screen blank utility Console and Utilities Field Description Corresponding Parameter Console Key Sequence Non standard key sequence for displaying the Console pref console key sequence Automatic Logout After minutes How long the terminal is idle before logging the user out pref console auto logout idle time Automatic Logout Cancel Delay seconds How long the terminal waits for the user to cancel an automatic logout pref console auto logout cancel delay Automatic Lock Screen After minutes How long the terminal is idle before automatically locking the screen pref console auto lock idle time Screen milliseconds Blank Screen before the screen goes blank Lock Screen Default Password for locking the screen pref console lock screen Password default password Delay When Blanking How long after the user selects pref console blank screen delay Show Console Message Timestamps Timestamps are displayed with Console messages pref console show timestamps 9 46 Using Configuration Menus Using Change User Preferences Environment Variables Preferences The Environment Variables hide box is used to set variables for certain local
447. nfiguration Methods ncd_std If the terminal does not find Prevent the terminal from booting Chapter 6 Terminal a configuration file it without a configuration file Configuration Methods 2 4 Booting Defaults Summary of Booting Alternatives Table 2 1 Chronological Summary of Default Booting Actions and Alternatives Default Booting Action The X server reads the font directories in its default font path on its boot host The X server reads the default keysym database file Alternate Action s You can configure the terminal to use a custom font path References Chapter 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Instead of or in addition to reading font directories directly you can configure the terminal to use a font server Chapter 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server If a specified font cannot be found the terminal uses its default font You can specify a different default font Specify an alternate keysym file xserver keysym file parameter Chapter 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference The X server reads the default color database file Specify an alternate color database file xserver rgb file parameter Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference The Console and a Login Chooser appear for the user to select a login host The Login Chooser displays all the hosts that responded to XDMCP requests from the termin
448. ng X Server Loading Using NFS for X Server Downloading Table 4 11 boot tftp directory Parameter Possible Values Result default tftpboot or usr tftpboot directory_path The directory for X server downloading using TFTP Using NFS for X Server Downloading To download an X server using NFS in addition to configuring the terminal for NFS use you must do the following Specify the default load method as NFS 1 If you do not want to use the default tftpboot or usr tftpboot directories for X servers specify the directory that NFS should search 1 If you do not want to use default X servers specify the X server to boot Making Sure NFS is Available If you are not certain whether NFS is available and configured on the boot host see Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services Specifying the Directory to Search for an X Server To specify the directory that the terminal searches for an X server to download the NFS mount point you alter a value in NVRAM If you do not specify a mount point the Boot Monitor uses the defaults tftpboot or usr tftpboot directory To specify a different directory set boot nfs directory to the desired mount point Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section NFS Directory Save the new value in NVRAM Booting X Server Loading 4 13 Linking X Server Files Table 4 12 boot nfs directory Parameter Po
449. ng BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery This section describes preparations for using BOOTP DHCP For BOOTP you can use the native software on the boot host or the software included in the NCDware distribution If you are using DHCP to provide network information the terminal configuration is the same as for BOOTP and the terminal must have Boot Monitor version 2 8 or later If you are not using ncdinstall to prepare hosts and terminals for BOOTP DHCP service you need to perform the tasks described in the following subsections The commands and steps may vary from those outlined in this section depending on your host your BOOTP DHCP implementation and your network These instructions are guidelines they are not precise procedures NCD terminals send BOOTP DHCP requests by default consequently terminal configuration is unnecessary unless you want to change the order in which the terminal sends requests for network information or specify a second or third source The default order is first DHCP then BOOTP then RARP Note Information provided by BOOTP for example the subnet mask is passed to the X server and may be stored in NVRAM overwriting previous values The BOOTP protocol is implemented through daemon programs such as bootpd 8 and a database file such as etc bootptab Hosts configured to use NCD s dynamic IP address allocation for terminals use an additional database file etc bootptab cfg For specific instructions
450. ng Navigation Keys for Boot Monitor Setup Menus The Boot Monitor s keymapper allows you to program menu navigation keys for unsupported keyboards that do not have defined arrow keys You can however change the navigation keys for any keyboard Please read the following usage notes before you begin T As you assign keys write down the key assigned to each navigation function in case you forget the new assignments after exiting from the keymapper This is because the keymapper displays only the keycode not the legend on the key For supported keyboards you can check the keycode against the keyboard maps For unsupported keyboards however there may be no way to find out which key corresponds to a given key code Q Ifyou assign a number key to a navigation function you can no longer use the number key for entering data in the Boot Monitor Setup menus or for entering data with other Boot Monitor commands 11 Mapping keys and then attaching a keyboard that has a different layout may cause problems if the assigned keys do not exist on the new keyboard T Do not assign one of the defaults to another keymapper function For example if you assign the default key for the left function to the right function but do not assign another key to the left function pressing left causes the cursor to move right There is now no way to move the cursor left Be especially careful that you do not lose the escape or setup functions Follow these steps to
451. ng The NCDnet object used by hosts connecting to the Serial daemon enable lat service default false true LAT service is enabled for the Serial daemon Supports VMS print service for the terminal false LAT service is not enabled for the Serial daemon lat service name default nil string The name of the Serial daemon LAT service lat service rating default 50 integer The X server uses the specified LAT service rating when advertising LAT service for the terminal s Serial daemon Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 15 7 Configuring Port Operating Characteristics The default serial daemons table is serial daemons table 1 false 87 seria 2 false 87 serial 3 false 87 seria Hh alse nil 50 alse nil 50 Hh d d d Hh alse nil 50 Configuring the Parallel Port The parallel daemons table specifies operating characteristics for the parallel port Setup Change Setup Parameters Parallel gt Parallel Daemons Table Table 15 3 parallel daemons table Parameter Table Entries Possible Values Results port number Range 1 2 The identifying number of the parallel port read only use parallel protocol default false false A protocol for reporting status to host printing software is not used This is the recommended setting when a printer is attached to the parallel port true A protocol for reporting status to h
452. ng handled by a font server the X server hands off the font request to the font server The font server creates a bitmap in the desired point size and resolution and returns it to the X server If the font is not being handled by a font server the X server directly opens the font file and reads it over the network into terminal memory 4 When the X server obtains a font either through direct file access or from a font server it displays the characters requested by the client on the screen 5 If the server does not find the font requested by the client the X server returns an error message to the client Usually the client requests another font If not you can arrange to provide another font through font aliasing Font Names In the X Window System fonts are named using the XLFD X Logical Font Description conventions XLFD names supply information about the developer of the font the font family and various characteristics of the font including size weight and dots per inch An XLFD name consists of 14 fields separated by hyphens The fields in the following example font name are described in Table 7 1 adobe courier medium r normal 8 80 100 100 m 50 is08859 1 7 2 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Use Overview Table 7 1 XLFD Field Descriptions Field Name Example Description Foundry adobe Developer of the font also called the foundry Family courie
453. ng the NVRAM utility and Boot Monitor Setup menus see Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 0 Interactive configuration through SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Using NCD s MIB Management Information Base and your host based SNMP utilities you can set and display configuration parameters For information on configuring terminals for SNMP see Chapter 16 Using SNMP for Terminal Management The SNMP names and paths for all configuration parameters are listed in the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference 6 4 Terminal Configuration Methods Parameter Types and Groups Access Control for Terminal Configuration Data NCDware provides the following types of access control for terminal configuration data Host based access control User based access control Password protection for local and remote interactive configuration Password protection for displaying statistical data DCO C O Protection for specified parameters L The ability to disable any of the local clients including the Console Controlling access to configuration data statistical data and local clients is described in the System Administrator s Guide except for parameter protection which is described in Protecting Configuration Parameters on page 6 32 Parameter Types and Groups This section describes parameter types and functional groups Read write Read only and Write only Parameters Parameters are read write read only or write only
454. nistrative status for remote reset requires that the snmp allow reset parameter be set to true The possible values for this parameter are described in Table 16 5 The parameter is not saved in NVRAM 16 12 Using SNMP for Terminal Management Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot Table 16 5 unit administrative status Parameter Values Possible Values Results default running running The terminal is running no reset commands are pending session reset The terminal restarts the session This option is the same as logging out of the current session in the Console select Login gt Logout last client close reset The terminal reboots when the last client closes unit reset The terminal reboots immediately This option is the same as rebooting the terminal in the Console select Console gt Reboot Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 13 Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot 16 14 Using SNMP for Terminal Management 17 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions This chapter describes NCD supported keyboards and downloadable keyboard files For the N 97 N 101 VT220 N 108 N 107 and N 123 keyboard groups there are illustrations showing keycap legends and associated decimal keycodes for the US version in each keyboard group tables listing the keysyms that result when the terminal uses the default keymap for the US version in each group default LED values key combinations
455. nitor asks TFTP to download an X server Potentially the Boot Monitor can issue 16 different requests as follows a Requests to the boot host The Boot Monitor directs the first series of requests to the boot host The Boot Monitor tries the following pathnames in the order shown Relative pathnames The first four requests use relative pathnames in the default TFTP X server directory tftpboot 1 A file named using the terminal s Ethernet address for example 0000A701395 2 A file named using the hexadecimal representation of the terminal s IP address For example C02B997E for the terminal with IP address 192 43 153 126 3 The file named using the terminal s product name and the terminal s memory size as a suffix The memory size is stated in hundreds of kilobytes For example 8 megabytes is the same as 8000 kilobytes yielding a suffix of 80 The resulting filename for an HMX in this example is Xncdhmx 80 4 The file named using the terminal s product name alone For example Xncdhmx Absolute pathnames The second four requests use the same filenames but absolute pathnames for the tftpboot directory These requests are included for versions of TFTP such as the System V version that do not use relative pathnames 5 For example tftpboot 0000A701395 6 For example tftpboot C02B997E for the terminal with IP address 192 43 153 126 7 For exampl
456. nse before failure is declared ncdnet connect timeout Retransmission Limit Number of attempts to retransmit data on an established connection before a failure is declared ncdnet retransmission limit Keepalive Timeout seconds Length of time the terminal remains inactive on an established connection before a keepalive packet is sent ncdnet keepalive timeout Hello Timeout seconds Length of time between successive transmissions of Hello packets ncdnet hello timeout Router Timeout seconds Length of time after a Router Hello message is received that the sending router is used as the default router ncdnet router timeout User Account Name Account name used in connection attempts ncdnet user account name MOP Identify Timeout Length of time between ncdnet mop identify timeout seconds transmissions of MOP identify packets Allow MOP Reset Allows remote reboot via MOP ncdnet mop allow reset Using Configuration Menus 9 31 Using Change Setup Parameters NCDnet Name Service Parameters The parameters in the NCDnet Name Service hide box affect the NCDnet DECnet name service NCDnet Name Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Lifetime seconds used before being automatically deleted Name Cache Max Size Maximum number of entries in the ncdnet name cache max size terminal s name cache Name Cache Max How long a name se
457. nterior Style Table 14 21 pref pex surface interior style Parameter Possible Values Result default by request by request Surface interiors are rendered as requested by the client hollow All surface interiors are rendered hollow solid All surface interiors are rendered solid empty All surface interiors are rendered empty The pref pex surface interp method parameter specifies how to shade the interiors of surfaces Setup Change User Preferences PEX Surface Interpolation Method Configuring PEX 14 11 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters Table 14 22 pref pex surface interp method Parameter Possible Values Result default by request by request Surface interiors are shaded as requested by the client none All surface interiors are flat shaded color All surface interiors are Gouraud shaded The pref pex surface reflect model parameter specifies how to apply lighting effects to all surfaces Setup gt Change User Preferences PEX Surface Reflection Model Table 14 23 pref pex surface reflect model Parameter Possible Values Result default by request by request Surface lighting effects are applied as requested by the client none Surfaces are not lighted ambient Only ambient lighting is used diffuse Ambient and diffuse lighting are used specular All lighting effects are used Specifying the Color Clippin
458. nual Text in This Format Indicates display text Text displayed on the screen or text in a file for example a field in the Setup menus input text Text to be typed as shown variable Portion of a command line or line in a file where you provide the value for example a terminal s IP address filename The name of a system file directory or pathname emphasized text An especially important word or phrase or explanatory text parameter name The name of a remote configuration parameter true A value assigned to a remote configuration parameter Other conventions used in this manual are 11 When you should press two keys at the same time they are shown as in this example Ctrl Z Press the Control and z key together 1 You should press Return after all commands Movement through menus in the Console is shown as a series of arrows For example Setup Change Setup Parameters Serial means to display the Setup menu select the Change Setup Parameters menu item and open the Serial hide box About this Manual 1 5 Comments on the Manual Comments on the Manual You can send comments suggestions or questions about this manual to the NCD Technical Publications Department at techpubs ncd com 1 6 About this Manual 2 Booting Defaults This chapter provides a summary of the default booting process of an NCD terminal 1 Address discovery Loading and executing the X server
459. nus 9 13 Using Change Setup Parameters Booting Fields Description Corresponding Parameter Previous Source The most recent boot method read only boot previous source Previous Server The most recent boot server read only boot previous server Primary Boot Source Method to be used the next time the terminal boots boot desired source Secondary Boot Source Method used for X server loading if the primary source is not available boot second source Tertiary Boot Source Method used for X server loading if the primary and secondary sources are not available boot third source Persist in Loading The terminal keeps trying to boot until it succeeds or is interrupted boot persistent loading Default Server when PROM Booting Server for downloading configuration files and fonts when the terminal boots locally boot default server when prom booting Boot Monitor Inverse Video Boot Monitor displays are in inverse video boot monitor inverse video Custom File A non standard filename for the X server boot file boot custom file TCP IP Boot Options Section TCP IP Desired Server Boot server to use when the boot boot tcpip desired server source is TFTP or NFS Secondary TCP IP Boot server to use when the desired boot tcpip second server Server primary boot server is not available Tertiary TCP IP Server Boot server to us
460. o 5 20 NFS configuring 5 22 to 5 23 statistics 10 13 TFIP configuring 5 20 to 5 22 statistics 10 25 timeouts configuring 5 24 File Service Protocol Change Quick Setup 9 3 File Service Table Change Setup Parameters 9 22 FILED messages 18 44 file default vms file name extension 9 23 file enable floppy filesystem 9 23 file enable nfs server 9 23 file export directory list 9 23 file extended diagnostics 5 24 9 4 9 22 13 12 18 6 file failed server ignore timeout 5 24 9 22 file initial protocol 1 9 3 9 22 file initial protocol 2 9 4 9 22 file initial server 1 9 3 9 22 file initial server 2 9 4 9 22 file manager access control enabled 9 12 file manager access control list 9 12 file manager ncdnet object name 9 21 file emanager password 9 12 file manager tcp port 9 21 file manager telnet port 9 21 file name type for initial tftp servers 9 4 9 22 file nfs access control list 9 12 file nfs access control default 9 12 file nfs gid 5 23 file nfs uid 5 23 file nfs unmount timeout 5 23 9 22 file service table 5 16 9 22 file try all matches on open 5 19 9 22 floppy drive diagnostic messages 18 38 FONT messages 18 48 Font Name Table Change Setup Parameters 9 24 font server access control for 7 22 architecture illustration 7 20 backup font servers 7 21 bitmap font format 7 21 Bitstream Speedo outline fonts 7 21 compressed font files 7 21 configuration file example 7 23 configuration parameters for 9 24 Index 9
461. o a file after an apply command Changing the Name of the Auto Save File The config auto save file name parameter controls the file to which changes are written You can specify a different filename from the default the name of the configuration file loaded plus the stp extension The file is written to the default directory for configuration files To change the default directory follow the directions in Specifying a Different Configuration File Directory on page 6 26 The file must be accessible through the file service table 6 36 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuring the Apply Command To change the name of the auto save file specify the filename in the config auto save file name parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Configuration Configuration Daemon Section Auto Save File Name Table 6 17 config auto save file name Parameter Possible Values Result default The file named for the initial configuration file downloaded by the terminal plus the stp filename extension filename Filename or pathname to which configuration data should be written Specifying the Data to Save The config auto saved info parameter controls the extent of the information to save Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Configuration Configuration Daemon Section Auto Saved Info Table 6 18 config auto saved info Parameter Possible Values Result default user changes us
462. o op on NCD terminals DOS a yad Say Print ST Rebinds F20 to string Print DCS 1 1 34 5052494E54 ST Rebinds F20 to string Print Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 29 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences In the Digital implementation there is a limitation of 256 characters combined for all programmable function keys NCD has a limitation of 256 characters per rebound key With Digital computers key locking and unlocking can be set through hardware Because NCD does not have this hardware this function does not work Locking is not enforced Configuring Window and Icon Titles Icon and window titles can be configured through the following escape sequence OSC ps ND string NP where ps Determines how the string is used 0 Uses string as the new icon name and window title 1 Uses string as the new icon name only 2 Uses string as the new window name only ND Is any non alphanumeric character and is discarded string Becomes the icon name and window title or icon name only This is an ASCII printable string that contains a maximum of 511 characters NP Is any non printing character and is also discarded Configuring Color Text You can specify color text programmatically This feature is based on the SGR select graphic rendition paradigm used to control blinking bold inverse and other text attributes There are two methods of setting text color I Using a subset of th
463. o other keys See Programming Navigation Keys for Boot Monitor Setup Menus on page 11 18 To move from field to field in a window use the up and down arrow keys Below the window a description of the current field is displayed If you enter an out of range value in a field an error message appears To delete a value in a field use one of the following methods 4 The Delete key backspaces a character at a time 1 Ctrl U deletes everything you typed in the current field 1 The Escape key erases everything that you typed and returns to the previous value Setting the Keyboard Type When you select the Keyboard menu the Keyboard window displays a list of the keyboard types and languages supported by the keyboard group to which the keyboard belongs The current type is highlighted when you display the window To select a keyboard other than the default usually the US English language type press the arrow key until you have highlighted the correct type Setting Monitor Resolution and Dots Per Inch When a terminal is first turned on the display appears at its default resolution number of pixels in height and width and refresh rate in hertz This setting may not accommodate the highest resolution or refresh rate that your monitor can support For detailed information about monitor resolution and dpi see your hardware documentation You can use the Monitor menu to select another resolution refresh rate or dpi for your
464. o the transport service snmp packets transmitted Packets Received with Bad Versions Total number of messages delivered that were for an unsupported SNMP version snmp packets received with bad versions Packets Received with Bad Community Names Total number of messages delivered to SNMP that used an unknown community name snmp packets received with bad community names Packets Received with Bad Community Uses Total number of messages delivered to SNMP that represented an operation that was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the message snmp packets received with bad community uses 10 18 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes SNMP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Packets Received with ASN 1 Errors Number of ASN 1 or BER errors encountered by SNMP when decoding received messages snmp packets received with asn1 errors Packets Received with Number of SNMP PDUs snmp packets received with Bad Variable Types delivered to SNMP that had an bad variable types unknown PDU type Too Big Error Number of PDUs generated by snmp too big error responses Responses Received SNMP with tooBig in the error status field received Bad Variable Name Number of PDUs delivered to snmp bad variable name error Error Responses SNMP with the value of responses received Received noSuchName in the error st
465. oads parameter settings from the file defined in the config default file parameter By default the value in this parameter is the initial configuration file loaded at boot time Cancel Cancels changes that have not been applied and quits the Change Quick Setup utility 9 2 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Quick Setup Contents of the Change Quick Setup Hide Boxes The following sections describe the contents of the Change Quick Setup hide boxes The tables in each section include brief descriptions of the fields and the names of the corresponding remote configuration parameters For the following information about parameters see the Remote Configuration Quick Reference m m m m Permitted values SNMP variable names and paths When the parameter takes effect Whether the parameter is saved in NVRAM Booting Parameters The Booting hide box contains parameters that affect the terminal s booting process Booting Field Description Corresponding Parameter Boot From Booting method that is the boot desired source protocol used for booting or whether the terminal boots locally Boot Host IP Address IP address of the boot server boot tcpip desired server Files Parameters The Files hide box contains parameters that affect how the terminal accesses files Files Field Description Corresponding Parameter File Service Protocol Protocol for file exchange with the primary initial file server
466. ocation failures 10 11 ncdnet name no server responses 10 10 ncdnet name no such name errors 10 10 ncdnet name numerical addresses 10 10 ncdnet name requests 10 10 ncdnet name server hits 10 10 ncdnet name server response errors 10 10 ncdnet name servers 9 6 9 32 ncdnet name server transaction timeout 9 32 ncdnet name system errors 10 10 ncdnet node address 10 9 ncdnet outbound errors 10 9 ncdnet retransmission limit 9 31 ncdnet router timeout 9 31 ncdnet seconds since zeroed 10 9 ncdnet user account name 9 31 ncdquery 1 16 7 ncdreset 1 16 10 to 16 12 ncdterm see Terminal Emulator ncdrunterm see Terminal Emulator ncdwm 1 diagnostic messages 18 133 in XDM session management files 8 9 net arp table entry buffers 10 12 net available buffers 10 11 net available cluster buffers 10 11 net buffer not available errors 10 11 net buffer waits 10 11 net connection control structure buffers 10 12 net connection name buffers 10 12 net connection option buffers 10 12 NETD messages 18 87 net domain channel 9 33 Index net ethernet snap encapsulation 9 32 NETFILE messages 18 87 net interface address buffers 10 12 net interfaces table 10 13 net number of interfaces 10 13 net packet data buffers 10 12 net packet fragment reassembly buffers 10 12 net packet header buffers 10 12 net protocol control structure buffers 10 12 net reserved data buffers 10 11 net roaming condition 9 32 NETSRV messages 18 93 net token ring spee
467. odules on page 18 7 TIMING image action took n milliseconds Severity Information Explanation The specified action took the specified length of time to complete User Action None SNMPD Messages SNMPD messages pertain to the SNMP daemon If you are looking for a message that refers to the SNMPD module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 AUTHFAILURE authentication failure from nan nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The SNMP daemon received an SNMP packet from the SNMP manager but the packet contains the wrong community string or access control is enabled and the specified host is not included in the list of approved hosts User Action Verify that the SNMP manager is sending the correct community string and that the host is included in the appropriate access control list of approved hosts NORESOLVE could not resolve address address Severity Error Explanation The SNMPD module has received an address that it cannot identify User Action Verify that the correct address has been specified 18 108 X Server Messages TERM Messages OPDISABLED requested operation is currently disabled Severity Warning Explanation A user has attempted to reset the terminal using ncdreset while the SNMP reset option is disabled User Action If the terminal should be enabled for remote reset via ncdreset enable the SNMP reset opti
468. of bytes received over ncdnet bytes received DECnet Hello Packets Sent Number of DECnet Hello packets sent ncdnet hello packets sent Hello Packets Received Number of DECnet Hello packets received ncdnet hello packets received Count Circuit Down Number of circuit down events that occurred ncdnet count circuit down Inbound Errors Number of DECnet receive errors ncdnet inbound errors Outbound Errors Number of DECnet transmit errors ncdnet outbound errors Seconds Since Zeroed Number of seconds since the DECnet statistics were last reset to zero ncdnet seconds since zeroed Statistics Menus 10 9 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes NCDnet Name Service Statistics The parameters in the NCDnet Name Service hide box report statistics on name service actions in a DECnet network NCDnet Name Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Name Requests Number of times the NCD name resolver was invoked ncdnet name requests Numerical Addresses Number of times the name resolver was invoked with the DECnet name in numerical format such as 1 17 ncdnet name numerical addresses Name Cache Hits Number of local name cache invocations in which the answer was found ncdnet name cache hits Name Server Hits Number of times the name resolver was invoked and the answer was found by consulting the name servers
469. of this document Part Number Revision Date Description 9300584 Rev A October 1997 First release of this manual for NCDware 5 0 Contents Chapter 1 About this Manua Intended Audience 1 1 Purpose 1 1 Contents of this Manual 1 2 Other NCD Manuals 1 4 Conventions Used in this Manual 1 5 Comments on the Manual 1 6 Chapter 2 Booting Defaults Summary of Booting Alternatives 2 1 hapter 3 Booting Address Discover Summary of Address Discovery Protocols 3 1 Changing the Order of Network Information Requests 3 2 Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery 3 3 Making Sure that BOOTP Is Enabled 3 4 Adding Options for NCD Terminals to the bootptab File 3 5 bootptab Format and Options 3 5 Adding Terminal Entries to the bootptab File 3 7 Configuring the Gateway Device and Terminal for Booting through a Gateway 3 8 Using RARP for Address Discovery 3 10 Storing Addresses in NVRAM_ 3 11 Contents Setting the Broadcast Address 3 12 Configuring Subnet Mask Discovery 3 13 Using ICMP to Discover the Subnet Mask 3 14 Setting the Subnet Mask in NVRAM 3 14 Communicating with Multi Homed Hosts 3 15 Using a Reverse Name Request 3 15 hapter 4 Booting X Server Loading Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence 4 1 Disabling Automatic Booting 4 4 Disabling Broadcast Requests for an X Server 4 4 Disabling the MOP Request for an X Server 4 5 Disabling Selected TFTP or NFS Requests for an X Server 4 5
470. ogFile usr lib X11 xdm xdm errors nager forwardingMode false nager resources usr lib X11 xdm Xresources nager startup usr lib X11 xdm Xstartup nager reset usr lib X11 xdm Xreset nager session usr lib X11 xdm Xsession nager pingInterval 60 nager pingTimeout 720 nager keyFile ust lib X11 xdm xdm keys Login and X Session Management 8 13 Configuring XDM Hosts Each resource in the xdm config file has one form for setting the resource for all terminals and another for setting the resource for an individual terminal For example the authorize resource enables or disables user based access control The two lines below disable user based access control for all terminals and enable access control for the terminal ncdu15 DisplayManager authorize false DisplayManager ncdu1l5_0O authorize true Note Instead of the colon normally used in specifying the terminal s display name an underscore _ is used in the xdm config file This is because of the colon s special meaning in resource specifications Configuring the Polling Interval The pingInterval resource controls how often XDM polls terminals to see if they are still running The units are minutes DisplayManager pingInterval 60 DisplayManager pingTimeout 720 Configuring the Version of xrdb to Use For OpenWindows add the following line to the xdm config file so XDM can find the correct version of xrdb the utility used to load client resour
471. ommonly tnamed is configured on the name server host You can use a command similar to the following to find the entry starting the daemon grep tnamed etc inetd conf name dgram udp wait root user etc in tnamed in tnamed J IEN 116 uses the etc hosts file as its database If the terminal is listed no further database configuration is necessary Making Sure the Terminal Uses the Name Service You should always place name service parameters at the beginning of a remote configuration file before any parameters that use hostnames In addition insert an apply command after the name service parameters to make Configuring Network Services 5 7 Using a Name Service sure the name service is in effect for subsequent parameters that use hostnames Selecting the Name Service Protocol Set the tcpip name server protocol parameter to the name service protocol you are using Setup Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service gt Name Server Protocol This parameter is saved in NVRAM and takes effect immediately if set interactively Table 5 5 tcpip name server protocol Parameter Possible Values Result default ien 116 If the terminal s NVRAM is set to the factory defaults and the BOOTP DHCP reply contains DNS name servers the default value is dns ien 116 The terminal uses the IEN 116 name service method dns The terminal uses DNS both The terminal uses both IEN 116 and DNS Sp
472. on TERM Messages TERM messages pertain to the NCD Terminal Emulator ncdterm If you are looking for a message that refers to the TERM module but that does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADCMD unknown command line argument command_option Severity Warning Explanation The TERM module does not recognize the specified command line option User Action Refer to the ncdterm man page for a complete list of acceptable command line options for the NCD Terminal Emulator BADGC Can t create a graphics context Severity Fatal Explanation The TERM module has insufficient memory to perform the requested operation User Action Verify that the terminal has enough memory to perform the operation Close any unused local clients to free memory for the desired function BADTABLE Bad table at index opcode opcode_name Severity Warning Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 109 TERM Messages COLORCE EA Error allocating necessary color cell Severity Error Explanation The NCD Terminal Emulator color table is full User Action Free colors so that the NCD Terminal Emulator can create a color as requested CONNERR Can t connect to host host CONREAD CONWRITE Severity Error E
473. on None E no response from mnn nnn nnn nnn using route to nnn nnn nnn nnn thru gateway nnn nnn nnn nnn deleting route RESTORE TIMEDOUT r Severity Information Explanation The X server has not received a response from the specified destination using the specified gateway and is deleting the route from its IP routing table The three IP addresses specified are the destination host the destination network and the gateway User Action None restoring default route thru gateway nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The X server has reestablished a stable network connection with the specified default gateway User Action None route to nnn nnn nnn nnn through gateway nnn nnn nnn nnn timed out deleting route Severity Information Explanation The route to the specified destination has timed out and the X server is removing the route from its IP routing table User Action None 18 56 X Server Messages JAVA Messages JAVA Messages JAVA messages pertain to use of Java If you are looking for a message that refers to the JAVA module but is not listed here see Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ABORT aborting java virtual machine Severity Fatal Explanation The Java module has experienced a fatal internal error User Action Please contact NCD Technical Support NOMEM unable to allocate enough memory Severity Fatal Explanation There is not en
474. on parameters that can be saved in NVRAM in both the shared and the X server only areas of NVRAM For more information about remote configuration parameters see the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference Table 11 10 Remote Configuration Parameters Saved in NVRAM Group Parameter Name boot boot automatically boot tcpip product name and memory boot custom file size file boot default server when prom booting _ boot tcpip product name and memory boot desired source size with path file boot monitor inverse video boot tcpip product name file boot mop boot tcpip product name with path file boot mop with file name boot tcpip second server boot nfs directory boot tcpip third server boot persistent loading boot tcpip unit address file boot second source boot tcpip unit address with path file boot send broadcast icmp for subnet boot test ram mask boot tftp directory boot tcpip broadcast boot request boot third source boot tcpip desired server config config add domain to unit name as config read write password filename config unit ethernet address file config console display password config unit ip address file config custom file config unit name file config generic file config unit ncdnet address file config load initial file config unix directory config persistent loading config use decimal ip address notation config pref read only password as filename config pref read write password config vms directory config
475. one COP YNOMI EMORY Line m no memory to copy string string Severity Error Explanation The terminal ran out of memory for temporary string storage User Action Check the amount of available memory If possible close some local clients to free more memory You may need to add memory to the terminal 18 58 X Server Messages KBM Messages i EXP EBUGDISABLI ECTEQUAL E Debug operation disabled EADKEYNOMEMORY Line n no memory for deadkey list list Severity Error Explanation The terminal ran out of memory for the deadkey list User Action Check the amount of available memory If possible close some local clients to free more memory You may need to add memory to the terminal Severity Warning Explanation Reports that the ability to invoke the Boot Monitor from the keyboard while the X server is running has been disabled User Action Verify that Boot Monitor access key combination was disabled intentionally ENDOFFILE Line n unexpected end of file Severity Error Explanation At line n an end of file was reached before parsing was complete User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statements in line n Line n expecting instead of arg Severity Error Explanation At line n an equals sign is needed instead of arg User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition st
476. onitor Setup menus se command and the NVRAM utility nv command Starting the Boot Monitor Utility To start the Boot Monitor utility use one of the following methods m After the terminal begins to boot press the Escape key the F11 key on VT220 style or N 108 keyboards when one of the following messages appears TFTP load lt ESC gt to abort NFS load lt ESC gt to abort The terminal displays the Boot Monitor prompt gt T Abort a running X server by typing a key combination The terminal displays the Boot Monitor prompt Table 11 1 lists the access key combinations for each keyboard type Table 11 1 Boot Monitor Access Key Combinations Keyboard Type Key Combination 101 key Ctrl Left Alt Setup 102 key Windows 95 compatible US Caps Lock Left Alt Setup English and IBM PS2 VT220 compatible Ctrl Compose F3 108 key Ctrl Left Alt F3 97 key Left Alt Caps Lock Setup 107 key Sun Type 4 compatible Stop A L1 A 122 key 3270 compatible Lexmark Alt Rule Home 123 key Sun Type 5 compatible Stop A L1 A Kana Left Alt Caps Setup 11 6 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using Boot Monitor Commands 1 Disable automatic booting so the terminal displays the Boot Monitor prompt instead of automatically booting the next time it is reset Set the value of the boot automatically parameter to false Setup Change Setup Parameters Booting Boot automatically at power up I
477. onitor and NVRAM 11 23 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals NVRAM Contents Table 11 7 lists the locations descriptions and permitted values for parameters stored in the shared portion of version 4 of the NVRAM layout which is the current version The corresponding remote configuration parameters if any are also listed NVRAM is divided into shared and server only portions The shared portion of NVRAM includes data used internally by the Boot Monitor and parameters set by both the Boot Monitor and the X server that is X server defaults or the changes you make using the X server configuration methods described in Chapter 6 Terminal Configuration Methods The server only portion is used by X server configuration methods to write parameters that can be saved in NVRAM You should not attempt to change data set automatically by the Boot Monitor You can change other parameters see the following cautionary note If a remote configuration parameter is listed in the description column you can set the parameter using the NVRAM utility or X server configuration utilities A subset of the booting parameters can also be set using the Boot Monitor Setup menus described in Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals on page 11 12 Do not change the contents of NVRAM using the NVRAM utility unless you know how your changes will affect the terminal Incorrect NVRAM settings can seriously impair the terminal s ope
478. onitor is updated When it boots the terminal attempts to update its boot PROM with the new image The update process begins as soon as the terminal receives and verifies the entire update file If the X server detects that the Boot Monitor in the terminal is an earlier version it downloads the new version If the terminal s Boot Monitor is the same or a later version no action is taken The update process takes about 15 seconds Caution Do not turn off power to the terminal while the Boot Monitor is being updated If the update process is interrupted before the new Boot Monitor is written to PROM the Boot Monitor will not have the settings necessary to operate the terminal In that case you would have to return the base to the factory for rework For this reason NCD recommends that you promptly reboot terminals as soon as you have configured them for Boot Monitor update and that you not configure terminals for Boot Monitor update when power outages are likely to occur Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 11 Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals Using the Boot Monitor Setup menus you can change a subset of terminal configuration parameters Using Boot Monitor Setup you can set the following LY Network addresses required for booting and network communication Files and directories needed for booting The order of booting attempts Monitor resolution and dpi
479. onnection to a specific host I Indirect query the terminal requests connection to a specific host this host may forward the request to another host answer the request or offer a list of hosts Configuring terminal queries is described in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems 8 4 Login and X Session Management Configuring XDM Hosts XDM and the DISPLAY Variable The DISPLAY environment variable identifies the terminal on which clients display their windows and must be available to all clients when they start This variable is set automatically by XDM for clients started on the login host You must however specify the DISPLAY variable for clients started on other hosts The NCD Login Chooser The Login Chooser is an NCD local client login Using the login client you can configure the terminal to offer a choice of login hosts to the user After the user selects a host the host displays a login banner which requests the user s account name and password You can also configure the terminal so the host displays a login banner immediately and does not offer a choice of hosts The NCD Display Manager The NCD Display Manager ncddm works with XDM to provide environment variables to local clients that require this information The environment variables set are the username the user s home directory and the UID and GID The Display Manager is installed by ncdinstall the terminal must be configur
480. ons received by the requests terminal Directory Create Requests Number of NFS create directory operations received by the terminal nfs received directory create requests Directory Remove Requests Number of NFS remove directory operations received by the terminal nfs received directory remove requests Directory Contents Requests Number of NFS read directory operations received by the terminal nfs received directory contents requests Get File System Stats Requests Number of NFS stats file system operations received by the terminal nfs received get file system stats requests Parallel Daemon Statistics The parameters in this hide box report about parallel port software functions This hide box contains the Parallel Daemons Statistics table which corresponds to the parallel daemons statistics table parameter Table Entry Description Port Number The identifying number of the parallel port Connections Accepted The number of connections to the Parallel daemon Connections with Access Control Errors The number of connections closed by the Parallel daemon because the remote address was not in the Parallel daemon s access control list Connections with I O Errors The number of connections closed by the Parallel daemon because of a local I O error including the user aborting the connection through a local mechanism Connections with No
481. ont The substitute font used if the requested font cannot be found should be one of the built in fonts Default 8x13 Small Not applicable 10 5 point Large Not applicable 14 point Jumbo Not applicable 18 point The Cursors Menu The Cursors menu allows you to change the terminal emulator s cursor by selecting one of the descriptions in the menu You can also press Shift MB3 mouse button 3 to shift through the nine different types of cursors available The Keys Menu The Keys menu Keys gt Keymap Editor provides access to the Keymap Editor see Configuring Key Translations on page 12 4 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 11 Configuring the Window Disconnect Delay Selecting in the Window You can select arbitrary rectangular sections of an NCD Terminal Emulator window to cut and paste LY Shift MB1 mouse button 1 starts the rectangular selection The cursor changes to a plus sign MB3 extends the selection The cursor again changes to a plus sign in the corner of the selection nearest the cursor allowing you to extend the selection 1 MB2 pastes the selection The rectangularCutLineTerminator resource allows you to specify the terminator added to the end of each line of the rectangular selection The default terminator is n which inserts a carriage return followed by a linefeed Configuring the Window Disconnect Delay The disconnectDelay resource allows you to specify
482. or NCD Technical Support IBUFFER internal buffer error reason_code IMBUF mbuf INACTIVITY Severity Error Explanation The software detected an internal buffer error Usually the LAN adapter is restarted in an attempt to recover from this error User Action If this problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support error reason_code Severity Error Explanation The software detected a communication buffer error Usually the LAN adapter is restarted in an attempt to recover from this error User Action If this problem persists please contact NCD Technical Support wireless inactivity time out Severity Information Explanation The LAN adapter has issued an inactivity time out User Action None the terminal software ignores this message INITFAIL initialization failure reason_code Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal failed to initialize the LAN adapter card User Action Try the following remedies in the order given 1 Make sure the LAN adapter card is fully inserted in the slot and the antenna is properly connected 2 Make sure the terminal is properly configured for wireless use X Server Messages 18 129 WIRELESS Messages INSTACK INT INVALID ISTATUS 3 Make sure the Access Point is properly configured 4 Test the wireless system to make sure the terminal is within the range of an Access Point If you cannot find the source of the problem please call
483. or Valuator The touch screen support is probably not operating User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 16 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages CONFIGD Messages BADADDROUTE BADCR EAT BADDEI ETE error deleting row parameter row field string CONFIGD messages pertain to the Configuration daemon If you are looking for a message that refers to the CONFIGD module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 can t add route message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot add the requested route perhaps due to low memory User Action Verify the terminal has enough memory to perform the operation If there is sufficient memory and the message appears repeatedly please contact NCD Technical Support E error creating row parameter row field string Severity Error Explanation The Configuration daemon cannot add the requested table entry to the specified parameter at the designated row This situation usually occurs when the row number in the entry is incorrect User Action Verify that the correct row is specified when adding information to a parameter table To add a row to the end of a table use the index number 1 Severity Error Explanation The Configuration daemon cannot delete the requested table entry from the specified parameter This usually occurs when the row nu
484. ore than one serial port the ports are identified in NCDware displays and configuration parameters as follows I The serial port on an ESP board is serial port 2 LY Ifa Y cable is attached to an ESP board s serial port the A connector is serial port 2 and the B connector is serial port 3 Specifying Physical Serial Port Attributes The serial interfaces table controls physical aspects of serial line communication Setup Change Setup Parameters Serial gt Serial Interfaces Table The table is saved in NVRAM and changes to the table take effect as soon as they are applied 15 2 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports Configuring Port Operating Characteristics Table 15 1 serial interfaces table Parameter Table Entries Possible Values Results port number Range 1 3 The identifying number of the serial port read only mode Controls the function of the auxiliary serial port and takes effect at boot time The current mode field specifies the immediate use of the port default terminal terminal The X server uses the serial port for a serial VT320 terminal connection usually for connection to a modem to a host system as a system console or to a terminal multiplexer printer The X server uses the serial port for an attached printer This option is the same as serial daemon serial daemon The X server uses the serial port for an attached printer This option is the same as
485. orrectly For example Configuring Display PostScript 13 3 Using DPS Support Files DSPVM local VM_3_2_ snf master VM_3_2_ snf d ColorRendering This section identifies the file containing color rendering information The identified file aids the DPS extension in rendering colors in a device independent manner For example ColorRendering DefaultCIE CIE dict19c dat ColorCIE CIE dict19c dat T ContextInit This section identifies the context initialization file used when a context is created For example ContextInit InitProc InitProc dat 0 FontAFM This section identifies the locations of the Adobe Font Metric AFM files Some applications that use the PostScript language need these files for proper operation The section lists each font name and font location For example FontAFM Avant Garde BoldOb1 fonts AFM AGWO afm Avant Garde Book fonts AFM AGW afm AvantGarde Demi fonts AFM AGD afm AvantGarde DemiOblique fonts AFM AGDO afm 0 FontFamily This section identifies the supported font families and additional typefaces For example FontFamily Courier Bold Oblique Courier BoldOblique Bold CourierBold Medium Courier Oblique Courier Obliqu I FontOutline This section identifies the locations of the available outline font files It lists each outline font name and the font location For example FontOutline Avant Garde Book fonts AGW pfa AvantGarde BookOblique fonts AGWO
486. ost printing software is used This value does not work unless hostside printing software has been enabled This is the recommended setting when a floppy drive is attached to the parallel port For more information about hostside printing software contact NCD Technical Support tcp port default 5964 integer TCP IP port number used by the hosts connecting to the Parallel daemon Range 1 65535 15 8 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports Configuring a Terminal for Use as a System Console Table 15 3 parallel daemons table Parameter Table Entries Possible Values Results ncdnet object name default paralleld string The NCDnet object used by hosts connecting to the Parallel daemon enable lat service default false true The terminal enables a LAT service for the Parallel daemon This LAT service is used to support VMS print service for the terminal false The terminal does not enable a LAT service for its Parallel daemon to the LAT network lat service name default nil string The name of the Parallel daemon LAT service lat service rating default 50 integer The X server uses the specified LAT service rating when advertising LAT service for the terminal s Parallel daemon The default parallel daemons table is parallel daemons table 1 false 5964 paralleld false nil 50 Configuring a Terminal for Use as a System Console By connecting a serial port of an N
487. ot attempt is disabled automatically You can change the order of booting attempts through the Boot Monitor Setup menus in a remote configuration file or in Change Setup Parameters The changes must be stored in NVRAM To specify the first method to try set the value of the boot desired source parameter to the desired method see Table 4 8 Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting gt Primary Boot Source or Setup gt Change Quick Setup Booting Boot From This parameter is saved in NVRAM 4 8 Booting X Server Loading Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Table 4 8 boot desired source Parameter Possible Result Values default The terminal attempts to boot via TFTP first tftp The terminal attempts to boot via TFTP first tcpip is included for backward tcpip compatibility and also results in first attempting TFTP booting nfs The terminal attempts to boot via NFS first ncdnet The terminal attempts to boot via MOP over an NCDnet DECnet first local The terminal attempts to boot first from a PCMCIA card prom is included for prom backward compatibility and results in attempting local booting first To specify the second and third boot methods to use set the boot second source Setup Change Setup Parameters Booting Secondary Boot Source and boot third source parameters Setup Change Setup Parameters Booting gt Tertiary Boot Source Thes
488. ot create a dialog box to display an X server message The message appears but it is not contained in a dialog box This situation usually occurs when the terminal is low on memory User Action Check the terminal s memory level Close any inactive local clients to free local memory 18 10 X Server Messages Messages Common to All Modules NOACCESS access denied to font_server font_server_name Severity Error Explanation The terminal cannot access font_server_name User Action Make sure that the named font server is available NODECOMP error installing decompression for file file message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot decompress the specified file for the reason given This message usually indicates the terminal is low on memory User Action Check the available memory to make sure that it is sufficient to perform the desired decompression Close any local clients that are not being used to free memory NOHOSTADDR unable to find address for host name host NOLIC ENS Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot locate the network address for the specified host User Action Make sure the hostname is correct If it is verify that the terminal s configuration database correctly identifies the system that is to provide name service for the terminal E this unit not licensed for feature Severity Error Explanation The terminal does not have a license fo
489. ote session and start a new one New network connection refused message Severity Error Explanation This message usually appears when the X server is not configured correctly for XRemote communications User Action Verify that the X server is configured correctly for XRemote communications Specifically verify that the terminal is configured for XRemote communications via TCP message Severity Warning Explanation The X server has encountered difficulties in the transport layer of XRemote software as specified in the message User Action Use the information contained in the message to resolve the problem If you require further assistance please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 137 XRPRINTD Messages XRPRINTD Messages XRPRINTD messages pertain to the XRemote print daemon If you are looking for a message that refers to the XRPRINTD module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 CLOSE closed session on port Severity Information Explanation The print daemon closed the connection to the serial parallel daemon on the specified port User Action None NOCONNECT unable to connect to print daemon on port Severity Error Explanation The XRemote print daemon is unable to connect to the serial parallel daemon on the specified port User Action Make sure that the serial port mode Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Serial Serial Interfa
490. ough memory for Java to operate User Action Add memory to the terminal or exit from other applications NOZIPFILEUSE unable to use zip file filename Severity Warning Explanation The Java module cannot open the compressed class files User Action Use TFTP instead of NFS for accessing class files ZIPERR error reading zip file filename message Severity Error Explanation There is an error in the compressed file the file is probably corrupted User Action Reinstall the zip file from the NCDware distribution CD ROM X Server Messages 18 57 KBM Messages KBM Messages KBM messages pertain to usage of downloadable keyboard description files For more information about using downloadable keyboard descriptions see Chapter 17 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions If you are looking for a message that refers to the KBM module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ARGUMENT Line n argument found where end of line is expected arg Severity Error Explanation At line n the X server encountered an extra command line argument arg User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition statement in line n Explanation Reports that the file which is an include file referred to in the primary keyboard description file was read completely CLOSEINCLUDE Closing include file file Severity Information User Action N
491. ount of elapsed time from the start of dead session testing set in the login xdm keepalives begin time parameter before the terminal declares the session dead Setup Change Setup Parameters Login XDM section Wait for Keepalive Responses for Table 8 6 login xdm keepalives wait time Possible Values Result default 30 integer The amount of time in seconds from the start of dead session testing until a session is declared dead Range 0 4294967295 Using XDM X11R3 Version If any of your XDM manager hosts are running X11R3 you can configure them as described in Configuring XDM Hosts on page 8 5 with the following additional steps 1 Place an entry for each terminal in the Xservers file Entries in this file have the following syntax hostname 0 foreign comment where hostname is the IP address or hostname of the terminal and comment is any word For example ncdul10 0 foreign magic cookie Make sure login is not included in the exec startup commands table Setup Change Setup Parameters Commands and Startup Startup Commands Login and X Session Management 8 19 Using XDM X11R3 Version 8 20 Login and X Session Management 9 Using Configuration Menus This chapter describes the controls and fields in the Console s configuration menus The following topics are covered in this chapter d Using Change Quick Setup on page 9 1 d Using Change Setup
492. p directory Appends directory to the font path xset fp directory Deletes directory from the font path Setting the Default Font If a client does not request any fonts the X server uses its default font If you do not explicitly set the default font the X server uses the 10x20 built in font for HMX series and Explora series terminals To change the default font specify the font name in the xserver default font parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Fonts gt Default Font Table 7 6 xserver default font Parameter Possible Values Result default 10x20 font name Name of the default font Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 13 Changing the Size of the Font Cache Changing the Size of the Font Cache Instead of downloading a font each time it is requested by a client the X server attempts to temporarily store the font in the portion of memory called the font cache Font caching improves the performance of clients that use large numbers of fonts After a font is closed by the last client using it the font is added to the font cache instead of being freed When the font is requested again it is taken from the cache instead of being read from a host The font cache is flushed when the X server is reset and when the font path is changed When the font cache is full the oldest resident font is replaced with the latest font being inserted into the cache If the server runs low on
493. p packets received with unknown protocols 10 6 ip packet transmission requests 10 7 ip packet transmission requests discarded 10 7 ip packet transmission requests without routes 10 7 ip respond to broadcast icmp 9 26 IPROUTE messages 18 55 ip routing table 5 27 ip routing table 5 27 9 26 ip subnet mask 9 5 9 25 10 8 ip use address discovery 9 26 ip use proxy arp 5 30 9 26 ip use router discovery 5 30 9 26 ip use router solicit 5 30 9 26 J Java configuration parameters for 9 27 diagnostic messages 18 36 18 57 Java applets Change Setup Parameters 9 16 Java Directory Change Setup Parameters 9 27 Index JAVA messages 18 57 java appletviewer command 9 27 java cache class file 9 27 java directory 9 27 Jscript Javascript routines Change Setup Parameters 9 16 K KBM messages 18 58 Keepalive Idle Time Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Keepalive Interval Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Keepalive Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 27 9 31 Keyboard Description File Change Setup Parameters 9 24 Keyboard Type Change Setup Parameters 9 24 keyboards compose sequences for Terminal Emulator 12 44 to 12 50 configuration parameters for 9 24 9 47 dead key processing 17 60 to 17 61 downloadable keyboard description files creating 17 54 to 17 61 diagnostic messages 18 58 escape sequences for Terminal Emulator 12 34 to 12 43 keyboard controller version displaying 16 8 keysym file 5 15 9 40 keysyms file
494. p port for raw TCP connections to the File Manager daemon NCDnet Object Name NCDnet object on which the file manager ncdnet object terminal listens for NCDnet name connections to the File Manager daemon Using Configuration Menus 9 21 Using Change Setup Parameters File Service Parameters The parameters in this hide box affect how the terminal accesses files located in the local file system and on network hosts File Service Field Description Corresponding Parameter Initial File Server 1 Primary file server at boot time for loading the initial configuration file file initial server 1 Initial Protocol 1 Protocol used for file access on the primary file server file initial protocol 1 Initial File Server 2 Secondary file server at boot time for loading the initial configuration file file initial server 2 Initial Protocol 2 Protocol used for file access on the secondary file server file initial protocol 2 Name Type for Initial TFTP Servers Type of filenames sent via TFTP from the initial file servers file name type for initial tftp servers File Service Table Configuration parameters for file access on network hosts file service table Timeout seconds failed due to a network timeout error is ignored Extended Diagnostics The terminal generates more file extended diagnostics detailed file service diagnostic messages Try All
495. pathnames of the X server files This ensures that the default loading sequence will work properly 4 14 Booting X Server Loading Linking X Server Files By default the ncdinstall program installs X servers in a subdirectory named for the release such as tftpboot Xncd 5 0 120 Then ncdinstall creates links for the X servers from this subdirectory to the default location which is tftpboot The general format of a link command is In filename server_pathname where filename is one of the filenames from the default download sequence and server_pathname is the actual pathname of the X server file If you are assigning an X server to an individual terminal use the request for the hexadecimal representation of the terminal s IP address which is unique to each terminal Link this filename to the pathname of the X server you want this terminal to boot For example assuming the servers are in the Xncd 5 0 120 subdirectory of tftpboot cd tftpboot In s Xned 5 0 120 Xncdhmx C02B9942 The hexadecimal equivalent of the IP address is displayed during boot when the X server attempts to download a configuration file with this name You also can find the hexadecimal equivalent by converting each octet in the IP address to a hexadecimal number For example 192 43 153 66 S S S CO 2B 42 You can use the bc 1 utility to convert from decimal notation to hexadecimal For example be obase 16 192 43 153 66 CO 2B
496. pe the remaining pairs At the prompt 009 xx you have typed the entire Ethernet address and you can type q to stop entering numbers Type s to save and y after the question Are you sure Type q to end the NVRAM utility session and resume using the Boot Monitor utility You can reboot the terminal by typing the rs reset command 11 22 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Changing Individual Bits in a Byte In the following example the first bit in byte 0x35 is changed This bit enables the display of the NCD logo at boot time and is set to 1 by default gt nv NVRAM Utility C add change location add D display contents Q return to monitor L load defaults R reload NVRAM values S save new values gt gt 1 gt gt c 35 035 8A OA 036 AO q gt gt s Are you sure y gt gt q gt rs 1 Start the NVRAM utility and type c 35 to start changing byte 0x35 2 Compute the new value of the byte in binary and then convert it to hexadecimal Assuming the other bits have their default values the new value of the byte is 00001010 or 0A in hexadecimal Enter the new value 3 At the next prompt type q to stop entering numbers Type s to save and y after the question Are you sure 5 Type qto end the NVRAM utility session and resume using the Boot Monitor utility 6 You can reboot the terminal by typing the rs reset command Boot M
497. pecified host should be granted access enter the host system s name in the appropriate access control list SYSERROR location error on module connection message Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 93 OPENGL Messages OPENGL Messages OPENGL messages pertain to use of applications using the OpenGL extension If you are looking for a message that refers to the OPENGL module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADALLOCBUFFER Out of memory while creating or resizing type buffer Severity Warning Explanation Memory was exhausted while creating or resizing a buffer of one of the type type User Action Reduce the size of the windows and or install more memory in the terminal BADALLOCCONTEXT Out of memory while creating graphics context Severity Error Explanation The terminal ran out of memory during OpenGL rendering context initialization User Action Perform one or more of the following actions LI Modify the application to reduce the number of GLX rendering contexts LI Reduce window sizes LY Reduce the complexity of data I Install more memory BADALLOCRENDER Out of memory while rendering or creating display list Severity Warning Explanation The terminal ran out of memory while render
498. ple setenv OPENWINHOME u ken answerbook Verifying AnswerBook environment Could not find the AnswerBook administration utility ab_admin in u ken bin o 5 If OPENWINHOME is not set the following messages are displayed o answerbook Verifying AnswerBook environment The OPENWINHOME environment variable is not set Are you running OpenWindows Check reset the value of OPENWINHOME then rerun AnswerBook o 5 No special fonts are needed for AnswerBook Configuring Display PostScript 13 13 Troubleshooting DPS Running ImageTool Problems with this application are caused by unavailable fonts colormap flash and incorrect setting of OPENWINHOME Font Problems If the required fonts are not in the terminal s font path or are not in the correct order in the font path the image appears briefly and the application shuts down Error messages similar to the following are displayed imagetool X error of failed request BadValue integer parameter out of range for operation Major opcode of failed request 94 X_CreateGlyphCursor Minor opcode of failed request 0 Resource id in failed request Oxc Serial number of failed request 1869 Current serial number in output stream 1873 You need the following fonts and font management files and the font directory must be second in the font path xserver default font path right after built ins OLCursor46 pcf fonts alias fonts d
499. please contact NCD Technical Support routine gc must be readonly or writable Severity Warning Explanation The specified routine has attempted to create an X internal structure with incorrect protection User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 125 UI Messages BADITEM routine invalid item number n Severity Warning Explanation The specified routine attempted to set an entry to an unacceptable value for example less than zero or greater than the acceptable maximum User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support BADTRANSLATION translation syntax error translation INITCONN Severity Error Explanation The UI module has encountered an error in the specified resource translation string User Action Make sure the terminal s resource translations use the correct names format and syntax unable to initialize connection to display Severity Fatal Explanation The UI module created but could not initialize the requested connection to the display User Action Verify that the terminal has sufficient memory If the memory level is adequate and you encounter this message frequently please contact NCD Technical Support NOCONN unable to connect to display display Severity Fatal Explanation The UI module cannot connect to the specified display User Action Verify that the requested
500. pose key sequence and character coding Chapter 13 Configuring Display PostScript describes DPS features requirements support files fonts configuration parameters and suggestions for troubleshooting Chapter 14 Configuring PEX describes PEX PHIGS extension to X support for 3D graphics applications and includes information about PEX fonts requirements configuration parameters input devices and suggestions for troubleshooting Chapter 15 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports describes the ports on NCD terminals setting port attributes and controlling host access to ports Chapter 16 Using SNMP for Terminal Management describes host requirements for using SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol About this Manual 1 3 Other NCD Manuals configuration parameters for SNMP reading and writing SNMP variables and using SNMP to remotely reset sessions and reboot terminals Chapter 17 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions describes NCD keyboards and how to use downloadable keyboard files to use unsupported keyboards Chapter 18 X Server Messages describes X server messages and message logging Other NCD Manuals This Reference Manual and the following manuals contain up to date information about this version of NCDware m m m m NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems procedures for managing NCD terminals NCDware Release Notes description of new features added sin
501. printer slip Configures the port for SLIP console The X server sends diagnostic messages to the serial port This option is for the use of NCD Technical Support only input device Configures the port to support one of the input devices selected in the xserver input extension device parameter xremote Configures the port for XRemote NCD recommends that you do not set the mode choice to xremote The X server automatically changes current mode to xremote when the user enters an xinitremote command ppp Configures the port for PPP Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports 15 3 Configuring Port Operating Characteristics Table 15 1 serial interfaces table Parameter Continued Table Entries current mode Possible Values Results Controls the immediate function of the auxiliary serial port The mode entry takes precedence at boot time default terminal terminal The X server uses the serial port for serial VT320 terminal connection usually for connection to a modem directly to a host system or to a terminal multiplexer printer The X server uses the serial port for an attached printer This option is the same as serial daemon serial daemon The X server uses the serial port for an attached printer This option is the same as printer slip Configures the port for SLIP console The X server sends diagnostic messages to
502. process Earlier versions display progressions of dots Self Tests and Commands for Testing The Boot Monitor tests terminal memory and the terminal s network interface The specific tests available for and run by default on the terminal depend upon the terminal model 11 2 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Boot Monitor Functions You can disable these tests using the boot test ram parameter but this is not recommended The Boot Monitor ex command displays an Extended Tests menu which lists the tests available for each terminal See Table 11 2 for a list of all the Boot Monitor commands NCD Technical Support may ask you to run tests if the results are needed for terminal troubleshooting The Boot Monitor s output during terminal booting includes the results of the tests Keyboard Controller and Supported Keyboards The keyboard controller is part of the ASIC application specific integrated circuit in the terminal base and serves as the interface between the terminal and the keyboard hardware The Boot Monitor supports the following keyboard types N 101 N 102 key keyboard group including Windows 95 compatible and foreign language versions LY VT 220 keyboard group including foreign language versions E N 108LK keyboard group including Nokia US French and German versions N 97 keyboard N 107 Sun Type 4 compatible N 123 Sun Type 5 compatible N 97 Kana and Hitachi Kana Nokia 122 3270 compatible OCO
503. ption Corresponding Parameter Receive Buffer Size Bytes of received data that a TCP tcp receive buffer size bytes connection can buffer in the terminal Send Buffer Size bytes Bytes of data awaiting transmission tcp send buffer size that the TCP connection can buffer in the terminal Connect Timeout Length of time that must elapse tcp connect timeout seconds before a TCP connection attempt is declared a failure for lack of response Maximum Number of retransmissions beforea tcp max retransmissions Retransmissions failure is declared Keepalive Idle Time Length of time that must elapse on tcp keepalive idle time seconds an established connection with no activity before a keepalive packet is generated Keepalive Interval Length of time that must elapse tcp keepalive interval seconds between successive transmissions of keepalive packets Maximum Keepalive Duration of keepalive tcp max keepalive idle time Idle Time seconds transmissions without response before a failure is declared Default Linger Time Length of time during which TCP tcp default linger time seconds continues to transmit outstanding data on the connections transmit queue after local software closes the connection 9 36 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters TCP IP Name Service Parameters The parameters in the TCP IP Name Service hide box affect the DNS and IEN 116 name services TCP
504. question 75 L 76 semicolon colon 17 32 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible N 108 Keysyms for VMS Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 77 P 78 minus underscore 79 F10 80 F14 81 Help 82 quoteright quotedbl 83 backslash bar 84 bracketleft braceleft 85 equal plus 86 87 KP_F4 88 89 Shift_R 90 Return 91 bracketright braceright 92 93 94 95 KP_F3 96 Down 97 Left 98 F3 99 Up Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 33 VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible N 108 Keysyms for VMS Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 100 Remove 101 Select 102 Delete 103 Insert 104 105 KP_1 106 Right 107 KP_4 108 KP_7 109 Next 110 Find 111 Prior 112 KP_0 113 KP_Decimal 114 KP_2 115 KP_5 116 KP_6 117 KP_8 118 KP_F2 119 Multi_keyt 120 Multi_keyt 121 KP_Enter 122 KP_3 17 34 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions VT220 Compatible and N 108 Keyboard Details Table 17 5 VT220 Compatible N 108 Keysyms for VMS Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 123 124 KP_Separator 125 KP_9 126 127 Menu 128
505. r Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus Table 12 2 File Menu Continued Menu Item Action Print on Serial Line 1 Specifies the serial port to be used for printing Serial line 1 is the Auxiliary serial port If an ESP board is installed serial line 2 is the serial port on the ESP board If a Y connector is in use Print on Serial Line 3 on an ESP board the A connector is serial port 2 and the B connector is serial port 3 Print on Serial Line 2 For terminals with more than one serial port you can specify the default port by setting the defaultHost resource to the port number The port can be specified in either of the following forms n serial n or serial n For example you can specify serial port 3 as 3 serial 3 or serial 3 Print on Remote Unit Sends print output to a printer attached to another NCD terminal The NCD_name port terminal and port are specified using the printerHost resource Remote printing is supported over TCP IP Print on Parallel Line 1 Sends print output to parallel port 1 Print on Parallel Line 2_ Sends print output to parallel port 2 on terminals with more than one parallel port Print Screen Prints the contents of the display window Print Log Buffer Prints the contents of the log buffer the input and output you can see by scrolling Printing starts at the top visible line and extends through the end of the buffer Print Selection
506. r The font family such as Courier Helvetica or Times Weight medium Weight usually bold or medium Slant Slant i for italic o or oblique r for roman ri for reverse italic and ot for other Set width normal Width of the characters condensed semi condensed narrow normal or double wide Style not Additional information to identify a font i for informal r for roman used serif for serif and sans for sans serif This field is rarely used two hyphens are used as a place holder Pixel size 8 Height of the characters in pixels a zero in this field means the font is a scalable font Point size 80 Height of the font in tenths of a point decipoints a zero in this field means the font is scalable Horizontal 100 Horizontal resolution in dpi dots per inch a zero in this field dpi indicates a scalable font Vertical dpi 100 Vertical resolution in dpi dots per inch a zero in this field indicates a scalable font Spacing m Convention for placing characters next to each other such as m for monospaced p for proportional and c for character cell monospaced Average 50 Average width in tenths of a pixel a zero in this field indicates a width scalable font Charset iso8859 The organization or standard registering the character set usually registry ISO 8859 Charset 1 The actual character set iso8859 1 is ISO Latin 1 an ASCII character encoding set that includes special European characters Bitm
507. r Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support OPENMODFAIL unable to open module module Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot find module User Action Make sure that the module is in the modules directory X Server Messages 18 43 FILED Messages PROCLIM too many copies already running client Severity Error Explanation The user has requested a local client when the maximum number of the client s processes already exist User Action Use an existing client process or close one of the existing client processes and open a new one START running command command Severity Information Explanation The EXECD module has started the specified command as requested User Action None UNKNOWNERR unknown error for client Severity Error Explanation The specified local client has failed with an unknown error code User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support FILED Messages FILED messages pertain to the local file system and Local File Manager If you are looking for a message that refers to the FILED module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADARG invalid arguments to command Severity Error Explanation The X server does not recognize arguments of the command User Action Retype the command with correc
508. r and is discarded For example OSC 91 orange brown G or ESC 91 orange brown G sets color pairl to foreground orange background brown The first color color cell 0 zero is special it is the default used for normal text In addition the background of the window is reset to the background specified with this color In the ISO 6429 model color cell 0 is always used for text specified as black text on a white background Note that this may have been changed using the Hewlett Packard method which results in black text on a white background being stored in color pair0 You can use the two models together but this is somewhat tricky in terms of cell reuse The zero cell is never reused but others are available to be reused if a free cell is needed and there are no matching colors for an existing cell on the screen The code scans the screen to determine if a color cell is in use when it needs to allocate a new color selection As a rule you should limit color to eight combinations at any given time or twice that using inverse text If you attempt to use more colors the result is plain color text Set up new color cells as early as possible and not within loops Reverse video inverts all the colors that are set programmatically The user can select reverse video from the Options menu or use the reverse Video resource Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 33 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences Using Keyboar
509. r Serial Terminal Emulation To use a Serial port for a serial VT320 connection you can open a serial terminal emulation session through the NCD Terminal Emulator local client The client s term ctype serial command allows you to log onto a host and run non X applications For X over a serial line use XRemote On terminals with more than one serial port you can configure more than one port for serial terminal emulation When more than one port is used for serial terminal emulation the serial terminal emulator displays a Chooser for selecting the desired serial connection Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 3 Configuring Key Translations Configuring an NCD terminal as an ASCII terminal involves making the physical connection and setting the parameters Follow these steps 1 Attach the terminal to a host via a modem or direct serial connection 2 Make sure the mode parameter for the port that you wish to use is set to terminal in the serial interfaces table 3 Set the other parameters in the serial interfaces table to match the host computer or modem on the other end of the serial line Use the suggested values shown here or set these attributes to match the computer or modem on the other end of the line baud rate 38400 make this as high as possible data bits 8 stop bits 1 parity None handshake DTR DSR RTS CTS or XON XOFF Configuring Key Translations The Keymap Editor local client displays a layo
510. r arc cache max size 9 40 xserver black pixel 9 41 xserver default colormap 9 41 xserver default font 7 13 9 23 xserver default font path 9 4 9 23 xserver default visual 9 41 xserver disabled extensions 9 40 xserver enable local dead key processing 9 25 xserver enable local lightpen blue flood 9 25 xserver font alias file name 9 23 xserver font cache max size 7 14 9 23 xserver font directory file name 9 23 xserver font path alias table 9 24 xserver fontserver open timeout 7 25 9 24 xserver fontserver read timeout 7 26 9 24 xserver fontserver reopen timeout 7 25 9 24 xserver fontserver retry attempts 7 26 9 24 xserver input extension device 9 25 15 3 15 4 xserver keyboard description file 9 24 xserver keyboard narrow keysym tables 9 24 xserver keyboard type 9 24 xserver keysym file 2 5 9 40 xserver mouse buttons 9 25 xserver retain font path 9 23 xserver retain x settings 9 40 xserver rgb file 2 5 9 40 Xservers file 8 7 8 19 xserver touchscreen calibration limits 9 25 xserver white pixel 9 41 xsession file 8 6 8 7 Xsession file 8 6 xset 1 displaying the font path 7 18 modifying current font path 7 13 Xstartup file 8 6 XT messages 18 141 Z zk command Boot Monitor 11 10 zs command Boot Monitor 11 10 Index 35 Index Index 36
511. r cannot open the module file for module User Action Make sure that the modules directory is configured correctly and accessible ERROR error Severity Error Explanation The error described in error for example CRC error was encountered by the loader User Action User action varies depending upon the specific error encountered Generally make sure that the modules directory has been configured correctly and is accessible INITFAIL could not register fr cache routine Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 104 X Server Messages RTLD Messages LOADED loaded version Severity Information Explanation The module described by the version information has been loaded into memory User Action None LOADING loading module from file Severity Information Explanation The module module is being unloaded from the file file User Action None NAMENULL cannot autoload name does not exist Severity Error Explanation An invalid module name was supplied User Action Make sure that the module name used is correct RETRY module load failed retrying from default location Severity Information Explanation The loader was unable to load the module and tries to load from the default installation directory User Action None UNLOAD unloading module UN
512. r connection xserver fontserver reopen timeout Input Devices Parameters The parameters in the Input Devices hide box affect the functioning of input devices such as keyboard and mouse Input Devices Field Description Corresponding Parameter Keyboard Type Type of keyboard in use xserver keyboard type Keyboard Description Filename of the downloadable xserver keyboard description File keyboard definition file for file unsupported keyboards Write Keyboard Writes a keyboard description file none Description File for the keyboard attached to the terminal Narrow Keysym Tables X11R3 two entry keysym tables are used instead of four entry keysym tables xserver keyboard narrow keysym tables 9 24 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Input Devices Field Description Corresponding Parameter Local Dead Key Support Enables local dead key processing on keyboards with this feature xserver enable local dead key processing Mouse Buttons Number of buttons on the mouse xserver mouse buttons Input Extension Device Input extension device attached to the serial port xserver input extension device Calibrate Touch Screen Lower left and upper right coordinates of the touch screen calibration limits xserver touchscreen calibration limits Light Pen Blue Flood 1 During calibration enhances the light pen s abi
513. r is using the specified hostname for the terminal User Action None INVPARAM invalid table parameter for operation at line n Severity Error Explanation The user selected an invalid or protected table parameter at line n User Action Verify the line number of the desired parameter IPADDR IP address for this unit nnn nnn nnn nnn Severity Information Explanation The X server is using the specified IP address for the terminal User Action None MOUNTFAILED failed to mount filesystem_name filesystem Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot mount the specified file system User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support NCDNETADDR NCDnet address for this unit aamnnn Severity Information Explanation The X server is using the specified DECnet address for the terminal User Action None X Server Messages 18 21 CONFIGD Messages NOACCI NOCLII ESS can t perform operation with current access level Severity Error Explanation A user with read only access attempted to perform an operation requiring write access For example the user tried to change a parameter s value or write information to NVRAM User Action Verify that the user has the appropriate level of access ENTDISABLE local client client can not be disabled NOCTRLSOCK NODFLTFILE NOF IL ESSE Severity Error Explanation The specified loca
514. r the buffer User Action None realloc failed Severity Error Explanation There was not enough contiguous memory to expand the print gather buffer to the required size User Action Free terminal memory by closing unused clients NOPRINTER printer device off line or out of paper Severity Fatal Explanation The status lines of the parallel port indicate that the printer is either turned off or out of paper User Action Make sure that power is applied to the printer and that the printer has paper REMNORESP remote printer not responding Severity Fatal Explanation Couldn t connect to the LPD port on the remote print server User Action Make sure the remote print server is configured to accept print jobs from the terminal For example LPD must be running on the remote print 18 102 X Server Messages RTLD Messages n ERIALDCMD server and the terminal must be listed in the etc hosts Ipd file Also make sure the hostname for the remote print server is correct in the browser printer table error writing to seriald couldn t check device status Severity Error Explanation Local print jobs are spooled via the Serial daemon to the parallel port Before any data is sent to the parallel port a command is sent to the daemon to check the status of the parallel port User Action If the job does not print try again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support U
515. r the specified feature such as DPS User Action Contact NCD to obtain a valid license for the specified feature and enter it in the terminal s configuration file NVRAM or license dat file X Server Messages 18 11 Messages Common to All Modules NOMEM function out of memory for data_structure Severity Error Explanation The X server does not have sufficient memory to perform the requested function User Action Close any unused local clients to free memory for the desired function NOOPEN unable to open file_type file Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot open the specified file User Action Make sure 1 The filename is correct I The file exists in the specified directory LI The file service table contains an entry for the specified directory LI The specified file has read access NOPROC unable to create new process for client Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot start the requested client This situation generally occurs when the X server is running low on memory or when there are too many clients running for the amount of available memory User Action Close any unused local clients to free memory for the desired function NOREAD unable to read file_type file Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot read the specified file User Action Make sure D The filename is correct I The file exists in the specified directory LI T
516. racter key then type the two characters in the third column Onany other type of keyboard press Left Alt and a space hold down Left Alt while pressing the space bar then type the two characters in the Keystrokes column Note that the notation sp in the Keystrokes column in Table 12 20 indicates that you must press the space bar Compose Sequence Table Table 12 20 on page 12 46 lists the characters you can compose and the keystrokes to use Note The compose sequences for the currency sign and the registered trademark symbol do not work Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 45 Using Compose Key Sequences Table 12 20 Compose Sequences Character Name Keystrokes quotation mark sp number sign apostrophe sp commercial at AA opening bracket backslash or lt closing bracket circumflex accent sp grave accent sp opening brace l vertical line closing brace tilde sp i inverted I cent sign C orCl pound sign L or L section sign SO or S or SO yen Y or Y a currency sign i XO or X0 copyright sign CO or C0 i female ordinal A_ open angle brackets G degree sign 0 12 46 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using Compose Key Sequences Table 12 20 Compose Sequences Continued
517. rameters for 3270 Host Chooser 9 42 for Login Chooser 9 29 for login through the Terminal Emulator 9 39 Default Linger Time Change Setup Parameters 9 36 Default Packet Time to Live Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Default Router Change Setup Parameters 9 31 Default Server when PROM Booting Change Setup Parameters 9 14 Default Visual Change Setup Parameters 9 41 Default VMS File Name Extension Change Setup Parameters 9 23 Delay LAT Display after Boot Change Setup Parameters 9 39 Delay When Blanking Screen Change User Preferences 9 46 DESKTOP messages 18 36 DHCP messages 18 37 see also BOOTP DHCP Index diag access control enabled 9 11 diag access control list 9 11 diag add timestamps 9 20 diag buffer size 9 20 18 6 diag log file 9 20 18 5 diag ncdnet object name 9 21 Diagnostic Access Control List Change Setup Parameters 9 11 Diagnostic daemon configuration parameters for 9 20 messages about 18 38 starting from Terminal Emulator 12 2 TELNET connection to 18 4 diagnostic messages see messages diag tcp port 9 20 diag telnet port 9 20 diag timestamp frequency 9 20 18 5 Disabled Commands Change Setup Parameters 9 18 Disabled Networks Change Setup Parameters 9 29 Disabled X Extensions Change Setup Parameters 9 40 display background configuration parameters for 9 52 DISPLAY environment variable set by XDM 8 5 Dither Flat Shaded Surface Change User Preferences 9 50 Dither Interpolated Surface
518. rameters that affect XDM and are not documented in the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems The System Administrator s Guide has instructions for configuring how XDM displays the login banner and Login Chooser Configuring the Login Chooser Redisplay The login window delay time parameter controls the amount of time to wait for a host to display a login banner after the user selects the host from the Login Chooser Setup Change Setup Parameters Login Window Delay Time After this time period elapses the Login Chooser reappears and the user can choose again Table 8 3 login window delay time Parameter Possible Values Results default 3 integer The amount of time in seconds to wait before redisplaying the Login Chooser after selecting a login host Range 0 4294967295 Configuring the Terminal s Action when XDM Terminates The login xdm action on disconnect parameter controls the terminal s behavior when XDM exits Setup Change Setup Parameters Login XDM section What to do when XDM disconnects The default action is to present choices to the user The program may exit for the following reasons 1 The user is trying to log out 1 XDM quits unexpectedly 1 The login host is no longer available Login and X Session Management 8 17 Configuring Terminals for XDM Table 8 4 login xdm action on disconnect Parameter Possible Values Result default prompt
519. rate Keyclick Volume Volume of the keyclick as a pref keyboard keyclick percent percentage of its maximum volume volume Led 1 The condition indicated by each pref keyboard leds Led 2 keyboard LED Led 3 Led 4 on some keyboards OpenGL Preferences The parameters in the OpenGL hide box control graphics processing by applications that use OpenGL This hide box appears on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only OpenGL Field Description Corresponding Parameter Allow Dithering Enables color dithering pref openg allow dither operations to improve color resolution when rendering to a visual with few color bit planes Allow Blending Enables color blending control pref openg allow depth and operations for hidden surface elimination Allow Depth Test Enables Z buffering control and pref openg allow depth operations Allow Alpha Test Enables alpha test control pref openg allow alpha Allow Scissor Test Enables scissor test control and pref openg allow scissor operation Allow Stencil Test Enables stencil test control and pref openg allow stencil stenciling operation 9 48 Using Configuration Menus Using Change User Preferences OpenGL Field Description Corresponding Parameter Allow Polygon Stipple Enables stippling operations pref opengl allow polygon stipple Allow Logical Operations Bitwise logical operations are performed on pixels pref op
520. ration Do not change settings in reserved areas or parameters set automatically by the Boot Monitor 11 24 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Location Description Size Values Default in Bold Header Information 0x0 Version number of the NVRAM layout 1byte set automatically by the Boot Monitor 0x1 NVRAM checksum calculated when you 1 byte set automatically by the use the NVRAM utility verified when the Boot Monitor terminal is powered on 0x2 Reserved 2 bytes Network Configuration 0x4 Factory set Ethernet address stored least 6 bytes 00 00 A7 00 00 00 significant to most significant byte The first three bytes are the series allocated to NCD the remaining bytes are terminal specific 0xA Terminal IP address 4bytes 0 0 0 0 ip address at next boot OxE Subnet mask 4bytes 255 255 255 000 ip subnet mask 0x12 Broadcast address 4bytes 255 255 255 255 ip broadcast address 0x16 Primary default gateway 4bytes 000 000 000 000 ip initial default gateway 1 Ox1A Secondary default gateway 4bytes 000 000 000 000 ip initial default gateway 2 Ox1E First boot host 4 bytes 000 000 000 000 boot tcpip desired server 0x22 Second boot host 4bytes 000 000 000 000 boot tcpip second server Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 25 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminal
521. rations The following aspects of configuration on the host are addressed in the font server configuration file Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 21 Font Server Issues Font Access The font server must be installed on each host from which fonts are to be accessed and the fonts must be in a format that the font server can read see Usable Font Formats with a Font Server on page 7 20 For the font server to access the fonts the font directories must be listed in the font server configuration file under the catalogue parameter The font server accesses the font directories in the order in which they are listed in this parameter Host Load Two font server configuration parameters control the load on each font server and specify how the font server responds to occurrences of imminent overloading The client limit parameter specifies how many clients can access the font server concurrently before it refuses access The clone self parameter specifies whether the font server can clone itself thereby spreading the load over more than one process when it reaches the limit specified in client limit The font server uses a cache to store recently requested fonts Use of a cache decreases the time needed to access and display fonts Fonts held in cache are available immediately for use they do not have to be read from a file or rescaled The size of the cache used depends on the memory available on the host and is specified in byte
522. rators In most cases the ncdinstall program is the most efficient way to prepare a terminal for booting and to make sure that necessary network services and files are available Besides placing NCDware on the boot host ncdinstall prepares terminals for booting enables network services add terminals to network databases and makes host resident files such as configuration files and fonts available to terminals While the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems describes the most common terminal configuration tasks this manual describes how to further customize all aspects of terminal operation This manual also describes specialized features such as SNMP DPS and PEX About this Manual 1 1 Contents of this Manual Contents of this Manual This manual contains up to date reference information about the current release of NCDware A brief description of each chapter follows m Chapter 1 About this Manual describes the audience purpose and contents of this manual other NCD manuals and conventions used in this manual Chapter 2 Booting Defaults lists the default actions of the terminal as it boots including discovering network addresses and other information loading an X server loading a configuration file reading font directories and displaying a login prompt For each of these actions alternatives are listed and references are given to the chapters and other manuals where defaults and alternati
523. rd Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 72 73 period greater 74 slash question 75 1 L 76 semicolon colon 77 p P 78 minus underscore 79 F10 80 81 82 quoteright quotedbl 83 84 bracketleft braceleft 85 equal plus 86 F11 87 Linefeed 88 Control_R 1 89 Shift_R 1 90 Return 91 bracketright braceright 92 backslash bar 93 94 F12 17 10 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 97 Keyboard Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 95 Break 96 Down 97 Left 98 99 Up 100 Delete 101 102 BackSpace 103 104 105 KP_1 106 Right 107 KP_4 108 KP_7 109 KP_Separator 110 111 112 KP_0 113 KP_Decimal 114 KP_2 115 KP_5 116 KP_6 117 KP_8 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 11 N 97 Keyboard Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 118 KP_F1 119 KP_F2 120 121 KP_Enter 122 KP_3 123 124 KP_F4 125 KP_9 126 KP_F3 127 128 129 130 131 132 KP_Subtract 1 If the pref compatibility decwindows keyboard parameter is set to true this right modifier is transla
524. re 79 F10 80 no assigned keysym 81 no assigned keysym 82 apostrophe quotedbl 83 no assigned keysym 84 bracketleft braceleft 85 equal plus 86 1 SunF36 87 F22 F22 Print SunSys_Req 88 Mode_switch 89 Shift_R 90 Return 91 bracketright braceright 92 backslash bar brokenbar 93 WYSetup 3 941 SunF37 95 F23 F23 Scroll_Lock 96 Down Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 49 N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 97 Left 98 F21 F21 Pause Break 99 Up 100 Delete 101 End 102 Backspace 103 Insert 104 105 F33 F33 KP_1 End 106 Right 107 Left F30 KP_4 108 F27 F27 KP_7 Home 109 Next 110 Home 111 Prior 112 Insert Insert KP_0 113 Delete Delete KP_Decimal 114 Down F34 KP_2 115 F31 F31 KP_5 116 Right F32 KP_6 117 Up F28 KP_8 118 Num_Lock 119 F25 F25 KP_Divide 17 50 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 123 Sun Type 5 Compatible Keyboard Details Table 17 7 N 123NA Keycodes and Keysyms with OpenWindows Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym Alt Keysym Shifted Alt Keysym 120 121 KP_Enter 122 F35 F35 KP_3 Next 123 124 KP_Add 125 F29 F29 KP_9 Prior 126 F26 F26 KP_Multiply 127
525. reen Luminance Change Setup Parameters 9 34 Reference Red Chromaticity Change Setup Parameters 9 34 Reference Red Luminance Change Setup Parameters 9 34 Reference White Chromaticity Change Setup Parameters 9 35 Reference White Luminance Change Setup Parameters 9 35 registers displaying 11 8 Index remote configuration apply command 6 34 assignment statements 6 11 6 14 assignments order of 6 14 auto save 6 34 to 6 37 configuration commands 6 8 to 6 10 get protect command 6 33 parameters lt GET PROTECTED gt value 6 32 default parameter value 6 12 nil parameter value 6 5 accessing through SNMP 16 10 assigning values 6 11 to 6 12 default values 6 12 filenames as parameter values 6 13 groups 6 6 multiple assignments of same parameter 6 14 protecting 6 32 to 6 33 saved in NVRAM 11 38 saved in optional string area 11 37 tables assigning values 6 11 to 6 12 write only 6 5 protect command 6 32 read command 6 19 to 6 20 remote terminal accessing 9 8 set protect command 6 33 syntax rules 6 13 to 6 15 see also remote configuration files remote configuration files auto save file 6 36 comments in 6 14 configuration parameters for 9 18 creating 6 16 to 6 21 by ncdinstall 6 17 from sample file 6 17 from Setup menus 6 18 directory for 6 26 remote configuration files continued downloading disabling 6 25 6 27 hosts for 6 21 initial file servers 5 13 6 21 persistent 6 22 sequence of filenames 6 2
526. rent configuration write filename parameter writes a parameter and its current value to a file write filename all group changes read write read only I all writes all parameters _I group writes all parameters in the specified group s I changes writes only the changes I read write writes only the read write parameters I read only writes only the read only parameters The dump and save commands are equivalent to write protect parameter group all Prevents anyone from reading or modifying the specified parameter s L parameter protects the specified parameter I group protects all the parameters in the specified group J all protects all parameters get protect parameter group all 12 Prevents anyone from reading the specified parameter s L parameter protects the specified parameter I group protects all the parameters in the specified group I all protects all parameters Terminal Configuration Methods 6 9 The Configuration Language Table 6 2 Configuration Commands for Files and Interactive Use Continued Command and Description set protect parameter group all 12 Prevents anyone from modifying the specified parameter s L parameter protects the specified parameter I group protects all the parameters in the specified group J all protects all parameters This command is not available when accessing the
527. res as an ASCII terminal The window displays 24 or 25 lines of text in 80 or 132 columns and you can resize it to display fewer or more rows changing the height or columns changing the width The size of the window is affected by several factors including the font used escape sequences sent to the terminal emulator described later menu selections from the menu bar and X resource specifications In addition you can use character attributes to make text stand out or to protect fields You can also choose the cursor NCD Terminal Emulator windows provide additional features not found on traditional terminals including a scroll bar and menu bar Terminal Emulator Fonts The font you choose for a terminal emulator window is important It controls the size of the characters you see as well as whether certain terminal emulation features appear to work If you do not know which font to choose use the default selected by the terminal emulator Fonts are specified using a set of X resources foundry family pointSize and subFont Together with the Fonts menu in the menu bar these resources control the actual X font used in the display See The Fonts Menu on page 12 10 for more information about fonts Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 5 Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus Terminal Emulator Scroll Bars Scroll bars allow review of information that has passed off the screen The ability to see p
528. rmal Completion The number of connections closed by the remote host which is the normal mode of ending a Parallel daemon connection 10 16 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes Serial Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on the physical serial interfaces This hide box contains the Interface Statistics table which corresponds to the serial interface statistics table parameter Table Entries Description Port Number The identifying number of the serial port Reception Overruns The number of times an incoming octet overwrote a previously received octet in the UART s buffer Reception Frame Errors The number of times an incoming octet had bad bit alignment Reception Parity Errors The number of times the parity bit of an incoming octet was incorrect Reception Break Errors The number of times a stop bit was not received at the expected time after a start bit and the intervening bits were all zero Total Characters Transmitted The total number of characters transmitted Total Transmit Interrupts The total number of transmission interrupts Total Characters Received The total number of characters received Total Receive Interrupts The total number of reception interrupts Total Receive Errors The total number of reception errors Serial Daemons Statistics The parameters in this hide box report
529. rmation more information self tests displays results tests NCD recommends that you and NVRAM and reads NVRAM do not disable any self tests configuration content The Boot Monitor You can manually configure the Chapter 3 Booting broadcasts the terminal s BOOTP DHCP database to provide Address Discovery System Administrator s Guide Instead of using BOOTP DHCP Chapter 6 Terminal responses for determining the IP Configuration Methods address and other booting Chapter 11 Boot Monitor information you can configure the And NVRAM terminal to use information stored in NVRAM Instead of using BOOTP DHCP Chapter 3 Booting responses for determining asubnet Address Discovery mask you can configure the terminal to use ICMP for subnet mask discovery Instead of using the default order of requests DHCP BOOTP then RARP for its IP address broadcasts you can change the order through the Boot Monitor Setup menus Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 2 2 Booting Defaults Summary of Booting Alternatives Table 2 1 Chronological Summary of Default Booting Actions and Alternatives Default Booting Action The Boot Monitor sends a series of requests for an X server first to the host that answered the request for the IP address and then to the network For more information about the default series of X server requests see Chapter 4 The Boot Monitor downloads an X se
530. rmation Explanation The X server is attempting to create a directory User Action None X Server Messages 18 89 NETFILE Messages MKDIRSUCCESS mkdir succeeded for file Severity Information Explanation The X server created a directory User Action None NOMATCHES open failed no file table matches for file Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot match the specified filename with an entry in the file service table User Action Verify that the filename was entered correctly Verify that an accurate entry for the file exists in the file service table OPENATTEMPT attempting open for file Severity Information Explanation The X server is attempting to open the specified file User Action None OPENSUCCESS open succeeded for file Severity Information Explanation The X server has successfully opened the specified file User Action None OUTOFMATCHES open failed no more matches for file Severity Error Explanation The X server matched the specified filename with some entries in the file service table but none of the entries worked User Action Verify that the filename was entered correctly Verify that the file exists in the correct location on the host system and that it has the correct permission assigned 18 90 X Server Messages NETFILE Messages PERMCHKATTEMPT attempting permission check for file Severity Information Explanation
531. rminal s IP address prefixed with tftpboot boot tcpip product name and memoty size with path file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section gt Try TCP IP Product Name and Memory Size with Path File The file named using the product name with the memory size of the terminal as the suffix and prefixed with tftpboot boot tcpip product name with path file Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting TCP IP Boot Options section Try TCP IP Product Name with Path File The file named using the product name prefixed with tftpboot 4 6 Booting X Server Loading Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Specifying a Non Standard X Server Filename To specify a non standard X server filename not one of the names listed in Table 4 5 use the boot custom file parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Booting Custom File This parameter is saved in NVRAM Table 4 6 boot custom file Parameter Possible Values Result default nil filename A non standard name for the X server file Specifying a Non Standard X Server Directory To specify a non standard X server directory set the boot nfs directory parameter or boot tftp directory parameter For details see Using TFTP for X Server Downloading on page 4 12 or Using NFS for X Server Downloading on page 4 13 Keeping the Terminal from Entering the Boot Monitor at Boo
532. ror message please contact NCD Technical Support BADBIND unable to bind protocol socket message BADCOMPFMT Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot assign a name to the specified network socket The included message describes the reason for the error User Action If you encounter this error message please contact NCD Technical Support invalid compression format in file file Severity Error Explanation The specified file does not contain the expected compression factor and therefore the X server cannot confirm that the file is compressed User Action Confirm that the specified file is compressed X Server Messages 18 7 Messages Common to All Modules BADCOMPSIZE BADCONNECT wrong compression factor use 12 bits in file file Severity Error Explanation The specified file indicates that it is using a compression factor different from that which the X server expects NCDware software uses a 12 bit compression factor User Action Confirm that 12 bit compression was specified when the file was compressed for example by the command line option b12 unable to connect to protocol socket message Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot connect to the specified network socket for the reason given User Action Verify that the network address is correct and confirm that the desired host is available on the network BADGETSOCKETOPT unable to get protocol socke
533. rough a TELNET connection family tcpip This host has access through the TCP IP protocol family ncdnet This host has access through the DECnet protocol family For example to allow access from some hosts config access control enabled tru config host access control list eagle tcpip peregrine ncdnet ncdu21 tcpip ncdu21 ncdnet Note that a host must have two entries if it is allowed access through both the TCP IP and DECnet protocol families You can now access the terminal s Configuration and User Preferences daemons remotely only from a host listed in the config access control list table Preventing All Remote Access to the Terminal s Configuration Data If no hosts should have access to the terminal s configuration data set the config access control enabled parameter to true and make sure the config access control list table is empty that is config access control list The terminal s Configuration and User Preferences daemons can now be accessed only locally through Change Setup Parameters Change Quick Setup and Change User Preferences Terminal Configuration Methods 6 31 Protecting Configuration Parameters Protecting Configuration Parameters The following parameter protection commands prevent display or modification of configuration parameters I protect prevents both display and modification LI get protect prevents display 1 set protect prev
534. rough the Console after the NCD terminal has booted Setup Change Setup Parameters For other ways of starting and displaying local clients and information about disabling local clients see the System Administrator s Guide Components of the Change Setup Parameters Window Change Setup Parameters is composed of a series of hide boxes which provide access to fields that correspond to remote configuration parameters Change Setup Parameters has a menu bar with a File menu and a Sections menu a messages area and several buttons 1 The File menu provides commands for writing values to and reading values from files and NVRAM Save to File Specifies the name of a file to which all current parameter settings should be written A popup dialog box presents the default filename or the last filename entered during this session Save to NVRAM Saves settings to NVRAM as appropriate Read from File Specifies a file from which all parameter settings should be read for display in the Change Setup Parameters window Presents the default filename or the last filename entered during this session Read from NVRAM Reads all NVRAM settings and displays them in the Change Setup Parameters window Restore Defaults Loads parameter settings from the file defined in the config default file parameter By default the value in this parameter is the initial configuration file loaded at boot time Using Configuration Menus 9 7
535. rror Explanation The CONFUI module has lost its connection to the specified terminal User Action Confirm that the specified terminal is running If it is confirm that the terminal is connected to the network and that the network is operational connected to any terminal Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support X Server Messages 18 31 CONFUI Messages NOEXT can not get NCD SETUP extension NOFONT can Severity Warning Explanation The X server has detected an internal error User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support not create font font Severity Error Explanation The specified font is not available User Action Use the default font or specify a substitute font SET conflib_set_type parameter failed Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set the specified parameter to the requested value In this message type refers to the value type such as Boolean floating point integer string or table User Action Verify that the value requested is the type of value accepted by the parameter TEST conflib_test_type parameter failed Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set the specified parameter to the requested value In this message type refers to the value type such as Boolean floating point integer str
536. rver file using TFTP from the default TFTP directory tftpboot or ustr tftpboot from the first host to answer a request If the TFTP attempts fail the Boot Monitor tries to download an X server using MOP and NFS Alternate Action s Direct the request for an X server to a specific host You can also specify a second and third boot host in case the first host is not available References System Administrator s Guide Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading Specify a non standard X server filename Change the default series of searches the Boot Monitor uses to find an X server Configure the terminal so it does not broadcast requests for an X server to the network Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading Use a different default method for X server downloading such as NFS or a local PCMCIA card Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading Specify the second and third choices for boot source System Administrator s Guide Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading Use a different directory from the default when using TFTP to download the X server Use a different directory from the default when using NFS to download the X server Prevent the terminal from attempting to download an X server using MOP Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading Booting Defaults 2 3 Summary of Booting Alternatives Table 2 1 Chronological Summary of Default Booting Actions and
537. rvice entry is ncdnet name cache max lifetime Local Name Cache Hostnames NCDnet addresses and address lifetimes for the local name cache ncdnet name local cache Name Server Transaction Timeout How long the terminal attempts a name service request before a failure is declared ncdnet name server transaction timeout Name Servers List of name servers ncdnet name servers Network Interfaces Parameters The parameters in the Network Interfaces hide box affect the terminal s network interfaces Network Interfaces Field Description Corresponding Parameter Use SNAP 802 2 LLC Encapsulation on Ethernet The terminal sends Ethernet packets using SNAP encapsulation net ethernet snap encapsulation Token Ring Speed Speed at which the Token Ring interface runs net token ring speed Roaming Condition Speed at which wireless terminals roam from one access point to another net roaming condition 9 32 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Network Interfaces Field Description Corresponding Parameter Domain Channel 1 Domain number for wireless terminals net domain channel 1 Explora 400 450 terminals only Parallel Parameters The Parallel hide box lists the attributes of the Parallel Daemon Parallel Field Description Corresponding Parameter Parallel Daemons Ta
538. s Destination Unreachables Received Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received icmp destination unreachables received Statistics Menus 10 3 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes ICMP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Time Exceededs Received Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received icmp time exceededs received Parameter Problems Received Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received icmp parameter problems received Source Quenches Received Number of ICMP Source Quench messages sent icmp source quenches received Redirects Received Number of ICMP Redirect messages received icmp redirects received Echo Requests Number of Echo request messages icmp echo requests received Received received Echo Replies Number of Echo Reply messages icmp echo replies received Received received Timestamps Requests Received Number of Timestamp request messages received icmp timestamp requests received Timestamp Replies Received Number of Timestamp replies messages received icmp timestamp replies received Address Mask Requests Received Number of Address Mask Request messages received icmp address mask requests received Address Mask Replies Received Number of Address Mask Reply messages received icmp address mask replies received Packets Transmitted
539. s N 97 Keyboard Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 30 2 at 31 F4 32 33 c C 34 x X 35 d D 36 e E 37 4 dollar 38 3 numbersign 39 F5 40 41 space 42 v V 43 f F 44 t T 45 r R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 49 n N 50 b B 51 h H 52 g G Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 7 N 97 Keyboard Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 53 y Y 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 57 Alt R1 Meta_R 1 58 m M 59 j J 60 u U 61 7 ampersand 35 d D 36 e E 37 4 dollar 38 3 numbersign 39 F5 40 41 space 42 v V 43 f F 44 t T 45 r R 46 5 percent 47 F6 48 17 8 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 97 Keyboard Details Table 17 2 N 97 Default Keymapping Continued Keycode Value Keysym Shifted Keysym 49 n N 50 b B 51 h H 52 g G 53 y Y 54 6 asciicircum 55 F7 56 57 Alt R1 Meta_R 1 58 m M 59 j J 60 u U 61 7 ampersand 62 8 asterisk 63 F8 64 65 comma less 66 k K 67 i I 68 o O 69 0 parenright 70 9 parenleft 71 F9 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 9 N 97 Keyboa
540. s Table 11 3 Boot Monitor Setup Network Window Window Item Purpose and How to Set Value IP Parameters Get IP Addresses From Use the Space bar to toggle between the two permitted values Network and NVRAM DHCP IP Addressing Order Backspace through the existing value then type 1 2 or 3 to specify the preferred priority of this method BOOTP IP Addressing Order Backspace through the existing value then type 1 2 or 3 to specify the preferred priority of this method RARP IP Addressing Order Backspace through the existing value then type 1 2 or 3 to specify the preferred priority of this method Terminal IP Address Backspace through the existing value then type the terminal s IP address in decimal format for example 192 43 154 80 First Boot Host IP Address on versions prior to 2 7 1 this is Boot Host IP Address Backspace through the existing value then type the first boot host s IP address in decimal format for example 192 43 154 99 Second Boot Host IP Address Boot Monitor 2 7 1 or later Backspace through the existing value then type the secondary boot host s IP address in decimal format Third Boot Host IP Address Boot Monitor 2 7 1 or later Backspace through the existing value then type the tertiary boot host s IP address in decimal format Gateway IP Address Backspace through the existing value then type the gateway s IP addres
541. s Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Continued Location Description Size Values Default in Bold 0x26 Third boot host 4 bytes 000 000 000 000 boot tcpip third server Ox2A Terminal DECnet address DEC byte 2bytes 0 0 ordering ncdnet address at next boot 0x2C DECnet router address DEC byte 2 bytes 0 0 ordering ncdnet default router Ox2E Default DECnet host 2bytes 0 0 0x30 Try booting forever 1 bit 1 Enabled boot persistent loading 0 Disabled Turns off broadcast booting 1 bit 1 Disabled boot tcpip broadcast boot request 0 Enabled Turns off absolute product name booting 1 bit 1 Enabled boot tcpip product name with path file 0 Disabled Turns off absolute memory size booting 1 bit 1 Enabled boot tcpip product name and memory 0 Disabled size with path file Turns off absolute hex IP address booting 1 bit 1 Enabled boot tcpip unit address with path file 0 Disabled Turns off relative product name booting 1 bit 1 Enabled boot tcpip product name 0 Disabled Turns off relative memory size booting 1 bit 1 Enabled boot tcpip product name and memoty 0 Disabled size Turns off relative hex IP address booting 1 bit 1 Enabled boot tcpip unit address file 0 Disabled 11 26 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 7 Shared NVRAM Version 4 Continued Location Description Size Values Default in Bold 0x
542. s using the font server configuration parameter cache size Client Connection On TCP IP networks the system administrator or system manager also specifies the TCP port number on which the font server listens for client X server and host connections The font server parameter port specifies the port number Security Client access to the font server can be controlled by using a font server parameter called trusted clients By default the font server allows any client X server or host to connect to it and access fonts Listing names of clients under the font server trusted clients parameter limits font server access to only those clients 7 22 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Server Issues Default Font Specifications Two font server configuration parameters set defaults for cases in which the point size or resolution dpi are not specified A default point size is set in tenths of a point sometimes called decipoints in the default point size parameter Supported default resolutions are listed under the default resolutions parameter Error Logging To assist in troubleshooting you can specify a method for logging errors using two font server configuration parameters The error method parameter specifies a method of error logging The permitted methods are 1 Using standard error reporting practices stderr 1 Logging to a named file the font server parameter error file described later specifies the name of a
543. s Manual Contents of this Manual host including the font server configuration file starting the font server remote configuration parameters for the font server and getting information about fonts Chapter 9 Using Configuration Menus describes the controls menus and fields in the three configuration utilities accessed through the Console Change Quick Setup Change Setup Parameters and Change User Preferences The chapter includes a brief description of each field and the name of the corresponding remote configuration parameter Chapter 10 Statistics Menus describes the controls menus and fields in the Show Statistics utility The chapter includes a brief description of each statistical field and the name of the corresponding remote configuration parameter Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM describes the functions and commands of the Boot Monitor how to use the Boot Monitor Setup menus to quickly configure a terminal how to use the NVRAM nv utility to read and change parameters that are stored in NVRAM and information about the configuration data stored in NVRAM Chapter 8 Login and X Session Management provides details about XDM X Display Manager components and files how to start XDM manually and XDM access control Chapter 12 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator describes the components of the VT320 terminal emulator the menus and controls configuring the emulator with X resources escape sequences com
544. s Time server host address es T31 ICMP router discovery enabled T28 IP broadcast address T49 XDM X Display Manager host address es listed in order of preference 3 6 Booting Address Discovery Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery A fragment of an example bootptab file follows with comments identifying the fields Template entry global Template entry name gw 192 43 153 1 Gateway address sm 255 255 255 000 Subnet mask hd tftpboot X server file directory ht ether Interface name Entry for an individual NCD terminal ncd1 NCD terminal s hostname tc global Include the template ha 0000a70015d5 Ethernet address ip 192 43 153 224 IP address bf Xncedxpl X server filename Adding Terminal Entries to the bootptab File The required and optional entries in the bootptab file are 1 One or more template or global entries for the information common to all terminals or groups of terminals optional 1 Anentry for each terminal containing at least the terminal s Ethernet address and IP address or its Token Ring address and IP address If you do not supply the address and the terminal cannot determine its address through other means using RARP or reading the address from NVRAM the terminal will be unable to boot Note If the terminal has a TRP board the current Token Ring address also called the active address is different from the built in Token Ring address also called the static
545. s contain the terminal s Ethernet address or Token Ring address A host running the RARP daemon and configured with information about the terminal responds with the IP address of the terminal Unlike BOOTP DHCP RARP supplies only the address of the terminal and the address of the host that responded to the terminal s request for an X server This method is recommended if you do not have BOOTP DHCP on your network For more information about RARP see Using RARP for Address Discovery on page 3 10 0 NVRAM You can save all of the necessary network addresses in NVRAM where they remain even when the terminal is powered off This method is recommended if You have no address discovery protocol BOOTP DHCP or RARP You are booting from a host on a different network through a router that cannot pass on the boot request You are managing a small group of terminals For more information about saving addresses in NVRAM see Storing Addresses in NVRAM on page 3 11 and Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Changing the Order of Network Information Requests By default a terminal sends requests in the following order first DHCP then BOOTP then RARP You can change the order in which the terminal sends requests using the NVRAM Setup menus For information about changing the order of requests see Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 3 2 Booting Address Discovery Using BOOTP DHCP for Address Discovery Usi
546. s in decimal format for example 192 43 112 32 Subnet Mask Backspace through the existing value then type the network s subnet mask in decimal format for example 255 255 255 0 Broadcast IP Address Backspace through the existing value then type the broadcast address for this subnet in decimal format for example 192 43 154 255 NCDnet Parameters Terminal NCDnet Address Backspace through the existing value then type the terminal s NCDnet address in the format area node for example 1 67 Areas range from 1 to 63 nodes from 1 to 1023 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 15 Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals Table 11 3 Boot Monitor Setup Network Window Continued Window Item Purpose and How to Set Value Host NCDnet Address Backspace through the existing value then type the host s NCDnet address in the format area node for example 1 27 Areas range from 1 to 63 nodes from 1 to 1023 Router NCDnet Address Backspace through the existing value then type the router s NCDnet address in the format area node for example 1 59 Areas range from 1 to 63 nodes from 1 to 1023 SNAP 802 2 LLC Encapsulation Boot Monitor 2 7 6 or later Use the space bar to toggle between Yes and No Setting Booting Parameters Use the Boot window to set the filenames and directories used in booting Table 11 4 lists the fields and how to set their values
547. s not working or it is too busy User Action Either wait until the browser is less busy or stop the browser and restart it 18 76 X Server Messages LOCALDEV Messages LOCALDEV Messages LOCALDEV messages pertain to a terminal s local file system on a PCMCIA card If you are looking for messages that refer to the LOCALDEV module but do not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 FLASH n megabyte flash memory card manufacturers id id devcode code Severity Information Explanation Identifies the PCMCIA card and the amount of memory available User Action None READONLY n megabyte read only memory card Severity Information Explanation Identifies the card as read only User Action None UNKNOWN n megabyte memory card of unknown type Severity Information Explanation Reports that the card type is unknown to the X server but identifies the amount of available memory User Action None UNSUPPORTED unsupported memory card manufacturers id id device dev Severity Error Explanation The current version of the X server does not support the memory card installed in the terminal base The memory card is identified by its manufacturer s identification and its device code User Action Replace the current memory card with one supported by the current version of NCDware NCD Technical Support can provide you with a list of the supported memory cards X Server M
548. s parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Extended Diagnostics 1 Font service To generate more detailed messages about fonts set the pref font extended diagnostics parameter to true Setup gt Change User Preferences gt Fonts Show Extended Font Diagnostics NCD recommends enabling extended font diagnostics only if you have a font problem This parameter generates a large number of messages 1 IP routing Extended diagnostic messages for IP routing are turned off by default If you want to see such messages make sure ip extended routing diagnostics is set to true Setup Change Setup Parameters IP gt Extended Routing Diagnostics The extended diagnostics parameter settings take effect immediately Only file extended diagnostics is saved to NVRAM To make the other parameter settings permanent set them in a remote configuration file 18 6 X Server Messages Messages Common to All Modules Messages Common to All Modules This section is an alphabetical listing of X server messages common to all modules If you are looking for a message that is not listed here refer to the sections that follow BADACCEPT unable to accept on protocol socket message Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot accept a connection on the specified network socket The included message describes the reason for the error User Action If you encounter this er
549. scovery priority lower 1 Try BOOTP first 4 bits 2 Try BOOTP second 3 Try BOOTP last 15 Disable BOOTP 0x195 DHCP address discovery priority upper 1 Try DHCP first 4 bits 2 Try DHCP second 3 Try DHCP last 15 Disable DHCP Reserved 4 bits 0x196 Reserved 1 byte 1 In Boot Monitor versions earlier than 2 8 2 the default is 4 MBit Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 31 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Keyboard Type Settings Table 11 8 lists the keyboard type values for byte 0x38 The default keyboard for the N 101 N 102 keyboard group is the IBM PS2 or Windows 95 compatible keyboard byte 0x39 This is also the default keyboard if the terminal cannot sense the type of the attached keyboard Table 11 8 Keyboard Type Settings in NVRAM Keyboard hist N 101 0 VT220 VMS 1 VT220 ULTRIX 2 N 97 3 N 102 German 4 N 102 French 5 N 102 Belgian UK 6 N 102 Swiss German 7 N 102 Spanish 8 N 102 English UK 9 N 102 Italian 10 N 102 Canadian 11 N 102 Norwegian 12 N 102 Finnish 13 N 102 Portuguese 14 N 102 Danish 15 N 102 Flemish 16 N 102 Norwegian Tandberg 17 11 32 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals Table 11 8 Keyboard Type Settings in NVRAM Continued Keyboard uae N 108 Nokia 18 N 108LK 19 N Kana 20 VT220
550. scripts for customizing user sessions References System Administrator s Guide Customize the system wide Xsession file System Administrator s Guide Configuring the System Wide XDM Session Management File on page 8 7 XDM sets the terminal s None DISPLAY variable When the XDM session Configure the terminal s System Administrator s Guide ends a dialog box is displayed giving the user choices about how to proceed behavior when the session ends and the user is logged out Configuring Terminals for XDM on page 8 17 XDM parameters that control timeouts and keepalives have their default values Customize timeouts and keepalives System Administrator s Guide Configuring Terminals for XDM on page 8 17 Access control is not enforced Users can run clients from unauthorized hosts on the terminal Configure access control on hosts and on the terminal System Administrator s Guide XDM Access Control on page 8 15 XDM Overview By default ncdinstall checks for the presence of XDM software on the boot host If XDM is not running ncdinstall can install or enable it XDM runs on login hosts and terminals and manages the user s X session from login to logout XDM can be configured to start clients automatically When the user logs out XDM resets the terminal for the next session The following subsections describe XDM in more detail Login and
551. sequence see Booting xX Server Loading on page 4 1 RARP is implemented through a daemon program rarpd 8 that runs on the boot host and a database file called etc ethers Complete the following tasks if you are using RARP for address discovery 1 To verify that RARP is available check the relevant host startup file For example on SunOS systems the startup file to check is etc re local The entry for RARP is similar to rarpd rarpd a 2 Ifthe entry is disabled by a comment symbol at the beginning of the line remove the comment symbol Then start the daemon manually by typing the startup command For example 3 10 Booting Address Discovery Storing Addresses in NVRAM xvarpd rarpd a If you are not running NIS Network Information Service add each terminal s Ethernet address and hostname to the etc ethers file For example 00 00 A7 00 00 AE ncdl The Ethernet address is entered into NVRAM at the factory You can display the address through the Console Statistics Show Version The Ethernet address also appears on a label on the bottom of the terminal base If you are running NIS add the terminal to the ethers map and update the map For example cd var yp make ethers Storing Addresses in NVRAM You can manually set all the addresses the terminal needs in NVRAM This is useful if you have just a few terminals to configure or if address resolution protocols are not running on
552. ser you must first set their passwords in the Console Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control If you do not set a password and select one of these local services in the Terminal Host Chooser the terminal emulator window appears briefly displays an access denied message then disappears The resources listed in Table 12 1 control the automatic display of services in the Terminal Host Chooser Users can select the corresponding View menu item to control the display of services locally 12 2 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Configuring a Terminal for Serial Terminal Emulation Table 12 1 View Options in the Terminal Host Chooser es Default View Menu Name Description Setting Resource Name Show Local Controls the automatic display of true showLocal services available on the terminal Show Available LAT Controls the automatic display of true showAvailableLat LAT services whose availability has been broadcast across the network Show Default LAT Controls the automatic display of true showDefaultLat LAT services listed in the term default hosts table Show CTerm Controls the automatic display of true showCTerm available CTERM hosts Show Serial Controls the automatic display of true showSerial available serial sessions Show Telnet Controls the automatic display of true showTelnet TELNET services listed in the term default hosts table Configuring a Terminal fo
553. service table If the terminal is accessing files only from these hosts and the boot host and the files are in their default locations no further configuration of the file service table is necessary If files required by the terminal are not on the boot host or designated initial file servers or are not in their default locations configure the file service table to map the default file access points known by the X server to the actual file access points and actual host The default file locations known to the X server are listed in Table 5 18 Table 5 18 Default File Locations File Type Default Directory Remote configuration files ust lib X11 ncd configs Color definition file rgb txt ust lib X11 ncd Fonts ust lib X11 ncd fonts Diagnostic log file No default location Keysym file XKeysymDB usr lib X11 ncd Configuring Network Services 5 15 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Each entry in the table specifies a file server host the file access point used by the terminal the actual file access point on the file server the protocol used the retransmission and transaction timeout periods and the amount of data transmitted on each read and write operation To change the file access point and the host 1 Find the entry in the file service table parameter see Table 5 19 that has the default location in the local unix mount point field For example if you are placing the remote con
554. set correctly Explanation The Help URL must be specified in the preference file Insufficient memory for requested operation Close unused applications and try again Explanation The terminal has run out of memory Invalid file name file Specify a correct file name Explanation The user specified an incorrect filename URL is longer than 1024 bytes Explanation The user typed an URL path that is too long NCDDM Messages NCDDM messages pertain to the NCD Display Manager If you are looking for a message that refers to the NCDDM module but is not listed here see Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 COMERR communication error with ncddm server message Severity Error Explanation The X server was unable to connect to the ncddm daemon or experienced a read or write error after the connection was established The message specifies which of these possible errors occurred User Action Check for network problems Check to make sure the daemon was started PROTOERR protocol error with ncddm server message Severity Error Explanation There was an internal problem in either the ncddm daemon running on the host or the ncddm client running in the terminal The message gives specific information User Action Please contact NCD Technical Support 18 86 X Server Messages NETD Messages REQFAIL ncddm server returned failed request Severity Error Explanation The ncddm daemon was u
555. shutting down Severity Information Explanation The specified module is shutting down as requested User Action None WRITE writing file_type file Severity Information Explanation The specified module is writing information to the specified file User Action None XKILLED connection closed by X server Severity Fatal Explanation In the process of shutting down the X server has stopped the reporting module User Action Check the application s that were running when the X server closed the connection to ensure that the clients exited gracefully and did not lose any information 18 14 X Server Messages CALIBLIGHTPEN Messages CALIBLIGHTPEN Messages NODISPLAY NOLIGHTPEN CALIBLIGHTPEN messages pertain to light pen support For messages that refer to the CALIBLIGHTPEN module but do not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 Could not open display Severity Fatal Explanation The X server cannot find the X display so light pen support is not operating User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support Could not open light pen Severity Fatal Explanation The X server cannot find the light pen User Action Make sure the light pen is properly attached NOXINPUT extension not present when listing input devices UNKWNCLASS Severity Fatal Explanation The X server could not find the light pen module User Actio
556. signing values to parameters refer to the documentation for your SNMP management software Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 9 Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot 3 Enter the command using the appropriate value For example a command using host based SNMP management software to change the boot desired source parameter to local is xsnmpi a 191 42 153 147 c manager set ncdBootDesiredSource 0 5 where 191 42 153 147 Is the IP address of the terminal c manager Is the community name for read write permission ncdBootDesiredSource s the SNMP variable name for the boot desired source parameter 5 Is the choice local Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot On a TCP IP network terminals can be reset remotely using SNMP and the ncdreset 1 command The host from which terminals are reset must be an SNMP manager host nedreset 1 provides the following choices D Establishing an SNMP connection without restarting the session I Restarting the X session LY Rebooting the terminal after all clients exit LI Rebooting the terminal immediately The following sections describe the host and terminal configuration required before you can reset a terminal remotely Configuring a Host for SNMP Remote Reset Complete the following steps to set up the host from which the remote reset command is issued 1 Install the ncdreset executable and the NCD MIB from the NCDware distribution if necessary They are installed when
557. sion shows the format in which the font is stored For more information about font formats see Font Formats on page 7 7 The font directory management files in bitmap font directories are not designed to be edited by hand Use the ncdmkfontdir 1 utility Font management utilities are included on the NCDware distribution their use is described in NCD Font Management Utilities on page 7 10 The fonts alias File Applications sometimes request unavailable fonts As a result the application might use undesirable default fonts crash refuse to run or run poorly To avoid such problems you can instruct the server to substitute a different font for the one requested by creating an entry in the font alias management file called fonts alias in the font directory where the substitute font resides Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 9 Font Use Overview Entries in the font alias management file consist of the name used by the application in the font request and the XLFD description of the substitute font A portion of an example fonts alias file follows lucidasans 8 b amp h lucida medium r normal sans 11 80 100 100 p 63 is08859 1 lucidasans 10 b amp h lucida normal sans 14 100 100 100 80 is08859 1 lucidasans 12 b amp h lucida normal sans 17 120 100 100 96 1s808859 1 medium P m P lucidasans 14 b amp h lucida medium normal sans 20 140 100 100 p 114 is08859 1 m P m P i dium
558. sor is on The NCD Terminal Emulator includes a subset of the VT320 command set as well as NCD specific sequences These escape sequences their actions and associated functions are listed in Table 12 5 Some of the sequences are described in more detail following the table The table lists sequences that differ depending on whether the environment requires eight bit or seven bit mode The eight bit mode sequence for example CSI is listed first followed by the equivalent seven bit mode sequence for example Esc Numerical variables are represented as pn Variables representing a number of rows or columns are represented as pr or pc respectively Variables requiring a parameter setting from a number of specific choices are represented by ps Other variable types are defined in the table as required Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 13 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences 0 Cursor to end of screen 1 Start to cursor 2 Entire screen i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI pn Q Insert pn blank characters ICH Esc pn Default 1 CSI ps Select the status line Esc ps ps specifies the display to which the terminal sends data See Configuring the Status Permissible values Line on page 12 27 for ae more nformnalon 0 Send characters to main display 1 Send characters to status line csIps Enable the status line T
559. splay does not set up the proper colormap for 8 bit displays such as the current NCD terminals If the PEX Client Looks Different The PEX protocol defines a full range of graphics functions and allows a server to comply with the protocol without implementing all functions If the NCD PEX module does not implement the same function subset as another server the client may look different on the two displays For example the shading methods defined by the PEX protocol are color Gouraud shading dot product and normal Phong The NCD PEX module supports Gouraud shading Clients can run in the absence of the other shading methods because clients default to one of the methods supported by the server 14 14 Configuring PEX 15 Configuring Serial and Parallel Ports This chapter describes serial and parallel ports The following topics are covered in this chapter m m m m Ports Overview on page 15 1 Configuring Port Operating Characteristics on page 15 2 Configuring a Terminal for Use as a System Console on page 15 9 Controlling Access to Serial and Parallel Ports on page 15 10 For information on serial and parallel port pinouts see the hardware documentation for your terminal Ports Overview All NCD Explora and HMX terminals are equipped with at least one serial port and one parallel port Serial Ports You can configure a serial port to m m Run serial terminal emulation through the NC
560. splays a login banner for the user to log into the boot host if you use ncdinstall If you do not use ncdinstall a Login Chooser is displayed offering the hosts that responded to the XDM query Disable the login chooser System Administrator s Guide Disable indirect or broadcast queries System Administrator s Guide Configure the terminal to send direct or indirect queries System Administrator s Guide Configure the Xaccess file to customize the host s response to indirect queries Configuring the XDM Xaccess File on page 8 11 Instead of using XDM users log in through the NCD Terminal Emulator System Administrator s Guide The user is not restricted to the hosts listed in the Login Chooser The user is not permitted to log into a host that is not listed in the Login Chooser System Administrator s Guide Clients that run before the user logs in such as the login box have default characteristics Customize client X resources using the Xresources file Configuring the XDM Xresources File on page 8 14 8 2 Login and X Session Management XDM Overview Table 8 1 Summary of XDM Defaults and Alternatives Continued Default The default system wide Xsession file sets up the default X session and looks for an individual startup script xsession file in the user s home directory Alternative Set up individual startup
561. ss to the terminal through SNMP You can establish a list of hosts allowed to access the terminal or prevent access from all hosts Access control is disabled by default You can use the default read only password called a community name or specify a different one Complete the following steps to configure read only access to a terminal s SNMP variables 1 To establish access control set the snmp read only access control enabled parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP section Enable SNMP Read Only Access Table 16 3 snmp read only access control enabled Parameter Possible Values Results default false false Requests for connections to the SNMP daemon from outside the terminal are not checked against the read only access list true Requests for connections to the SNMP daemon from outside the terminal are checked against the read only access list 2 The snmp read only access control list table contains the names of all hosts with read only access to SNMP variables Setup Change Setup Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 5 Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP Parameters Access Control SNMP section SNMP Read Only Access Control List If read only access control is enabled only hosts in the table have read only access to the terminal Table 16 4 snmp read only access control list Parameter Table Entries Possible Values Resu
562. ssible Values Result default tftpboot or usr tftpboot directory_path The directory for X server downloading using NFS The default X server loading sequence automatically loads the first X server it finds in the mounted NFS directory If you do not specify a mount point the Boot Monitor loads the first X server it finds in the default directory tftpboot or ust tftpboot As with TFTP booting you can boot an X server in another directory by symbolically linking one of the default directory pathnames to the true location of the X server Linking X Server Files on page 4 14 describes using symbolic links for X server directory pathnames When using NFS for X server download each directory involved in the linkage between the default pathname and the actual X server image location must be exported If any directory is non exportable the read operation fails and an error message such as the following results Failed to mount usr nfs load If the Boot Monitor succeeds in mounting the directory containing the X server image messages such as the following result oading initial file usr nfs load Xncdhmx oading final file usr tftpboot Xncdhmx Linking X Server Files If X servers are located in directories other than the default or specified directory such as subdirectories of the default TFTP directory you need links between the pathnames used in the default loading sequence and the actual
563. ssuing Commands to the Boot Monitor You can type the Boot Monitor commands listed in Table 11 2 after the prompt gt Follow each command by a carriage return Table 11 2 Boot Monitor Commands Command Function bd file Boots the specified X server file via MOP If file is not specified boots the file identified in the NCP database on the host system for the terminal bl Boots the X server stored in the NCD terminal s local file system bn file NCD_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask Boots the terminal from the network using NFS You can specify the X server image file file the IP address of the terminal NCD_IP and the IP address of the host host_IP For example bn Xnedhmx 192 43 153 225 192 43 153 23 If you are specifying either the host or the IP address you must specify both and specify the filename If you are booting through a gateway supply the address of the gateway gateway_IP and the subnet mask subnet_mask if any If you do not specify a complete pathname a default value of tftpboot is used Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 7 Using Boot Monitor Commands Table 11 2 Boot Monitor Commands Continued Command Function bt file NCD_IP host_IP gateway_IP subnet_mask Boots the terminal from the network using TFTP You can specify the X server image file file the IP address of the terminal NCD_IP and the IP address of the host
564. sted by the NFS client nfs file rename requests Link Create Requests Number of NFS Create Link nfs link create requests operations requested by the NFS client Symlink Create Number of NFS Create Symbolic nfs symlink create requests Requests Link operations requested by the NFS client Directory Create Requests Number of NFS Create Directory operations requested by the NFS client nfs directory create requests Directory Remove Requests Number of NFS Remove Directory operations requested by the NFS client nfs directory remove requests Directory Contents Requests Number of NFS Read Directory operations requested by the NFS client nfs directory contents requests 10 14 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes NFS Field Description Corresponding Parameter Get File System Stats Number of NFS Stat File System nfs get file system stats Requests operations requested by the NFS requests client Server NFS section Null Requests Number of NFS read directory nfs received null requests operations received by the terminal Get Attributes Requests Number of NFS create directory operations received by the terminal nfs received get attributes requests Set Attributes Requests Number of NFS set attribute operations received by the terminal nfs received set attributes requests Get Root Requests Number
565. sword required for read write access to the user preferences daemon config pref read write password Enforce User Preferences Passwords Locally A password is required to access user preferences information from the terminal config pref enforce passwords locally Console section Console Display Password Password for displaying the Console write only config console display password Enforce Console Password Locally Password for accessing the Console locally config console enforce password locally SNMP section SNMP Read Only Community The first community name for SNMP requests for read only access to configuration information snmp read only community SNMP Read Only Alternative Community The second community name for SNMP read only access to configuration information snmp read only community alt 9 10 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Access Control Field Description Corresponding Parameter Enable SNMP Read Only Access Control Remote requests for connections to the SNMP daemon are checked against the read only host access control list snmp read only access control enabled SNMP Read Only Access Control List Hosts allowed to use an SNMP read only community name to access configuration information snmp read only access control list SNMP Read Write Community The first communi
566. t Request server if the boot server does not request respond TFTP Directory Directory to be searched for an X boot tftp directory server when TFTP is the boot source NFS Directory Directory to be searched for an X boot nfs directory server when NFS is the boot source NCDnet Boot Options section Try MOP Include MOP as a boot source boot mop DECnet networks only Try MOP with File Include MOP as a boot source and boot mop with file name Name specify a filename DECnet networks Using Configuration Menus 9 15 Using Change Setup Parameters Browser Parameters The parameters in the Browser hide box affect the NCD Mosaic Browser Browser Fields Description Corresponding Parameter General section Browser Module Browser module loaded at boot browser module time Environment Variables Browser variables browser environment Cache Size Limit KB Maximum size of the memory browser cache size cache Maximum TCP IP Maximum number of concurrent browser max connections connections TCP IP connections User Preference Overrides section Automatically load Enables automatic loading of browser auto load images images images when a new Web page is loaded Jscript Javascript Enables execution of JavaScript browser jscript active routines routines when Web pages are loaded Java applets Enables execution of Java applets browser java applets when included in the Web contents Show
567. t Alternatives References Address Resolution Service The terminal uses ARP for address Add entries manually Configuring the ARP resolution Entries are added to the to the ARP table Cache Resolved Addresses on page 5 5 Name Service The terminal uses IEN 116 protocol for name service unless NVRAM is set to factory defaults and BOOTP DHCP supplies name server information Use DNS instead of IEN 116 Configure the local name cache manually The terminal uses the boot host as the name server host Specify other name servers The fully qualified domain name must be specified when referring to network hosts Specify the domain name suffix Using a Name Service on page 5 7 The terminal does not send a reverse name request to discover its own hostname when it boots Configure the terminal to send a reverse name request Name cache parameters are set to their default values Redefine the name cache parameter values Using a Name Service on page 5 7 Configuring Network Services 5 3 Summary of Network Service Defaults and Alternatives Table 5 1 Default Network Services and Alternatives Continued Default Alternatives References File Service File service is from the boot host Specify initial file Configuring How a servers Terminal Accesses Files 7 on page 5 13 Configure the file service table to add other hosts an
568. t Time By default the Boot Monitor prompt appears when attempts to load an X server are unsuccessful To configure the terminal to continue attempting to boot until it succeeds set the boot persistent loading parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters Booting gt Persist in Loading This parameter is saved in NVRAM Table 4 7 boot persistent loading Parameter Possible Values Result default false false The Boot Monitor displays its prompt if all download attempts are unsuccessful true The Boot Monitor does not display its prompt if all attempts to load an X server are unsuccessful It keeps trying the default or specified download sequence until you interrupt the process Booting xX Server Loading 4 7 Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence Configuring the Sequence of X Server Loading Methods The default sequence of methods for finding and loading an X server is configured into NVRAM at the factory to allow the terminal to load an X server the first time it is powered on The Boot Monitor tries these methods in the following order 1 TFTP 2 MOP 3 NFS 4 The local file system on a PCMCIA card If a PCMCIA card is installed NVRAM values are set to their default values and the terminal has not booted from the network the default order is 1 The local file system on the PCMCIA card 2 TFTP 3 MOP 4 NFS When booting over a Token Ring network the MOP bo
569. t address at next boot Next Boot the next time it boots Using Configuration Menus 9 5 Using Change Quick Setup Network Field Description Corresponding Parameter Default router for terminals on a ncdnet default router DECnet network NCDnet Router Address List of name server hosts for ncdnet name servers terminals on a DECnet network NCDnet Name Servers Session Parameters The Session hide box contains parameters that start the initial local clients for the user s session Session Field X Session XDM DECwindows Hostname Description Login host for the XDM login banner Terminal Session Type Type of terminal emulation for users logging in through a terminal emulator XRemote Session Start Window Manager Starts the window manager when a user logs in through XRemote Corresponding Parameter exec startup commands 9 6 Using Configuration Menus Using Change Setup Parameters Using Change Setup Parameters Change Setup Parameters provides access to all terminal configuration parameters It is especially useful for setting configuration parameters when you have a few easily accessible terminals or when users set some or all configuration parameters themselves Procedures for configuring terminals using Change Setup Parameters are described in the System Administrator s Guide By default you access Change Setup Parameters th
570. t arguments 18 44 X Server Messages FILED Messages BADNUMARGS invalid number of arguments Severity Error Explanation An incorrect number of arguments was given with the command User Action Retype the command with the correct number of arguments BADPASSWD incorrect password entered FORMATABORT Severity Warning Explanation The password that has been entered for the local file system is incorrect User Action Confirm that you are using the correct password for access to the local file system format aborted no data changed Severity Information Explanation The user entered the format command but then entered no in response to the Proceed with format prompt In response the FILED module aborted the formatting process User Action None FORMATFAILED failed to format local action message Severity Error Explanation The Local File Manager could not perform the specified action when it attempted to format the PCMCIA card This situation occurs if d The PCMCIA card is inserted incorrectly d The PCMCIA card is write protected 1 The user has read only access to the local file system Read only access occurs with One Time Programmable OTP cards and with cards that the X server does not support User Action Verify that the PCMCIA card is seated properly in its slot the write protect switch on the PCMCIA card is write enabled and the card is supported by the current version of t
571. t option option message Severity Error Explanation The reporting module cannot use the specified socket option for the reason given User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support BADLISTEN unable to listen on protocol socket message Severity Error Explanation The reporting module is unable to listen for network connections User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 8 X Server Messages Messages Common to All Modules BADNET client unknown network message Severity Error Explanation The specified client could not create a connection to the specified transport This situation usually occurs with the DECwindows login client User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support BADREAD read error on file message BADREFCNT BADS Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot read the specified file for the reason given User Action Verify that d The filename is specified correctly The file service table contains an entry for the specified file d The file has read access resource bad reference count n Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot reconcile the reference count for the specified resource This message typically appears when the reference count should be zero because no one is using the resource but the reported count is gre
572. table entries when trying to access a file Table 5 20 file try all matches on open Parameter Possible Values Result default false false The terminal tries only the longest matches true The terminal tries all matching pathnames beginning with the longest match The two methods of matching are explained in more detail in the following subsections Trying Only the Longest Matches By default the terminal tries only the longest matches For example assume that the pathname of a font requested by a client program is usr lib X11 ncd fonts pcf 100dpi 10x20 pcf and the file service table contains the following local mount points usr lib X11 nced usr lib X11 nced usr lib X11 nced usr The first three local mount points match the request The terminal tries the hosts in the order in which they are listed in the file service table until it succeeds in opening the font file You may wish to have several longest matches to ensure that the terminal can always find the font or other data it needs Trying All Matches If the terminal is configured to try all matches the terminal first finds all the matches After finding all the matching paths the terminal sorts the mount points by length and tries the longest path first If the file is not found there the next longest is tried and so on The root directory matches any request Configuring Network Services 5 19 Configuring How a Terminal Accesses F
573. tal number of segments sent including those on current connections but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets tcp packets transmitted 10 22 Statistics Menus Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes TCP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Packets Retransmitted Total number of segments retransmitted transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets tcp packets retransmitted Ack Packets Received Number of packets received that contained no data only the ACK flag turned on tcp ack packets received Ack Only Packets Transmitted Number of packets transmitted that acknowledged one or more octets of unacknowledged data tcp ack only packets transmitted Packets with Errors Received Total number of segments received in error such as bad TCP checklists tcp packets with errors received Keepalive Packets Number of TCP keepalive tcp keepalive packets Transmitted packets transmitted transmitted Reset Packets Number of segments sent tcp reset packets transmitted Transmitted containing the RST flag Connection Table Table listing TCP connections including local and remote IP addresses and ports and the state of the connection tcp connection table Statistics Menus 10 23 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes TCP IP Name Service Statistics The parameters in this hide box report st
574. tal resolution vertical resolution and average width Outline font names look similar to the following courier 0 0 0 0 m 0 Specifying Fonts for Clients You can specify fonts for a client as X resources or in the client s command line with the fn option When specifying a font you must use the XLFD font name with or without wildcards The following examples show font specifications in a resource setting and in a command line xterm boldfont adobe courier bold r normal 20 140 100 100 m 110 is08859 1 7 4 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server Font Use Overview xterm fn adobe courier bold r normal 20 140 100 100 m 110 is08859 1 If you are using a font name with asterisks in a command line the font name must be surrounded by single quotes to prevent the UNIX shell from interpreting the asterisks For example xterm fn courier bold r normal 20 140 For outline fonts you must provide a well formed font name in the font specification A well formed font name contains all 14 hyphens specified in the XLFD convention Wildcards are permitted for any field For example this is not a well formed name because it does not contain all 14 hyphens helvetica bold o 120 This is a well formed name x courier 0 0 0 0 m 0 Obtaining Fonts The NCDware distribution includes the full set of fonts in the MIT X Window
575. ted to 64 characters TFTP Order Backspace through the existing value then type a number specifying the order NFS Order in which the terminal should attempt file transfer protocols 1 for first 2 for second 3 for third 4 for fourth Type D if the transfer method is disabled The MOP Order default order is 1 TFTP 2 MOP 3 NFS and 4 local If a PCMCIA card is installed the default order is 1 local 2 TFTP 3 MOP and 4 NFS LOCAL Order 1 The Boot File TFTP Boot Directory andNFS Boot Directory items must have a combined length of 128 or fewer characters 2 The Config File UNIX Config Directory andNCDnet Config Directory items must have a combined length of 166 or fewer characters Finishing the Boot Monitor Setup Session To save parameter settings restore old settings reboot the terminal or return to the Boot Monitor use the Done menu item which displays a Done window The items in the Done window are described in Table 11 5 Table 11 5 Boot Monitor Setup s Done Window Window Item Action Reboot Saves parameter settings to NVRAM and reboots after you press Return Exit Saves parameter settings to NVRAM and exits to the Boot Monitor prompt gt after you press Return Undo Restores the original parameters after you press Return Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 17 Using Boot Monitor Setup Menus to Configure Terminals Programmi
576. ted to a left modifier 17 12 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions N 101 Keyboard Details N 101 Keyboard Details NCD has two US types of 101 key keyboards the N 101 and the English US type The English US is the same as the IBM PS 2 and the Windows 95 compatible except for three Windows specific keys Figure 17 2 illustrates the legends and keycodes for the N 101 type The English US and Windows 95 compatible keyboards differ from the N 101 keyboard illustrated in Figure 17 2 as follows The Caps Lock and Ctrl keys are swapped The Line Feed key bears the legend Print Screen The Break key bears the legend Scroll Lock The Setup key bears the legend Pause Break The Return key bears the legend Enter The Option key bears the label Ctrl The Windows 95 keyboard has three additional keys two Windows keys and one menu key OCOC C 0 O Table 17 3 lists the N 101 and English US keysyms when default mapping is in effect The 101 key keyboards have three LEDs Their default values are LED1 Net on all HMX series X1 on all Explora series LED2 Caps LED3 Num To access the Boot Monitor from an N 101 keyboard when the X server is running use the Ctrl Left Alt Setup key combination To access the Boot Monitor from the 102 key English US IBM PS2 and Windows 95 compatible versions use CapsLock Left Alt Setup Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 13 N
577. terminal after the last client closes Note The reset process is irreversible You cannot change to another reset level after resetting the terminal The syntax of ncdreset is nedreset v v c community r reset_level hostname where V Prints version information for the program on the standard output Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 11 Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot v Prints a message on the standard output when the terminal is actually reset c community Is the community name If the community name is not the default manager you must supply the community name hostname Is the hostname of the terminal being reset r reset_level Is the reset level The values are 1 Establishes an SNMP connection without resetting the terminal 2 Restarts the X session 3 Reboots the terminal when the last client closes This is the default reset level 4 Reboots the terminal immediately For example the following command reboots the terminal when the last client closes and prints a message on the standard output when the terminal resets nedreset v r3 nedu203 Using unit administrative status for SNMP Remote Reset The unit administrative status remote configuration parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Unit Administrative Status both displays the SNMP administrative status of terminals and provides for immediate or delayed resetting of terminals from a remote location Use of unit admi
578. terminals only DPS Overview The DPS X server module allows PostScript applications to display their output on NCD terminals Such local servicing of DPS requests speeds application processing and reduces host and network loading NCD s DPS extension is based on Adobe s Display PostScript Level 2 software supports true WYSIWYG two dimensional graphics and provides access to all Type 1 Scaled Font Libraries The Display PostScript imaging model is device independent allowing graphics to look the same on any supported platform An application that uses Display PostScript works and appears the same on all supported platforms without modification of the application Display PostScript performs the following functions 1 Allows applications to scale rotate and render text graphics and scanned images at any angle 1 Scales fonts to any point size Configuring Display PostScript 13 1 DPS Requirements Q Automatically adjusts the colors appearing in color graphics and scanned images on monochrome or grayscale monitors or on monitors with limited color selections LI Renders graphics that use B zier curves LI Allows users to import and display Encapsulated PostScript EPS files in applications that support this format LY Automatically adjusts output to the current screen resolution so that an application looks the same on any screen D Allows easy porting of application programs to other DPS environments NCDware incl
579. teways on page 5 25 0 The system administrator entering routes into the table manually Manual changes to the routing table take effect immediately The IP routing table is defined in the ip routing table parameter Change Setup Parameters gt IP gt Routing Table Routing table entries include read only 5 26 Configuring Network Services Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks values which you cannot modify as well as read write values The entries in each row of the routing table are defined in Table 5 28 Entries with the destination 0 0 0 0 are created from the ip initial default gateway 1 and ip initial default gateway 2 parameter settings Table 5 28 ip routing table Parameter Table Entry Possible Values Result Field Type destination default 0 0 0 0 read write 0 0 0 0 The entry is one of the default gateways IP address or Address of the host network or name of the hostname host gateway default 0 0 0 0 read write IP address or The IP address of the next hop on this route hostname If the route is bound to an interface that is realized through a broadcast medium this field contains the agent s IP address on the interface preference default 0 read write 0 The midpoint of the preference range integer Determines which route is preferred when there are multiple routes to a destination Router discovery messages convey this information dynamically otherwise you ca
580. the default of 20 EQ requesting font on server font_server font FSRI FSR Severity Information Explanation The X server is requesting the specified font from the specified font server User Action None EFOTIMEOUT timed out in servicing request from font server Severity Warning Explanation The X server requested a font from a font server but the response time exceeded the time limit specified for response from the font server User Action Verify that the font server is running that it is accessible via the network and that the request time out limit specifies a reasonable amount of time ESETCONN resetting connection to font server font_server Severity Information Explanation The X server is resetting status information such as dpi as requested User Action None X Server Messages 18 53 FONT Messages LIST listing fonts on pattern font_pattern Severity Information Explanation The X server is listing fonts that match the specified pattern as requested User Action None LISTINFO listing fonts with info on pattern font_pattern Severity Information Explanation The X server is listing fonts that match the specified pattern and providing additional information as requested User Action None LOSTCONNECTION lost connection to font server font_server Severity Error Explanation The connection to the font server failed User Action Veri
581. the keysyms are set added to or removed from the indicated modifier list The modifier list is actually constructed at the end of all keyboard file processing so that it can use the final keysym table values modifier remove MODIFIER LISTofKEYSYM Removes a key from the modifier list modifier clear MODIFIER Clears the existing list click LISTofKEYSYM Specifies keys that should click when pressed and clears any already existing list of clickable keys Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 57 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Table 17 8 Keyboard Description File Statements Continued Statement Keyword Value Description click add LISTofKEYSYM Specifies additional keys that should click without clearing the click list click remove LISTofKEYSYM Removes a key from the click list click clear Clears the existing list lock LISTofKEYSYM Specifies keysyms that should ignore release events requiring a second press for release By default all keys with keysyms with the word lock are locking lock add LISTofKEYSYM Specifies additional keys that should lock without clearing the lock list lock remove LISTofKEYSYM Removes a key from the lock list latch LISTofKEYSYM Specifies keysyms that are treated as latching with a release that is delayed until the next key is released By default the Mod
582. the range of 0 4 User Action Check the syntax and usage of the LED command in line n 18 60 X Server Messages KBM Messages KEYCODERANGE Line n keycodes must be in the range of 0 to 254 instead of key_n Severity Error Explanation At linen the keycode key_n must be in the correct range of 0 to 254 User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keycode definition statement in line n KEYSYMLISTEMPTY Line n provided keysym list is empty Severity Error Explanation You must provide at least one keysym for each of the following keyboard definition file statements modifier repeat lock latch click click add and click remove User Action Make sure that each of the statements listed has at least one keysym KEYSYMNOMEMORY Line n no memory for keysym list list Severity Error Explanation The terminal ran out of memory for the keysym list User Action Check the amount of available memory If possible close some local clients to free more memory You may need to add memory to the terminal KEYWORD Line m unknown keyword keyword Severity Error Explanation The keymapper file has an unknown command at line n User Action Check the syntax and usage of keyword in line n X Server Messages 18 61 KBM Messages MAXDEBUGKEYS Line n found debug n debug combination keys max_n maximum Severity Error Explanation At line n debug_n k
583. the terminal s TELNET and TCP ports This section explains how to change the default ports Changing Ports for Access to All Configuration Data The default TELNET and TCP ports for accessing all configuration data including user preferences are 5999 and 5979 respectively To change the TELNET port use config telnet port Setup gt Change Setup Parameters gt Configuration gt Telnet Port Number Table 6 9 config telnet port Parameter Possible Values Result default 5999 port number Access to all of the terminal s configuration data is through the TELNET port specified Range 1024 through 65535 To change the TCP port use config tcp port Setup Change Setup Parameters Configuration TCP Port Number Table 6 10 config tcp port Parameter Possible Values default Result 5979 port number Access to all of the terminal s configuration data is through the TCP port specified Range 1024 through 65535 6 28 Terminal Configuration Methods Changing the Ports for Accessing Configuration Daemons Changing Ports for Access to User Preferences Data Only The default TELNET and TCP ports for accessing user preferences data only are 5997 and 5977 respectively To change the TELNET port for the Preferences daemon use config pref telnet port Setup Change Setup Parameters gt Configuration User Preferences daemon section Telnet Port Number
584. the virtual NVRAM space q Exits the NVRAM utility and displays the Boot Monitor s prompt r Reads the entire NVRAM and places it into RAM space reserved for editing s Saves the current values of NVRAM Also calculates a new checksum before loading the values into NVRAM Sample NVRAM Utility Sessions The following examples show how to use the NVRAM utility In the NVRAM utility you enter new values in hexadecimal notation The symbols used in the examples are gt The prompt generated by the Boot Monitor gt gt The NVRAM utility prompt XX The previous values stored in NVRAM Changing Contents Byte by Byte In the following example of how to change NVRAM contents the terminal s Ethernet address is re entered after having been accidentally erased The Ethernet address is 00 00 A7 10 24 14 Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 21 Using the NVRAM Utility to Configure Terminals gt nv NVRAM Utility C D Q L R S A gt gt 004 005 006 007 008 009 OOA add change location add display contents return to monitor load defaults reload NVRAM values save new values 1 c 04 xx 00 xx 00 xx AT xx 10 xx 24 xx 14 xx q s you sure y q rs Start the NVRAM utility and type c 04 to start changing the Ethernet address the Ethernet address starts at location 0x4 Type the first pair of numbers of the Ethernet address and press Return In the same way ty
585. them from the NCDware distribution CD ROM Colormap Flash You can fix colormap flash problems by clicking in another window and then clicking in the PageView main Window Also try pressing Alt F12 when the focus is on the PageView window Configuring Display PostScript 13 15 Troubleshooting DPS 13 16 Configuring Display PostScript 14 Configuring PEX This chapter introduces PEX and describes configuring terminals for using PEX applications The following topics are covered in this chapter PEX Overview on page 14 1 PEX Requirements on page 14 3 Setting PEX Configuration Parameters on page 14 3 Specifying the Input Device for PEX on page 14 13 DOO C O Troubleshooting PEX on page 14 14 PEX is supported on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only PEX Overview The PEX extension to the X protocol provides support for 3D graphics applications Using the PEX X server module NCD terminals can display 3D drawing applications written for PEX 3D applications provide such features as 3D objects transformations floating point color and lighting Applications that use PEX include 3D drawing programs CAD computer aided design programs and scientific visualization programs When considering 3D clients to be run on NCD X terminals make sure they are based on PEX Only applications that generate the PEX protocol can access the PEX functional extensions in the PEX server As with the core X
586. this mode the keyboard driver looks at each key press as it is entered intercepting keysyms for sequences of keys that match those specified in the dead key statement The first keysym on the left of the equals sign is usually either the keysym Multi_key for Digital style triple key compose sequences or one of the dead accent keysyms listed in Table 17 10 17 60 Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Table 17 10 Dead Key Accent Keysyms Old Digital Versions New X11R6 Standard Versions Dring_acent dead_abovering dead_macron Deircumflex_accent dead_circumflex dead_breve Deedilla_accent dead_cedilla dead_abovedot Dacute_accent dead_acute dead_doubleacute Dgrave_accent dead_grave dead_caron Dtilde dead_tilde dead_ogonek Ddieresis dead_dieresis dead_iota dead_voiced_sound dead_semivoiced_sound The keysyms for accented vowels produced using dead keys differ from those used when the accent is a standalone character degree asciicircum cedilla acute grave asciitilde and dieresis When you type a dead keysym the keyboard driver delays processing of the keyboard events until it either completes a dead key sequence or encounters a non modifier keysym that does not match a sequence containing the keys typed so far If no match is found the bell rings and the delayed keyboard events are processed separately Otherwise if a ful
587. time This occurs on VESA compliant monitors only User Action None REBOOT shutting down and rebooting Severity Warning Explanation The X server is shutting down the terminal and rebooting it as requested User Action None selection selection_name stolen from console SELSTOLEN Severity Error Explanation An application is attempting to prevent other applications from requesting information from the Console User Action Modify the application that is preventing other applications from requesting information from the Console UNLOCKED screen unlocked Severity Information Explanation The X server has unlocked the terminal s screen as requested User Action None X Server Messages 18 35 DESKTOP Messages DESKTOP Messages DESKTOP messages pertain to the Java Virtual Machine JVM If you are looking for a message that refers to the DESKTOP module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 BADPORT bad port specified using default value integer Severity Warning Explanation The port that was specified for contacting the JVM is invalid and the desktop code will use the default port specified in the message User Action Make sure that you are using a valid unused socket CLONG command too long greater than 2048 bytes Severity Error Explanation The command string sent to the JVM exceeds the maximum command line length User Action
588. times a TFTP client tftp no available buffer errors Errors failed to allocate a buffer Data Packets Number of TFTP data packets the tftp data packets transmitted Transmitted TFTP client sent Statistics Menus 10 25 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes TFTP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Ack Packets Number of TFTP ACK packets sent tftp ack packets transmitted Transmitted by the TFTP client Packets Number of times a TFTP client tftp packets retransmitted Retransmitted retransmitted a TFTP packet Token Ring Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on the Token Ring interfaces Token Ring Field Interface Table Description Table of status and parameter values for an 802 5 Token Ring interface Corresponding Parameter tokring interface table Statistics Table Table of statistics for each 802 5 Token Ring interface tokring statistics table UDP Statistics The parameters in this hide box report statistics on UDP communications UDP Statistics Field Description Corresponding Parameter Packets Received Total number of UDP datagrams delivered to UDP applications udp packets received Packets Received with Errors Number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port udp packets received with errors Packets Received with
589. tion about Boot Monitor requirements Boot Monitor and NVRAM 11 1 Boot Monitor Functions Boot Monitor Functions The Boot Monitor is firmware code in the terminal s boot PROM The Boot Monitor performs many functions automatically and provides interactive access to Boot Monitor functions and to configuration information stored in NVRAM non volatile RAM Automatic Boot Monitor Functions The Boot Monitor is activated when you turn on the terminal and controls the booting process as the terminal discovers its network address and loads an X server This section describes the automatic functions that occur when you turn on or reboot the terminal The functions are listed in chronological order and described in more detail in the following subsections The Boot Monitor automatically I Displays the Boot Monitor version number and keyboard controller version number I Runs self tests including memory and network interface tests and displays the results of the self tests LI Requests or provides the terminal s IP address LI Requests and loads an X server image LI Verifies that the downloaded X server image Fits into the terminal s memory Is the correct one for the terminal model Has not been corrupted 1 Displays the progress of the download process Beginning with version 2 8 the Boot Monitor reports the size of the X server and displays a graphical bar showing the progress of the X server download
590. to map hardware scancodes of range 0 255 into X keycodes of range 8 254 Also used to make one keyboard imitate another Used by applications to convert X keycodes into keysyms Also used by the X server when internal dead key processing is enabled Keycodes are the codes assigned to the physical keys Keysyms are the actions taken when keys are pressed Dead keys are keys pressed before other key presses such as an accent and a vowel to produce an accented vowel letter as required in many European languages Sequences of keys intercepted by the keyboard driver and replaced by another key Keys that are treated as modifiers such as Shift Lock Control Mod1 5 Typical values are Shift Shift_L Shift_R Lock Caps_Lock Control Control_L Control_R The following values vary depending on the keyboard Modi Alt_L Alt R Meta L Meta_R Mod4 Num_Lock Mod5 Mode_switch Keys that click through the base speaker when pressed Keys that lock when pressed requiring a second press to release usually used with modifier keys By default all keysyms containing the name lock are locking keys Keyboards and Downloadable Keyboard Definitions 17 55 Using Downloadable Keyboard Description Files Latching list Keys that are treated as locking until the next key is released usually used with modifier keys By default the Mode_switch keysym latches Repeating list Keys that autorepeat LED actions table Maps LED number
591. tocol stack User Action Make sure that the DHCP server is responding DHCP server nnn nnn nnn nnn or any others not responding n ntil lease expires Severity Warning Explanation The terminal is unable to renew its IP address lease User Action Make sure that the DHCP server is responding X Server Messages 18 37 DIAGD Messages DIAGD Messages DIAGD module messages pertain to the Diagnostic daemon If you are looking for a message that refers to the DIAGD module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 STAMP days hours minutes seconds Severity Information Explanation When the Console Messages Time Stamp feature is active the DIAGD module time stamps messages using the specified format The time reported is the elapsed time since the last boot of the X server User Action None DOS Messages This section lists the X server messages generated by the DOS module These messages pertain to use of a local file system on a floppy drive If you are looking for a message that refers to the DOS module but does not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 ALLOCERR not enough sectors allocated for file Severity Error Explanation The file is corrupted User Action Reformat or replace the floppy disk CORRUPT Corrupted file system detected message Severity Error Explanation The X server detected invalid file system
592. tor and NVRAM for more information D Setting the boot tcpip second server and boot tcpip third server parameters Setup Change Setup Parameters Booting TCP IP Boot Options 4 16 Booting X Server Loading Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor section Secondary TCP IP Server and Tertiary TCP IP Server Set either or both of the following parameters and save them in NVRAM Table 4 14 boot tcpip second server Parameter Possible Values Default default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 There is no designated second boot host IP address or If the primary boot host is unavailable the terminal hostname attempts to boot from the specified host Table 4 15 boot tcpip third server Parameter Possible Values Default default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 There is no designated third boot host IP address or If the primary and secondary boot hosts are unavailable the hostname terminal attempts to boot from the specified host Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor You can boot a terminal manually from the Boot Monitor prompt gt This is useful if m m m m There is no address determination protocol on the boot host You want to boot from a host other than the normal boot host You want to load a different X server from the one normally loaded by the terminal The terminal cannot locate an X server You can invoke the Boot Monitor by pressing the Escape key while address requests are be
593. ts Packet Transmission Requests Discarded Number of output datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent transmission but were discarded anyway for example for lack of buffer space includes datagrams counted in ip packets forwarded if such packets met this discretionary discard criterion ip packet transmission requests discarded Packet Transmission Requests without Routes Number of datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Includes any packets counted in ip packets forwarded that met this criterion including datagrams that a host cannot route because its default gateways are down ip packet transmission requests without routes Packet Reassembly Timeout Maximum number of seconds that the terminal holds fragments awaiting reassembly ip packet reassembly timeout Statistics Menus 10 7 Contents of the Statistics Hide Boxes IP Field Description Corresponding Parameter Packet Reassemblies Required Number of IP fragments received that need to be reassembled at the terminal ip packet reassemblies required Packet Reassemblies Completed Number of datagrams successfully reassembled ip packet reassemblies completed Packet Reassemblies Number of failures detected by the IP ip packet reassemblies not Not Completed reassembly algorithm completed Packet Number of datagra
594. ts with read write access to SNMP variables Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP Read Write Access Control List If read write access control is enabled only hosts in the table have read write access to the terminal Table 16 2 snmp read write access control list Parameter Table Entries host Possible Values default Results empty list hostname or IP address The network name or address of a host granted read write access to the terminal s SNMP daemon Note To disallow read write access by all hosts leave the table empty and make sure snmp read write access control enabled is set to true 16 4 Using SNMP for Terminal Management Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP 3 A community name must be specified in SNMP requests to obtain read write access to the terminal s configuration information when access control is enabled You can specify up to two community names A community string is a string of alphanumeric characters of arbitrary length Set the first community name in Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP Read Write Community Set the second community name in Setup gt Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP Read Write Alternative Community Configuring Read Only Access A host with read only access to a terminal s MIB variables is called a monitor The default is to allow any host read only acce
595. tup Parameters Access Control Unit Global Password For more information about setting a global password see the System Administrator s Guide For information about the special area in NVRAM for saving passwords and certain other strings see Chapter 11 Boot Monitor and NVRAM Except for the community names the parameters described in the following procedures are not saved in NVRAM Using SNMP for Terminal Management 16 3 Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP Configuring Read Write Access A host with read write access to a terminal s MIB variables is called a manager You can establish a list of hosts allowed to access the terminal or prevent access from all hosts Access control is disabled by default To establish read write access control to a terminal s SNMP variables 1 To establish access control set the snmp read write access control enabled parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control Enable SNMP Read Write Access Control Table 16 1 snmp read write access control enabled Parameter Possible Values Results default false false Requests for connections to the SNMP daemon from outside the terminal are not checked against the read write access list true Requests for connections to the SNMP daemon from outside the terminal are checked against the read write access list 2 The snmp read write access control list table contains the names of all hos
596. tus Severity Error Explanation The X server has detected the specified XMDCP error User Action Use the information contained in the message to determine the best course of action XDMCPNOBROADCAST unable to set broadcast option on XDMCP socket Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot set the broadcast option for XDMCP requests for service User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support XDMCPNOSOCKET unable to create protocol socket for XDMCP Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot create the required socket for XDMCP communications User Action If you encounter this message check the XDM error logging file xdm error If you need additional assistance please contact NCD Technical Support XSESSFIND asking host host to find a protocol login host Severity Information Explanation When the X server issues indirect requests for login services it asks an intermediate host to locate a host offering login services This message 18 80 X Server Messages MIRRORD Messages indicates that the X server is asking the specified indirect host to locate a system offering login services using the specified protocol User Action None XSESSREQ asking host host for protocol session Severity Information Explanation The X server is requesting login services from the specified host using the specified protocol usually either XDMCP or DECwindows
597. ty Error Explanation The local print device is unable to accept more data at this time User Action Keep trying to send the data If the problem persists please contact Technical Support DFILECMDFAIL failed to init transfer of data file to remote queue Severity Fatal Explanation The LPD on the remote print server did not accept the Receive Data File command User Action Make sure that the network and the remote print server are operational If so try the print job again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support DATAXFERFAIL failed to transfer data to remote queue Severity Fatal Explanation The terminal was unable to transfer all the print data to the remote print server User Action Make sure that the network and the remote print server are operational If so try the print job again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support 18 100 X Server Messages PRINTAPIS Messages DATAXFERCMPLTFAIL failed to complete transfer of data file to remote queue Severity Fatal Explanation The end of data transmission was not acknowledged User Action Make sure that the network and the remote print server are operational If so try the print job again If the problem persists please contact Technical Support GBMALLOCFAIL malloc of print buffer size bytes for print gather buffer failed GBREALLOCOK LOSTCONN LPDCONNI ECT Severity Fat
598. ty name for SNMP requests for read write access to configuration information snmp read write community SNMP Read Write Alternative Community The second community name for SNMP read write access to configuration information snmp read write community alt Enable SNMP Read Write Access Control Remote requests for connection to the SNMP daemon are checked against the read write host access control list snmp read write access control enabled SNMP Read Write Access Control List Hosts allowed to use an SNMP read write community name to access configuration information snmp read write access control list Allow SNMP Reset Enables remote reset via SNMP snmp allow reset SNMP Trap Monitors Hosts to which SNMP traps are sent snmp trap monitors NCDnet MOP section MOP Reset Password Password included in the MOP ncdnet mop reset password reset packet Diagnostic Daemon section Enable Diagnostic Remote requests for access to the diag access control enabled Access Control Diagnostic daemon are checked against the access control list Diagnostic Access Control List Hosts that can access the Diagnostic daemon diag access control list Using Configuration Menus 9 11 Using Change Setup Parameters Access Control Field Description Corresponding Parameter NFS section NFS Server Access Default access control policy for file nfs access
599. ude file file that is referred to in the main file User Action None READINGFILE Reading file file Severity Information Explanation Reports the full pathname of the file being read User Action None SCANCODERANGE Line n scancodes must be in the range of 0 to 255 instead of scan_n Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode scan_n is not in the range of 0 to 255 User Action Check the syntax and usage of the scancode command in line n X Server Messages 18 65 KBM Messages SETUPDISABLE SUBNOSYMBOL Setup operation disabled Severity Warning Explanation Reports that keyboard access to the Setup menus has been disabled User Action Verify that the menu access was disabled intentionally Line n cannot substitute NoSymbol keysym Severity Error Explanation At line n the keysym command cannot make a substitute of NoSymbol which is a default User Action Select another keysym TOOFEWKEYSYMS Line n not enough keysyms provided Severity Error Explanation At line n the deadkey command has too few keysyms User Action Correct the keyboard description file deadkey command TOOMANYKEYCODE Line n too many keycodes found key_n Severity Error Explanation At line n the scancode command has key_n keycodes which is more than the maximum of 256 User Action Check the syntax and usage of the keyboard definition state
600. udes the following components for DPS DPS X server modules For information on managing X server modules see Chapter 4 Booting xX Server Loading and the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems LI DPS support files For information on support files see Using DPS Support Files on page 13 3 I Adobe font files For information on DPS fonts see Configuring DPS Font Access by X Clients on page 13 11 DPS Requirements The requirements for using DPS on an NCD terminal are 1 Using DPS requires a valid license To add a DPS node license to a terminal s configuration use the unit license key parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters Licenses gt License Key If the terminal has more than one node license include one instance of this parameter for each license key This parameter is saved in NVRAM After adding the DPS license reboot the terminal so that the X server can read the PostScript resource file If you are using site licensing or floating licenses see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems for instructions 1 Additional terminal memory may be required For information on the amount of terminal memory required to use DPS see the Release Notes 13 2 Configuring Display PostScript Using DPS Support Files 1 You must use NFS Network File Service as the file transfer protocol for DPS See Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services for infor
601. ued by the Configuration daemon m m Informational message The module performed the activity successfully CONFIGD I IPADDR IP address for this unit 192 40 50 12 Warning message The module may have completed some but not all of the requested activity CONFIGD W BADPASSWD incorrect password entered Error message The module did not complete the requested activity but is attempting to continue CONFIGD E GATEWAYBADNET gateway 89 0 0 1 is not on local net Fatal message The module did not complete the requested activity and cannot continue CONFIGD F INITUI unable to initialize user interfac You should take steps to resolve messages with severity levels E and F Contact NCD Technical Support if you need assistance X Server Messages 18 3 Displaying Messages Displaying Messages You can display current messages in the Console or by connecting to the terminal s Diagnostic daemon using TELNET Viewing Messages in the Console Window You can see current messages by opening the Messages hide box 1 Inthe Console click on Messages 2 To see more messages scroll through messages in the window or enlarge the window Console Clear Messages clears messages from the message area Console Rescan Messages redisplays messages that were cleared previously Viewing Messages through TELNET You can see current messages by connecting directly to the diagnostic module through a TELNET
602. uration Language baud rate in row 1 of the serial interfaces table while other values in the row retain their current values serial interfaces table 1l baud rate 9600 In contrast the following assignment defines the baud rate and resets the other parameters in the row to their default values serial interfaces table 1 baud rate 9600 Specify an empty table or empty row in a table as follows D Empty row in a table table row number I Empty table table or table For example config access control list config access control list 2 Types of Values The following list describes the types of values used in remote configuration parameters T Strings The keywords null or nil indicate that the parameter has no value String values that contain embedded white space must be surrounded by double or single quotation marks or LI Integers To specify integer values use decimal or hexadecimal notation I The keyword default All parameters accept the keyword default which assigns the default value to the parameter For example the following assignments have the same effect boot automatically default boot automatically true 1 Boolean values For parameters that have Boolean values you can use the value pairs yes no on off or true false For example the following assignments are equivalent boot autom
603. uration Language Remote configuration files and interactive remote configuration through a TELNET connection use a common language For details about the language and assignment statements see The Configuration Language on page 6 8 Default Configuration Values The default configuration of an NCD terminal is a combination of settings in the terminal s NVRAM and settings in the X server X server settings take effect after the X server is loaded and executed Default configuration values allow the terminal to run with a minimum of configuration effort Some default values change during operations as a result 6 2 Terminal Configuration Methods Configuration Methods Overview of network operations and the status of processes For more information about default and optional values for specific parameters see the alphabetical listing of configuration parameters in the Remote Configuration Parameter Quick Reference Configuration Methods The methods of configuring NCD terminals are Remote configuration files NCD terminals can download configuration files from network host computers Values in a downloaded configuration file override the default values in NVRAM and the X server Some parameters in remote configuration files can be written to NVRAM thus altering the values read from NVRAM the next time the terminal boots Remote configuration files are described in Creating Remote Configuration Files on page 6
604. ut do not appear here see Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 access point error Severity Error Explanation The software detected an error reported by the Access Point Usually the LAN adapter is restarted in an attempt to recover from this error User Action Make sure that the terminal and Access Point are properly configured and that there are enough Access Points to provide adequate coverage of the area If the problem persists please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support antenna status change Severity Information Explanation Displayed on a terminal with a RangeLAN 7200 LAN adapter installed when the terminal detects a change in the antenna status User Action Make sure the antenna is securely attached to the LAN adapter card If the message persists please contact your service personnel or NCD Technical Support antenna connected Severity Information Explanation Displayed on a terminal with a RangeLAN 7200 LAN adapter installed when the antenna is reconnected User Action None 18 128 X Server Messages WIRELESS Messages ANTDIS antenna disconnected Severity Information Explanation Displayed on a terminal with a RangeLAN 7200 LAN adapter installed when the terminal detects that the antenna is disconnected User Action Make sure that the antenna is securely attached to the LAN adapter card If the message persists please contact your service personnel
605. ut of a keyboard that has keys labelled with their keycaps and the functions called actions or translations assigned to them The Keymap Editor allows you to change the actions or translations For detailed information about using the Keymap Editor see the System Administrator s Guide If you are changing key translations using X resources instead of the Keymap Editor note that you can specify key translations using more than one modifier for example Shift Lock F1 The keymap action keymap name changes keypress translations while the terminal emulator is running This action takes a single string argument that names a resource for dynamically defining a new translation table The resource name is derived by appending the string Keymap to name The keymap argument None restores the original translation table The following example shows how the keymap action can be used to add special keys for entering commonly typed expressions 12 4 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus NCDterm Translations override lt Key gt F12 keymap dbx NCDterm dbxKeymap translations lt Key gt F14 keymap None n lt Key gt F17 string next string 0x0d n lt Key gt F18 string step string 0x0d n lt Key gt F19 string continue string 0x0d Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus The NCD Terminal Emulator window provides the same featu
606. ution in both outline and AFM formats Table 13 1 Adobe Ouiline Fonts for Display PostScript Font Family Additional Typefaces Helvetica Bold Oblique Bold Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique Bold Oblique Times Roman Bold Italic Bold Italic Courier Bold Oblique Bold Oblique New Century SchoolBook Bold Italic Bold Italic Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique Demi Oblique Bookman Demi Italic Demi Italic Palatino Bold Italic Bold Italic Zapf Chancery Zapf Dingbats Symbol 13 8 Configuring Display PostScript Adobe Fonts for DPS Table 13 2 lists the fonts included in the distribution in prebuilt bitmap format Table 13 2 Bitmap Fonts for Display PostScript Font Family Additional Typefaces Helvetica Bold Oblique Bold Oblique Times Roman Bold Italic Bold Italic Courier Bold Oblique Bold Oblique New Century SchoolBook Bold Italic Bold Italic Palatino Bold Italic Bold Italic Symbol Table 13 3 lists the default font locations Table 13 3 Default Locations of Adobe Fonts Font Path Type 1 outline fonts usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts pfa AFM font files usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts AFM afm Prebuilt fonts usr lib X11 ncd dps prebuilts bepf Configuring Display PostScript 13 9 Configuring the DPS Resource Path Configuring the DPS Resource Path The dps resource path remote configuration
607. ve the output from the Imgrd daemon containing messages sent to the log file The error log file is specified when starting the license server For more information see the NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems NCD Technical Support needs the information contained in the log file to assist in diagnosing problems X Server Messages 18 67 LICENSE Messages For messages that refer to the LICENSE module but do not appear here refer to Messages Common to All Modules on page 18 7 Additional information about FLEXIm messages is contained in the FLEXIm End User Manual ATTEMPTCON Requesting feature license from ncdlicense at host_IP Severity Information Explanation The X server is trying to obtain a license for feature from the license daemon running on host_ip User Action None BADFEATMASK Received packet with wrong feature or request Severity Error Explanation The terminal sent a request to ncdlicense which responded with the wrong feature or request User Action Try again If the problem persists contact NCD Technical Support BADLICENSE invalid license string license_string Severity Error Explanation The license string license_string is invalid User Action Correct the license string in the remote configuration file NVRAM or the license dat file For floating and site licenses you must use the Imreread utility to instruct the terminal to reread the license dat
608. ver cannot set the specified parameter for the reason given User Action If you encounter this message please contact NCD Technical Support 18 18 X Server Messages CONFIGD Messages BADVALUE line n value value is invalid for parameter parameter CLASSLOAD Severity Error Explanation The value specified for the parameter on the given line is incorrect This message usually occurs when the parameter accepts only specific choices and the value entered is not one of the acceptable choices User Action Verify the acceptable values for the specified parameter loading java class file into memory CLASSLOADFA Severity Information Explanation The Java class files are being loaded User Action None IL failed to cache java class file into memory reason Severity Error Explanation The classes zip file could not be loaded into memory This would improve Java performance User Action Make sure the terminal has enough memory and that the file is accessible through the file service table DIRNAMETOOLONG directory name directory is too long DOMAIN DNS Severity Error Explanation The specified directory name exceeds the maximum acceptable length for directory names User Action Keep the directory name to 255 or fewer characters If necessary assign a logical on the host system so that the name is within the acceptable range default domain name for this unit domain_name Severity Inform
609. vered in this chapter DCOUUCCUOCCUC E Other Sources of Information on the Terminal Emulator on page 12 1 Configuring Local Services in the Terminal Host Chooser on page 12 2 Configuring a Terminal for Serial Terminal Emulation on page 12 3 Configuring Key Translations on page 12 4 Configuring the Terminal Emulator Window and Menus on page 12 5 Configuring the Window Disconnect Delay on page 12 12 Configuring the Answer Back Message on page 12 12 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences on page 12 13 Using Keyboard Escape Sequences on page 12 34 Using Compose Key Sequences on page 12 44 VT320 Character Coding Conventions on page 12 51 Other Sources of Information on the Terminal Emulator This chapter describes resources escape sequences and character coding for the NCD Terminal Emulator Other documents and other chapters in this manual contain information about other aspects of the Terminal Emulator m Using the terminal emulator The NCDware User s Guide describes the appearance and use of the NCD Terminal Emulator choosers and window Basic configuration and Keymap Editor The NCDware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems provides information about basic configuration of the NCD Terminal Emulator including its use for login using the Keymap Editor and starting the Terminal Emulator without logging in ncdrunterm Configuring the NCD
610. ves are described Chapter 3 Booting Address Discovery describes methods of discovering or specifying network addresses and other network information needed by the terminal when it boots Chapter 4 Booting X Server Loading describes the default X server loading sequence and alternatives loading server modules booting manually setting the broadcast address and setting the Token Ring speed on HMX terminals Chapter 5 Configuring Network Services summarizes the protocols and other network services normally required by NCD terminals and provides details about configuring address resolution name services file access communication with multi homed hosts routing and setting TCP performance parameters Chapter 6 Terminal Configuration Methods gives an overview of terminal configuration methods describes configuration parameters and configuration language commands provides options for creating configuration files and describes optional filenames and directories for configuration files Chapter 7 Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server describes the conventional method of directly accessing fonts by reading font directories on a host including font names font downloading font directories and files configuring the font path and other font usage parameters getting font information font management utilities and built in fonts The chapter also describes using a font server rather than directly accessing fonts on a 1 2 About thi
611. w 80 to 132 mode 41 Off on curses 1 fix 42 National replacement character set mode DECNRCM disabled 44 Off on margin bell 45 No reverse wraparound reverse wraparound mode 46 Stop start logging 47 Use normal alternate screen buffer CSI ps q Select character protection attribute DECSCA Esc ps q Permissible values for ps 0 Not protected 1 Protected 2 Not protected CSI 0 c Device attributes terminal identification DA1 cSIpne The response is CSI 62 1 2 6 8c DECID Esc pne Esc Z CSI pnaA Cursor up pn times CUU Esc pnA Default 1 12 18 Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function CSI pnB Cursor down pn times CUD Esc pnB Default 1 CSI pnc Cursor forward pn times CUF Esc pnc Default 1 CSI pn D Cursor backward pn times CUB Esc pnD Default 1 CSI pr pcH Cursor position CUP Esc pr pcH Default 1 1 CSI ps J Erase in display ED Esc psJ Permissible values for ps 0 Cursor to end of screen default 1 Start to cursor 2 Entire screen CSI psK Erase in line EL Esc psK Permissible values for ps 0 Cursor to end of line default 1 Beginning to cursor 2 Entire line CSI pn L Insert pn lines IL Esc pnL Default 1 CSI pnM Delete pn lines DL Esc pnM Default 1 CSI pnP Delete pn characters DCH Esc pnP Default 1
612. w file it skips over the ignored servers The default timeout period is 120 seconds A long timeout speeds up booting and session reset when the primary initial file server has failed Table 5 24 file failed server ignore timeout Parameter Possible Values Result default 120 integer The amount of time in seconds to ignore a file server that has failed because of a network timeout error Range 1 600 Issuing Extended File Service Diagnostic Messages The file extended diagnostics parameter Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt Extended Diagnostics controls the extent of the file service diagnostics messages issued by the terminal By default a minimum number of messages are issued If you are having problems with the terminal accessing files you can arrange to display more specific messages by setting this parameter to true Table 5 25 file extended diagnostics Parameter Possible Values Result default false false Minimal file service diagnostic messages are issued true Extended file service diagnostic messages are issued 5 24 Configuring Network Services Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks Configuring Routing Accessing Remote Networks If the terminal is communicating with remote networks make sure that routes to other networks are set up and the subnet mask is set properly For most sites you need only specify the default gatewa
613. w memory level Warning Box at bytes Memory warning popup Video Parameters The parameters in the Video hide box affect viewing videos on the terminal This hide box appears on HMX and Explora 700 terminals only Video Field Description Corresponding Parameters Fast MPEG decoder Use the CompCore fast MPEG video fast mpeg decoder requires license video decoder instead of the Berkeley decoder Starworks volume file Filename of the StarWorks volume information file video starworks volume file VT320 Terminal Emulation Parameters The parameters in the VT320 Terminal Emulation hide box affect login through terminal emulation VT320 Terminal Emulation Field Description Corresponding Parameters Default Hosts Hosts listed in the Terminal Host term default hosts Chooser Restrict Host Choices User is restricted to the hosts term restrict host choices listed in the Terminal Host Chooser Delay LAT Display after How long after rebooting to term delay lat display Boot seconds display the Terminal Host LAT Chooser Terminal Default Connect Timeout seconds How long the terminal emulator attempts to establish a connection before declaring an error term default connect timeout Using Configuration Menus 9 39 Using Change Setup Parameters WinCenter Parameters The parameters in the WinCenter hide box affect characteristics of WinCenter when WinCenter is
614. ware System Administrator s Guide for UNIX Systems Also refer to the Roadmap to see if information on the functional area you are having trouble with is available in other NCDware documents For information about host related management tasks such as checking that a utility is running on the host refer to your host system administration manual Messages and Modules Overview As part of its ongoing activities the X server issues messages about its operations As the X server executes each module for example the Configuration daemon generates its own messages The information reported includes successful completion of user requests unsuccessful attempts to perform an action or fatal errors that cause the X server to crash X Server Messages 18 1 The Format of Messages Note The modules that issue messages are not necessarily X server modules although many of them are A reporting module may also be a daemon such as the Configuration daemon or simply a discrete function of the X server The messages are stored in an internal buffer and forwarded to the Console Messages hide box If there is an existing TELNET connection the messages are sent there as well You can also configure the terminal to write messages to a log file Console messages are the same as messages logged to a file except that Console messages do not include a time stamp Many of the messages displayed in the Console are issued by the terminal as it
615. ware distribution fonts included 7 8 outline fonts see font server PCF fonts 7 7 PEX fonts 14 2 samples of a font displaying 7 19 SNE format 7 7 statistics 10 3 XLFD X Logical Font Description 7 2 7 19 see also font server fonts alias file 7 9 to 7 10 7 15 fonts dir file 7 9 7 10 7 15 font total fonts loaded 10 3 FTP Proxy Overrides Change Setup Parameters 9 17 Index FTP Proxy Host Change Setup Parameters 9 17 FTP Proxy Host Port Change Setup Parameters 9 17 Function Key Style Change User Preferences 9 47 G gateway booting through 3 8 11 7 11 8 configuration parameters for 9 25 default gateways 5 25 router discovery 5 30 see also routing Gateway IP Address Change Quick Setup 9 5 get protect command Configuration language 6 32 6 33 GET PROTECTED parameter value 6 5 Gopher Proxy Host Change Setup Parameters 9 17 Gopher Proxy Host Port Change Setup Parameters 9 17 Gopher Proxy Overrides Change Setup Parameters 9 17 graphics optimizations configuration parameters for 9 54 H Hello Timeout Change Setup Parameters 9 31 hostnames name service 5 7 to 5 10 terminal configuration parameters for 9 38 reverse name request 3 15 5 12 HTTP Proxy Host Change Setup Parameters 9 16 HTTP Proxy Host Port Change Setup Parameters 9 16 HTTP Proxy Overrides Change Setup Parameters 9 17 ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol configuration parameters for 9 26 router discovery 5 30
616. wegian 14 French Belgian 15 Spanish 16 Portuguese CSI pt pbr Set top and bottom margins pt top bp bottom DECSTBM Esc pt pbr Default full size window Configuring the NCD Terminal Emulator 12 23 Using VT320 Terminal Emulator Escape Sequences Table 12 5 Escape Sequences Continued i Control Escape Sequence Action Function 8 bit mode User defined keys F6 F14 Do Help F17 F20 DECUDK DCS pc pl Ky1 St1 Kyn Stn ST R OL pe Clear parameter Permissible values DCS pe pl Ky1 St1 0 Clear all keys before starting resetting Kyn Stn ST 1 Clear one key at a time as overwritten 7 bit mode pl Lock parameter no op Permissible values Esc P pc pl Ky1 St1 Q Lock the keys Kyn Stn ST 1 Unlock the keys or Esc P pc pl Ky1 St1 Kyn Stn ST Ky1 St1 or Ky1 St1 Key definition strings See Programming f Function Keys on N 108LK ST String terminator character or ESC Keyboards on page 12 28 for more information Esc G embedded space Sending 8 bit C1 control characters S8C1T required Esc F embedded space Sending 7 bit C1 control characters S7C1T required Esc Select locking shift of G2 character set right LS2R Esc Keypad application mode DECKPAM Esc gt Keypad numeric mode DECPNM Esc 3 Double width single height line top DECDHL Esc 4 Double width single height line bottom DECDHL Esc 5 Single width single
617. which the terminal s hostname must be known at boot time for example if the terminal should download a configuration file named for its hostname This parameter is saved in NVRAM Booting Address Discovery 3 15 Using a Reverse Name Request Note The DNS name service must be running for a reverse name request to succeed Table 3 5 unit query for name at boot Parameter Possible Values Result default none none The terminal does not attempt a reverse name query at boot tcpip The terminal tries a reverse query to the name server hosts If no name servers are defined the terminal tries the TCP IP boot server if the boot server is defined ncdnet The terminal tries a reverse query to the MOP boot server if the boot server is defined 3 16 Booting Address Discovery 4 Booting X Server Loading This chapter describes the defaults and alternatives for loading and executing the X server and X server modules The following topics are covered in the chapter Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence on page 4 1 Configuring X Server Module Loading on page 4 10 Using TFTP for X Server Downloading on page 4 12 Using NFS for X Server Downloading on page 4 13 Linking X Server Files on page 4 14 Specifying Boot Hosts on page 4 16 CoOUUoOooo Booting Manually from the Boot Monitor on page 4 17 Configuring the Default X Server Loading Sequence
618. with errors 10 26 udp packets received with unknown port 10 26 udp packets transmitted 10 26 UI messages 18 125 Unit Global Password Change Setup Parameters 9 9 Unit Name Change Setup Parameters 9 38 unit administrative status 9 38 16 11 16 12 unit blocks of available memory 10 28 unit boot monitor version 10 27 unit code memory installed 10 27 unit contact 9 38 unit floating point exceptions 10 28 unit global password 9 9 unit idle time 10 27 unit keyboard controller version 10 27 unit licensed features 9 5 9 28 unit license key 9 5 9 28 unit location 9 38 unit low memory level 9 39 unit memory available 10 28 unit memory installed 10 27 unit name 9 38 unit optional features 9 28 unit query for name at boot 3 15 5 12 9 38 unit snmp system object id 10 27 unit tcpip service level 10 27 unit terminal model 10 27 unit time since boot 10 27 unit version 10 27 Index 31 Index UNIX Config Directory Change Quick Setup 9 4 UNIX Directory Change Setup Parameters 9 18 up command Boot Monitor 11 9 11 10 Use Address Discovery Change Quick Setup 9 5 Use Address Discovery Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Use Backing Store Change User Preferences 9 54 Use Decimal IP Address Notation as Filename Change Setup Parameters 9 19 Use Proxy Arp Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Use Router Discovery Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Use Router Solicit Change Setup Parameters 9 26 Use SNAP 802 2 LLC Encapsulation on
619. ws access from any terminal in the oceans domain oceans com This entry prevents direct or broadcast access by the terminal ncdu11 ncdull oceans com 8 12 Login and X Session Management Configuring XDM Hosts Indirect Entries in the Xaccess File Indirect entries are forwarded to another host or list of hosts Indirect entries consist of terminal hostnames or patterns followed by a list of XDM manager hostnames macros or the keyword BROADCAST Example Entries To force a terminal to a connect to a specific host you can assign the terminal sending indirect queries to this host For example nedul2 atlantic oceans com This entry disallows indirect access by ncdu13 ncdul3 oceans com dummy The following example forwards queries from all terminals with names beginning with ncdu to the hosts listed in the HOSTS macro SHOSTS atlantic oceans com pacific oceans com antarctic oceans com ncdu oceans com SHOSTS Configuring the xdm config File Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display The xdm config file is the master XDM configuration file The functions of this file are to set some resources for the xdm client and specify the names and locations of all of the other configuration files XDM uses You can substitute your own files for the default configuration files The following is an example nager servers usr lib X11 xdm Xservers nager errorL
620. xplanation The TERM module cannot connect to the specified host as requested User Action Verify that the hostname is entered correctly and that the desired host is accessible via the network Error reading from the network connection Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has detected a problem with the network User Action Verify that the network is operational and that the terminal and the host system are securely attached to the network Error writing to the network connection Severity Error Explanation The TERM module has detected a problem with the network User Action Verify that the network is operational and that the terminal is securely attached to the network DFLTFONT No font font1 using default font2 Severity Warning Explanation The desired font font1 is not available the TERM module is using the default font font2 instead User Action Verify that the desired font is in the user s font path and that it is located in the correct directory has read access and is available via the 18 110 X Server Messages TERM Messages DISPLAY network If the terminal is configured to obtain fonts from a font server verify that the font server is running and that it is accessible via the network Can t open the display connection Severity Fatal Explanation The user has specified the incorrect display variable or the display specified on the command line is incorrect User Action
621. y Error Explanation The X server cannot add the specified entry to the font path User Action Verify that the font path entry is typed correctly and that the file service table is configured appropriately If the entry is for a font server make sure the entry uses the proper syntax and that the font server is accessible via the network X Server Messages 18 139 XSERVER Messages BADWINDOWSIZE window dimensions n n too large Severity Error Explanation The specified window dimensions are too large for the display User Action Specify the window size again using appropriate dimensions CMDSRUNNING n local commands are still running NEWCLII Severity Warning Explanation The X server has determined that clients are not disconnecting as requested the specified number of clients are hung processes User Action Stop the hung processes ENT host host connected with authorization_type authorization Severity Information Explanation The specified host has connected to the X server with the specified type of authorization User Action None NOCONSOLE unable to find console window NO EXT ENSION Severity Error Explanation The X server cannot display the Console window User Action Reboot the terminal If the situation persists please contact NCD Technical Support client attempted to use non existent extension extension_name Severity Warning Explanation A
622. y as the mount point You could also use the secure directory only for X servers and use NFS as the access method for other files and fonts 5 20 Configuring Network Services Configuring How a Terminal Accesses Files Non Secure TFTP Use non secure TFTP when extra security is unnecessary Non secure TFTP is more flexible because chroot is not used With non secure TFTP you can put X servers and modules in any directory Note that when you use a non standard directory for the X server or server modules you must configure the terminal to find the files and configure the booting process to place the X server and modules in the desired location s Make Sure TFTP Is Enabled on the Host Consult your vendor documentation on how to make sure that TFTP is enabled On some systems you can use the following procedure 1 Make sure the tftpd daemon has been installed and enabled Usually the daemon is enabled in the file etc inetd conf for example tftp dgram udp wait root usr etc in tftpd in tftpd If a comment symbol appears at the beginning of the entry remove it Always specify wait instead of no wait Otherwise each tftpd request starts a new process which can cause the host to start processes until it cannot start any more If you specify wait each request is processed before another is serviced Usually tftpd runs under the user ID root as indicated in the example command line 2 Make sure that th
623. y does not access the DPS extension Check Statistics Show Version Licensable Features to see if DPS is listed File Service Problems Most DPS failures are caused by file service problems To see all messages related to file service enable extended file diagnostics The parameter is file extended diagnostics Setup Change Setup Parameters gt File Service gt 13 12 Configuring Display PostScript Troubleshooting DPS Extended Diagnostics After enabling Extended Diagnostics reboot the terminal and restart the application to see the additional messages DPS file service messages resemble the following examples oe NETFILE I OPENATTEMPT attempting open for usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica oe NETFILE I MATCHATTEMPT attempting NFS open of usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica on 191 42 155 70 for usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica oe Z ETFILE I OPENSUCCESS open succeeded for usr lib X11 ncd dps fonts Helvetica DPS Applications on Solaris Systems This section describes how to use AnswerBook ImageTool and PageView on an NCD terminal if the applications are running on a Solaris system Running AnswerBook Problems with this application derive from incorrect setting of the OPENWINHOME environment variable or failing to set the variable at all If OPENWINHOME is set incorrectly an error message is displayed as shown in the following exam
624. ying and Logging Font Diagnostic Messages Displaying and Logging Font Diagnostic Messages Font diagnostic messages report all font actions that require file system or network access By default these messages are not displayed in the Console Messages area or logged to the diagnostics log file There is no default diagnostics log file You must set up the file before any messages can be logged For more information about setting up a diagnostics log file see Chapter 18 X Server Messages To display and log font diagnostic messages set the pref font extended diagnostics parameter to true Setup Change User Preferences gt Fonts gt Show Extended Font Diagnostics Table 7 11 pref font extended diagnostics Parameter Possible Values Result default false false Font diagnostic messages are not reported in the Console Messages hide box or logged to a diagnostics log file true Font diagnostic messages are reported in the Console Messages hide box and logged to a diagnostics log file if you have set up such a file Getting Font Information The following X clients available in the public domain display information about the font path and fonts I xset 1 displays information about the current font path 1 xIsfonts 1 lists the fonts known to the X server I xfd 1 displays the characters in a font m xfontsel 1 displays samples of a font Bitmap Fonts and the Font Server 7 17
625. you install NCDware with the ncdinstall script 2 Make sure the host has SNMP management software 16 10 Using SNMP for Terminal Management Using SNMP Remote Reset Reboot Configuring a Terminal for SNMP Remote Reset Complete the following steps to configure a terminal for remote reset 1 Set the snmp allow reset parameter to true Setup Change Setup Parameters Access Control SNMP section Allow SNMP Reset Reset is disabled by default 2 The default is to allow reset from any host and by any user To restrict access to the reset function do the following To restrict access to certain hosts make sure the hosts are included in the snmp read write access control list table if SNMP write access is enabled Write access is enabled if snmp read write access control enabled is set to true To prevent other users from resetting the terminal set a password in the snmp read write community parameter These parameters are described in Controlling Access to Terminals through SNMP on page 16 3 Resetting Session and Rebooting Terminals You can use the ncdreset utility or the unit administrative status remote configuration parameter to reset terminals remotely Using the ncdreset Utility for Remote Reset To use ncdreset to remotely reset a terminal or restart the X session enter an ncdreset command from a host designated as an SNMP manager The default action of this command is to reset the
626. ys described in this section The terminal maintains current routes in the routing table described in The IP Routing Table on page 5 26 Specifying Default Gateways Default gateways are a reliable way to contact hosts outside the local network If the terminal cannot find a usable route in the routing table it contacts the default gateways You specify the default gateways in the ip initial default gateway 1 and ip initial default gateway 2 parameters Setup Change Setup Parameters gt IP gt Initial Default Gateway 1 Initial Default Gateway 2 These parameters can be saved in NVRAM If the host named in the ip initial default gateway 1 parameter is not available the terminal tries the host listed in ip initial default gateway 2 If one of the default gateways is 0 0 0 0 the terminal uses the boot host as the default gateway If both gateways are set to 0 0 0 0 the second is ignored The default gateways are automatically placed in the routing table and are the initial entries in the table Although you can designate only two gateways using these parameters you can specify as many additional gateways as you need by entering them into the routing table after the initial configuration file is loaded Table 5 26 ip initial default gateway 1 Parameter Possible Values Result default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The gateway is the boot host IP address or hostname A default gateway Configuring Network Servic

NCDware Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents